49
Transportation
2
1998-10-01
1998-10-01
false

SHIPPERS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHIPMENTS AND PACKAGINGS
173

PART 173
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS
Pt. 173

PART 173—SHIPPERS—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHIPMENTS AND PACKAGINGS

Subpart A—General
Sec.
173.1
Purpose and scope.
173.2
Hazardous materials classes and index to hazard class definitions.
173.2a
Classification of a material having more than one hazard.
173.3
Packaging and exceptions.
173.4
Small quantity exceptions.
173.5
Agricultural operations.
173.5a
Oilfield service vehicles.
173.6
Materials of trade exceptions.
173.7
U.S. Government material.
173.8
Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation.
173.9
Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been fumigated.
173.10
Tank car shipments.
173.12
Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.
173.13
Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.

Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation
173.21
Forbidden materials and packages.
173.22
Shipper's responsibility.
173.22a
Use of packagings authorized under exemptions.
173.23
Previously authorized packaging.
173.24
General requirements for packagings and packages.
173.24a
Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and packages.
173.24b
Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.
173.25
Authorized packages and overpacks.
173.26
Quantity limitations.
173.27
General requirements for transportation by aircraft.
173.28
Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.
173.29
Empty packagings.
173.30
Loading and unloading of transport vehicles.
173.31
Use of tank cars.
173.32
Qualification, maintenance and use of portable tanks other than Specification IM portable tanks.
173.32a
Approval of Specification IM portable tanks.
173.32b
Periodic testing and inspection of Specification IM portable tanks.
173.32c
Use of Specification IM portable tanks.
173.33
Hazardous materials in cargo tank motor vehicles.
173.34
Qualification, maintenance, and use of cylinders.
173.35
Hazardous materials in intermediate bulk containers.
173.40
General packaging requirements for poisonous materials required to be packaged in cylinders.

Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1
173.50
Class 1—Definitions.
173.51
Authorization to offer and transport explosives.
173.52
Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.
173.53
Provisions for using old classifications of explosives.
173.54
Forbidden explosives.
173.55
[Reserved]
173.56
New explosives—Definition and procedures for classification and approval.
173.57
Acceptance criteria for new explosives.
173.58
Assignment of class and division for new explosives.
173.59
Description of terms for explosives.
173.60
General packaging requirements for explosives.
173.61
Mixed packaging requirements.
173.62
Specific packaging requirements for explosives.
173.63
Packaging exceptions.

Subpart D—Definitions, Classification, Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for Hazardous Material Other Than Class 1 and Class 7
173.115
Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3—Definitions.
173.116
Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone.
173.117-173.119
[Reserved]
173.120
Class 3—Definitions.
173.121
Class 3—Assignment of packing group.
173.124
Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3—Definitions.
173.125
Class 4—Assignment of packing group.
173.127
Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and assignment of packing groups.
173.128
Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and types.
173.129
Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of packing group.
173.132
Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions.
173.133
Assignment of packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials.
173.134
Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions, exceptions and packing group assignments.
173.136
Class 8—Definitions.
173.137
Class 8—Assignment of packing group.
173.140
Class 9—Definitions.
173.141
Class 9—Assignment of packing group.
173.144
Other Regulated Materials (ORM)—Definitions.
173.145
Other Regulated Materials—Assignment of packing group.
173.150
Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable) and combustible liquids.
173.151
Exceptions for Class 4.
173.152
Exceptions for Division 5.1 (oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).
173.153
Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).
173.154
Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).
173.155
Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).
173.156
Exceptions for ORM materials.

Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7
173.158
Nitric acid.
173.159
Batteries, wet.
173.160
Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).
173.161
Chemical kits.
173.162
Gallium.
173.163
Hydrogen fluoride.
173.164
Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury).
173.166
Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners.
173.170
Black powder for small arms.
173.171
Smokeless powder for small arms.
173.172
Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank.
173.173
Paint, paint-related material, adhesives and ink and resins.
173.174
Refrigerating machines.
173.181
Pyrophoric materials (liquids).
173.182
Barium azide—50 percent or more water wet.
173.183
Nitrocellulose base film.
173.184
Highway or rail fusee.
173.185
Lithium batteries and cells.
173.186
Matches.
173.187
Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, n.o.s.
173.188
White or yellow phosphorous.
173.189
Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium.
173.192
Packaging for certain Packing Group I poisonous materials.
173.193
Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures, etc.
173.194
Gas identification sets.
173.195
Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution).
173.196
Infectious substances (etiologic agents).
173.197
Regulated medical waste.
173.198
Nickel carbonyl.
173.201
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
173.202
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
173.203
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
173.204
Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials.
173.205
Specification cylinders for liquid hazardous materials.
173.211
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
173.212
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
173.213
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
173.214
Packagings which require approval by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
173.216
Asbestos, blue, brown, or white.
173.217
Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice).
173.218
Fish meal or fish scrap.
173.219
Life-saving appliances.
173.220
Internal combustion engines, self-propelled vehicles, and mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines or wet batteries.
173.221
Polymeric beads, expandable.
173.222
Wheelchairs equipped with wet electric storage batteries.
173.224
Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials.
173.225
Packaging requirements and other provisions for organic peroxides.
173.226
Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A.
173.227
Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B.
173.228
Bromine pentaflouride or bromine trifluoride.
173.229
Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.

Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7
173.240
Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.
173.241
Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid materials.
173.242
Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, including solids with dual hazards.
173.243
Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard.
173.244
Bulk packaging for certain pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous liquids with inhalation hazards (Division 6.1).
173.245
Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3).
173.247
Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials (Class 9) and certain flammable elevated temperature materials (Class 3).
173.249
Bromine.

Subpart G—Gases; Preparation and Packaging
173.300
[Reserved]
173.300a
Approval of independent inspection agency.
173.300b
Approval of non-domestic chemical analyses and tests.
173.300c
Termination of approval.
173.301
General requirements for shipment of compressed gases in cylinders and spherical pressure vessels.
173.302
Charging of cylinders with non-liquefied compressed gases.
173.303
Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution (acetylene).
173.304
Charging of cylinders with liquefied compressed gas.
173.305
Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and other material.
173.306
Limited quantities of compressed gases.
173.307
Exceptions for compressed gases.
173.308
Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel.
173.309
Fire extinguishers.
173.314
Compressed gases in tank cars and multi-unit tank cars.
173.315
Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks.
173.316
Cryogenic liquids in cylinders.
173.318
Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.
173.319
Cryogenic liquids in tank cars.
173.320
Cryogenic liquids; exceptions.
173.321
Ethylamine.
173.322
Ethyl chloride.
173.323
Ethylene oxide.
173.334
Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas.
173.335
Gas generator assemblies.
173.336
Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied.
173.337
Nitric oxide.
173.338
Tungsten hexafluoride.
173.340
Tear gas devices.

Subpart H [Reserved]

Subpart I-Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials
173.401
Scope.
173.403
Definitions.
173.410
General design requirements.
173.411
Industrial packagings.
173.412
Additional design requirements for Type A packages.
173.413
Requirements for Type B packages.
173.415
Authorized Type A packages.
173.416
Authorized Type B packages.
173.417
Authorized fissile materials packages.
173.418
Authorized packages—pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.419
Authorized packages—oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.420
Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile excepted and non-fissile).
173.421
Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.422
Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.423
Requirements for multiple hazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.424
Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles.
173.425
Table of activity limits—excepted quantities and articles.
173.426
Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium.
173.427
Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive) materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO).
173.428
Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging.
173.431
Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages.
173.433
Requirements for determining A1 and A2 values for radionuclides and for the listing of radionuclides on shipping papers and labels.
173.434
Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.
173.435
Table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides.
173.441
Radiation level limitations.
173.442
Thermal limitations.
173.443
Contamination control.
173.447
Storage incident to transportation—general requirements.
173.448
General transportation requirements.
173.453
Fissile materials—exceptions.
173.457
Transportation of fissile material, controlled shipments—specific requirements.
173.459
Mixing of fissile material packages.
173.461
Demonstration of compliance with tests.
173.462
Preparation of specimens for testing.
173.465
Type A packaging tests.
173.466
Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases.
173.467
Tests for demonstrating the ability of Type B and fissile materials packagings to withstand accident conditions in transportation.
173.468
Test for LSA-III material.
173.469
Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.471
Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved packages.
173.472
Requirements for exporting DOT Specification Type B and fissile packages.
173.473
Requirements for foreign-made packages.
173.474
Quality control for construction of packaging.
173.475
Quality control requirements prior to each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.476
Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

Subparts J-O [Reserved]
Appendix A to Part 173 [Reserved]
Appendix B to Part 173—Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packaging and Receptacles
Appendix C to Part 173—Procedure for Base-level Vibration Testing
Appendix D to Part 173—Test Methods for Dynamite (Explosive, Blasting, Type A)
Appendixes E-G to Part 173 [Reserved]
Appendix H to Part 173—Method of Testing for Sustained Combustibility

Authority:
49 U.S.C. 5101-5127, 44701; 49 CFR 1.45, 1.53.

Subpart A—General
§ 173.1
Purpose and scope.
(a) This part includes:
(1) Definitions of hazardous materials for transportation purposes;
(2) Requirements to be observed in preparing hazardous materials for shipment by air, highway, rail, or water, or any combination thereof; and
(3) Inspection, testing, and retesting responsibilities for persons who retest, recondition, maintain, repair and rebuild containers used or intended for use in the transportation of hazardous materials.
(b) A shipment of hazardous materials that is not prepared in accordance with this subchapter may not be offered for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water. It is the responsibility of each hazmat employer subject to the requirements of this subchapter to ensure that each hazmat employee is trained in accordance with the requirements prescribed in this subchapter. It is the duty of each person who offers hazardous materials for transportation to instruct each of his officers, agents, and employees having any responsibility for preparing hazardous materials for shipment as to applicable regulations in this subchapter.
(c) When a person other than the person preparing a hazardous material for shipment performs a function required by this part, that person shall perform the function in accordance with this part.
(d) In general, the Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR) contained in this subchapter are based on the Recommendations of the United Nations Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods and are consistent with international regulations issued by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO Technical Instructions) and the International Maritime Organization (IMDG Code). However, the HMR are not consistent in all respects with the UN Recommendations, the ICAO Technical Instructions or the IMDG Code, and compliance with the HMR will not guarantee acceptance by regulatory bodies outside of the United States.
[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16062, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-100, 41 FR 40476, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 173-161, 48 FR 2655, Jan. 20, 1983; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 20953, May 15, 1992]
§ 173.2
Hazardous materials classes and index to hazard class definitions.
The hazard class of a hazardous material is indicated either by its class (or division) number, its class name, or by the letters “ORM-D”. The following table lists class numbers, division numbers, class or division names and those sections of this subchapter which contain definitions for classifying hazardous materials, including forbidden materials.
Class No. | Division No. (if any) | Name of class or division | 49 CFR reference for definitions
None | | Forbidden materials | 173.21
None | | Forbidden explosives | 173.54
1 | 1.1 | Explosives (with a mass explosion hazard) | 173.50
1 | 1.2 | Explosives (with a projection hazard) | 173.50
1 | 1.3 | Explosives (with predominately a fire hazard) | 173.50
1 | 1.4 | Explosives (with no significant blast hazard) | 173.50
1 | 1.5 | Very insensitive explosives; blasting agents | 173.50
1 | 1.6 | Extremely insensitive detonating substances | 173.50
2 | 2.1 | Flammable gas | 173.115
2 | 2.2 | Non-flammable compressed gas | 173.115
2 | 2.3 | Poisonous gas | 173.115
3 | | Flammable and combustible liquid | 173.120
4 | 4.1 | Flammable solid | 173.124
4 | 4.2 | Spontaneously combustible material | 173.124
4 | 4.3 | Dangerous when wet material | 173.124
5 | 5.1 | Oxidizer | 173.127
| 5 | 5.2 | Organic peroxide | 173.128
6 | 6.1 | Poisonous materials | 173.132
6 | 6.2 | Infectious substance (Etiologic agent) | 173.134
7 | | Radioactive material | 173.403
8 | | Corrosive material | 173.136
9 | | Miscellaneous hazardous material | 173.140
None | | Other regulated material: ORM-D | 173.144
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993]
§ 173.2a
Classification of a material having more than one hazard.
(a) Classification of a material having more than one hazard. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, a material not specifically listed in the § 172.101 table that meets the definition of more than one hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall be classed according to the highest applicable hazard class of the following hazard classes, which are listed in descending order of hazard:
(1) Class 7 (radioactive materials, other than limited quantities).
(2) Division 2.3 (poisonous gases).
(3) Division 2.1 (flammable gases).
(4) Division 2.2 (nonflammable gases).
(5) Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids), Packing Group I, poisonous-by-inhalation only.
(6) A material that meets the definition of a pyrophoric material in § 173.124(b)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.2).
(7) A material that meets the definition of a self-reactive material in § 173.124(a)(2) of this subchapter (Division 4.1).
(8) Class 3 (flammable liquids), Class 8 (corrosive materials), Division 4.1 (flammable solids), Division 4.2 (spontaneously combustible materials), Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet materials), Division 5.1 (oxidizers) or Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids or solids other than Packing Group I, poisonous-by-inhalation). The hazard class and packing group for a material meeting more than one of these hazards shall be determined using the precedence table in paragraph (b) of this section.
(9) Combustible liquids.
(10) Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).
(b) Precedence of hazard table for Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 6.1. The following table ranks those materials that meet the definition of Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 6.1:
Precedence of Hazard Table
[Hazard class and packing group]
| 4.2 | 4.3 | 5.1 I ^1 | 5.1 II ^1 | 5.1 III ^1 | 6.1, I dermal | 6.1, I oral | 6.1 II | 6.1 III | 8, I liquid | 8, I solid | 8, II liquid | 8, II solid | 8, III liquid | 8, III solid
3I | | | | | | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | (^3) | 3 | (^3) | 3 | (^3)
3II | | | | | | 3 | 3 | 3 | 3 | 8 | (^3) | 3 | (^3) | 3 | (^3)
3III | | | | | | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 34 | 8 | (^3) | 8 | (^3) | 3 | (^3)
4.1II ^2 | 4.2 | 4.3 | 5.1 | 4.1 | 4.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 4.1 | 4.1 | (^3) | 8 | (^3) | 4.1 | (^3) | 4.1
4.1III ^2 | 4.2 | 4.3 | 5.1 | 4.1 | 4.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 4.1 | (^3) | 8 | (^3) | 8 | (^3) | 4.1
4.2II | | 4.3 | 5.1 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 8 | 8 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 4.2 | 4.2
4.2III | | 4.3 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 4.2 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 4.2 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 4.2 | 4.2
4.3I | | | 5.1 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 6.1 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3
4.3II | | | 5.1 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 6.1 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 4.3 | 4.3 | 4.3
4.3III | | | 5.1 | 5.1 | 4.3 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 4.3 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 4.3 | 4.3
5.1I ^1 | | | | | | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1
5.1II ^1 | | | | | | 6.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 5.1 | 5.1 | 5.1
5.1III ^1 | | | | | | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 5.1 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 5.1 | 5.1
6.1I, Dermal | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1
6.1I, Oral | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1
6.1II, Inhalation | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1
6.1II, Dermal | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 6.1 | 8 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1
6.1II, Oral | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 8 | 8 | 6.1 | 6.1 | 6.1
| 6.1III | | | | | | | | | | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8
^1 There are at present no established criteria for determining Packing Groups for liquids in Division 5.1. For the time being, the degree of hazard is to be assessed by analogy with listed substances, allocating the substances to Packing Group I, great; II, medium; or III, minor danger.
^2 Substances of Division 4.1 other than self-reactive substances.
^3 Denotes an impossible combination.
^4 For pesticides only, where a material has the hazards of Class 3, Packing Group III, and Division 6.1, Packing Group III, the primary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III.

Note 1:
The most stringent packing group assigned to a hazard of the material takes precedence over other packing groups; for example, a material meeting Class 3 PG II and Division 6.1 PG I (oral toxicity) is classified as Class 3 PG I.

Note 2:
A material which meets the definition of Class 8 and has an inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists which meets criteria for Packing Group I specified in § 173.133(a)(1) must be classed as Division 6.1 if the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group I or II. If the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group III or less, the material must be classed as Class 8.
(c) The following materials are not subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section because of their unique properties:
(1) A Class 1 (explosive) material that meets any other hazard class or division as defined in this part shall be assigned a division in Class 1. Class 1 materials shall be classed and approved in accordance with § 173.56 of this part;
(2) A Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) material that meets the definition of any other hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall be classed as Division 5.2;
(3) A Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material that also meets the definition of another hazard class or division, other than Class 7, or that also is a limited quantity Class 7 material, shall be classed as Division 6.2;
(4) A material that meets the definition of a wetted explosive in § 173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.1). Wetted explosives are either specifically listed in the § 172.101 table or are approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety (see § 173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter); and
(5) A limited quantity of a Class 7 (radioactive) material that meets the definition for more than one hazard class or division shall be classed in accordance with § 173.423.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-247, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995; Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995]
§ 173.3
Packaging and exceptions.
(a) The packaging of hazardous materials for transportation by air, highway, rail, or water must be as specified in this part. Methods of manufacture, packing, and storage of hazardous materials, that affect safety in transportation, must be open to inspection by a duly authorized representative of the initial carrier or of the Department. Methods of manufacture and related functions necessary for completion of a DOT specification or U.N. standard packaging must be open to inspection by a representative of the Department.
(b) The regulations setting forth packaging requirements for a specific material apply to all modes of transportation unless otherwise stated, or unless exceptions from packaging requirements are authorized.
(c) Salvage drums. Packages of hazardous materials that are damaged, defective, or found leaking and hazardous materials that have spilled or leaked may be placed in a metal or plastic removable head salvage drum that is compatible with the lading and shipped for repackaging or disposal under the following conditions:
(1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, the drum must be a UN 1A2, 1B2, 1N2 or 1H2 tested and marked for Packing Group III or higher performance standards for liquids or solids and a leakproofness test of 20 kPa (3 psi). Alternatively, a drum manufactured and marked prior to October 1, 1993 as a salvage drum, in accordance with the provisions of this section in effect on September 30, 1991, is authorized. Capacity of the drum may not exceed 450 L (119 gallons).
(2) Each drum shall be provided when necessary with sufficient cushioning and absorption material to prevent excessive movement of the damaged package and to eliminate the presence of any free liquid at the time the salvage drum is closed. All cushioning and absorbent material used in the drum must be compatible with the hazardous material.
(3) Each salvage packaging must be marked with the proper shipping name of the hazardous material inside the packaging and the name and address of the consignee. In addition, the packaging must be marked “SALVAGE” or “SALVAGE DRUM”.
(4) Each drum shall be labeled as prescribed for the respective material.
(5) The shipper shall prepare shipping papers in accordance with subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.
(6) The overpack requirements of § 173.25 do not apply to drums used in accordance with this paragraph.
(7) A salvage packaging marked “T” in accordance with applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations may be used.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52607, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.4
Small quantity exceptions.
(a) Small quantities of Class 3, Division 4.1, Division 4.2 (PG II and III), Division 4.3 (PG II and III), Division 5.1, Division 5.2, Division 6.1, Class 7, Class 8, and Class 9 materials that also meet the definition of one or more of these hazard classes, are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter when—
(1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle is limited to:
(i) Thirty (30) ml (1 ounce) for authorized liquids, other than Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials;
(ii) Thirty (30) g (1 ounce) for authorized solids, other than Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials;
(iii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized materials classed as Division 6.1, Packing Group I; and
(iv) An activity level not exceeding that specified in §§ 173.421, 173.424, 173.425 or 173.426, as appropriate, for a package containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material.
(2) With the exception of temperature sensing devices, each inner receptacle:
(i) Is not liquid-full at 55 °C (131 °F), and
(ii) Is constructed of plastic having a minimum thickness of no less than 0.2 mm (0.008 inch), or earthenware, glass, or metal;
(3) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure held securely in place with wire, tape, or other positive means;
(4) Unless equivalent cushioning and absorbent material surrounds the inside packaging, each inner receptacle is securely packed in an inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent material that:
(i) Will not react chemically with the material, and
(ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire contents (if a liquid) of the receptacle;
(5) The inside packaging is securely packed in a strong outside packaging;
(6) The completed package, as demonstrated by prototype testing, is capable of sustaining—
(i) Each of the following free drops made from a height of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) directly onto a solid unyielding surface without breakage or leakage from any inner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in the effectiveness of the package:
(A) One drop flat on bottom;
(B) One drop flat on top;
(C) One drop flat on the long side;
(D) One drop flat on the short side; and
(E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting edges; and
(ii) A compressive load as specified in § 178.606(c) of this subchapter.
(7) Placement of the material in the package or packing different materials in the package does not result in a violation of § 173.21;
(8) The gross mass of the completed package does not exceed 29 kg (64 pounds);
(9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no longer in commerce; and
(10) The shipper certifies conformance with this section by marking the outside of the package with the statement “This package conforms to 49 CFR 173.4” or, alternatively, until October 1, 2001, with the statement “This package conforms to the conditions and limitations specified in 49 CFR 173.4.”
(b) A package containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material also must conform to the requirements of § 173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or § 173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate.
(c) Packages which contain a Class 2, Division 4.2 (PG I), or Division 4.3 (PG I) material conforming to paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section may be offered for transportation or transported if specifically approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996]
§ 173.5
Agricultural operations.
(a) The transportation of an agricultural product other than a Class 2 material, over local roads between fields of the same farm, is excepted from the requirements of this subchapter when:
(1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor carrier; and
(2) The movement of the agricultural product conforms to requirements of the State in which it is transported and is specifically authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998.
(b) The transportation of an agricultural product to or from a farm, within 150 miles of the farm, is excepted from the requirements in subparts G and H of part 172 of this subchapter and from the specific packaging requirements of this subchapter when:
(1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor carrier;
(2) The total amount of agricultural product being transported on a single vehicle does not exceed:
(i) 7,300 kg (16,094 lbs.) of ammonium nitrate fertilizer properly classed as Division 5.1, PG III, in a bulk packaging, or
(ii) 1900 L (502 gallons) for liquids or gases, or 2,300 kg (5,070 lbs.) for solids, of any other agricultural product;
(3) The movement and packaging of the agricultural product conform to the requirements of the State in which it is transported and are specifically authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998; and
(4) Each person having any responsibility for transporting the agricultural product or preparing the agricultural product for shipment has been instructed in the applicable requirements of this subchapter.
(c) Formulated liquid agricultural products in specification packagings of 220 L (58 gallons) capacity, or less, with closures manifolded to a closed mixing system and equipped with positive dry disconnect devices may be transported by a private motor carrier between a final distribution point and an ultimate point of application or for loading aboard an airplane for aerial application.
(d) See § 173.315(m) pertaining to nurse tanks of anhydrous ammonia.
(e) See § 173.6 pertaining to materials of trade.
[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1215, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173-262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998]
§ 173.5a
Oilfield service vehicles.
Notwithstanding § 173.29 of this subchapter, a cargo tank mounted on a transport vehicle used in oilfield servicing operations is not subject to the specification requirements of this subchapter if—
(a) The cargo tank and equipment contains only residual amounts (i.e., it is emptied so far as practicable) of a flammable liquid alone or in combination with water,
(b) No flame producing device is operated during transportation, and
(c) The proper shipping name is preceded by “Residual” on the shipping paper for each movement on a public highway.
[Amdt. 173-196, 51 FR 5971, Feb. 18, 1986]
§ 173.6
Materials of trade exceptions.
When transported by motor vehicle in conformance with this section, a material of trade (see § 171.8 of this subchapter) is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter besides those set forth or referenced in this section.
(a) Materials and amounts. A material of trade is limited to the following:
(1) A Class 3, 8, 9, Division 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, or ORM-D material contained in a packaging having a gross mass or capacity not over—
(i) 0.5 kg (1 pound) or 0.5 L (1 pint) for a Packing Group I material;
(ii) 30 kg (66 pounds) or 30 L (8 gallons) for a Packing Group II, Packing Group III, or ORM-D material;
(iii) 1500 L (400 gallons) for a diluted mixture, not to exceed 2 percent concentration, of a Class 9 material.
(2) A Division 2.1 or 2.2 material in a cylinder with a gross weight not over 100 kg (220 pounds), or a permanently mounted tank manufactured to ASME standards of not more than 70 gallon water capacity for a non-liquefied Division 2.2 material with no subsidiary hazard.
(3) A Division 4.3 material in Packing Group II or III contained in a packaging having a gross capacity not exceeding 30 ml (1 ounce).
(4) This section does not apply to a hazardous material that is self-reactive (see § 173.124), poisonous by inhalation (see § 173.133), or a hazardous waste.
(b) Packaging. (1) Packagings must be leak tight for liquids and gases, sift proof for solids, and be securely closed, secured against movement, and protected against damage.
(2) Each material must be packaged in the manufacturer's original packaging, or a packaging of equal or greater strength and integrity.
(3) Outer packagings are not required for receptacles (e.g., cans and bottles) that are secured against movement in cages, carts, bins, boxes or compartments.
(4) For gasoline, a packaging must be made of metal or plastic and conform to the requirements of this subchapter or to the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of Labor contained in 29 CFR 1910.106(d)(2) or 1926.152(a)(1).
(5) A cylinder or other pressure vessel containing a Division 2.1 or 2.2 material must conform to packaging, qualification, maintenance, and use requirements of this subchapter, except that outer packagings are not required. Manifolding of cylinders is authorized provided all valves are tightly closed.
(c) Hazard communication. (1) A non-bulk packaging other than a cylinder (including a receptacle transported without an outer packaging) must be marked with a common name or proper shipping name to identify the material it contains, including the letters “RQ” if it contains a reportable quantity of a hazardous substance.
(2) A bulk packaging containing a diluted mixture of a Class 9 material must be marked on two opposing sides with the four-digit identification number of the material. The identification number must be displayed on placards, orange panels or, alternatively, a white square-on-point configuration having the same outside dimensions as a placard (at least 273 mm (10.8 inches) on a side), in the manner specified in § 172.332 (b) and (c) of this subchapter.
(3) A DOT specification cylinder (except DOT specification 39) must be marked and labeled as prescribed in this subchapter. Each DOT-39 cylinder must display the markings specified in 178.65(i).
(4) The operator of a motor vehicle that contains a material of trade must be informed of the presence of the hazardous material (including whether the package contains a reportable quantity) and must be informed of the requirements of this section.
(d) Aggregate gross weight. Except for a material of trade authorized by paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section, the aggregate gross weight of all materials of trade on a motor vehicle may not exceed 200 kg (440 pounds).
(e) Other exceptions. A material of trade may be transported on a motor vehicle under the provisions of this section with other hazardous materials without affecting its eligibility for exceptions provided by this section.
[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173-262, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.7
U.S. Government material.
(a) Hazardous materials offered for transportation by, for, or to the Department of Defense (DOD) of the U.S. Government, including commercial shipments pursuant to a DOD contract, must be packaged in accordance with the regulations in this subchapter or in packagings of equal or greater strength and efficiency as certified by DOD in accordance with the procedures prescribed by “Performance Oriented Packaging of Hazardous Material, DLAR 4145.41/AR 700-143/AFR 71-5/NAVSUPINST 4030.55/MCO 4030.40.” Hazardous materials offered for transportation by DOD under this provision may be reshipped by any shipper to any consignee provided the original packaging has not been damaged or altered in any manner.
(1) Hazardous materials sold by the DOD in packagings that are not marked in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter may be shipped from DOD installations if the DOD certifies in writing that the packagings are equal to or greater in strength and efficiency than the packaging prescribed in this subchapter. The shipper shall obtain such a certification in duplicate for each shipment. He shall give one copy to the originating carrier and retain the other for no less than 1 year.
(2) [Reserved]
(b) Shipments of hazardous materials, made by or under the direction or supervision of the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) or the Department of Defense (DOD), for the purpose of national security, and which are escorted by personnel specifically designated by or under the authority of those agencies, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. For transportation by a motor vehicle or a rail car, the escorts must be in a separate transport vehicle from the transport vehicle carrying the hazardous materials that are excepted by this paragraph. A document certifying that the shipment is for the purpose of national security must be in the possession of the person in charge of providing security during transportation.
(c) Shipments of explosive samples, not exceeding one gram net weight, offered by and consigned to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms (ATF) of the Department of the Treasury are not otherwise subject to the regulations in parts 110-189 of this subchapter when placed in a specifically designed multi-unit assembly packed in a strong outside packaging. The packaging must be of a type accepted by ATF as capable of precluding a propagation of any explosion outside the packaging. The second component from the outside of the packaging must be marked or tagged to indicate the presence of an explosive.
(d) Notwithstanding the requirements of §§ 173.416 and 173.417 of this subchapter, packagings made by or under the direction of the U.S. Department of Energy may be used for the transportation of Class 7 materials when evaluated, approved, and certified by the Department of Energy against packaging standards equivalent to those specified in 10 CFR part 71. Packages shipped in accordance with this paragraph shall be marked and otherwise prepared for shipment in a manner equivalent to that required by this subchapter for packagings approved by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.7, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.8
Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation.
(a) Non-specification bulk packagings. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-specification bulk packaging may be used for transportation of a hazardous material by an intrastate motor carrier until July 1, 2000, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
(b) Non-specification cargo tanks for petroleum products. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-specification cargo tank motor vehicle having a capacity of less than 13,250 liters (3,500 gallons) may be used by an intrastate motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
(c) Permanently secured non-bulk tanks for petroleum products. Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F of this part 173 and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-specification metal tank permanently secured to a transport vehicle and protected against leakage or damage in the event of a turnover, having a capacity of less than 450 liters (119 gallons), may be used by an intrastate motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) Additional requirements. A packaging used under the provisions of paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of this section must—
(1) Be operated by an intrastate motor carrier and in use as a packaging for hazardous material before October 1, 1998;
(2) Be operated in conformance with the requirements of the State in which it is authorized;
(3) Be specifically authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 1998, for use as a packaging for the hazardous material being transported;
(4) Be offered for transportation and transported in conformance with all other applicable requirements of this subchapter;
(5) Not be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid, hazardous substance, hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant (except for gasoline); and
(6) On and after July 1, 2000, for a tank authorized under paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, conform to all requirements in part 180 (except for § 180.405(g)) of this subchapter in the same manner as required for a DOT specification MC 306 cargo tank motor vehicle.
[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 172-262, 62 FR 49567, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998]
§ 173.9
Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been fumigated.
(a) For the purpose of this section, not including 49 CFR part 387, a rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer in which the lading has been fumigated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, is a package containing a hazardous material, unless the transport vehicle or freight container has been sufficiently aerated so that it does not pose an unreasonable risk to health and safety.
(b) No person may offer for transportation or transport a rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer in which the lading has been fumigated or treated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, unless the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph (c) of this section is prominently displayed so that it can be seen by any person attempting to enter the interior of the transport vehicle or freight container. For domestic transportation, a hazard warning label authorized by EPA under 40 CFR part 156 may be used as an alternative to the FUMIGANT marking.
(c) FUMIGANT marking. (1) The FUMIGANT marking must consist of red letters on a white background that is at least 30 cm (11.8 inches) wide and at least 25 cm (9.8 inches) high. Except for size and color, the FUMIGANT marking must be as follows:
(2) The “*” shall be replaced with the technical name of the fumigant.
(d) No person may affix or display on a rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer (a package) the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph (c) of this section, unless the lading has been fumigated or is undergoing fumigation.
(e) The FUMIGANT marking required by paragraph (b) of this section must remain on the rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer until:
(1) The fumigated lading is unloaded; and
(2) The transport vehicle or freight container has undergone sufficient aeration to assure that it does not pose an unreasonable risk to health and safety.
(f) For international shipments, transport documents must indicate the date of fumigation, type and amount of fumigant used, and instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant, including fumigation devices.
(g) Any person subject to the requirements of this section, solely due to the fumigated lading, must be informed of the requirements of this section and the safety precautions necessary to protect themselves and others in the event of an incident or accident involving the fumigated lading.
(h) Any person who offers for transportation or transports a rail car, freight container, truck body or trailer that is subject to this subchapter solely because of the hazardous materials designation specified in paragraph (a) of this section is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 1234, Jan. 8, 1997]
§ 173.10
Tank car shipments.
(a) Tank cars containing any 2.1 material (including a cryogenic liquid) or Class 3 material with a flash point below 38 °C (100 °F), except liquid road asphalt or tar, may not be offered for transportation unless originally consigned or subsequently reconsigned to parties having private-siding (see Note 1 of this section) or to parties using railroad siding facilities which have been equipped for piping the liquid from tank cars to permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive contents of car.
(b) A tank car containing any Class 2 material must not be offered for transportation unless the car is consigned for delivery (see paragraph (c) of this section) and unloading on a private track (see Note 1 of this section) except that where no private track is available, delivery and unloading on carrier tracks is permitted provided the following conditions are complied with:
(1) Any tank car of DOT-106A or 110A type (see §§ 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter) may be offered for transportation and the loaded unit tanks may be removed from car frame on carrier tracks, provided the shipper has obtained from the delivering carrier and filed with originating carrier, written permission (see Note 2 of this section) for such removal. The consignee must furnish adequately safe mechanical hoist, obtained from the carrier if desirable, by which the tanks shall be lifted from the car and deposited directly upon vehicles furnished by the consignee for immediate removal from carrier property or tanks must be lifted by adequately safe mechanical hoist from car directly to vessels for further transportation
(c) Any tank car of other than DOT-106A or 110A type (see §§ 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), containing anhydrous ammonia, liquefied hydrocarbon or liquefied petroleum gas, and having interior pipes of liquid and gas discharge valves equipped with check valves, may be consigned for delivery and unloading on carrier tracks, if the lading is piped directly from the car to permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive the entire contents of the car. Such cars may also be consigned for storage on a private track or on a carrier track when designated by the carrier for such storage.
(d) For cars of the DOT-106A or 110A type (see §§ 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), the tanks must be placed in position and attached to the car structure by the shipper.
(e) Class 3 materials with a flash point below 38 °C (100 °F) and Division 2.1 materials (including a cryogenic liquid) may not be loaded into tank cars on carrier property from tank trucks or drums.

Note 1:
For this purpose, a private track is a track outside of carrier's right-of-way, yard, and terminals, and of which the carrier does not own either the rails, ties, roadbed or right-of-way; or a track or portion of a track which is devoted to the purpose of its user, either by lease or written agreement; in which case the lease or written agreement will be considered as equivalent to ownership.

Note 2:
Carriers should give permission for the unloading of these containers on carrier tracks only where no private siding is available within reasonable trucking distance of final destination. The danger involved is the release of compressed gases due to accidental injury to container in handling. The exposure to this danger decreases directly with the isolation of the unloading point.
[29 FR 18773, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and by Amdt. 173-162, 48 FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983, and amended by Amdt. 173-180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 173-207, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 29, 1988; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993]
§ 173.12
Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.
(a) Open head drums. If a hazardous material that is a hazardous waste is required by this subchapter to be shipped in a closed head drum (i.e., a drum with a 7.0 cm (3 inches) or less bung opening) and the hazardous waste contains solids or semisolids that make its placement in a closed head drum impracticable, an equivalent (except for closure) open head drum may be used for the hazardous waste.
(b) Lab packs. (1) Waste materials classed as Class or Division 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8, or 9 are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter for combination packagings if packaged in accordance with this paragraph and transported for disposal or recovery by highway only. In addition, a generic description from the § 172.101 table may be used in place of specific chemical names, when two or more chemically compatible waste materials in the same hazard class are packaged in the same outside packaging.
(2) Additional packaging requirements are as follows:
(i) The outer packaging must be a UN 1A2 or UN 1B2 metal drum, a UN 1D plywood drum, a UN 1G fiber drum or a UN 1H2 plastic drum tested and marked at least for the Packing Group III performance level for liquids or solids;
(ii) The inner packagings must be either glass, not exceeding 4 L (1 gallon) rated capacity, or metal or plastic, not exceeding 20 L (5.3 gallons) rated capacity;
(iii) Each outer packaging may contain only one class of hazardous material;
(iv) Inner packagings containing liquid must be surrounded by a chemically compatible absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the total liquid contents; and
(v) Gross weight of the complete package may not exceed 205 kg (452 lbs).
(3) Prohibited materials. Materials meeting the definition of Division 6.1, Packing Group I, or Division 4.2, Packing Group I, and bromine pentafluoride; bromine trifluoride; chloric acid; and oleum (fuming sulfuric acid) may not be packaged or described under the provisions of this paragraph.
(c) Reuse of packagings. A previously used packaging may be reused for the shipment of hazardous waste to designated facilities, not subject to the reconditioning and reuse provisions contained in § 173.28 and part 178 of this subchapter, under the following conditions:
(1) Except as authorized by this paragraph, the waste must be packaged in accordance with this part and offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
(2) Transportation is performed by highway only.
(3) A package is not offered for transportation less than 24 hours after it is finally closed for transportation, and each package is inspected for leakage and is found to be free from leaks immediately prior to being offered for transportation.
(4) Each package is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the consignee, unless the motor carrier is a private or contract carrier.
(5) The packaging may be used only once under this paragraph and may not be used again for shipment of hazardous materials except in accordance with § 173.28.
(d) Technical names for n.o.s. descriptions. The requirements for the inclusion of technical names for n.o.s. descriptions on shipping papers and package markings, §§ 172.203 and 172.301 of this subchapter, respectively, do not apply to packagings prepared in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, except as follows:
(1) Packages containing materials meeting the definition of a hazardous substance must be described as required in § 172.203(c) of this subchapter and marked as required in § 172.324 of this subchapter; and
(2) Packages containing hazardous materials subject to the provisions of § 172.203(m) of this subchapter must be described in accordance with § 172.203(m) of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]
§ 173.13
Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.
(a) A Class 3, 8 or 9, or Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or 6.1 material is excepted from the labeling and placarding requirements of this subchapter if prepared for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this section. A material that meets the definition of a material poisonous by inhalation may not be offered for transportation or transported under provisions of this section.
(b) A hazardous material conforming to requirements of this section may be transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft. Only hazardous materials permitted to be transported aboard a cargo-only aircraft by column (9B) of the Hazardous Materials Table in § 172.101 of this subchapter are authorized for transport aboard cargo-only aircraft pursuant to the provisions of this section.
(c) A hazardous material permitted by paragraph (a) of this section must be packaged as follows:
(1) For liquids:
(i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, plastic or metal inner packaging with a maximum capacity not exceeding 1.2 liters. Sufficient outage must be provided such that the inner packaging will not become liquid full at 55 °C (130 °F). The net quantity (measured at 20 °C (68 °F)) of liquid in any inner packaging may not exceed one liter.
(ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading, and then wrapped in a non-reactive absorbent material in sufficient quantity to completely absorb the contents of the inner packaging, and placed in a snugly fitting, metal can.
(iii) The metal can must be securely closed. For liquids that are in Division 4.2 or 4.3, the metal can must be hermetically sealed. For Division 4.2 materials in Packing Group I, the metal can must be tested in accordance with part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.
(iv) The metal can must be placed in a fiberboard box that is placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.
(v) The intermediate packaging must be placed inside a securely closed, outer packaging conforming to § 173.201.
(vi) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an outer packaging.
(2) For solids:
(i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, plastic or metal inner packaging. The net quantity of material in any inner packaging may not exceed 2.85 kg (6.25 pounds).
(ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.
(iii) The barrier bag and its contents must be placed in a fiberboard box that is placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.
(iv) The intermediate packaging must be placed inside an outer packaging conforming to § 173.211.
(v) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an outer packaging.
(d) The outside of the package must be marked, in association with the proper shipping name, with the statement: “This package conforms to 49 CFR 173.13.”
[Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996]

Subpart B—Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation
§ 173.21
Forbidden materials and packages.
Unless otherwise provided in this subchapter, the offering for transportation or transportation of the following is forbidden:
(a) Materials that are designated “Forbidden” in Column 3 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) Forbidden explosives as defined in § 173.54 of this part.
(c) Electrical devices which are likely to create sparks or generate a dangerous quantity of heat, unless packaged in a manner which precludes such an occurrence.
(d) For carriage by aircraft, any package which has a magnetic field of more than 0.00525 gauss measured at 4.5 m (15 feet) from any surface of the package.
(e) A material in the same packaging, freight container, or overpack with another material, the mixing of which is likely to cause a dangerous evolution of heat, or flammable or poisonous gases or vapors, or to produce corrosive materials.
(f) A package containing a material which is likely to decompose with a self-accelerated decomposition temperature (SADT) of 50 °C (122 °F) or less, or polymerize at a temperature of 54 °C (130 °F) or less with an evolution of a dangerous quantity of heat or gas when decomposing or polymerizing, unless the material is stabilized or inhibited in a manner to preclude such evolution. The SADT may be determined by any of the test methods described in Part II of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
(1) A package meeting the criteria of paragraph (f) of this section may be required to be shipped under controlled temperature conditions. The control temperature and emergency temperature for a package shall be as specified in the table in this paragraph based upon the SADT of the material. The control temperature is the temperature above which a package of the material may not be offered for transportation or transported. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which, due to imminent danger, emergency measures must be initiated.
§ 173.21 Table: Method of Determining Control and Emergency Temperature.
SADT 1 | Control temperatures | Emergency temperature
SADT ≤ 20 °C (68 °F) | 20 °C (36 °F) below SADT | 10 °C (18 °F) below SADT.
20 °C (68 °F) < SADT ≤ 35 °C (95 °F) | 15 °C (27 °F) below SADT | 10 °C (18 °F) below SADT.
35 °C (95 °F) < SADT ≤ 50 °C (122 °F) | 10 °C (18 °F) below SADT | 5 °C (9 °F) below SADT.
50 °C (122 °F) < SADT | (^2) | (^2)
1 Self-accelerating decomposition temperature.
2 Temperature control not required.
(2) For self-reactive materials listed in § 173.224(b) table control and emergency temperatures, where required are shown in Columns 5 and 6, respectively. For organic peroxides listed in The Organic Peroxides Table in § 173.225 control and emergency temperatures, where required, are shown in Columns 7a and 7b, respectively.
(3) Refrigeration may be used as a means of stabilization only when approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. For status of approvals previously issued by the Bureau of Explosives, see § 171.19 of this subchapter. Methods of stabilization approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety are as follows:
(i) For highway transportation:
(A) A material meeting the criteria of this paragraph (f) may be transported only in a transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle equipped with a mechanical refrigeration unit, or loaded with a consumable refrigerant, capable of maintaining the inside temperature of the hazardous material at or below the control temperature required for the material during transportation.
(B) Each package containing a material meeting the criteria of this paragraph (f) must be loaded and maintained at or below the control temperature required for the material. The temperature of the material must be determined by appropriate means and entered on a written record at the time the packaging is loaded.
(C) The vehicle operator shall monitor the inside temperature of the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle and enter that temperature on a written record at the time the package is loaded and thereafter at intervals not exceeding two hours. Alternatively, a transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle may be equipped with a visible or audible warning device that activates when the inside temperature of the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle exceeds the control temperature required for the material. The warning device must be readily visible or audible, as appropriate, from the vehicle operator's seat in the vehicle.
(D) The carrier shall advise the vehicle operator of the emergency temperature for the material, and provide the vehicle operator with written procedures that must be followed to assure maintenance of the control temperature inside the transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle. The written procedures must include instructions for the vehicle operator on actions to take if the inside temperature exceeds the control temperature and approaches or reaches the emergency temperature for the material. In addition, the written temperature-control procedures must identify enroute points where the consumable refrigerant may be procured, or where repairs to, or replacement of, the mechanical refrigeration unit may be accomplished.
(E) The vehicle operator shall maintain the written temperature-control procedures, and the written record of temperature measurements specified in paragraph (f)(3)(i)(C) of this section, if applicable, in the same manner as specified in § 177.817 of this subchapter for shipping papers.
(F) If the control temperature is maintained by use of a consumable refrigerant (e.g., dry ice or liquid nitrogen), the quantity of consumable refrigerant must be sufficient to maintain the control temperature for twice the average transit time under normal conditions of transportation.
(G) A material that has a control temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) or higher may be transported by common carrier. A material that has a control temperature below 40 °C (104 °F) must be transported by a private or contract carrier.
(ii) For transportation by vessel, shipments are authorized in accordance with the control-temperature requirements of Section 21 of the General Introduction of the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG Code).
(g) Packages which give off a flammable gas or vapor, released from a material not otherwise subject to this subchapter, likely to create a flammable mixture with air in a transport vehicle.
(h) Packages containing materials (other than those classed as explosive) which will detonate in a fire.
(1) For purposes of this paragraph, “detonate” means an explosion in which the shock wave travels through the material at a speed greater than the speed of sound.
(2) When tests are required to evaluate the performance of a package under the provisions of this paragraph, the testing must be done or approved by one of the agencies specified in § 173.56.
(i) A package containing a cigarette lighter, or other similar device, equipped with an ignition element and containing fuel; except that a cigarette lighter or similar device subject to this paragraph may be shipped if the design of the device and its inner packaging has been examined by the Bureau of Explosives and specifically approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The examination of cigarette lighters and similar devices containing gaseous fuel will include scrutiny for compliance with § 173.308 of this part. For the status of approvals previously issued by the Bureau of Explosives, see § 171.19 of this subchapter.
(j) An organic peroxide of the “ketone peroxide” category which contains more than 9 percent available oxygen as calculated using the equation in § 173.128(a)(4)(ii). The category, ketone peroxide, includes, but is not limited to:
Acetyl acetone peroxide
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s)
Diacetone alcohol peroxides
Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s)
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s)
Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s)
(k) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, including §§ 171.11 and 175.10(a)(2) of this subchapter, an oxygen generator (chemical) as cargo on a passenger-carrying aircraft. This prohibition does not apply to an oxygen generator for medical or personal use of a passenger that meets the requirements of § 175.10(a)(7) or § 175.10(a)(24) of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-254, 61 FR 26419, May 24, 1996; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; Amdt. 173-254, 61 FR 68954, Dec. 30, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.22
Shipper's responsibility.
(a) Except as otherwise provided in this part, a person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a packaging or container required by this part only in accordance with the following:
(1) The person shall class and describe the hazardous material in accordance with parts 172 and 173 of this subchapter, and
(2) The person shall determine that the packaging or container is an authorized packaging, including part 173 requirements, and that it has been manufactured, assembled, and marked in accordance with:
(i) Section 173.7(a) and parts 173, 178, or 179 of this subchapter;
(ii) A specification of the Department in effect at the date of manufacture of the packaging or container;
(iii) National or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, as authorized in § 173.24(d)(2);
(iv) An approval issued under this subchapter; or
(v) An exemption issued under subchapter A of this chapter.
(3) In making the determination under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the person may accept:
(i) Except for the marking on the bottom of a metal or plastic drum with a capacity over 100 liters which has been reconditioned, remanufactured or otherwise converted, the manufacturer's certification, specification, approval, or exemption marking (see §§ 178.2 and 179.1 of this subchapter); or
(ii) With respect to cargo tanks provided by a carrier, the manufacturer's identification plate or a written certification of specification or exemption provided by the carrier.
(4) For a DOT specification or UN standard packaging subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, a person shall perform all functions necessary to bring that package into compliance with part 178 of this subchapter, as identified by the packaging manufacturer or subsequent distributor, in accordance with § 178.2 of this subchapter.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Prior to each shipment of fissile radioactive materials, and Type B or highway route controlled quantity packages of radioactive materials (see § 173.403), the shipper shall notify the consignee of the dates of shipment and expected arrival. The shipper shall also notify each consignee of any special loading/unloading instructions prior to his first shipment. For any shipment of irradiated reactor fuel, the shipper shall provide physical protection in compliance with a plan established under:
(1) Requirements prescribed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, or
(2) Equivalent requirements approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, RSPA.
[Amdt. 173-100, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.22, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.22a
Use of packagings authorized under exemptions.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, no person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a packaging the use of which is dependent upon an exemption issued under subpart B of part 107 of this title, unless that person is the holder of or a party to the exemption.
(b) If an exemption authorizes the use of a packaging for the shipment or transportation of a hazardous material by any person or class of persons other than or in addition to the holder of the exemption, that person or a member of that class of persons may use the packaging for the purposes authorized in the exemption subject to the terms specified therein. However, no person may use a packaging under the authority of this paragraph unless he maintains a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with the shipment or transportation of the hazardous material concerned. Copies of exemptions may be obtained from the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001, Attention: Docket Section.
(c) When an exemption issued to a person who offers a hazardous material contains requirements that apply to a carrier of the hazardous material, the offeror shall furnish a copy of the exemption to the carrier before or at the time a shipment is tendered.
[Amdt. 173-93, 41 FR 3478, Jan. 23, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-121, 43 FR 48643, Oct. 19, 1978; Amdt. 173-223, 55 FR 39981, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173.249, 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; Amdt.173-249, 61 FR 51242, Oct. 1, 1996]
§ 173.23
Previously authorized packaging.
(a) When the regulations specify a packaging with a specification marking prefix of “DOT,” a packaging marked prior to January 1, 1970, with the prefix of “ICC” may be used in its place if the packaging otherwise conforms to applicable specification requirements.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) After July 2, 1982, a seamless aluminum cylinder manufactured in conformance with and for use under DOT special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6498, 7042, 8107, 8364 or 8422 may be continued in use if marked before or at the time of the next retest with either the specification identification “3AL” immediately above the special permit or exemption number, or the DOT mark (e.g., DOT 3AL 1800) in proximity to the special permit or exemption marking.
(d) Cylinders (spheres) manufactured and marked under DOT special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6616 prior to January 1, 1983, may be continued in use if marked before or at the time of the next retest with the specification identification “4BA” near the special permit or exemption marking.
(e) After October 1, 1984, cylinders manufactured for use under special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6668 or 8404 may be continued in use, and must be marked “DOT-4LXXXYY” (XXX to be replaced by the service pressure, YY to be replaced by the letters “AL”, if applicable) in compliance with Specification 4L (§ 178.57 of this subchapter) on or before January 1, 1986. The “DOT-4LXXXYY” must appear in proximity to other required special permit or exemption markings.
(f) An MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to structural integrity requirements in § 178.337-3 or to corresponding requirements in effect at the time of manufacture.
(g) A non-bulk packaging manufactured, tested, marked, and certified on or before September 30, 1996, in accordance with the applicable provisions of subparts L and M of part 178 of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 1995, may be used as authorized by this subchapter if the packaging conforms to all requirements applicable at the time of manufacture. In addition, such a packaging may be reused as authorized by § 173.28 without a nominal thickness marking, if it conforms to the minimum thickness criteria prescribed in § 173.28(b)(4).
[Amdt. 173-3, 33 FR 14921, Oct. 4, 1968]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.23, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.24
General requirements for packagings and packages.
(a) Applicability. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, the provisions of this section apply to—
(1) Bulk and non-bulk packagings;
(2) New packagings and packagings which are reused; and
(3) Specification and non-specification packagings.
(b) Each package used for the shipment of hazardous materials under this subchapter shall be designed, constructed, maintained, filled, its contents so limited, and closed, so that under conditions normally incident to transportation—
(1) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, there will be no identifiable (without the use of instruments) release of hazardous materials to the environment;
(2) The effectiveness of the package will not be substantially reduced; for example, impact resistance, strength, packaging compatibility, etc. must be maintained for the minimum and maximum temperatures encountered during transportation;
(3) There will be no mixture of gases or vapors in the package which could, through any credible spontaneous increase of heat or pressure, significantly reduce the effectiveness of the packaging.
(c) Authorized packagings. A packaging is authorized for a hazardous material only if—
(1) The packaging is prescribed or permitted for the hazardous material in a packaging section specified for that material in Column 8 of the § 172.101 table and conforms to applicable requirements in the special provisions of Column 7 of the § 172.101 table and, for specification packagings (but not including UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United States), the specification requirements in parts 178 and 179 of this subchapter; or
(2) The packaging is permitted under, and conforms to, provisions contained in §§ 171.11, 171.12, 171.12a, 173.3, 173.4, 173.5, 173.7, 173.27, or 176.11 of this subchapter.
(d) Specification packagings and UN standard packagings manufactured outside the U.S.—(1) Specification packagings. A specification packaging, including a UN standard packaging manufactured in the United States, must conform in all details to the applicable specification or standard in part 178 or part 179 of this subchapter.
(2) UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United States. A UN standard packaging manufactured outside the United States, in accordance with national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, may be imported and used and is considered to be an authorized packaging under the provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, subject to the following conditions and limitations:
(i) The packaging fully conforms to applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods and the requirements of this subpart, including reuse provisions;
(ii) The packaging is capable of passing the prescribed tests in part 178 of this subchapter applicable to that standard; and
(iii) The competent authority of the country of manufacture provides reciprocal treatment for UN standard packagings manufactured in the U.S.
(e) Compatibility. (1) Even though certain packagings are specified in this part, it is, nevertheless, the responsibility of the person offering a hazardous material for transportation to ensure that such packagings are compatible with their lading. This particularly applies to corrosivity, permeability, softening, premature aging and embrittlement.
(2) Packaging materials and contents must be such that there will be no significant chemical or galvanic reaction between the materials and contents of the package.
(3) Plastic packagings and receptacles. (i) Plastic used in packagings and receptacles must be of a type compatible with the lading and may not be permeable to an extent that a hazardous condition is likely to occur during transportation, handling or refilling.
(ii) Each plastic packaging or receptacle which is used for liquid hazardous materials must be capable of withstanding without failure the procedure specified in appendix B of this part (“Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packagings and Receptacles”). The procedure specified in appendix B of this part must be performed on each plastic packaging or receptacle used for Packing Group I materials. The maximum rate of permeation of hazardous lading through or into the plastic packaging or receptacles may not exceed 0.5 percent for materials meeting the definition of a Division 6.1 material according to § 173.132 and 2.0 percent for other hazardous materials, when subjected to a temperature no lower than—
(A) 18 °C (64 °F) for 180 days in accordance with Test Method 1 in appendix B of this part;
(B) 50 °C (122 °F) for 28 days in accordance with Test Method 2 in appendix B of this part; or
(C) 60 °C (140 °F) for 14 days in accordance with Test Method 3 in appendix B of this part.
(iii) Alternative procedures or rates of permeation are permitted if they yield a level of safety equivalent to or greater than that provided by paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section and are specifically approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(4) Mixed contents. Hazardous materials may not be packed or mixed together in the same outer packaging with other hazardous or nonhazardous materials if such materials are capable of reacting dangerously with each other and causing—
(i) Combustion or dangerous evolution of heat;
(ii) Evolution of flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant gases; or
(iii) Formation of unstable or corrosive materials.
(5) Packagings used for solids, which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation, must be capable of containing the hazardous material in the liquid state.
(f) Closures. (1) Closures on packagings shall be so designed and closed that under conditions (including the effects of temperature and vibration) normally incident to transportation—
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (g) of this section, there is no identifiable release of hazardous materials to the environment from the opening to which the closure is applied; and
(ii) The closure is secure and leakproof.
(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, a closure (including gaskets or other closure components, if any) used on a specification packaging must conform to all applicable requirements of the specification.
(g) Venting. Venting of packagings, to reduce internal pressure which may develop by the evolution of gas from the contents, is permitted only when—
(1) Transportation by aircraft is not involved;
(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, the evolved gases are not poisonous, likely to create a flammable mixture with air or be an asphyxiant under normal conditions of transportation;
(3) The packaging is designed so as to preclude an unintentional release of hazardous materials from the receptacle; and
(4) For shipments in bulk packagings, venting is authorized for the specific hazardous material by a special provision in the § 172.101 table or by the applicable bulk packaging specification in part 178 of this subchapter.
(h) Outage and filling limits—(1) General. When filling packagings and receptacles for liquids, sufficient ullage (outage) must be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging or receptacle will occur as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation. Requirements for outage and filling limits for non-bulk and bulk packagings are specified in §§ 173.24a(d) and 173.24b(a), respectively.
(2) Compressed gases and cryogenic liquids. Filling limits for compressed gases and cryogenic liquids are specified in §§ 173.301 through 173.306 for cylinders and §§ 173.314 through 173.319 for bulk packagings.
(i) Air transportation. Packages offered or intended for transportation by aircraft must conform to the general requirements for transportation by aircraft in § 173.27, except as provided in § 171.11 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52610, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-242, 60 FR 26805, May 18, 1995]
§ 173.24a
Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and packages.
(a) Packaging design. Except as provided in § 172.312 of this subchapter:
(1) Inner packaging closures. A combination packaging containing liquid hazardous materials must be packed so that closures on inner packagings are upright.
(2) Friction. The nature and thickness of the outer packaging must be such that friction during transportation is not likely to generate an amount of heat sufficient to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the contents.
(3) Securing and cushioning. Inner packagings of combination packagings must be so packed, secured and cushioned to prevent their breakage or leakage and to control their movement within the outer packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. Cushioning material must not be capable of reacting dangerously with the contents of the inner packagings or having its protective properties significantly weakened in the event of leakage.
(4) Metallic devices. Nails, staples and other metallic devices shall not protrude into the interior of the outer packaging in such a manner as to be likely to damage inner packagings or receptacles.
(5) Vibration. Each non-bulk package must be capable of withstanding, without rupture or leakage, the vibration test procedure specified in § 178.608 of this subchapter.
(b) Non-bulk packaging filling limits. (1) A single or composite non-bulk packaging may be filled with a liquid hazardous material only when the specific gravity of the material does not exceed that marked on the packaging, or a specific gravity of 1.2 if not marked, except as follows:
(i) A Packing Group I packaging may be used for a Packing Group II material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material;
(ii) A Packing Group I packaging may be used for a Packing Group III material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 2.7, or 2.25 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material; and
(iii) A Packing Group II packaging may be used for a Packing Group III material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 1.5 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity material.
(2) Except as otherwise provided in this section, a non-bulk packaging may not be filled with a hazardous material to a gross mass greater than the maximum gross mass marked on the packaging.
(3) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid hazardous material to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked. In addition:
(i) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group II hazardous material to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
(ii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group III hazardous material to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 2.25, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
(iii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid Packing Group III hazardous material to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
(4) Packagings tested as prescribed in § 178.605 of this subchapter and marked with the hydrostatic test pressure as prescribed in § 178.503(a)(5) of this subchapter may be used for liquids only when the vapor pressure of the liquid conforms to one of the following:
(i) The vapor pressure must be such that the total pressure in the packaging (i.e., the vapor pressure of the liquid plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psi)) at 55 °C (131 °F), determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section and a filling temperature of 15 °C (59 °F)), will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure;
(ii) The vapor pressure at 50 °C (122 °F) must be less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 psi); or
(iii) The vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) must be less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 psi).
(5) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of a package after filling.
(c) Mixed contents. (1) An outer non-bulk packaging may contain more than one hazardous material only when—
(i) The inner and outer packagings used for each hazardous material conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to that hazardous material;
(ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter for the packing group indicating the highest order of hazard for the hazardous materials contained in the package;
(iii) Corrosive materials (except ORM-D) in bottles are further packed in securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer packagings; and
(iv) For transportation by aircraft, the total net quantity does not exceed the lowest permitted maximum net quantity per package as shown in Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the § 172.101 table. The permitted maximum net quantity must be calculated in kilograms if a package contains both a liquid and a solid.
(2) A packaging containing inner packagings of Division 6.2 materials may not contain other hazardous materials, except dry ice.
(d) Liquids must not completely fill a receptacle at a temperature of 55 °C (131 °F) or less.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52611, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.24b
Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.
(a) Outage and filling limits. (1) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquids and liquefied gases must be so loaded that the outage is at least five percent for materials poisonous by inhalation, or at least one percent for all other materials, of the total capacity of a cargo tank, portable tank, tank car (including dome capacity), multi-unit tank car tank, or any compartment thereof, at the following reference temperatures—
(i) 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated tank;
(ii) 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank car having a thermal protection system, incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/ per degree F) temperature differential; or
(iii) 41 °C (105 °F) for an insulated tank.
(2) Hazardous materials may not be loaded into the dome of a tank car. If the dome of the tank car does not provide sufficient outage, vacant space must be left in the shell to provide the required outage.
(b) Equivalent steel. For the purposes of this section, the reference stainless steel is stainless steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 51.7 deka newtons per square millimeter (75,000 psi) and a guaranteed elongation of 40 percent or greater. Where the regulations permit steel other than stainless steel to be used in place of a specified stainless steel (for example, as in § 172.102 of this subchapter, special provision B30), the minimum thickness for the steel must be obtained from one of the following formulas, as appropriate:

Formula for metric units
e1 = (12.74e0) / (Rm1 A1)1/3

Formula for non-metric units
e1 = (144.2e0) / (Rm1 A1)1/3
where:
e0 = Required thickness of the reference stainless steel in millimeters or inches respectively;
e1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used in millimeters or inches respectively;
Rm1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of the steel used in deka-newtons per square millimeter or pounds per square inch respectively; and
A1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel used multiplied by 100 (for example, 20 percent times 100 equals 20). Elongation values used must be determined from a 50 mm or 2 inch test specimen.
(c) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space of the tank.
(d) A bulk packaging may not be loaded with a hazardous material that:
(1) Is at a temperature outside of the packaging's design temperature range; or
(2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, exceeds the maximum weight of lading marked on the specification plate.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.25
Authorized packages and overpacks.
(a) Authorized packages containing hazardous materials may be offered for transportation in an overpack as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, if all of the following conditions are met:
(1) The package meets the requirements of §§ 173.21 and 173.24 of this subchapter.
(2) The overpack is marked with the proper shipping name and identification number, and labeled as required by this subchapter for each hazardous material contained therein unless markings and labels representative of each hazardous material in the overpack are visible.
(3) Each package subject to the orientation marking requirements of § 172.312 of this subchapter is packed in the overpack with its filling holes up and the overpack is marked with package orientation marking arrows on two opposite vertical sides of the overpack with the arrows pointing in the correct direction of orientation.
(4) The overpack is marked with a statement indicating that the inside (inner) packages comply with prescribed specifications when specification packagings are required, unless specification markings on the inside packages are visible.
(5) Packages containing Class 8 (corrosive) materials in Packing Group I or Division 5.1 (oxidizing) materials in Packing Group I may not be overpacked with any other materials.
(b) Shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped trays may be used as outer packagings for inner packagings prepared in accordance with the limited quantity provisions or consumer commodity provisions of this subchapter, provided that the complete package is capable of meeting performance standards at the Packing Group III performance level. Each package may not exceed 20 kg (44 lbs) gross weight.
(c) Hazardous materials which are required to be labeled POISON may be transported in the same motor vehicle with material that is marked or known to be foodstuffs, feed or any edible material intended for consumption by humans or animals provided the hazardous material is marked, labeled, and packaged in accordance with this subchapter, conforms to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section and is overpacked as specified in § 177.841(e) of this subchapter or in an overpack which is a UN 1A2, 1B2, or 1N2 drum tested and marked for a Packing Group II or higher performance level.
[Amdt. 173-165, 48 FR 28099, June 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-214, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994]
§ 173.26
Quantity limitations.
When quantity limitations do not appear in the packaging requirements of this subchapter, the permitted gross weight or capacity authorized for a packaging is as shown in the packaging specification or standard in part 178 or 179, as applicable, of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.27
General requirements for transportation by aircraft.
(a) The requirements of this section are in addition to the requirements in § 173.24 and apply to packages offered or intended for transportation aboard aircraft. Notwithstanding any Packing Group III performance level specified in Column 5 of the § 172.101 table, the required performance level for packages containing Class 4, 5, or 8 materials, when offered or intended for transportation aboard aircraft, is at the Packing Group II performance level, unless otherwise excepted from performance requirements in subpart E of this part.
(b) Packages authorized on board aircraft. (1) When Column 9a of the § 172.101 table indicates that a material is “Forbidden”, that material may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.
(2) When Column 9b of the § 172.101 table indicates that a material is “Forbidden”, that material may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard aircraft.
(3) The maximum quantity of hazardous material in a package that may be offered for transportation or transported aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft or cargo aircraft may not exceed that quantity prescribed for the material in Column 9a or 9b, respectively, of the § 172.101 table.
(4) A package containing a hazardous material which is authorized aboard cargo aircraft but not aboard passenger aircraft must be labeled with the CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label required by § 172.402(b) of this subchapter and may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.
(c) Pressure requirements. (1) Packagings must be designed and constructed to prevent leakage that may be caused by changes in altitude and temperature during transportation aboard aircraft.
(2) Packagings for which retention of liquid is a basic function must be capable of withstanding without leakage the greater of—
(i) An internal pressure which produces a gauge pressure of not less than 75 kPa (11 psi) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1. or 95 kPa (14 psi) for other liquids; or
(ii) A pressure related to the vapor pressure of the liquid to be conveyed, determined by one of the following:
(A) The total gauge pressure measured in the receptacle (i.e., the vapor pressure of the material and the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psi)) at 55 °C (131 °F), multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; determined on the basis of a filling temperature of 15 °C (59 °F) and a degree of filling such that the receptacle is not completely liquid full at a temperature of 55 °C (131 °F) or less;
(B) 1.75 times the vapor pressure at 50 °C (122 °F) less 100 kPa (15 psi); or
(C) 1.5 times the vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 °) less 100 kPa (15 psi).
(3) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this section—
(i) Hazardous materials may be contained in an inner packaging which does not itself meet the pressure requirement provided that the inner packaging is packed within a supplementary packaging which does meet the pressure requirement and other applicable packaging requirements of this subchapter.
(ii) Packagings which are subject to the hydrostatic pressure test and marking requirements of §§ 178.605 and 178.503(a)(5), respectively, of this subchapter must have a marked test pressure of not less than 250 kPa (36 psi) for liquids in Packing Group I, 80 kPa (12 psi) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1, and 100 kPa (15 psi) for other liquids.
(d) Closures. Stoppers, corks or other such friction-type closures must be held securely, tightly and effectively in place by positive means. Each screw-type closure on any packaging must be secured to prevent closure from loosening due to vibration or substantial change in temperature.
(e) Absorbent materials. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, liquids in Packing Group I or II of Class 3, 4, 5, 6, or 8, when in glass or earthenware inner packagings, must be packaged using material capable of absorbing and not likely to react dangerously with the liquid. Absorbent material is not required if the inner packagings are so protected that breakage of them and leakage of their contents from the outer packaging is not likely to occur under normal conditions of transportation and is not required for packagings containing liquids in Packing Group II for transport aboard cargo aircraft only. Where absorbent material is required and an outer packaging is not liquid-tight, a means of containing the liquid in the event of leakage must be used in the form of a leakproof liner, plastic bag or other equally efficient means of containment. Where absorbent material is required, the quantity and disposition of it in each outer packaging must be as follows:
(1) For packagings containing liquids in Packing Group I offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft, each packaging must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the contents of all inner packagings containing such liquids;
(2) For packagings containing liquids in Packing Group I offered for transportation or transported aboard cargo aircraft only and packagings containing liquids in Packing Group II offered for transportation or transported aboard passenger aircraft, each package must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the contents of any one of the inner packagings containing such liquids and, where they are of different sizes and quantities, sufficient absorbent material to absorb the contents of the inner packaging containing the greatest quantity of liquid.
(f) Combination packagings. Unless otherwise specified in this part, or in § 171.11 of this subchapter, when combination packagings are offered for transportation aboard aircraft, inner packagings must conform to the quantity limitations set forth in table 1 of this paragraph for transport aboard passenger-carrying aircraft and table 2 of this paragraph for transport aboard cargo aircraft only, as follows:
Table 1—Maximum Net Capacity of Inner Packaging for Transportation on Passenger-Carrying Aircraft
Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9a of the § 172.101 table | Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging | Glass, earthenware or fiber inner packagings | Metal or plastic inner packagings
Liquids:
Not greater than 0.5L | 0.5L | 0.5L.
Greater than 0.5L. not greater than lL | 0.5L | lL.
Greater than 1L, not greater than 5L | 1L | 5L.
Greater than 5L, not greater than 60L | 2.5L | 10L.
Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L | 5L | 25L.
Greater than 220L | No limit | No limit.
Solids:
Not greater than 5 kg | 0.5 kg | 1 kg.
Greater than 5 kg, not greater than 25 kg | 1 kg | 2.5 kg.
Greater than 25 kg, not greater than 200 kg | 5 kg | 10 kg.
Greater than 200 kg | No limit | No limit.
Table 2—Maximum Net Capacity of Inner Packaging for Transportation on Cargo Aircraft
Maximum net quantity per package from Column 9b of the § 172.101 table | Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging | Glass, earthenware or fiber inner packagings | Metal or plastic inner packagings
Liquids:
Not greater than 2.5L | 1L | 1L.
Greater than 2.5L, not greater than 30L | 2.5L | 2.5L.
| Greater than 30L, not greater than 60L | 5L | 10L.
Greater than 60L, not greater than 220L | 5L | 25L.
Greater than 220L | No limit | No limit.
Solids:
Not greater than 15 kg | 1 kg | 2.5 kg.
Greater than 15 kg, not greater than 50 kg | 2.5 kg | 5 kg.
Greater than 50 kg, not greater than 200 kg | 5 kg | 10 kg.
Greater than 200 kg | No limit | No limit.
(g) Cylinders. For any cylinder containing hazardous materials and incorporating valves, sufficient protection must be provided to prevent operation of, and damage to, the valves during transportation, by one of the following methods:
(1) By equipping each cylinder with securely attached valve caps or protective headrings; or
(2) By boxing or crating the cylinder.
(h) Tank cars and cargo tanks. Any tank car or cargo tank containing a hazardous material may not be transported aboard aircraft.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]
§ 173.28
Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.
(a) General. Packagings and receptacles used more than once must be in such condition, including closure devices and cushioning materials, that they conform in all respects to the prescribed requirements of this subchapter. Before reuse, each packaging must be inspected and may not be reused unless free from incompatible residue, rupture, or other damage which reduces its structural integrity.
(b) Reuse of non-bulk packaging. A non-bulk packaging used more than once must conform to the following provisions and limitations:
(1) A non-bulk packaging which, upon inspection, shows evidence of a reduction in integrity may not be reused unless it is reconditioned in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(2) Before reuse, packagings subject to the leakproofness test with air prescribed in § 178.604 of this subchapter shall be—
(i) Retested without failure in accordance with § 178.604 of this subchapter using an internal air pressure (gauge) of at least 48 kPa (7.0 psi) for Packing Group I and 20 kPa (3.0 psi) for Packing Group II and Packing Group III; and
(ii) Marked with the letter “L”, with the name and address or symbol of the person conducting the test, and the last two digits of the year the test was conducted. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(3) Packagings made of paper, plastic film, or textile are not authorized for reuse;
(4) Metal and plastic drums and jerricans used as single packagings or the outer packagings of composite packagings are authorized for reuse only when they are marked in a permanent manner (e.g., embossed) in millimeters with the nominal (for metal packagings) or minimum (for plastic packagings) thickness of the packaging material, as required by § 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter, and—
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section, conform to the following minimum thickness criteria:
Maximum capacity not over | Minimum thickness of packaging material | Metal drum or jerrican | Plastic drum or jerrican
20 L | 0.63 mm (0.025 inch) | 1.1 mm (0.043 inch).
30 L | 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) | 1.1 mm (0.043 inch).
40 L | 0.73 mm (0.029 inch) | 1.8 mm (0.071 inch).
60 L | 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) | 1.8 mm (0.071 inch).
120 L | 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) | 2.2 mm (0.087 inch).
220 L | 0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 1 | 2.2 mm (0.087 inch).
| 450 L | 1.77 mm (0.070 inch) | 5.0 mm (0.197 inch).
^1 Metal drums or jerricans with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body and 1.09 mm heads which are manufactured and marked prior to January 1, 1997 may be reused. Metal drums or jerricans manufactured and marked on or after January 1, 1997, and intended for reuse, must be constructed with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body and 1.11 mm heads.
(ii) For stainless steel drums and jerricans, conform to a minimum wall thickness as determined by the following equivalence formula:

Formula for Metric Units

Formula for U.S. Standard Units
where:
e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).
e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for U.S. Standard units, use pounds per square inch).
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this section).
(5) Plastic inner receptacles of composite packagings must have a minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 inch).
(6) A previously used non-bulk packaging may be reused for the shipment of hazardous waste, not subject to the reconditioning and reuse provisions of this section, in accordance with § 173.12(c).
(7) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a packaging otherwise authorized for reuse may be reused without being leakproofness tested with air provided the packaging—
(i) Is refilled with a material which is compatible with the previous lading:
(ii) Is refilled and offered for transportation by the original filler;
(iii) Is transported in a transport vehicle or freight container under the exclusive use of the refiller of the packaging; and
(iv) Is constructed of—
(A) Stainless steel, monel or nickel with a thickness not less than one and one-half times the minimum thickness prescribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this section;
(B) Plastic, provided the packaging is not refilled for reuse on a date more than five years from the date of manufacture marked on the packaging in accordance with § 178.503(a)(6) of this subchapter; or
(C) another material or thickness when approved under the conditions established by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety for reuse without retesting.
(c) Reconditioning of non-bulk packaging. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of metal drums is:
(i) Cleaning to base material of construction, with all former contents, internal and external corrosion, and any external coatings and labels removed;
(ii) Restoring to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced: and
(iii) Inspecting after cleaning but before painting, Packagings that have visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects, must be rejected.
(2) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of a non-bulk packaging other than a metal drum or a UN 1H1 plastic drum is restoring the packaging by repair, or replacement of non-integral packaging components (such as removable gaskets, closure devices, cushioning material, etc.) to a condition such that it conforms in all respects with the prescribed requirements of this subchapter. For a UN 1H1 plastic drum, replacing a removable gasket or closure device with a replacement of the same design and material which provides equivalent performance does not constitute reconditioning. Packagings which have significant defects which cannot be repaired may not be reused.
(3) A person who reconditions a packaging manufactured and marked under the provisions of subpart L of part 178 of this subchapter, shall mark that packaging as required by § 178.503(c) and (d) of this subchapter. The marking is the certification of the reconditioner that the packaging conforms to the standard for which it is marked and that all functions performed by the reconditioner which are prescribed by this subchapter have been performed in compliance with this subchapter.
(4) The markings applied by the reconditioner may be different from those applied by the manufacturer at the time of original manufacture, but may not identify a greater performance capability than that for which the original design type had been tested (for example, the reconditioner may mark a drum which was originally marked as 1A1/Y1.8 as 1A1/Y1.2 or 1A1/Z2.0).
(d) Remanufacture of non-bulk packagings. For the purpose of this subchapter, remanufacture is the conversion of a non-specification, non-bulk packaging to a DOT specification or U.N. standard, the conversion of a packaging meeting one specification or standard to another specification or standard (for example, conversion of 1A1 non-removable head drums to 1A2 removable head drums) or the replacement of integral structural packaging components (such as non-removable heads on drums). A person who remanufactures a non-bulk packaging to conform to a specification or standard in part 178 of this subchapter is subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter as a manufacturer.
(e) Non-reusable containers. A packaging marked as NRC according to the DOT specification or UN standard requirements of part 178 of this subchapter may be reused for the shipment of any material not required by this subchapter to be shipped in a DOT specification or UN standard packaging.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67491, 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 60 FR 7627, Feb. 8, 1995; Amdt. 173-241, 60 FR 26805, 26806, May 18, 1995 Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, 50265, Sept. 26, 1996; 61 FR 51495, Oct. 2, 1996; Amdt. 173-254, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997]
§ 173.29
Empty packagings.
(a) General. Except as otherwise provided in this section, an empty packaging containing only the residue of a hazardous material shall be offered for transportation and transported in the same manner as when it previously contained a greater quantity of that hazardous material.
(b) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, an empty packaging is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter if it conforms to the following provisions:
(1) Any hazardous material shipping name and identification number markings, any hazard warning labels or placards, and any other markings indicating that the material is hazardous (e.g., RQ, INHALATION HAZARD) are removed, obliterated, or securely covered in transportation. This provision does not apply to transportation in a transport vehicle or a freight container if the packaging is not visible in transportation and the packaging is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the shipper or consignee;
(2) The packaging—
(i) Is unused;
(ii) Is sufficiently cleaned of residue and purged of vapors to remove any potential hazard;
(iii) Is refilled with a material which is not hazardous to such an extent that any residue remaining in the packaging no longer poses a hazard; or
(iv) Contains only the residue of—
(A) An ORM-D material; or
(B) A non-flammable gas with no subsidiary hazard at an absolute pressure less than 276 kPa (40 psia); at 21 °C (70 °F); and
(3) Any material contained in the packaging does not meet the definitions in § 171.8 of this subchapter for a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.
(c) A non-bulk packaging containing only the residue of a hazardous material covered by table 2 of § 172.504 of this subchapter—
(1) Does not have to be included in determining the applicability of the placarding requirements of subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter; and
(2) Is not subject to the shipping paper requirements of this subchapter when collected and transported by a contract or private carrier for reconditioning, remanufacture or reuse.
(d) Notwithstanding the stowage requirements in Column 10a of the § 172.101 table for transportation by vessel, an empty drum or cylinder may be stowed on deck or under deck.
(e) Specific provisions for describing an empty packaging on a shipping paper appear in § 172.203(e) of this subchapter.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) A package which contains a residue of an elevated temperature material may remain marked in the same manner as when it contained a greater quantity of the material even though it no longer meets the definition in § 171.8 of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-251, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997]
§ 173.30
Loading and unloading of transport vehicles.
A person who loads or unloads hazardous materials into or from a transport vehicle or vessel shall comply with the applicable loading and unloading requirements of parts 174, 175, 176, and 177 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16064, Apr. 15, 1976]
§ 173.31
Use of tank cars.
(a) General. (1) No person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a tank car unless the tank car meets the applicable specification and packaging requirements of this subchapter or, when this subchapter authorizes the use of an non-DOT specification tank car, the applicable specification to which the tank was constructed.
(2) Tank cars and appurtenances may be used for the transportation of any commodity for which they are authorized in this part and specified on the certificate of construction (AAR Form 4-2 or by addendum on Form R-1). See § 179.5 of this subchapter. Transfer of a tank car from one specified service on its certificate of construction to another may be made only by the owner or with the owner's authorization. A tank car proposed for a commodity service other than specified on its certificate of construction must be approved for such service by the AAR's Tank Car Committee.
(3) No person may fill a tank car overdue for periodic inspection with a hazardous material and then offer it for transportation. Any tank car marked as meeting a DOT specification and any non-specification tank car transporting a hazardous material must have a periodic inspection and test conforming to subpart F of part 180 of this subchapter.
(4) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may be used for the transportation in commerce of any hazardous material unless the air brake equipment support attachments of such tank car conform to the standards for attachments set forth in §§ 179.100-16 and 179.200-19 of this subchapter.
(5) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may be used for the transportation in commerce of any hazardous material with a self-energized manway located below the liquid level of the lading.
(6) Unless otherwise specifically provided in this part:
(i) When the tank car delimiter is an “A,” offerors may also use tank cars with a delimiter “S,” “J” or “T”.
(ii) When the tank car delimiter is an “S,” offerors may also use tank cars with a delimiter “J” or “T”.
(iii) When a tank car delimiter is a “T” offerors may also use tank cars with a delimiter of “J”.
(iv) When a tank car delimiter is a “J”, offerors may not use a tank car with any other delimiter.
(b) Safety systems—(1) Coupler vertical restraint. Each tank car conforming to a DOT specification and any other tank car used for transportation of a hazardous material must be equipped with a coupler vertical restraint system that meets the requirements of § 179.14 of this subchapter.
(2) Pressure relief devices. (i) Pressure relief devices on tank cars must conform to part 179 of this subchapter.
(ii) Except for shipments of chloroprene, inhibited, in class DOT 115 tank cars, single-unit tank cars used for materials meeting the definition for Division 6.1 liquid, Packing Group I or II, Class 2 materials, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must have self-closing pressure relief devices. However, a tank car built before January 1, 1991, and equipped with a non-closing pressure relief device may be used to transport a Division 6.1 or Class 4 liquid if the liquid is not poisonous by inhalation. Unless otherwise specifically provided in this subchapter, frangible discs may not have breather holes.
(3) Tank-head puncture-resistance requirements. The following tank cars must have a tank-head puncture-resistance system that conforms to the requirements in § 179.16 of this subchapter, or to the corresponding requirements in effect at the time of installation:
(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 material.
(ii) Tank cars constructed from aluminum or nickel plate that are used to transport hazardous material.
(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, those tank cars specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section not requiring a tank-head puncture resistance system prior to July 1, 1996, must have a tank-head puncture resistance system installed no later than July 1, 2006.
(iv) Class DOT 105A tank cars built prior to September 1, 1981, having a tank capacity less than 70 kl (18,500 gallons), and used to transport a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, must have a tank-head puncture-resistant system installed no later than July 1, 2001.
(4) Thermal protection requirements. The following tank cars must have thermal protection that conforms to the requirements of § 179.18 of this subchapter:
(i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 material, except for a class 106, 107A, 110, and 113 tank car. A tank car equipped with a thermal protection system conforming to § 179.18 of this subchapter, or that has an insulation system having an overall thermal conductance of no more than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per square meter, per degree Celsius temperature differential (0.03 B.t.u. per square foot, per hour, per degree Fahrenheit temperature differential), conforms to this requirement.
(ii) A tank car transporting a Class 2 material that was not required to have thermal protection prior to July 1, 1996, must be equipped with thermal protection no later than July 1, 2006.
(5) Bottom-discontinuity protection requirements. No person may offer for transportation a hazardous material in a tank car with bottom discontinuity protection unless the tank car has bottom-discontinuity protection that conforms to the requirements of E9.00 and E10.00 of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars. Tank cars not requiring bottom-discontinuity protection under the terms of appendix Y of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars as of July 1, 1996, must conform to these requirements no later than July 1, 2006. Tank cars modified before July 1, 1996, may conform to the bottom-discontinuity protection requirements of appendix Y of the 1992 edition of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
(6) Scheduling of modifications and progress reporting. The date of conformance for the continued use of tank cars subject to paragraphs (b)(3), (b)(4), (b)(5), (e)(2), and (f) of this section and §§ 173.314(j) and 173.323(c)(1) is subject to the following conditions and limitations.
(i) Each tank car owner shall modify, reassign, retire, or remove at least 50 percent of their in-service tank car fleet within the first half of the compliance period and the remainder of their in-service tank car fleet during the second half of the compliance period.
(ii) By October 1 of each year, each owner of a tank car subject to this paragraph (b)(6) shall submit to the Hazardous Materials Division (RRS-12), Office of Safety Assurance and Compliance, Federal Railroad Administration, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001, a progress report that shows the total number of in-service tank cars that need head protection, thermal protection, or bottom-discontinuity protection; the number of new or different tank cars acquired to replace those tank cars required to be upgraded to a higher service pressure; and the total number of tank cars modified, reassigned, acquired, retired, or removed from service the previous year.
(c) Tank car test pressure. A tank car used for the transportation of a hazardous material must have a tank test pressure equal to or greater than the greatest of the following:
(1) Except for shipments of carbon dioxide, anhydrous hydrogen chloride, vinyl fluoride, ethylene, or hydrogen, 133 percent of the sum of lading vapor pressure at the reference temperature of 46 °C (115 °F) for non-insulated tank cars or 41 °C (105 °F) for insulated tank cars plus static head, plus gas padding pressure in the vacant space of a tank car;
(2) 133 percent of the maximum loading or unloading pressure, whichever is greater;
(3) 20.7 Bar (300 psi) for materials that are poisonous by inhalation (see § 173.31(e)(2)(ii) for compliance dates);
(4) The minimum pressure prescribed by the specification in part 179 of this subchapter; or
(5) The minimum test pressure prescribed for the specific hazardous material in the applicable packaging section in subpart F or G of this part.
(d) Examination before shipping. (1) No person may offer for transportation a tank car containing a hazardous material or a residue of a hazardous material unless that person determines that the tank car is in proper condition and safe for transportation. As a minimum, each person offering a tank car for transportation must perform an external visual inspection that includes:
(i) Except where insulation or a thermal protection system precludes an inspection, the tank shell and heads for abrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other condition that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation;
(ii) The piping, valves, fittings, and gaskets for corrosion, damage, or any other condition that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation;
(iii) For missing or loose bolts, nuts, or elements that make the tank car unsafe for transportation;
(iv) All closures on tank cars and determine that the closures and all fastenings securing them are properly tightened in place by the use of a bar, wrench, or other suitable tool;
(v) Protective housings for proper securement;
(vi) The pressure relief device, including a careful inspection of the frangible disc in non-closing pressure relief devices, for corrosion or damage that may alter the intended operation of the device;
(vii) Each tell-tale indicator after filling and prior to transportation to ensure the integrity of the rupture disc;
(viii) The external thermal protection system, tank-head puncture resistance system, coupler vertical restraint system, and bottom discontinuity protection for conditions that make the tank car unsafe for transportation.
(ix) The required markings on the tank car for legibility; and
(x) The periodic inspection date markings to ensure that the inspection and test intervals are within the prescribed intervals.
(2) Closures on tank cars are required, in accordance with this subchapter, to be designed and closed so that under conditions normally incident to transportation, including the effects of temperature and vibration, there will be no identifiable release of a hazardous material to the environment. ln any action brought to enforce this section, the lack of securement of any closure to a tool-tight condition, detected at any point, will establish a rebuttable presumption that a proper inspection was not performed by the offeror of the car. That presumption may be rebutted by any evidence indicating that the lack of securement resulted from a specific cause not within the control of the offeror.
(e) Special requirements for materials poisonous by inhalation—(1) Interior heater coils. Tank cars used for materials poisonous by inhalation may not have interior heater coils.
(2) Tank car specifications. A tank car used for a material poisonous by inhalation must have a tank test pressure of 20.7 Bar (300 psi) or greater, head protection, and a metal jacket (e.g., DOT 105S300W), except that—
(i) A higher test pressure is required if otherwise specified in this subchapter; and
(ii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a tank car which does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph (e)(2), and was authorized for the material poisonous by inhalation under the regulations in effect on June 30, 1996, may continue in use until July 1, 2006.
(f) Special requirements for hazardous substances. (1) A tank car used for a hazardous substance listed in paragraph (f)(2) of this section must have a tank test pressure of at least 13.8 Bar (200 psi), head protection and a metal jacket, except that—
(i) No metal jacket is required if—
(A) The tank test pressure is 23.4 Bar (340 psi) or higher; or
(B) The tank shell and heads are manufactured from AAR steel specification TC-128, normalized;
(ii) A higher test pressure is required if otherwise specified in this subchapter; and
(iii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a tank car which does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph (f)(1), and was authorized for a hazardous substance under the regulations in effect on June 30, 1996, may continue in use until July 1, 2006.
(2) List of hazardous substances. Hazardous substances for which the provisions of this paragraph (f) apply are as follows:
Aldrin
Allyl chloride
alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC
gamma-BHC
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlordane
p-Chloroaniline
Chlorobenzene
Chlorobenzilate
p-Chloro-m-cresol
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether
Chloroform
2-Chloronapthalene
o-Chlorophenol
3-Chloropropionitrile
DDE
DDT
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane
m-Dichlorobenzene
o-Dichlorobenzene
p-Dichlorobenzene
3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine
1,4-Dichloro-2-butene
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene
Dichloroisopropyl ether
Dichloromethane @
2,4-Dichlorophenol
2,6-Dichlorophenol
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,3-Dichloropropene
Dieldrin
alpha-Endosulfan
beta-Endosulfan
Endrin
Endrin aldehyde
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Hexachloroethane
Hexachlorophene
Hexachloropropene
Isodrin
Kepone
Methoxychlor
4,4′-Methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
Methylene bromide
Pentachlorobenzene
Pentachloroethane
Pentachloronitrobenzene (PCNB)
Pentachlorophenol
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)
Pronamide
Silvex (2,4,5-TP)
2,4,5-T
TDE
1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD)
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol
Toxaphene
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Trichloroethylene
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
Tris(2,3-dibromopropyl) phosphate
[Amdt. 173-245, 60 FR 49072, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-245, 61 FR 33254, June 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996]
§ 173.32
Qualification, maintenance and use of portable tanks other than Specification IM portable tanks.
(a) Except as otherwise provided in this section, each portable tank used for the transportation of hazardous materials must conform to the requirements of the specification and regulations for the transportation of the particular commodity. Except for Specification 56 and 57 portable tanks, a manufacturer's data report of the portable tank must be procured and retained in the files of the owner during the time that such portable tank is used for such service.
(1) When a portable tank container is used as a cargo tank container, it shall conform to all the requirements prescribed for cargo tank containers. (See § 173.33)
(2) [Reserved]
(3) Each uninsulated portable tank used for the transportation of compressed gases, as defined in § 173.115, must have an exterior surface finish conforming to § 178.245-1(c) of this subchapter.
(4) No portable tank or specification 106A or 110A tank containing a hazardous material may be offered for transportation aboard a passenger vessel unless:
(i) The vessel is operating under a change to its character of vessel certification as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter; and
(ii) The material is permitted to be transported aboard a passenger vessel in § 172.101 of this subchapter.
(5) Where IM-101 and IM-102 portable tanks are prescribed, Specification 51 portable tanks otherwise conforming to the special commodity requirements of § 172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter may be used.
(6) A DOT 51 portable tank may be used where DOT 56 or DOT 57 type portable tanks or DOT 60 portable tanks are authorized. A DOT 60 portable tank may be used where DOT 56 or DOT 57 type portable tanks are authorized. A higher integrity tank used instead of a specified portable tank must meet the same design profile; e.g., a DOT 51 portable tank must be lined if used instead of a lined DOT 60 portable tank.
(b) Any portable tank container constructed prior to May 15, 1950, complying with the requirements of either the A. S. M. E. Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1946 Edition, or the A. P. I.-A. S. M. E. Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1943 Edition, may be used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gas, provided it fulfills all the requirements of this part and specifications for the particular gas or gases to be transported therein and shall be marked “ICC Specification 51X” on the plate required by the specification, except as modified by any or all of the following:
(1) Tanks designed and constructed in accordance with Pars. U-68, U-69, or U-201 of the A. S. M. E. Code may be used. Tanks designed and constructed in accordance with Par. U-68 or U-69 may be re-rated at a working pressure 25 percent in excess of the design pressure for which the tank was originally constructed. If advantage is taken of the increased rating, the re-rated pressure shall be marked on the plate as follows:

Re-rated working pressure—psig

Note 1:
For purposes of setting safety relief valves, pressure control valves and establishing retest pressure, and for purposes of establishing maximum and minimum design pressures, the re-rated working pressure shall be considered as the equivalent of the design pressure as defined in the specification.
(2) Loading and unloading accessories, valves, piping, fittings, safety and gauging devices, do not have to comply with the requirements for the particular location on the tank.
(3) Specification requirements as to stress-relieving and radiographing are waived.
(c) Any portable tank container of ICC Specification 50 1
fulfilling the requirements of that specification may be continued in service for transportation of a liquefied petroleum gas if it is retested every five years in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (e)(3) and (4) of this section: Provided, That it is in and can be maintained in safe operating condition for the transportation of that gas. In this case the container may retain its original markings.
1 Use of existing portable tanks authorized, but new construction not authorized.
(d) Use of Specification 52, 53, 56 and 57 portable tanks. Continued use of an existing portable tank constructed to DOT Specification 52 or 53 is authorized only for a tank constructed before June 1, 1972. Continued use of an existing portable tank constructed to DOT Specification 56 or 57 is authorized only for a tank constructed before October 1, 1996. A stainless steel portable tank internally lined with polyethylene, which was constructed on or before October 1, 1996, and complies with all requirements of Specification 57 except that it is equipped with a polypropylene discharge ball valve and polypropylene secondary discharge opening closure, may be marked as a Specification 57 portable tank and used in accordance with the provisions of this section.
(e) Retest. Each portable tank used for the transportation of a hazardous material must be successfully retested before further use in accordance with the following:
(1) Schedule. Each tank must be retested as prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, in accordance with the following schedule:
(i) Specification 51 (§ 178.245 of this subchapter): At least once every 5 years.
(ii) Specifications 52, 53, 56 and 57 portable tanks (§§ 178.251, 178.252, 178.253 of this subchapter): At least once every 2.5 years.
(iii) Specification 60 (§ 178.255 of this subchapter): At the end of the first 4-year period after the original test; at least once every 2 years thereafter up to a total of 12 years of service; and at least once annually thereafter. Retesting is not required on a rubber-lined tank except before each relining.
(iv) Any other portable tank authorized by this part for transportation of compressed gases (including liquefied compressed gases): At least once every 5 years.
(2) Test procedures. Unless otherwise specified, each tank must be retested in accordance with the following test procedures:
(i) Pressure. Each Specification 60 tank must be retested in accordance with § 178.255-12 of this subchapter. Each Specification 57 tank must be leak tested by a minimum sustained air pressure of at least three pounds per square inch gage applied to the entire tank. Any other tank must be tested by a minimum pressure (air or hydrostatic) of at least 2 pounds per square inch gage or at least one and one-half times the design pressure (maximum allowable working pressure, or re-rated pressure) of the tank, whichever is greater. During each air pressure test, the entire surface of all joints under pressure must be coated with or immersed in a solution of soap and water, heavy oil, or other material suitable for the purpose of detecting leaks. The pressure must be held for a period of time sufficiently long to assure detection of leaks. During the air or hydrostatic test, relief devices may be removed, but all the closure fittings must be in place and the relief device openings plugged. Lagging need not be removed from a lagged tank if it is possible to maintain the required test pressure at constant temperature with the tank disconnected from the source of pressure.
(ii) Visual. While under the test pressure, the tank must be visually inspected for leakage, defective fittings and welds, defective closures, significant dents, and other defects or abnormalities which indicate a potential or actual weakness that could render the tank unsafe for the transportation of a hazardous material.
(iii) Rejection criteria. A tank fails to meet the requirements of the pressure test if, during the test, there is permanent distortion of the tank exceeding that permitted by the applicable specification, if there is any leakage, or if any deficiencies described in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section are found. Any tank that fails must be rejected and may not be used again for the transportation of a hazardous material unless the tank is adequately repaired and thereafter a successful test is conducted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
(3) Marking. The date of the most recent periodic retest must be marked on the tank, on or near the metal certification plate. Marking must be in accordance with § 178.3 of this subchapter.
(4) Records. The owner of the tank or his authorized agent must retain a written record indicating the date and results of all required tests and the name and address of the tester, until the next retest has been satisfactorily completed and recorded.
(5) A portable tank for which the prescribed retest or reinspection under paragraph (e)(1) of this section has become due may not be filled and offered for transportation until the retest or reinspection has been successfully completed. This paragraph does not apply to any tank filled prior to the test due date.
(f) Special tanks. Each portable tank authorized by this part including each exemption tank (other than a tank covered by paragraph (e)(1)(iv) of this section) which is not in compliance with one of the specifications listed in paragraph (e) of this section, must be tested in accordance with the procedures prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section for the type of portable tank most nearly equivalent in design and usage. A tank constructed in accordance with paragraph U-68 or U-69 of previous editions of the ASME Code, and which has not been re-rated, must be hydrostatically retested at twice the design pressure instead of the one and one-half times prescribed in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this section.
(g) Deteriorated tanks. Without regard to any other retest requirements, any tank that shows evidence at any time of significant dents, corroded areas, leakage, or other conditions that indicate weakness which could render the tank unsafe for the transportation of a hazardous material, must be retested as prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(h) Damaged tanks. Any tank that has been in an accident and that has been damaged to an extent that may adversely affect its product retention capability, must be retested as prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(i) Unused tanks. Any tank that has not been used to transport a hazardous material for a period of 1 year or more may not be returned to hazardous materials service until it has been tested successfully in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(j) The Department may require the testing under prescribed conditions of any tank when probable cause appears for suspecting that such tank is in unsafe operating condition.
(k) The repair of tanks is authorized, provided such repairs are made under requirements prescribed in the “Code” for the original design and construction.
(1) In addition to any other provisions of the specification, no tank shall be repaired, or remodeled, as to cause leakage or cracks or likelihood of leakage or cracks, by areas of stress concentration due to shrinkage of cooling metal in welding operations, sharp fillets, reversal of stresses, or otherwise.
(2) No field welding shall be done except to non-pressure parts.
(l) The bursting strength of any piping and fittings shall be not less than four times the design pressure of the tank, and not less than four times that pressure to which, in any instance, it may be subjected in service, by the action of a pump or other device (not including safety relief valves) the action of which may be to subject certain portions of the tank piping to pressures greater than the design pressure of the tank.
(1) Pipe joints shall be threaded, welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is used, the pipe and pipe fittings must not be lighter than (Schedule 80) weight. Nonmalleable metals must not be used in the construction of valves or fittings. Where copper tubing is permitted, joints must be brazed or be of equally strong metal union type. The melting point of brazing material may not be lower than 1000 °F. The method of joining tubing must not decrease the strength of the tubing such as by the cutting of threads.
(2) Fittings shall be extra heavy. Non-malleable metals shall not be employed in the construction of valves or fittings.
(3) Suitable provision shall be made in every case to allow for expansion, contraction, jarring and vibration of all pipe. Slip joints shall not be used for this purpose.
(4) Piping and fittings shall be grouped in the smallest practicable space and shall be protected from damage as required by the specification.
(5) All piping, valves and fittings on every tank shall be leakage tested with gas or air after installation and proved tight at not less than the design pressure of the tank on which they are used. In the event of replacement, all such piping, valves, or fittings so replaced shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this section before the tank is returned to transportation service. The requirements of this section shall apply with equal force to all hose used on such tanks, except that such hose may be so tested either before or after installation on the tank.
(m) All materials of construction used in portable tank containers and their appurtenances shall not be subject to destructive attack by the contents of the tank.
(1) All parts of tanks and appurtenances for anhydrous ammonia shall be steel. No copper, silver, zinc, nor their alloys shall be permitted. Brazed joints shall not be permitted.
(2) [Reserved]
(n) Each outlet of portable tanks used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gases, except carbon dioxide, shall be provided with a suitable automatic excess-flow valve. These valves shall be located inside the tank or at a point outside the tank where the line enters or leaves the tank. The valve seat shall be located inside the tank or shall be located within a welded flange or its companion flange, or within a nozzle or within a coupling. The installation shall be made in such a manner as reasonably to assure that any undue strain which causes failure requiring functioning of the valve shall cause failure in such a manner that it will not impair the operation of the valve.
Exception. Safety device connections and liquid level gauging devices which are so constructed that the outward flow of tank contents shall not exceed that passed by a No. 54 drill size opening are not required to be equipped with excess-flow valves.
(1) Excess-flow valves shall close automatically at the rated flows of gas or liquid as specified by the valve manufacturer. The connections or lines on each side of the excess-flow valve, including valves, fittings, etc., shall have a greater capacity than the rated flow of the excess-flow valve.
(2) Excess-flow valves may be designed with a by-pass, not to exceed a No. 60 drill size opening, to allow equalization of pressures.
(3) Filling and discharge lines shall be provided with manually operated shut-off valves located as close to the tank as is practicable. The use of so-called “Stop-Check” valves to satisfy with one valve the requirements of this paragraph and of paragraph (n) of this section, is forbidden.
(o) Each tank for carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide shall be lagged with a suitable insulation material of such thickness that the overall thermal conductance is not more than 0.08 Btu per square foot per degree F. differential in temperature per hour. The conductance shall be determined at 60 °F. Insulation material used on tanks for nitrous oxide shall be noncombustible.
(p) A refrigerating and/or heating coil or coils may be installed in tanks for carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide. Such coils must be tested externally to at least the same pressure as the test pressure of the tank. The coils must also be tested internally to at least twice the working pressure of the heating or refrigerating system to be used but in no case less than the test pressure of the tank. Such coils shall be securely anchored. The refrigerant or heating medium to be circulated through the coil or coils must be such as to cause no adverse chemical reaction with the tank or tank contents in case of leakage.
(q) Maximum Lading Pressure. Prior to filling and offering a portable tank for transportation, the person must confirm that the portable tank conforms to the specification required for the lading and that the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of the portable tank is greater than or equal to the largest pressure obtained under the following conditions:
(1) For compressed gases and certain refrigerated liquids that are not cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in § 173.315 of this subchapter.
(2) For liquid hazardous materials not covered in paragraph (q)(1) of this section, the sum of the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C (115 °F), plus the tank static head exerted by the lading, plus any pressure exerted by the gas padding, including air in the ullage space.
(3) The pressure prescribed in subpart B, D, E, F, G, or H of this part, as applicable.
(4) The maximum pressure used to load or unload the lading.
(r) Unless otherwise specified, where a portable tank is authorized, minimum tank design pressure is 172 kPa (25 psig) for any Packing Group I or Packing Group II liquid lading that meets more than one hazard class definition.
(s) Any DOT specification portable tank manufactured prior to January 1, 1992 that is equipped with a non-reclosable pressure relief device can continue in service for the commodities for which it is authorized. Except for DOT Specification 56 and 57 portable tanks, any DOT specification portable tank manufactured after January 1, 1992 used for materials meeting the definition for Division 6.1 liquids, Packing Group I or II, Class 2 gases, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must be equipped with a reclosing pressure relief valve having adequately-sized venting capacity.
(t) Exemption portable tanks based on DOT 51 portable tanks. (1) The owner of a portable tank constructed in accordance with and used under an exemption issued prior to August 31, 1996, that was in conformance with the requirements for Specification DOT 51 portable tanks with the exception of the location of fill and discharge outlets, shall examine the portable tank and its design to determine if it meets the new outlet requirements contained in § 178.245-1(d) of this subchapter. If the owner determines that the portable tank is in compliance with all the requirements of § 178.245 of this subchapter, the exemption number stenciled on the portable tank shall be removed and the specification plate (or a plate placed adjacent to the specification plate) shall be durably marked “DOT 51—E*****” (where ***** is to be replaced by the exemption number).
(2) During the period the portable tank is in service, and for one year thereafter, the owner of the portable tank must retain on file at its principal place of business a copy of the last exemption in effect.
[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.32, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.32a
Approval of Specification IM portable tanks.
(a) Application for approval. (1) An owner or manufacturer of an IM portable tank (§§ 178.270 through 178.272 of this subchapter) shall apply for approval to any approval agency designated to approve that tank in accordance with the procedures in subpart E, part 107 of this chapter.
(2) Each application for approval must contain the following information:
(i) Three complete copies of all engineering drawings, calculations, and test data necessary to insure that the design complies with the relevant specification.
(ii) The manufacturer's serial number that will be assigned to each portable tank.
(iii) A statement as to whether the design type has been examined by any approval agency previously and judged unacceptable. Affirmative statements must be documented with the name of the approving agency, reason for nonacceptance, and the nature of modifications made to the design type.
(b) Action by approval agency. The approval agency shall:
(1) Review the application for approval to determine whether it is complete and conforms with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section. If an application is incomplete, it will be returned to the applicant and the applicant will be informed in what respects the application is incomplete.
(2) Review all drawings and calculations to ensure that the design is in compliance with all requirements of the relevant specification. If the application is approved, one set of the approved drawings, calculations, and test data shall be returned to the applicant. The second and third (inspector's copy) sets of approved drawings, calculations, and test data shall be retained by the approval agency.
(3) Witness all tests required in § 178.270-13 of this subchapter.
(4) Ensure, through appropriate inspection that each IM portable tank is fabricated in all respects in conformance with the approved drawings, calculations, and test data; and
(5) Upon successful completion of all requirements of this subpart, the approval agency shall:
(i) Apply its name, identifying mark or identifying number, and the date upon which the approval was issued, to the metal identification plate required by § 178.270-14 of this subchapter.
(ii) Issue an approval certificate for each IM portable tank or, in the case of a series of identical tanks manufactured to a single design, for the series of IM portable tanks. The approval certificate must include all the information required to be displayed on the required metal identification plate.
(c) Disposition of approval certificates. A copy of each approval certificate must be retained by the approval agency and by the owner of each IM portable tank.
(d) Denial of application for approval. If an approval agency finds that an IM portable tank cannot be approved for any reason, it shall so notify the applicant in writing and shall provide the applicant with the reasons for which the approval is denied. An applicant aggrieved by a decision of an approval agency may appeal the decision in writing within 90 days of receipt to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(e) [Reserved]
(f) Approval of other existing IM portable tanks. Portable tanks constructed on or before May 1, 1981, that have not operated under a DOT exemption must be approved in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section.
(g) Modifications to approved portable tanks. (1) Prior to modification of any approved portable tank which may affect conformance to § 178.271 or § 178.272 of this subchapter, the owner or manufacturer desiring to make such modification shall inform the approval agency that issued the initial approval of the portable tank (or if unavailable another approval agency) of the nature of the modification and request approval of the modification. The owner or manufacturer shall supply the approval agency with three sets of all revised drawings, calculations, and test data relative to the intended modification.
(2) A statement as to whether the intended modification has been examined by any approval agency previously and judged unacceptable. An affirmative statement must be documented with the name of the approving agency, the reason for nonacceptance, and the nature of changes made to the modification since its original rejection.
(3) The approval agency shall review the request for modification, and if it is determined that the proposed modification is in full compliance with the relevant DOT specification the request shall be approved and the approval agency shall:
(i) Return one set of the approved revised drawings, calculations, and test data to the applicant. The second and third sets of the approved revised drawings, calculations, and test data shall be retained by the approval agency as required in § 107.404(a)(3) of this chapter.
(ii) Ensure through appropriate inspection, that all modifications conform to the revised drawings, calculations, and test data.
(iii) Determine the extent to which retesting of the modified tank is necessary based on the nature of the proposed modification, and ensure that all required retests are performed in accordance with § 178.270-13 of this subchapter.
(iv) If modification to an approved tank alters any information on the approval certificate, issue a new approval certificate for the modified tank and ensure that any necessary changes are made to the metal identification plate. A copy of each newly issued approval certificate shall be retained by the approval agency and by the owner of each portable tank.
(4) If it determined that the proposed modification is not in compliance with the relevant DOT specification, the request shall be denied. The procedures of paragraph (d) of this section apply to such denial.
(h) Termination of Approval Certificate. (1) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may terminate an approval issued under this section if he determines that:
(i) Information upon which the approval was based is fraudulent or substantially erroneous; or
(ii) Termination of the approval is necessary to adequately protect against risks to life and property.
(iii) The approval was not issued by the approval agency in good faith.
(2) Before an approval is withdrawn, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety gives the owner or manufacturer and the approval agency:
(i) Written notice of the facts or conduct believed to warrant the withdrawal;
(ii) Opportunity to submit oral and written evidence, and
(iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or achieve compliance with the application requirement.
(3) If the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety determines that a certificate of approval must be withdrawn to preclude a significant and imminent adverse affect on public safety, he shall withdraw the certificate of approval issued by a designated approval agency. In such circumstances, the procedures of paragraphs (h)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section need not be provided prior to withdrawal of the approval, but shall be provided as soon as practicable thereafter.
[Amdt. 173-144, 46 FR 9890, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 173-185, 50 FR 11052, Mar. 19, 1985; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996]
§ 173.32b
Periodic testing and inspection of Specification IM portable tanks.
(a) Periodic testing—(1) Hydrostatic test. Each Specification IM portable tank (§§ 178.270, 178.271 and 178.272 of this subchapter) and all piping, valves and accessories, except pressure-relief devices, shall be hydrostatically tested with water, or other liquid of similar density and viscosity, to a pressure not less than 150 percent of its maximum allowable working pressure. Testing shall be at intervals of not more than five years. While under pressure the tank shall be inspected, for leakage, distortion, or any other condition which might render the tank unsafe for service. The hydrostatic test shall be witnessed by an approval agency. Any damage or deficiency which might render the portable tank unsafe for service shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the witnessing approval agency and the tank hydrostatically retested. Upon successful completion of the hydrostatic test, the witnessing approval agency shall apply its name, identifying mark or identifying number and the date of the test on the tank as described in paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) Pressure relief valves. Spring loaded pressure relief valves must be removed from the tank and tested at intervals of not more than two and one-half years.
(b) Visual inspection. Each portable tank and all piping, valves and accessories shall be visually inspected at intervals not exceeding two and one-half years. The inspection shall be conducted by an owner or his agent or by an approval agency, except that it must be conducted by an approval agency coincident with each hydrostatic test required by paragraph (a) of this section. In the case of insulated tanks, insulation need not be removed if, in the opinion of the person performing the visual inspection, external corrosion is likely to be negligible. If evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank may not be returned to service until such condition has been corrected to the satisfaction of the person performing the inspection. The inspection shall include the following:
(1) The tank shall be carefully inspected internally for corroded areas, dents, distortions, defects in welds, and other conditions that might render the tank unsafe for service;
(2) The piping, valves, and gaskets shall be carefully inspected for corroded areas, defects in welds, and other conditions, including leakage, that might render the tank unsafe for service;
(3) Devices for tightening manhole covers must be operative and there must be no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets.
(4) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange must be replaced or tightened.
(5) All emergency devices and valves must be free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation.
(6) Required markings on the tank must be legible.
(7) Upon successful completion of the visual reinspection, the inspector shall mark the date of the visual reinspection on the tank as described in paragraph (d) of this section.
(c) International shipments. A portable tank that meets the definition of “container” in § 450.3(a)(3) of this title may not be offered for international transport unless the frame work, tank supports and lifting attachments fully comply with all applicable requirements of parts 450—453 of this title.
(d) Test date marking. The month and year of the last hydrostatic test, the identification markings of the approval agency witnessing the test, and the date of the last visual inspection must be durably and legibly marked on or near the metal identification plate in letters not less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high when on the metal identification plate and 32 mm (1.25 inches) high when on the tank.
(e) Damaged or deteriorated portable tanks. Without regard to any other test requirement, any tank that shows evidence at any time of damaged or corroded areas, leakage, or other deterioration that indicates a weakness that could render the tank unsafe for service, must be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section prior to reuse. Pressure relief devices need not be tested or replaced unless there is reason to believe the relief devices have been affected by the damage or deterioration.
(f) Record retention. The owner of each portable tank or his authorized agent shall retain a written record of the date and results of all required tests, (including visual inspections), and the name and address of the person performing the test, until the next retest has been satisfactorily completed and recorded.
[Amdt. 173-144, 46 FR 9891, Jan. 29, 1981]
§ 173.32c
Use of Specification IM portable tanks.
(a) No person may offer a hazardous material for transportation in an IM portable tank except as authorized by this subchapter.
(b) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, an IM portable tank may not be used for the transportation of a hazardous material unless it meets the requirements of this subchapter.
(c) An IM portable tank for which the prescribed periodic retest or reinspection under § 173.32b of this subchapter has become due may not be filled and offered for shipment until the retest or reinspection has been successfully completed. This paragraph does not apply to any tank filled prior to the test due date.
(d) Prior to filling, each IM portable tank shall be given a complete external inspection. Any unsafe condition must be corrected prior to its use. The external inspection shall include:
(1) A visual inspection of:
(i) The shell, piping, valves and other appurtenances for corroded areas, dents, defects in welds and other defects such as missing, damaged, or leaking gaskets;
(ii) All flanged connections or blank flanges for missing or loose nuts and bolts;
(iii) All emergency devices for corrosion, distortion, or any damage or defect that could prevent their normal operation; and
(iv) All required markings on the tank for legibility.
(2) An inspection to determine that any device for tightening manhole covers is operative and adequate to prevent leakage at the manhole cover.
(e) A hazardous material may not be loaded in an IM portable tank if the part of the tank or any of its appurtenances having contact with the material during transportation would be subject to destructive attack by or a dangerous reaction with the material.
(f) A hazardous material may not be loaded in an IM portable tank unless it has pressure relief devices providing total relieving capacity meeting the requirements of § 178.270-11(d) of this subchapter.
(g) A hazardous material may not be loaded in an IM portable tank with filling or discharge connections located below the normal liquid level of the tank unless:
(1) Each filling or discharge connection located below the normal liquid level of the tank has at least two serially-mounted closures consisting of an internal discharge valve and a bolted blank flange or other suitable, liquid-tight closure on each filling or discharge connection; or
(2) When this paragraph (g)(2) is specified for a hazardous material through § 172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter, each filling or discharge connection located below the normal liquid level of the tank, or compartment thereof, has three serially-mounted closures consisting of an internal discharge valve capable of being closed from a location remote from the valve itself, an external valve, and a bolted blank flange or other suitable, liquid-tight closure on the outlet side of the external valve.
(h) Except during a hydrostatic test, an IM portable tank may not be subjected to a pressure greater than its maximum allowable working pressure.
(i) An IM portable tank may not be loaded to a gross weight greater than the maximum allowable gross weight specified on its identification plate.
(j) Except for a non-flowable solid, an IM portable tank or compartment thereof having a volume greater than 7,500 L may not be loaded to a filling density less than 80 percent by volume.
(k) The outage for an IM portable tank may not be less than 2 percent at a temperature of 122 °F (50 °C).
(l) Each tell-tale indicator for the space between a frangible disc and a safety relief valve mounted in series must be checked after the tank is filled and prior to transportation to ensure that the frangible disc is leak free. Any leakage through the frangible disc must be corrected prior to offering the tank for transportation. The tell-tale device must be designed to prevent the loss of any hazardous material through the device itself while the tank is in transportation.
(m) An IM portable tank containing a hazardous material may not be loaded on a highway or rail transport vehicle unless loaded entirely within the horizontal outline thereof, without overhang or projection of any part of the tank assembly. In addition, for unloading an IM portable tank, see § 177.834(h) of this subchapter.
(n) Specifications IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks used for the transportation of flammable liquids via rail may not be fitted with nonreclosing pressure relief devices except in series with spring loaded pressure relief valves.
(o) An IM 101 tank may be used whenever an IM 102 tank is authorized provided it meets the requirements for pressure relief devices, bottom outlets and any other special provisions specified for the IM 102 tank in § 172.102 of this subchapter.
(p) Any IM 101 or IM 102 portable tank certified by an approval agency prior to January 1, 1992, that is equipped with a non-reclosable pressure relief device may continue in service for the commodities for which it is authorized. Any IM 101 and IM 102 portable tank certified after January 1, 1992, used for materials meeting the definition for Division 6.1 liquids, Packing Group I or II, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must be equipped with a reclosing pressure relief valve having adequately-sized venting capacity.
(q) If the hazardous material being transported is in a molten state, the tank must be thermally insulated by completely covering it with at least 100 mm (3.94 inches) of cork or other suitable insulation material of sufficient thickness that the overall thermal conductance is not more than 0.080 Btu per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit differential.
(r) Hazardous materials authorized for transport in a tank fitted with bottom outlets having two serially mounted closures are also authorized for transport in a tank fitted with three serially mounted closures and in tanks fitted with no bottom outlets. Similarly, hazardous materials authorized for transport in tanks fitted with bottom outlets having three serially mounted closures are also authorized for transport in tanks fitted with no bottom outlets.
[Amdt. 173-144, 46 FR 9892, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52616 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]
§ 173.33
Hazardous materials in cargo tank motor vehicles.
(a) General requirements. (1) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in a cargo tank motor vehicle except as authorized by this subchapter.
(2) Two or more materials may not be loaded or accepted for transportation in the same cargo tank motor vehicle if, as a result of any mixture of the materials, an unsafe condition would occur, such as an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure or heat, or the release of toxic vapors.
(3) No person may fill and offer for transportation a specification cargo tank motor vehicle for which the prescribed periodic retest or reinspection under subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter is past due until the retest or inspection has been successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to a cargo tank supplied by a motor carrier who is other than the person offering the hazardous material for transportation (see § 180.407(a)(1) of this subchapter), or to any cargo tank filled prior to the retest or inspection due date.
(b) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded in a cargo tank if during transportation any part of the tank in contact with the hazardous material lading would have a dangerous reaction with the hazardous material.
(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded with a hazardous material that will have an adverse effect on the tank's integrity or—
(i) May combine chemically with any residue or contaminants in the tank to produce an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure, release of toxic vapors or other unsafe condition.
(ii)—(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) May severely corrode or react with the tank material at any concentration and temperature that will exist during transportation.
(v) Is prohibited by § 173.21 or § 173.24 of this subchapter.
(3) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space of the tank.
(4) To prevent cargo tank rupture in a loading or unloading accident, the loading or unloading rate used must be less than or equal to that indicated on the cargo tank specification plate, except as specified in § 173.318(b)(6). If no loading or unloading rate is marked on the specification plate, the loading or unloading rate and pressure used must be limited such that the pressure in the tank may not exceed 130% of the MAWP.
(c) Maximum Lading Pressure. (1) Prior to loading and offering a cargo tank motor vehicle for transportation with material that requires the use of a specification cargo tank, the person must confirm that the cargo tank motor vehicle conforms to the specification required for the lading and that the MAWP of the cargo tank is greater than or equal to the largest pressure obtained under the following conditions:
(i) For compressed gases and certain refrigerated liquids that are not cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in § 173.315 of this subchapter.
(ii) For cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in § 173.318 of this subchapter.
(iii) For liquid hazardous materials loaded in DOT specification cargo tanks equipped with a 1 psig normal vent, the sum of the tank static head plus 1 psig. In addition, for hazardous materials loaded in these cargo tanks, the vapor pressure of the lading at 115 °F. must be not greater than 1 psig, except for gasoline transported in accordance with Special Provision B33 in § 172.102(c)(3) of this subchapter.
(iv) For liquid hazardous materials not covered in paragraph (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, the sum of the vapor pressure of the lading at 115 °F, plus the tank static head exerted by the lading, plus any pressure exerted by the gas padding, including air in the ullage space or dome.
(v) The pressure prescribed in subpart B, D, E, F, G, or H of this part, as applicable.
(vi) The maximum pressure in the tank during loading or unloading.
(2) Any Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 or MC 312, cargo tank motor vehicle with no marked design pressure or marked with a design pressure of 3 psig or less may be used for an authorized lading where the pressure derived from § 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to 3 psig. After December 31, 1990, a cargo tank may not be loaded and offered for transportation unless marked or remarked with an MAWP or design pressure in accordance with 49 CFR 180.405(k).
(3) Any Specification MC 310 or MC 311 cargo tank motor vehicle may be used for an authorized lading where the pressure derived from § 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the MAWP or MWP, respectively, as marked on the specification plate.
(4) Any cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995, marked with a design pressure rather than an MAWP may be used for an authorized lading where the largest pressure derived from § 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the design pressure marked on the cargo tank.
(5) Any material that meets the definition of a Division 6.1, Packing Group I or II (poisonous liquid) material must be loaded in a cargo tank motor vehicle having a MAWP of 25 psig or greater.
(d) Relief system. (1) Non-reclosing pressure relief devices are not authorized in any cargo tank except when in series with a reclosing pressure relief device. However, a cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995 which is fitted with non-reclosing pressure relief devices may continue to be used in any hazardous material service for which it is authorized. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo tanks.
(2) Each cargo tank motor vehicle used to transport a liquid hazardous material with a gas pad must have a pressure relief system that provides the venting capacity prescribed in § 178.345-10(e) of this subchapter. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo tanks.
(3) A cargo tank motor vehicle made to a specification listed in column 1 may have pressure relief devices or outlets conforming to the applicable specification to which the tank was constructed, or the pressure relief devices or outlets may be modified to meet the applicable requirement for the specification listed in column 2 without changing the markings on the tank specification plate. The venting capacity requirements of the original DOT cargo tank specification must be met whenever a pressure relief valve is modified.
Column 1 | Column 2
MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305 | MC 306 or DOT 406.
MC 306 | DOT 406.
MC 304 | MC 307 or DOT 407.
MC 307 | DOT 407.
MC 310, MC 311 | MC 312 or DOT 412.
MC 312 | DOT 412.
MC 330 | MC 331.
(e) Retention of hazardous materials in product piping during transportation. DOT specification cargo tanks used for the transportation of any material that is a Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) material, oxidizer liquid, liquid organic peroxide or corrosive liquid (corrosive to skin only) may not be transported with hazardous materials lading retained in the piping, unless the cargo tank motor vehicle is equipped with bottom damage protection devices meeting the requirements of § 178.337-10 or § 178.345-8(b) of this subchapter, or the accident damage protection requirements of the specification under which it was manufactured. This requirement does not apply to a residue which remains after the piping is drained. A sacrificial device (see § 178.345-1 of this subchapter) may not be used to satisfy the accident damage protection requirements of this paragraph.
(f) An MC 331 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT 406, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tanks are authorized. An MC 307, MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306 or DOT 406 type cargo tanks are authorized. A higher integrity tank used instead of a specified tank must meet the same design profile (for example, an MC 331 cargo tank must be lined if used in place of a lined MC 312 cargo tank.)
(g) Unless otherwise specified, where MC 307, MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 412 cargo tanks are authorized, minimum tank design pressure is 172.4 kPa (25 psig) for any Packing Group I or Packing Group II liquid lading that meets more than one hazard class definition.
(h) Each liquid or vapor discharge opening in an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank and each liquid filling and liquid discharge line in an MC 338 cargo tank must be provided with a remotely controlled internal self-closing stop valve, except when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is marked and used exclusively to transport carbon dioxide, or except when an MC 338 is used to transport argon, carbon dioxide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon. However, if the cargo tank motor vehicle was certified before January 1, 1995, this requirement is applicable only when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is used to transport a flammable liquid, flammable gas, hydrogen chloride (refrigerated liquid), or anhydrous ammonia; or when an MC 338 cargo tank is used to transport flammable ladings.
[Amdt. 173-212, 54 FR 25005, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37048, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52616 Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 173-212, 56 FR 27875, June 17, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-212, 58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 173-212, 59 FR 1786, Jan. 12, 1994; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-240, 59 FR 55172, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.34
Qualification, maintenance and use of cylinders.
(a) General qualification for use of cylinders. (See §§ 173.1 through 173.30 for requirements applying to all shipments.)
(1) No person may charge or fill a cylinder unless it is as specified in this part and part 178 of this subchapter. A cylinder that leaks, is bulged, has defective valves or safety devices, bears evidence of physical abuse, fire or heat damage, or detrimental rusting or corrosion, must not be used unless it is properly repaired and requalified as prescribed in these regulations.
(2) When cylinders with a marked pressure limit are prescribed, other cylinders made under the same specification but with a higher marked service pressure limit are authorized. For example, cylinders marked DOT-4B500 may be used where DOT-4B300 is specified.
(b) Grandfather clause. A cylinder in domestic use previous to the date upon which the specification therefor was first made effective in these regulations may be used if the cylinder has been properly tested and otherwise complies with the requirements applicable for the gas with which it is charged.
(c) Cylinder marking. Each required marking on a cylinder must be maintained so that it is legible. Retest markings and original markings which are becoming illegible may be reproduced by stamping on a metal plate which must be permanently secured to the cylinder.
(1) Additional information not affecting the markings prescribed in the applicable cylinder specification may be placed on the cylinder. No indentation may be made in the sidewall of the cylinder unless specifically permitted in the applicable specification.
(2) When the space originally provided for dates of subsequent retests becomes filled, the stamping of additional test dates into the external surface of the footring of a cylinder is authorized.
(3) Except for marked service pressure, markings required on cylinders may not be altered or removed. The marked service pressure may be changed only upon application to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety and receipt of written instructions as to the procedure to be followed. A service pressure change is not authorized for a cylinder which fails to pass the prescribed periodic hydrostatic retest, unless it is reheat treated and requalified in accordance with this section.
(d) Pressure relief device systems. No person may offer a cylinder charged with a compressed gas for transportation in commerce unless the cylinder is equipped with one or more pressure relief devices sized and selected as to type, location, and quantity and tested in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.1 (compliance with paragraph 9.1.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.1 is not required). The pressure relief device system must be capable of preventing rupture of the normally charged cylinder when subjected to a fire test conducted in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-14, or in the case of an acetylene cylinder, CGA Pamphlet C-12. Cylinders shall not be shipped with leaking safety relief devices. Safety relief devices must be tested for leaks before the charged cylinder is shipped from the cylinder filling plant; it is expressly forbidden to repair leaking fuse plug devices, where leak is through the fusible metal or between the fusible metal and the opening in the plug body, (except by removal of the device and replacement of the fusible metal.) Exceptions are as follows:
(1) Except as provided in paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (iii) of this section, a pressure relief device is not required on a cylinder 12 inches or less in length, exclusive of neck, and 41/2 inches or less in outside diameter.
(i) A pressure relief device is required on a specification 9, 39 (§ 178.65 of this subchapter), 40, or 41 cylinder. A metal pressure relief valve is required on a specification 39 cylinder used for a liquefied flammable gas. A fusible pressure relief device is not authorized on a specification 39 cylinder containing a liquefied compressed gas.
(ii) A pressure relief device is required on a cylinder charged with a liquefied gas for which this part requires a service pressure of 1800 psi or higher.
(iii) A pressure relief device is required on a cylinder charged with a nonliquefied gas to a pressure of 1,800 psi or higher at 70 °F.
(2) Except for a specification 39 cylinder and a cylinder used for acetylene in solution, a pressure relief device is not required on a cylinder charged with a nonliquefied gas under pressure of 300 psi or less at 70 °F.
(3) A pressure relief device is prohibited on a cylinder charged with a Division 2.3 or Division 6.1 material in Hazard Zone A.
(4) A pressure relief device is prohibited on a cylinder charged with fluorine.
(5) A pressure relief device is not required on a cylinder charged with methyl mercaptan; with mono-, di-, or trimethylamine, anhydrous; with not over 10 pounds of nitrosyl chloride; or with less than 165 pounds of anhydrous ammonia.
(6) Pressure relief devices, if used, must be in the vapor space of cylinders containing pyroforic liquids, inorganic or organic, n.o.s., covered by § 173.124.
(e) Periodic qualification and marking of cylinders. Each cylinder that becomes due for periodic retest as specified in the following table must be retested and marked in conformance with the requirements of this paragraph (e):
Retest and Inspection of Cylinders ^1
Specification under which cylinder was made ^2 | Minimum retest pressure (p.s.i.) ^3 | Retest period (years)
DOT-3 | 3,000 p.s.i | 5
DOT-3A, 3AA | 5/3 times service pressure, except non-corrosive service (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5, 10, or 12 (see § 173.34 (e)(14), (e)(12), (e)(16), and (e)(19))
DOT-3AL | 5/3 times service pressure | 5 or 12 (see (e)(19))
DOT-3AX, 3AAX | 5/3 times service pressure | 5
3B, 3BN | 2 times service pressure (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5 or 10 (see § 173.34(e)(12))
3C | Retest not required. |
3D | 5/3 times service pressure | 5
3E | Retest not required. |
3HT | 5/3 times service pressure | 3 (see § 173.34(e)(15))
3T | 5/3 times service pressure | 5
4 | 700 p.s.i | 10
4A | 5/3 times service pressure (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5 or 10 (see § 173.34(e)(12))
4AA480 | 2 times service pressure (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5 or 10 (see § 173.34(e)(14))
| 4B, 4BA, 4BW, 4B-240ET | 2 times service pressure, except non-corrosive service (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5, 10 or 12 (see § 173.34 (e)(11), (e)(12) and (e)(19))
4C | Retest not required. |
4D, 4DA, 4DS | 2 times service pressure | 5
DOT-4E | 2 times service pressure, except non-corrosive service (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5
4L | Retest not required. |
8, 8AL | | 10 or 20 (see § 173.34(e)(18))
DOT-9 | 400 p.s.i. (maximum 600 p.s.i.) | 5
25 | 500 p.s.i | 5
26 for filling at over 450 p.s.i | 5/3 times service pressure | 5
26 for filling at 450 p.s.i. and below | 2 times service pressure, except non-corrosive service (see § 173.34(e)(13)) | 5 or 10 (see § 173.34(e)(11))
33 | 800 p.s.i | 5
38 | 500 p.s.i | 5
Exemption cylinder | See current exemption | See current exemption
Foreign cylinder (see § 173.301(j) for restrictions on use) | As marked on the cylinder, but not less than 5/3 of any service or working pressure marking | 5
^1 Any cylinder not exceeding two inches outside diameter and less than two feet in length is excepted from hydrostatic retest.
^2 A cylinder in chlorine or sulfur dioxide service made before April 20, 1915, must be retested at 500 psi.
^3 For cylinders not marked with a service pressure, see § 173.301(e)(1).
(1) General requirements. (i) Each cylinder bearing a DOT specification marking (including a cylinder remarked in conformance with § 173.23) must be inspected, retested and marked in conformance with this section, at the frequency specified in the Retest and Inspection of Cylinders Table in this paragraph (e). Each cylinder bearing a DOT exemption number must be inspected, retested and marked in conformance with this section and the terms of the applicable exemption, at the frequency specified in the exemption.
(ii) No cylinder required to be retested by paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section may be charged or filled with a hazardous material and transported in commerce unless that cylinder has been inspected and retested in accordance with this section and the retester has marked the cylinder by stamping the date of retest, the cylinder retester identification number unless excepted under this section, and any other marking required by this section. No person may mark a test date or a retester identification number on a DOT specification or exemption cylinder unless all applicable requirements of this section have been met.
(2) Retester authorization. (i) No person may mark a cylinder with a test date or retester identification number, or otherwise represent that a DOT specification or exemption cylinder has been retested under this section, unless that person holds a current retester identification number issued by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Material Safety and operates in compliance with the terms of the retester identification number issuance letter. With the exception of visual inspections, all functions under this section must be performed or supervised by an individual named as qualified in the retester identification number application or a notification pursuant to paragraph (e)(2)(iv) of this section. A person is not required to obtain a retester identification number, if the person only performs visual inspections on DOT specification or exemption cylinders.
(ii) Any person seeking approval as a cylinder retester shall arrange for an independent inspection agency, approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Material Safety pursuant to § 173.300a, to inspect its retest facility. The person seeking approval shall bear the cost of the inspection. Independent inspection agencies are not RSPA agents or representatives. A list of approved independent inspection agencies is available from the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, Office of Hazardous Materials Exemptions and Approvals (DHM-32), Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Assistance in obtaining an approval may be requested from the same address.
(A) After the inspection, the person seeking approval must submit a letter of recommendation and inspection report from the independent inspection agency and a completed request for approval to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety at the address listed in this paragraph (e)(2)(ii). An applicant must include the following information: company name; facility location; mailing address (if different from location of facility); business telephone number; name of facility manager; the DOT specification/exemption cylinders that will be tested at the facility; a certification that the facility will operate in compliance with the applicable requirements of this subchapter, the date and an authorized signature.
(B) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety reviews the application, the inspection report and recommendation submitted by the independent inspection agency, and other available information. The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety issues a retester identification number upon a finding that the applicant's facility and qualifications are adequate to properly inspect, test and mark cylinders under this section. Unless otherwise provided in the retester identification number issuance letter, a retester identification number expires five years from the date of issuance.
(iii) An approved retester shall apply for retester identification number renewal in a timely manner. A new inspection report and recommendation of an independent inspection agency are required for each renewal. If the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety receives a renewal application with the accompanying inspection report and recommendation at least 50 days before expiration of the retester identification number, the retester identification number remains in effect until the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety issues a renewal or notifies the retester that its request for renewal of the retester identification number is denied. The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety considers renewal of a retester identification number in accordance with the standard in paragraph (e)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
(iv) The retester identification number holder shall report in writing any change in its name, address, ownership, testing equipment, or management or personnel performing any function under this section, to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety (DHM-32) within 20 days of the change. A retester identification number remains valid only if the retester's facility and qualifications are maintained at or above the level observed at the time of inspection by the independent inspection agency.
(v) A retester shall maintain, at each location at which it inspects, retests or marks cylinders under this section:
(A) Current copies of those portions of this subchapter that apply to its cylinder inspection, retesting and marking activities at that location.
(B) Current copies of all exemptions governing exemption cylinders inspected, retested or marked by the retester at that location.
(C) Copies of each CGA pamphlet incorporated by reference in § 171.7 of this subchapter that applies to the retester's cylinder inspection, retesting and marking activities at that location. The publication maintained must be the edition incorporated by reference in § 171.7 of this subchapter.
(3) Visual inspection. Except as otherwise provided in this section, each time a cylinder is retested, it must be visually inspected, internally and externally, in accordance with CGA Pamphlets C-6, C-6.1, C-6.2, or C-6.3, as applicable. The cylinder must be approved, rejected or condemned according to the criteria in the applicable CGA pamphlet. Internal inspection may be omitted for cylinders of the type and in the service described under paragraph (e)(13) of this section. DOT 3BN cylinders must be inspected in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6.
(4) Pressure retest. (i) Unless otherwise provided, each cylinder required to be retested under this section must be retested by means suitable for measuring the expansion of the cylinder under pressure. Bands and other removable attachments must be loosened or removed before testing so that the cylinder is free to expand in all directions.
(ii) The pressure-indicating device of the testing apparatus must permit reading of pressures to within 1% of the minimum prescribed test pressure of each cylinder tested, except that for an analog device, interpolation to 1/2 of the marked gauge divisions is acceptable. The expansion-indicating device of the testing apparatus must also permit incremental reading of the cylinder expansion to 1% of the total expansion of each cylinder tested or 0.1 cubic centimeter, whichever is larger. Midpoint visual interpolation is permitted.
(iii) Each day before retesting, the retester shall confirm, by using a calibrated cylinder or other method authorized in writing by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety that:
(A) The pressure-indicating device, as part of the retest apparatus, is accurate within ±1.0% of the prescribed test pressure of any cylinder tested that day. The pressure indicating device, itself, must be certified as having an accuracy of ±0.5%, or better, of its full range, and must permit readings of pressure from 90%-110% of the minimum prescribed test pressure of the cylinder to be tested. The accuracy of the pressure indicating device within the test system can be demonstrated at any point within 500 psi of the actual test pressure for test pressures at or above 3000 psi, or 10% of the actual test pressure for test pressures below 3000 psi; and
(B) The expansion-indicating device, as part of the retest apparatus, gives a stable reading of expansion and is accurate to ±1.0% of the total expansion of any cylinder tested or 0.1 cubic centimeter, whichever is larger. The expansion-indicating device itself must have an accuracy of ±0.5%, or better, of its full scale.
(iv) The test equipment must be verified to be accurate within ±1.0% of the calibrated cylinder's pressure and corresponding expansion values. This may be accomplished by bringing the pressure to a value shown on the calibration certificate for the calibrated cylinder used and verifying that the resulting total expansion is within ±1.0% of the total expansion shown on the calibration certificate. Alternatively, calibration may be demonstrated by bringing the total expansion to a known value on the calibration certificate for the calibrated cylinder used and verifying that the resulting pressure is within ±1.0% of the pressure shown on the calibration certificate. The calibrated cylinder must show no permanent expansion. The retester shall demonstrate calibration in conformance with this paragraph (e)(4) to an authorized inspector on any day that it retests cylinders. A retester shall maintain calibrated cylinder certificates in conformance with paragraph (e)(8)(iii) of this section.
(v) Minimum test pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds, and as long as necessary for complete expansion of the cylinder. A system check may be performed at or below 90% of test pressure prior to the retest. In the case of a malfunction of the test equipment, the test may be repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psi, whichever is less. This paragraph (e)(4) does not authorize retest of a cylinder otherwise required to be condemned under paragraph (e)(6) of this section.
(5) Cylinder rejection. (i) A retester shall reject a cylinder when on visual inspection, it meets a rejection standard in CGA Pamphlets C-6, C-6.1, C-6.2, or C-6.3, as applicable.
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section, a cylinder that is rejected may not be marked as meeting the requirements of this section.
(iii) When a cylinder is rejected, the retester shall notify the cylinder owner, in writing, that the cylinder has been rejected and, unless requalified as provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section, may not be filled with a hazardous material for transportation in commerce where use of a specification packaging is required.
(iv) A rejected cylinder with a service pressure of less than 900 psig may be requalified and marked if the cylinder is repaired or rebuilt and subsequently reinspected and retested in conformance with—
(A) CGA Pamphlets C-6, C-6.1, C-6.2, or C-6.3, as applicable;
(B) Parts 173 and 178 of this subchapter;
(C) Any exemption specific to that cylinder; and
(D) Any approval required under paragraphs (i) and (l) of this section.
(6) Cylinder condemnation. (i) A cylinder must be condemned when—
(A) On inspection, it meets a condition for condemnation in CGA Pamphlets C-6, C-6.1, C-6.2, or C-6.3, as applicable;
(B) The cylinder leaks through its wall;
(C) Evidence of cracking exists to the extent that the cylinder is likely to be weakened appreciably;
(D) For a DOT specification cylinder other than a DOT 4E aluminum cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds 10 percent of total expansion;
(E) For a DOT 4E aluminum cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds 12 percent of total expansion;
(F) For a DOT exemption cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds the limit in the applicable exemption, or the cylinder meets another criterion for condemnation in the applicable exemption; or
(G) For a DOT specification 3HT cylinder, elastic expansion exceeds the marked rejection elastic expansion.
(ii) When a cylinder is required to be condemned, the retester shall stamp a series of X's over the DOT specification number and the marked service pressure or stamp “CONDEMNED” on the shoulder, top head, or neck using a steel stamp. Alternatively, at the direction of the owner, the retester may render the cylinder incapable of holding pressure.
(iii) When a cylinder is required to be condemned, the retester shall notify the cylinder owner, in writing, that the cylinder is condemned and may not be filled with hazardous material for transportation in commerce where use of a specification packaging is required.
(iv) A cylinder that is condemned may not be filled with hazardous material for transportation in commerce where use of a specification packaging is required and may not be marked as meeting the requirements of this section or any DOT exemption. No person may remove or obliterate the “CONDEMNED” marking.
(7) Retester markings. (i) Each cylinder passing retest must be marked with the retester's identification number set in a square pattern, between the month and year of the retest date, in characters not less than 1/8-inch high. The first character of the retester identification number must appear in the upper left corner of the square pattern; the second in the upper right; the third in the lower right, and the fourth in the lower left. Example: A cylinder retested in May 1994, and approved by a person who has been issued retester identification number “A123”, would be marked plainly and permanently into the metal of the cylinder in accordance with location requirements of the cylinder specification or on a metal plate permanently secured to the cylinder in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section:
(ii) Markings of previous tests may not be obliterated. A cylinder that is subject to the requirements of paragraph (e) (10), (11) (modified hydrostatic test only), (13) or (14) of this section is not required to be marked with a retester identification number. A cylinder requalified by the modified hydrostatic test method or external inspection must be marked after a retest or an inspection by stamping the date of retest or reinspection on the cylinder followed by the symbol “E” (external inspection) or “S” (modified hydrostatic test method) as appropriate. However, a cylinder subject to the requirements of § 173.301(j) may not be marked with a retester identification number. Variation from the marking requirement may be approved on written request to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(8) Recordkeeping. A retester shall maintain the following records at the retesting location, on paper or in a form from which a paper copy can be produced on request.
(i) Records of authority to inspect, retest and mark must be maintained, as follows:
(A) Current retester identification number issuance letter;
(B) If the retester identification number has expired and renewal is pending, a copy of the renewal request; and
(C) Copies of notifications to Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety required under paragraph (e)(2)(iv) of this section.
(ii) Daily records of visual inspection and hydrostatic retest must be maintained until either the expiration of the retest period or until the cylinder is again reinspected or retested, whichever occurs first. A single date may be used for each retest sheet, provided each retest on the sheet was conducted on that date. Ditto marks or a solid vertical line may be used to indicate repetition of the preceding entry for the following entries: date; actual dimensions or a symbol; if present, manufacturer's name or symbol; if present, owner's name or symbol and retest operator. Blank spaces may not be used to indicate repetition of a prior entry. Records must include—
(A) For each test to demonstrate calibration, the date; serial number of the calibrated cylinder; calibration test pressure; total, elastic and permanent expansions; and legible identification of retest operator. The retest operator must be able to demonstrate that the results of the daily calibration verification correspond to the hydrostatic retests that were performed on that day. The daily verification of calibration(s) may be recorded on the same sheets as, and with, retest records for that date;
(B) For each cylinder retested or visually inspected, records containing the date; serial number; ICC/DOT specification or exemption number; service pressure; actual dimensions or a symbol; if present, manufacturer's name or symbol; if present, owner's name or symbol; result of visual inspection; actual test pressure; total, elastic and permanent expansions; percent permanent expansion; disposition, with reason for any repeated retest, rejection or condemnation; and legible identification of test operator. For each cylinder marked pursuant to § 173.302(c)(5), the retest sheet must indicate the method by which any average or maximum wall stress was computed. Records must be kept for all completed retests, as well as unsuccessful retests under paragraph (e)(4)(v) of this section. The entry for a later retest under paragraph (e)(4)(v) of this section after a failure to hold test pressure, or retest of a cylinder requalified after rejection, must indicate the date of the earlier inspection or retest; and
(C) Calculations of average and maximum wall stress pursuant to § 173.302(c)(3), if performed.
(iii) The most recent certificate of calibration must be maintained for each calibrated cylinder used by the retester.
(9) DOT 4-series cylinders. A DOT 4-series cylinder, except 4L cylinders, that at any time shows evidence of a leak or of internal or external corrosion, denting, bulging or rough usage to the extent that it is likely to be weakened appreciably; or that has lost five percent or more of its official tare weight must be retested before being recharged and shipped. (Refer to CGA Pamphlet C-6 or C-6.3, as applicable, regarding cylinder weakening.) After retest, the actual tare weight must be recorded as the new tare weight.
(10) Cylinders 12 pounds or less with service pressures of 300 psi or less. A cylinder of 12 pounds or less water capacity authorized for service pressure of 300 psi or less must be given a complete external visual inspection at the time periodic retest becomes due. External visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6 or C-6.3. The cylinder may be hydrostatically retested without a water jacket and without determining total and permanent expansions. The retest is successful if the cylinder, when examined under test pressure, does not display a defect described in paragraph (e)(6)(i) (B) or (C) of this section.
(11) Modified hydrostatic retest. A cylinder made in compliance with specification DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E or ICC-26-300 2 (§§ 178.50, 178.51, 178.61, 178.68 of this subchapter) that is used exclusively for anhydrous dimethylamine; anhydrous methylamine; anhydrous trimethylamine; methyl chloride; liquefied petroleum gas; methylacetylene-propadiene stabilized; or dichlorodifluoromethane, difluoroethane, difluorochloroethane, chlorodifluoromethane, chlorotetrafluoroethane, trifluorochloroethylene, or mixture thereof, or mixtures of one or more with trichlorofluoromethane; and that is commercially free from corroding components and protected externally by a suitable corrosion-resistant coating (such as galvanizing or painting) may be given a hydrostatic retest every 12 years instead of every five years. Alternatively, the cylinder may be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure of at least two times the marked service pressure without determination of expansions, but this latter type of test must be repeated every seven years after expiration of the first 12-year period. When subjected to the latter test, the cylinder must be carefully examined under test pressure and removed from service if a leak or other harmful defect exists. A cylinder requalified by the modified hydrostatic test method must be marked after a retest or an inspection by stamping the date of retest or reinspection on the cylinder followed by a “S”.
2 For filling at 450 p.s.i. and below. Use of existing cylinders authorized; new construction not authorized.
(12) A cylinder made in conformance with specification DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3B, DOT-4BA or DOT-4BW (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.38, 178.51, 178.61 of this subchapter) having a service pressure of 300 psi or less that is used exclusively for methyl bromide, liquid; mixtures of methyl bromide and ethylene dibromide, liquid; mixtures of methyl bromide and chlorpicrin, liquid; mixtures of methyl bromide and petroleum solvents, liquid; or methyl bromide and nonflammable, nonliquefied compressed gas mixtures, liquid; that is commercially free of corroding components, and that is protected externally by a suitable corrosion resistant coating (such as galvanizing or painting) and internally by a suitable corrosion resistant lining (such as galvanizing) may be tested every 10 years instead of every five years, provided that a visual internal and external examination of the cylinder is conducted every five years in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6. The cylinder must be examined at each filling, and rejected if a dent, corroded area, leak or other condition indicates possible weakness.
(13) A cylinder made in conformance with a specification listed in the table in this paragraph (e)(13) and used exclusively in the service indicated may, instead of a periodic hydrostatic retest, be given a complete external visual inspection at the time periodic retest becomes due. External visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6 or C-6.3. When this inspection is used instead of hydrostatic retesting, subsequent inspections are required at five-year intervals after the first inspection. Inspections must be made only by competent persons and the results recorded and maintained in accordance with paragraph (e)(8) of this section. Records shall include: date of inspection (month and year); DOT specification number; cylinder identification (registered symbol and serial number, date of manufacture, and owner); type of cylinder protective coating (including statement as to need of refinishing or recoating); conditions checked (e.g., leakage, corrosion, gouges, dents or digs in shell or heads, broken or damaged footring or protective ring or fire damage); disposition of cylinder (returned to service, returned to cylinder manufacturer for repairs or scrapped). A cylinder that passes inspection shall be marked with the date in accordance with paragraph (e)(7) of this section. An “E” after the date indicates requalification by the external inspection method. Specification cylinders must be in exclusive service as follows:
Cylinders made in compliance with— | Used exclusively for—
DOT-4, DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3A480X, DOT-4A, DOT-4AA480. | Anhydrous ammonia of at least 99.95% purity.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3A480X, DOT-3B, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW, ICC-26-240,^1 ICC-26-300^1 | Butadiene, inhibited, which is commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3A480X, DOT-3AA, DOT-3B, DOT-4A, DOT-4AA480, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW | Cyclopropane which is commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3A480X, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW, DOT-4E | Fluorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof which are commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3A480X, DOT-3B, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW, DOT-4E, ICC-26-240,1 ICC-26-3001 | Liquefied hydrocarbon gas which is commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3A480X, DOT-3B, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW, DOT-4E, ICC-26-2401, ICC-26-3001 | Liquefied petroleum gas which is commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3B, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW, DOT-4E | Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized, which is commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-3A, DOT-3AA, DOT-3B, DOT-4B, DOT-4BA, DOT-4BW | Anhydrous mono, di, trimethylamines which are commercially free from corroding components.
DOT-4B240, DOT-4BW240 | Ethyleneimine, inhibited.
^1 Use of existing cylinders authorized; new construction not authorized.
(14) Cylinders containing anhydrous ammonia. A cylinder made in compliance with specification DOT-3A, DOT-3A 480X, or DOT-4AA480 used exclusively for anhydrous ammonia, commercially free from corroding components, and protected externally by a suitable corrosion-resistant coating (such as painting) may be retested every 10 years instead of every five years.
(15) 3HT cylinders. (i) In addition to the other requirements of this section, a cylinder marked DOT-3HT must be requalified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-8.
(ii) The cylinder must be condemned:
(A) If elastic expansion exceeds the marked rejection elastic expansion. A cylinder made before January 17, 1978, and not marked with a rejection elastic expansion in cubic centimeters near the marked original elastic expansion must be so marked before the next retest date. The rejection elastic expansion for a cylinder is 1.05 times its original elastic expansion.
(B) If there is evidence of denting or bulging.
(C) Twenty-four years after the date of the original test or after 4,380 pressurizations, whichever occurs first. If a cylinder is recharged, on average, more than once every other day, an accurate record of the number of rechargings must be maintained by the cylinder owner or his/her agent.
(iii) The retest date and retester identification number must be applied by low-stress steel stamp to a depth no greater than that of the marking at the time of manufacture. Stamping on the sidewall is not authorized.
(16) DOT-3A or 3AA cylinders. (i) A cylinder made in conformance with specification DOT-3A or 3AA with a water capacity of 125 pounds or less that is removed from any cluster, bank, group, rack or vehicle each time it is filled, may be retested every ten years instead of every five years, provided the cylinder complies with all of the following—
(A) The cylinder was manufactured after December 31, 1945;
(B) The cylinder is used exclusively for air, argon, cyclopropane, ethylene, helium, hydrogen, krypton, neon, nitrogen, nitrous oxide, oxygen, sulfur hexafluoride, xenon, permitted mixtures of these gases (see § 173.301(a)) and permitted mixtures of these gases with up to 30 percent by volume of carbon dioxide, provided that the gas has a dew point at or below minus 52 °F at 1 atmosphere;
(C) Before each refill, the cylinder passes the hammer test specified in CGA Pamphlet C-6;
(D) The cylinder is dried immediately after hydrostatic testing to remove all traces of free water;
(E) The cylinder is not used for underwater breathing; and
(F) Each cylinder is stamped with a five-point star at least one-fourth of an inch high immediately following the test date.
(ii) If, since the last required hydrostatic retest, a cylinder has not been used exclusively as specified in paragraph (e)(16)(i)(B) of this section, but currently conforms with all other provisions of paragraph (e)(16)(i) of this section, it may be retested every 10 years instead of every five years, provided it is first retested and examined as prescribed by § 173.302(c)(2), (3) and (4).
(iii) Except as specified in paragraph (e)(16)(ii) of this section, if a cylinder marked with a star is charged with a compressed gas other than as specified in this paragraph (e)(16), the star following the most recent test date must be obliterated. The cylinder must be retested five years from the marked retest date, or prior to the first charging with a compressed gas, if the required five-year retest period has passed.
(17) Cylinders containing corrosive materials. (i) A cylinder that previously contained a Class 8 (corrosive) material may not be used to transport a compressed gas in commerce unless the following requirements are met—
(A) The cylinder is visually inspected, internally and externally, in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6;
(B) Regardless of the date of previous retest, the cylinder is subjected to and passes inspection and hydrostatic retest in accordance with this section; and
(C) The record prescribed in paragraph (e)(8) of this section includes: the month and year of inspection and test; the cylinder identification (including ICC or DOT specification number, registered symbol, serial number, date of manufacture and owner); the conditions checked (e.g., leakage, corrosion, gouges, dents, or digs in shell or heads, broken or damaged footrings, fire damage) and the disposition of the cylinder (returned to service, returned to the manufacturer for repairs, or scrapped).
(ii) A cylinder requalified for compressed gas service in accordance with this paragraph (e)(17) may have its next retest and inspection scheduled from the date of the inspection and retest prescribed in this paragraph (e). If decontamination cannot remove all significant residue or impregnation by the Class 8 material, the cylinder may not be used to transport compressed gas in commerce.
(18) DOT 8 and 8AL cylinders. (i) Each owner of a DOT 8 or 8AL cylinder used to transport acetylene must have the cylinder shell and the porous filler requalified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-13. Requalification must be performed in accordance with the following schedule:
Date of cylinder manufacture | Shell (visual inspection) requalification | Initial | Subsequent | Porous filler requalification | Initial | Subsequent
Before January 1, 1991 | Before January 1, 2001 | 10 yrs | Before January 1, 2011 | Not required.
On or after January 1, 1991 | 10 yrs ^1 | 10 yrs | 3 to 20 yrs ^2 | Not required.
^1 Years from date of cylinder manufacture.
^2 For a cylinder manufactured on or after January 1, 1991, requalification of the porous filler must be performed no sooner than 3 years, and no later than 20 years, from the date of manufacture.
(ii) Unless requalified and marked in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-13 before October 1, 1994, an acetylene cylinder must be requalified by a person who holds a valid retester identification number. Each cylinder successfully passing a shell or filler requalification must be marked with the retester's identification number in accordance with paragraph (e)(7) of this section. In addition, the cylinder must be marked to identify the type of requalification performed in accordance with paragraph 5.6 of CGA Pamphlet C-13. For example, the letter “S” must be used for a shell requalification and the letter “F” for a porous filler requalification.
(iii) If a cylinder valve is replaced, a cylinder valve of the same weight must be used or the tare weight of the cylinder must be adjusted to compensate for valve weight differential.
(19) Cylinders used as fire extinguishers. Only DOT specification cylinders used as fire extinguishers and meeting Special Provision 18 in § 172.102(c)(1) of this subchapter may be retested in accordance with this paragraph (e)(19).
(i) A DOT specification 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW (§§ 178.50, 178.51, 178.55 and 178.61 of this subchapter) cylinder may be retested as follows:
(A) For a cylinder with a water capacity of 12 pounds or less by hydrostatic test using the water jacket method or by hydrostatic test without determination of expansion (modified hydrostatic test method). A retest must be performed 12 years after the original test date and at 12-year intervals thereafter.
(B) For a cylinder having a water capacity over 12 pounds—
(1) By hydrostatic test without determination of expansion (modified hydrostatic test method). A retest must be performed 12 years after the original test date and at 7-year intervals; or
(2) By hydrostatic test using the water jacket method. A retest must be performed 12 years after the original test date and at 12-year intervals thereafter.
(ii) A DOT specification 3A, 3AA, or 3AL (§§ 178.36, 178.37 and 178.46 of this subchapter) cylinder may be retested by hydrostatic test using the water jacket method. A retest must be performed 12 years after the original test date and at 12-year intervals thereafter.
(f) Cylinders subjected to the action of fire. A cylinder which has been subjected to the action of fire must not again be placed in service until it has been properly reconditioned as follows:
(1) A cylinder made of plain carbon steel with not over 0.25 percent carbon nor over 0.90 manganese need not be reheat-treated but must pass the periodic retest requirements as specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
(2) DOT 8 and 8AL cylinders made entirely of carbon steel with 0.25 percent or less carbon and with 0.90 percent or less manganese, must be reinspected to determine the condition of the cylinder and the porous filler, as prescribed in CGA Pamphlet C-13. If the cylinder has been damaged, the porous filler must be removed and the cylinder must be heat treated and retested. The porous filler must be replaced in accordance with the specification to which the cylinder was made. A cylinder may be returned to service without reheat treatment or retest if the cylinder has no fire or mechanical damage and the porous filler is unchanged and intact.
(3) The inner cylinders made under specification DOT-4L (§ 178.57 of this chapter) may be used after again passing the original hydrostatic test.
(4) DOT 3AL and DOT 4E aluminum cylinders may not be reheat treated and must be removed from service.
(5) Other cylinders must be reheat treated and reconditioned as specified in paragraph (g) of this section.
(g) Reheat treatment. (1) Previous to the reheat treatment procedure hereinafter prescribed, each cylinder must be subjected to a careful internal and external inspection.
(2) Cylinders must be segregated for reheat treatment in lots of 100 or less cylinders of the same general size having practically the same chemical composition.
(3) The reheat treatment operation must be carried out, supervised, and reported as prescribed for the heat treatment in the specification covering the manufacture of the cylinder in question. Data from the original reports of manufacture of the cylinders must be available.
(4) The reheat treatment must be followed by hydrostatic retest, such retest to be carried out, supervised, and reported as prescribed for the hydrostatic tests in the specification covering the manufacture of the cylinder in question. The results of the retest must meet either of the following conditions:
(i) The permanent expansion shall be from zero to 10 percent of the total expansion in the hydrostatic retest and one cylinder from each lot shall pass the requirements of the flattening and physical tests prescribed. Failure to pass the flattening or physical tests will reject the lot or;
(ii) The permanent expansion shall not be less than 3 percent nor more than 10 percent of the total expansion in the hydrostatic retest, in which case the flattening and physical tests are not required. For this alternative method the hydrostatic retest pressure may not exceed 115 percent of the minimum prescribed test pressure.
(h) Repair by welding or brazing of specifications DOT-3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C cylinders. Repair of specifications DOT-3A, 3AA, 3B or 3C (§§ 178.36(e), 178.37(e), 178.38(e), and 178.40(e) of this subchapter) cylinders by welding or brazing authorized, but only for the removal and replacement of neckrings and footrings attached to cylinders originally manufactured to conform to §§ 178.36-9(a), 178.37-9(a), 178.38-9(a), and 178.40-9(a) of this subchapter. Removal and replacement must be done by a regular manufacturer of this type of cylinder. After removal and before replacement of such parts, cylinders must be inspected, and defective ones rejected. Cylinders, neckrings, foot-rings, and method of replacement must conform to § 178.36(e), 178.37(e), 178.38(e), or 178.40(e) of this subchapter whichever applies. Replacement must be followed by reheat treating, testing, inspection, and supervised and reported as prescribed by the specification covering their original manufacture. Inspector's reports must conform with that required by the specification covering original manufacture with the word “repaired” substituted for “manufactured.” Show original markings and the new additional markings added, and statement: “Cylinders were carefully inspected for defects after removal of neckrings and footrings and after replacement, which replacement was made by process of _____ (Welding-brazing).”
(i) Repair by welding or brazing of DOT-4 series and DOT-8, welded or brazed cylinders. Repairs on DOT-4 series and DOT-8 series welded or brazed cylinders are authorized to be made by welding or brazing. Such repairs must be made by a manufacturer of these types of DOT cylinders or by a repair facility approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety and by a process similar to that used in its manufacture and under the following specific requirements:
(1) Cylinders with injurious defects in welded joints in or on pressure parts must be repaired by completely removing the defect prior to rewelding.
(2) Cylinders with injurious defects in brazed joints in or on pressure parts must be repaired by rebrazing.
(3) Cylinders during welding must be free of materials in contact with the welded joint that may impair the serviceability of the metal in or adjacent to the weld. (Precautions must be taken to prevent acetylene cylinder steels from picking up carbon during repair.)
(4) Neckrings, footrings, or other nonpressure attachments authorized by the specification may be replaced or repaired. Repair or replacement of footrings, neckrings, or other nonpressure attachments authorized by the specification for DOT-4BA and 8AL (§§ 178.51 and 178.60 of this subchapter) cylinders may be made without conforming to the requirements of paragraph (i)(6) of this section provided the following requirements are met:
(i) Must be done by a manufacturer of these types of DOT cylinders or by a repair facility approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(ii) The welder shall have available to him information as to the procedure equipment, and rod used during manufacture and shall use a similar method for repair.
(iii) Repairs must be by metal arc welding only. Welds shall be 3 inches maximum length and spaced at least 3 inches apart.
(iv) Welds shall not be made on or near a brazed joint (to prevent the possibility of copper penetration).
(v) After repair the welds are to be inspected visually for weld quality.
(vi) After repair the weld area is to be leak tested at the service pressure of the cylinder.
(5) After removal, and before replacement of attachments, cylinders must be inspected and defective ones rejected, repaired or rebuilt.
(6) After repair, cylinders must be reheat-treated, tested, inspected and reported when and as prescribed by the specification covering their original manufacture when welding or brazing seams in a pressure part of a cylinder; or when welding or brazing on pressure parts of cylinders of plain carbon steels with carbon over 0.25 percent or manganese over 1.00 percent or of alloy steels except as provided in § 173.34(i)(7).

Note 1:
Heat-treatment is not required after welding or brazing weldable low carbon parts to attachments of similar material which has been previously welded or brazed to the top or bottom of cylinders and properly heat-treated, provided such subsequent welding or brazing does not produce a temperature in excess of 400 °F. in any part of the top or bottom material.
(7) Repair of cylinders must be followed by a proof pressure leakage test at prescribed test pressure and visual examination for weld quality when welding on pressure parts of cylinders of plain carbon 0.25 percent or less and manganese 1.00 percent or less, or when repairing steel types 1315, NAX and GLX by the following procedure:
(i) Leakage through the welding metal may be repaired without subsequent reheat treatment of the cylinder.
(ii) Repair permitted only by either the metal arc or tungsten inert gas shielded arc process. E7015, 7016, or 7018 electrodes not larger than 1/8 inch diameter shall be used for the metal arc process.
(iii) Weld defects must be removed by grinding or chipping before repair by the metal arc process. The tungsten inert gas shielded arc process may be used for repair only when such repair can be made by puddling. Repair weld shall not exceed 1 inch in length nor be closer than 3 inches to the next repair area.
(iv) Repair of weld defects which have any cracking is not permitted.
(j) Repair of non-pressure attachments. Repair of non-pressure attachments by welding or brazing without affecting a pressure part of the cylinder must be followed by visual examination for weld quality.
(k) Prohibited repairs. Walls, heads or bottoms of cylinders with injurious defects or leaks in base metal shall not be repaired, but may be replaced as provided for in paragraph (l) of this section.
(l) Rebuilding of DOT-4 series and DOT-8, welded or brazed cylinders. Rebuilding of DOT-4 series and DOT-8 series, welded or brazed cylinders is authorized. Such rebuilding must be done by a manufacturer of these types of DOT cylinders or by a repair facility approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety and by a process similar to that used in its original manufacture and under the following specific requirements:
(1) The replacement of a pressure part such as wall, heads, or bottoms of cylinders or the replacement of the porous filling material, shall be considered as rebuilding.
(2) Rebuilt cylinders shall be considered as new cylinders and shall conform to all the requirements of the specifications applying, including verification of material, examination, inspection, etc., and the rendering of the proper reports to the purchaser, cylinder rebuilder, and the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. Report must show that cylinders were rebuilt.
(3) Information in sufficient detail regarding previous serial numbers and identification symbols must be filed with the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 2137-0022)
[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.34, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.35
Hazardous materials in intermediate bulk containers.
(a) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for transportation in an intermediate bulk container except as authorized by this subchapter. Each intermediate bulk container used for the transportation of hazardous materials must conform to the requirements of its specification and regulations for the transportation of the particular commodity. A specification intermediate bulk container, for which the prescribed periodic retest or inspection under subpart D of part 180 of this subchapter is past due, may not be filled and offered for transportation until the retest or inspection have been successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to any intermediate bulk container filled prior to the retest or inspection due date.
(b) Before being filled and offered for transportation, each intermediate bulk container and its service equipment must be visually inspected to ensure that it is free from corrosion, contamination, cracks, or other damage which would render the intermediate bulk container unsafe for transportation. No rigid plastic or composite intermediate bulk container with repaired bodies may be reused; however, plastic components, such as closures, valves, or legs, may be replaced. Fiberboard, wooden, or flexible intermediate bulk containers may not be reused.
(c) A metal intermediate bulk container, or a part thereof, subject to thinning by mechanical abrasion or corrosion due to the lading, must be protected by providing a suitable increase in thickness of material, a lining or some other suitable method of protection. Increased thickness for corrosion or abrasion protection must be added to the wall thickness specified in § 178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this subchapter.
(d) Notwithstanding requirements in § 173.24b of this subpart, when filling an intermediate bulk container with liquids, sufficient ullage must be left to ensure that, at the mean bulk temperature of 50 °C (122 °F), the intermediate bulk container is not filled to more than 98 percent of its water capacity.
(e) Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series, the system nearest to the hazardous material being carried must be closed first.
(f) During transportation—
(1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the intermediate bulk container; and
(2) Each intermediate bulk container must be securely fastened to or contained within the transport unit.
(g) Each intermediate bulk container used for transportation of solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation must also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.
(h) Liquid hazardous materials may only be offered for transportation in a metal, rigid plastic, or composite intermediate bulk container that is appropriately resistant to an increase of internal pressure likely to develop during transportation.
(1) A rigid plastic or composite intermediate bulk container may only be filled with a liquid having a vapor pressure less than or equal to the greater of the following two values: the first value is determined from any of the methods in paragraphs (h)(1) (i), (ii) or (iii) of this section. The second value is determined by the method in paragraph (h)(1)(iv) of this section.
(i) The gauge pressure (pressure in the intermediate bulk container above ambient atmospheric pressure) measured in the intermediate bulk container at 55 °C (131 °F). This gauge pressure must not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure and must be determined after the intermediate bulk container was filled and closed at 15 °C (60 °F) to less than or equal to 98 percent of its capacity.
(ii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material plus atmospheric pressure) in the intermediate bulk container at 50 °C (122 °F). This absolute pressure must not exceed four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
(iii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material plus atmospheric pressure) in the intermediate bulk container at 55 °C (131 °F). This absolute pressure must not exceed two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
(iv) Twice the static pressure of the substance, measured at the bottom of the intermediate bulk container. This value must not be less than twice the static pressure of water.
(2) Gauge pressure (pressure in the intermediate bulk container above ambient atmospheric pressure) in metal intermediate bulk containers must not exceed 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C (122 °F) or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F).
(i) The requirements in this section do not apply to DOT-56 or -57 portable tanks.
(j) No intermediate bulk container may be filled with a Packing Group I liquid. Rigid plastic, composite, flexible, wooden or fiberboard intermediate bulk containers used to transport Packing Group I solid materials may not exceed 1.5 cubic meters (53 cubic feet) capacity. For Packing Group I solids, a metal intermediate bulk container may not exceed 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) capacity.
(k) When an intermediate bulk container is used for the transportation of liquids with a flashpoint of 60.5 °C (141 °F) (closed cup) or lower, or powders with the potential for dust explosion, measures must be taken during product loading and unloading to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.
(l) Intermediate bulk container filling limits. (1) Except as provided in this section, an intermediate bulk container may not be filled with a hazardous material in excess of the maximum gross mass marked on that container.
(2) An intermediate bulk container which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III liquid material to a gross mass not exceeding 1.5 times the maximum gross mass marked on that container, if all the performance criteria can still be met at the higher gross mass.
(3) An intermediate bulk container which is tested and marked for liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid hazardous material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on that container. In addition, an intermediate bulk container intended for the transport of liquids which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III solid hazardous material to a gross mass not exceeding the marked maximum gross mass multiplied by 1.5 if all the performance criteria can still be met at the higher gross mass.
(4) An intermediate bulk container which is tested and marked for Packing Group I solid materials may be filled with a Packing Group II solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on that container, multiplied by 1.5, if all the performance criteria can be met at the higher gross mass; or a Packing Group III solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on the intermediate bulk container, multiplied by 2.25, if all the performance criteria can be met at the higher gross mass. An intermediate bulk container which is tested and marked for Packing Group II solid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III solid material to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on the intermediate bulk container, multiplied by 1.5.
[Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995]
§ 173.40
General packaging requirements for poisonous materials required to be packaged in cylinders.
When this section is referenced in the packaging section for a hazardous material elsewhere in this part, the following requirements are applicable to cylinders used for that material:
(a) Authorized cylinders. A cylinder must conform to one of the specifications for cylinders in subpart C of part 178 of this subchapter, except that Specification 8, 8AL and 39 cylinders are not authorized.
(b) Outage and pressure requirements. The pressure of the hazardous material at 55 °C (131 °F) must not exceed the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient outage shall be provided so that the cylinder will not be liquid full at 55 °C (131 °F).
(c) Closures. Each cylinder must be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following:
(1) Each plug or valve must have a taper-threaded connection directly to the cylinder and be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder;
(2) Each valve must be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the packed type provided the assembly is made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with gasketed joint attached to the valve body or the cylinder to prevent loss of material through or past the packing;
(3) Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug, and
(4) Cylinder, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets must be compatible with each other and with the lading.
(d) Additional protection. Additional protection requirements for thin-walled cylinders and for cylinders equipped with valves are as follows:
(1) Each cylinder which has a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.03 mm (0.080 inch) and each cylinder which does not have fitted valve protection must be overpacked in a box. The box must conform to overpack provisions in § 173.25. Box and valve protection must be of sufficient strength to protect all parts of the cylinder and valve, if any, from deformation and breakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) or more onto a concrete floor, impacting at an orientation most likely to cause damage.
(2) Each cylinder equipped with a valve, if not overpacked in a box in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, must be equipped with a protective cap or other means of valve protection sufficient to protect the valve from deformation and breakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) or more onto a concrete floor, impacting at an orientation most likely to cause damage.
(e) Interconnection. Cylinders may not be interconnected.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52616, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]

Subpart C—Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1

Source:
Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.
§ 173.50
Class 1—Definitions.
(a) Explosive. For the purpose of this subchapter, an explosive means any substance or article, including a device, which is designed to function by explosion (i.e., an extremely rapid release of gas and heat) or which, by chemical reaction within itself, is able to function in a similar manner even if not designed to function by explosion, unless the substance or article is otherwise classed under the provision of this subchapter.
(b) Explosives in Class 1 are divided into six divisions as follows:
(1) Division 1.1 consists of explosives that have a mass explosion hazard. A mass explosion is one which affects almost the entire load instantaneously.
(2) Division 1.2 consists of explosives that have a projection hazard but not a mass explosion hazard.
(3) Division 1.3 consists of explosives that have a fire hazard and either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but not a mass explosion hazard.
(4) Division 1.4 consists of explosives that present a minor explosion hazard. The explosive effects are largely confined to the package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is to be expected. An external fire must not cause virtually instantaneous explosion of almost the entire contents of the package.
(5) Division 1.5 ^1 consists of very insensitive explosives. This division is comprised of substances which have a mass explosion hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport.
^1 The probability of transition from burning to detonation is greater when large quantities are transported in a vessel.
(6) Division 1.6 ^2 consists of extremely insensitive articles which do not have a mass explosive hazard. This division is comprised of articles which contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation.
^2 The risk from articles of Division 1.6 is limited to the explosion of a single article.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.51
Authorization to offer and transport explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise provided in this subpart, no person may offer for transportation or transport an explosive, unless it has been tested and classed and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety (§ 173.56).
(b) Reports of explosives approved by the Department of Defense or the Department of Energy must be filed with, and receive acknowledgement in writing by, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety prior to such explosives being offered for transportation.
§ 173.52
Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.
(a) The classification code for an explosive, which is assigned by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety in accordance with this subpart, consists of the division number followed by the compatibility group letter. Compatibility group letters are used to specify the controls for the transportation, and storage related thereto, of explosives and to prevent an increase in hazard that might result if certain types of explosives were stored or transported together. Transportation compatibility requirements for carriers are prescribed in §§ 174.81, 175.78. 176.83 and 177.848 of this subchapter for transportation by rail, air, vessel, and public highway, respectively, and storage incidental thereto.
(b) Compatibility groups and classification codes for the various types of explosives are set forth in the following tables. Table 1 sets forth compatibility groups and classification codes for substances and articles described in the first column of table 1. Table 2 shows the number of classification codes that are possible within each explosive division. Altogether, there are 35 possible classification codes for explosives.
Table 1—Classification Codes
Description of substances or article to be classified | Compatibility group | Classification code
Primary explosive substance | A | 1.1A
Article containing a primary explosive substance and not containing two or more effective protective features. Some articles, such as detonators for blasting, detonator assemblies for blasting and primers, cap-type, are included, even though they do not contain primary explosives. | B | 1.1B 1.2B 1.4B
Propellant explosive substance or other deflagrating explosive substance or article containing such explosive substance | C | 1.1C 1.2C 1.3C 1.4C
Secondary detonating explosive substance or black powder or article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, in each case without means of initiation and without a propelling charge, or article containing a primary explosive substance and containing two or more effective protective features | D | 1.1D 1.2D 1.4D 1.5D
Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance, without means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid gel or hypergolic liquid ) | E | 1.1E 1.2E 1.4E
Article containing a secondary detonating explosive substance with its means of initiation, with a propelling charge (other than one containing flammable liquid gel or hypergolic liquid) or without a propelling charge | F | 1.1F 1.2F 1.3F 1.4F
Pyrotechnic substance or article containing a pyrotechnic substance, or article containing both an explosive substance and an illuminating, incendiary, tear-producing or smoke-producing substance (other than a water-activated article or one containing white phosphorus, phosphide or flammable liquid or gel or hypergolic liquid) | G | 1.1G 1.2G 1.3G 1.4G
Article containing both an explosive substance and white phosphorus | H | 1.2H 1.3H
Article containing both an explosive substance and flammable liquid or gel | J | 1.1J 1.2J 1.3J
Article containing both an explosive substance and a toxic chemical agent | K | 1.2K 1.3K
Explosive substance or article containing an explosive substance and presenting a special risk (e.g., due to water-activation or presence of hybergolic liquids, phosphides or pyrophoric substances) needing isolation of each type | L | 1.1L 1.2L 1.3L
Articles containing only extremely insensitive detonating substances. | N | 1.6N
Substance or article so packed or designed that any hazardous effects arising from accidental functioning are limited to the extent that they do not significantly hinder or prohibit fire fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity of the package | S | 1.4S
Table 2—Scheme of Classification of Explosives, Combination of Hazard division With Compatibility Group
| Hazard division | Compatibility group | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | J | K | L | N | S | A-S
1.1 | 1.1A | 1.1B | 1.1C | 1.1D | 1.1E | 1.1F | 1.1G | | 1.1J | | 1.1L | | | 9
1.2 | | 1.2B | 1.2C | 1.2D | 1.2E | 1.2F | 1.2G | 1.2H | 1.2J | 1.2K | 1.2L | | | 10
1.3 | | | 1.3C | | | 1.3F | 1.3G | 1.3H | 1.3J | 1.3K | 1.3L | | | 7
1.4 | | 1.4B | 1.4C | 1.4D | 1.4E | 1.4F | 1.4G | | | | | | 1.4S | 7
1.5 | | | | 1.5D | | | | | | | | | | 1
1.6 | | | | | | | | | | | | 1.6N | | 1
| 1.6 | 1 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 2 | 3 | 2 | 3 | 1 | 1 | 35
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994]
§ 173.53
Provisions for using old classifications of explosives.
Where the classification system in effect prior to January 1, 1991, is referenced in State or local laws, ordinances or regulations not pertaining to the transportation of hazardous materials, the following table may be used to compare old and new hazard class names:
Current classification | Class name prior to Jan. 1, 1991
Division 1.1 | Class A explosives.
Division 1.2 | Class A or Class B explosives.
Division 1 3 | Class B explosive.
Division 1.4 | Class C explosives.
Division 1.5 | Blasting agents.
Division 1.6 | No applicable hazard class.
§ 173.54
Forbidden explosives.
Unless otherwise provided in this subchapter, the following explosives shall not be offered for transportation or transported:
(a) An explosive that has not been approved in accordance with § 173.56 of this subpart.
(b) An explosive mixture or device containing a chlorate and also containing:
(1) An ammonium salt, including a substituted ammonium or quaternary ammonium salt; or
(2) An acidic substance, including a salt of a weak base and a strong acid.
(c) A leaking or damaged package of explosives.
(d) Propellants that are unstable, condemned or deteriorated.
(e) Nitroglycerin. diethylene glycol dinitrate, or any other liquid explosives not specifically authorized by this subchapter.
(f) A loaded firearm (except as provided in 14 CFR 108.11).
(g) Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator.
(h) Fireworks containing yellow or white phosphorus.
(i) A toy torpedo, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds 23 mm (0.906 inch), or a toy torpedo containing a mixture of potassium chlorate, black antimony (antimony sulfide), and sulfur, if the weight of the explosive material in the device exceeds 0.26 g (0.01 ounce).
(j) Explosives specifically forbidden in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(k) Explosives not meeting the acceptance criteria specified in § 173.57 of this subchapter.
(l) An explosive article with its means of initiation or ignition installed, unless approved in accordance with § 173.56.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993]
§ 173.55
[Reserved]
§ 173.56
New explosives—definition and procedures for classification and approval.
(a) Definition of new explosive. For the purposes of this subchapter a new explosive means an explosive produced by a person who:
(1) Has not previously produced that explosive; or
(2) Has previously produced that explosive but has made a change in the formulation, design or process so as to alter any of the properties of the explosive. An explosive will not be considered a “new explosive” if an agency listed in paragraph (b) of this section has determined, and confirmed in writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, that there are no significant differences in hazard characteristics from the explosive previously approved.
(b) Examination, classing and approval. Except as provided in paragraph (j) of this section, no person may offer a new explosive for transportation unless that person has specified to the examining agency the ranges of composition of ingredients and compounds, showing the intended manufacturing tolerances in the composition of substances or design of articles which will be allowed in that material or device, and unless it has been examined, classed and approved as follows:
(1) Except for an explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of the Department of Defense (DOD) or the Department of Energy (DOE), a new explosive must be examined and assigned a recommended shipping description, division and compatibility group, based on the tests and criteria prescribed in §§ 173.52, 173.57 and 173.58. The person requesting approval of the new explosive must submit to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety a report of the examination and assignment of a recommended shipping description, division, and compatibility group. If the Associate Administrator finds the approval request meets the regulatory criteria, the new explosive will be approved in writing and assigned an EX number. The examination must be performed by a person who is approved by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of subpart H of part 107 of this chapter and who—
(i) Has (directly, or through an employee involved in the examination) at least ten years of experience in the examination, testing and evaluation of explosives;
(ii) Does not manufacture or market explosives, and is not controlled by or financially dependent on any entity that manufactures or markets explosives, and whose work with respect to explosives is limited to examination, testing and evaluation; and
(iii) Is a resident of the United States.
(2) A new explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of a component of the DOD may be examined, classed, and concurred in by:
(i) U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives Safety (SMCAC-EST), Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA-9934), or Air Force Safety Agency (SEW), when approved by the Chairman, DOD Explosives Board, in accordance with the Department of Defense Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures (TB 700-2, dated December 1989); or
(ii) The agencies and procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(3) A new explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of the Department of Energy (DOE) may be—
(i) Examined by the DOE in accordance with the Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures (TB 700-2, dated December, 1989), and must be classed and approved by DOE; or
(ii) Examined, classed, and approved in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(4) For a material shipped under the description of “ammonium nitrate-fuel oil mixture (ANFO)”, the only test required for classification purposes is the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 5(a). prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual). The test must be performed by an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section, the manufacturer, or the shipper. A copy of the test report must be submitted to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety before the material is offered for transportation, and a copy of the test report must be retained by the shipper for as long as that material is shipped. At a minimum, the test report must contain the name and address of the person or organization conducting the test, date of the test, quantitative description of the mixture. including prill size and porosity, and a description of the test results.
(c) Filing DOD or DOE approval report. DOD or DOE must file a copy of each approval, accompanied by supporting laboratory data, with the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety and receive acknowledgement in writing before offering the new explosive for transportation, unless the new explosive is:
(1) Being transported under paragraph (d) or (e) of this section; or
(2) Covered by a national security classification currently in effect.
(d) Transportation of explosive samples for examination. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section with regard to the transportation of a new explosive that has not been approved, a person may offer a sample of a new explosive for transportation, by railroad, highway, or vessel from the place where it was produced to an agency identified in paragraph (b) of this section, for examination if—
(1) The new explosive has been assigned a tentative shipping description and class in writing by the testing agency;
(2) The new explosive is packaged as required by this part according to the tentative description and class assigned, unless otherwise specified in writing by the testing agency; and,
(3) The package is labeled as required by this subchapter and the following is marked on the package:
(i) The words “SAMPLE FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION”;
(ii) The net weight of the new explosive; and
(iii) The tentative shipping name and identification number.
(e) Transportation of unapproved explosives for developmental testing. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, the owner of a new explosive that has not been examined or approved may transport that new explosive from the place where it was produced to an explosives testing range if—
(1) It is not a primary (a 1.1A initiating) explosive or a forbidden explosive according to this subchapter;
(2) It is described as a Division 1.1 explosive (substance or article) and is packed, marked, labeled, described on shipping papers and is otherwise offered for transportation in conformance with the requirements of this subchapter applicable to Division 1.1;
(3) It is transported in a motor vehicle operated by the owner of the explosive; and
(4) It is accompanied by a person, in addition to the operator of the motor vehicle, who is qualified by training and experience to handle the explosive.
(f) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (d) of this section, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may approve a new explosive on the basis of an approval issued for the explosive by the competent authority of a foreign government, or when examination of the explosive by a person approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety is impracticable, on the basis of reports of tests conducted by disinterested third parties, or may approve the transportation of an explosives sample for the purpose of examination by a person approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(g) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, an explosive may be transported under §§ 171.11, 171.12, 171.12a or § 176.11 of this subchapter without the approval of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety if the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety has acknowledged, in writing, the acceptability of an approval issued by the competent authority of a foreign government pursuant to the provisions of the UN Recommendations, the ICAO Technical Instructions, the IMDG Code, or other national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations. In such a case, a copy of the foreign competent authority approval, and a copy of the written acknowledgement of its acceptance must accompany each shipment of that explosive.
(h) The requirements of this section do not apply to cartridges, small arms which are:
(1) Not a forbidden explosive under § 173.54 of this subchapter;
(2) Ammunition for rifle, pistol, or shotgun;
(3) Ammunition with inert projectile or blank ammunition; and
(4) Ammunition not exceeding 50 caliber for rifle or pistol cartridges or 8 gauge for shotgun shells.
Cartridges, small arms meeting the criteria of this paragraph (h) may be assigned a classification code of 1.4S by the manufacturer.
(i) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material or a device containing an explosive composition is greater or less than indicated according to the definition and criteria specified in §§ 173.50, 173.56, and 173.58 of this subchapter, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may specify a classification or except the material or device from the requirements of this subchapter.
(j) Fireworks. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, Division 1.3 and 1.4 fireworks may be classed and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety without prior examination and offered for transportation if the following conditions are met:
(1) The fireworks are manufactured in accordance with the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87-1;
(2) A thermal stability test is conducted on the device by the BOE, the BOM, or the manufacturer. The test must be performed by maintaining the device, or a representative prototype of a large device such as a display shell, at a temperature of 75 °C (167 °F) for 48 consecutive hours. When a device contains more than one component, those components which could be in physical contact with each other in the finished device must be placed in contact with each other during the thermal stability test; and
(3) The manufacturer applies in writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety following the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87-1, and is notified in writing by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety that the fireworks have been classed, approved, and assigned an EX-number. Each application must be complete, including all relevant background data and copies of all applicable drawings, test results, and any other pertinent information on each device for which approval is being requested. The manufacturer must sign the application and certify that the device for which approval is requested conforms to APA Standard 87-1 and that the descriptions and technical information contained in the application are complete and accurate. If the application is denied, the manufacturer will be notified in writing of the reasons for the denial. The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may require that the fireworks be examined by an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]
§ 173.57
Acceptance criteria for new explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise excepted, an explosive substance must be subjected to the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test (Test Method 3(a)(i)), the Friction Sensitivity Test (Test Method 3(b)(iii)), the Thermal Stability Test (Test Method 3(c)) at 75 °C (167 °F) and the Small-Scale Burning Test (Test Method 3(d)(i)), each as described in the Explosive Test Manual (UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria, Part I, Second Edition (see § 171.7 of this subchapter). A substance is forbidden for transportation if any one of the following occurs:
(1) For a liquid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for liquids;
(2) For a solid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for solids;
(3) The substance has a friction sensitiveness equal to or greater than that of dry pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) when tested in the Friction Sensitivity Test;
(4) The substance fails to pass the test criteria specified in the Thermal Stability Test at 75 °C (167 °F); or
(5) Explosion occurs when tested in the Small-Scale Burning Test.
(b) An explosive article, packaged or unpackaged, or a packaged explosive substance must be subjected to the Thermal Stability Test for Articles and Packaged Articles (Test method 4(a)(i)) and the Twelve Meter Drop Test (Test Method 4(b)(ii)), when appropriate, in the Explosive Test Manual. An article or packaged substance is forbidden for transportation if evidence of thermal instability or excessive impact sensitivity is found in those tests according to the criteria and methods of assessing results prescribed therein.
(c) Dynamite (explosive, blasting, type A) is forbidden for transportation if any of the following occurs:
(1) It does not have uniformly mixed with the absorbent material a satisfactory antacid in a quantity sufficient to have the acid neutralizing power of an amount of magnesium carbonate equal to one percent of the nitroglycerin or other liquid explosive ingredient;
(2) During the centrifuge test (Test Method D-2, in appendix D to this part) or the compression test (Test Method D-3 in appendix D to this part), a non-gelatin dynamite loses more than 3 percent by weight of the liquid explosive or a gelatin dynamite loses more than 10 percent by weight of the liquid explosive; or
(3) During the leakage test (Test Method D-1 in appendix D to this part), there is any loss of liquid.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993]
§ 173.58
Assignment of class and division for new explosives.
(a) Division 1.1., 1.2., 1.3., and 1.4 explosives. In addition to the test prescribed in § 173.57 of this subchapter, a substance or article in these divisions must be subjected to Test Methods 6(a), 6(b), and 6(c), as described in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, for assignment to an appropriate division. The criteria for assignment of class and division are as follows:
(1) Division 1.1 if the major hazard is mass explosion;
(2) Division 1.2 if the major hazard is dangerous projections;
(3) Division 1.3 if the major hazard is radiant heat or violent burning, or both, but there is no blast or projection hazard;
(4) Division 1.4 if there is a small hazard with no mass explosion and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range;
(5) Division 1.4 Compatibility Group S (1.4S) if the hazardous effects are confined within the package or the blast and projection effects do not significantly hinder emergency response efforts; or
(6) Not in the explosive class if the substance or article does not have significant explosive hazard or if the effects of explosion are completely confined within the article.
(b) Division 1.5 explosive. Except for ANFO, a substance that has been examined in accordance with the provisions § 173.57(a) of this subchapter, must be subjected to the following additional tests: Cap Sensitivity Test, Princess Incendiary Spark Test, DDT Test, and External Fire Test, each as described in the Explosive Test Manual. A material may not be classed as a Division 1.5 explosive if any of the following occurs:
(1) Detonation occurs in the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 5(a));
(2) Detonation occurs in the DDT Test (Test Method 5(b)(ii));
(3) An explosion, evidenced by a loud noise and projection of fragments, occurs in the External Fire Test (Test Method 5(c), or
(4) Ignition or explosion occurs in the Princess Incendiary Spark Test (Test Method 5(d)).
(c) Division 1.6 explosive. (1) In order to be classed as a 1.6 explosive, an article must pass all of the following tests, as prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual:
(i) The 1.6 Article External Fire Test;
(ii) The 1.6 Article Slow Cook-off Test;
(iii) The 1.6 Article Propagation Test; and
(iv) The 1.6 Article Bullet Impact Test.
(2) A substance intended for use as the explosive load in an article of Division 1.6 must be an extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). In order to determine if a substance is an EIDS, it must be subjected to the tests in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(x) of this section, which are described in the Explosive Test Manual. The substance must be tested in the form (i.e., composition, granulation, density, etc.) in which it is to be used in the article. A substance is not an EIDS if it fails any of the following tests:
(i) The Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test;
(ii) The Friction Sensitivity Test;
(iii) The Thermal Sensitivity Test at 75 °C (167 °F);
(iv) The Small Scale Burning Test;
(v) The EIDS Cap Test;
(vi) The EIDS Gap Test;
(vii) The Susan Test;
(viii) The EIDS Bullet Impact Test;
(ix) The EIDS External Fire Test; and
(x) The EIDS Slow Cook-off Test.
(d) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may waive or modify certain test(s) identified in §§ 173.57 and 173.58 of this subchapter, or require additional testing, if appropriate. In addition, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may limit the quantity of explosive in a device.
(e) Each explosive is assigned a compatibility group letter by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety based on the criteria prescribed in § 173.52(b) of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.59
Description of terms for explosives.
For the purpose of this subchapter, a description of the following terms is provided for information only. They must not be used for purposes of classification or to replace proper shipping names prescribed in § 172.101 of this subchapter.
Ammonium-nitrate—fuel oil mixture (ANFO). A blasting explosive containing no essential ingredients other than prilled ammonium nitrate and fuel oil.
Ammunition. Generic term related mainly to articles of military application consisting of all types of bombs, grenades, rockets, mines, projectiles and other similar devices or contrivances.
Ammunition, illuminating, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Ammunition designed to produce a single source of intense light for lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating cartridges, grenades and projectiles, and illuminating and target identification bombs. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: cartridges, signal; signal devices; hand signals; distress flares, aerial and flares, surface.
Ammunition, incendiary. Ammunition containing an incendiary substance which may be a solid, liquid or gel including white phosphorus. Except when the composition is an explosive per se, it also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes: Ammunition, incendiary, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; Ammunition, incendiary with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; and Ammunition, incendiary, white phosphorus, with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge.
Ammunition, practice. Ammunition without a main bursting charge, containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a fuze and propelling charge. The term excludes the following article which is listed separately: Grenades, practice.
Ammunition, proof. Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substance, used to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon component or assemblies.
Ammunition, smoke. Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture (CSAM), titanium tetrachloride (FM), white phosphorus, or smoke-producing substance whose composition is based on hexachlorothannol (HC) or red phosphorus. Except when the substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition also contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes: Ammunition, smoke, with or without burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; Ammunition, smoke, white phosphorus with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge.
Ammunition, tear-producing with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Ammunition containing tear-producing substance. It may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge.
Ammunition, toxic. Ammunition containing toxic agent. It may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge.
Articles, explosive, extremely insensitive (Articles, EEI). Articles that contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or propagation under normal conditions of transport and which have passed Test Series 7.
Articles, pyrophoric. Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance (capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white phosphorus.
Articles, pyrotechnic for technical purposes. Articles which contain pyrotechnic substances and are used for technical purposes, such as heat generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. The term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; cartridges, signal; cutters, cable, explosive; fireworks; flares, aerial; flares, surface; release devices, explosives; rivets, explosive; signal devices, hand; signals, distress; signals, railway track, explosive; and signals, smoke.
Black powder (gunpowder). Substance consisting of an intimate mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium or sodium nitrate, and sulphur. It may be meal, granular, compressed, or pelletized.
Bombs. Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft. They may contain a flammable liquid with bursting charge, a photo-flash composition or bursting charge. The term excludes torpedoes (aerial) and includes bombs, photo-flash; bombs with bursting charge; bombs with flammable liquids, with bursting charge.
Boosters. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating power of detonators or detonating cord.
Bursters, explosive. Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive to open projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents.
Cartridges, blank. Articles which consist of a cartridge case with a center or rim fire primer and a confined charge of smokeless or black powder, but no projectile. Used in training, saluting, or in starter pistols, etc.
Cartridges, flash. Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and flash powder, all assembled in one piece for firing.
Cartridges for weapons. (1) Fixed (assembled) or semi-fixed (partially assembled) ammunition designed to be fired from weapons. Each cartridge includes all the components necessary to function the weapon once. The name and description should be used for military small arms cartridges that cannot be described as cartridges, small arms. Separate loading ammunition is included under this name and description when the propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also Cartridges, blank).
(2) Incendiary, smoke, toxic, and tear-producing cartridges are described under ammunition, incendiary, etc.
Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile. Ammunition consisting of a casing with propelling charge and a solid or empty projectile.
Cartridges, oil well. Articles consisting of a casing of thin fiber, metal or other material containing only propellant explosive. The term excludes charges, shaped, commercial.
Cartridges, power device. Articles designed to accomplish mechanical actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating explosive and a means of ignition. The gaseous products of the deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion; activate diaphragms, valves or switches, or project fastening devices or extinguishing agents.
Cartridges, signal. Articles designed to fire colored flares or other signals from signal pistols or devices.
Cartridges, small arms. Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case fitted with a center or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling charge and solid projectile(s). They are designed to be fired in weapons of caliber not larger than 19.1 mm. Shotgun cartridges of any caliber are included in this description. The term excludes: Cartridges, small arms, blank, and some military small arms cartridges listed under Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile.
Cases, cartridge, empty with primer. Articles consisting of a cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non-flammable materials, in which only the explosive component is the primer.
Cases, combustible, empty, without primer. Articles consisting of cartridge cases made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose.
Charges, bursting. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive such as hexolite, octolite, or plastics-bonded explosive designed to produce effect by blast or fragmentation.
Charges, demolition. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive in a casing of fiberboard, plastics, metal or other material. The term excludes articles identified as bombs, mines, etc.
Charges, depth. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a drum or projectile. They are designed to detonate under water.
Charges, expelling. A charge of deflagrating explosive designed to eject the payload from the parent article without damage.
Charges, explosive, commercial without detonator. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for explosive welding, joining, forming, and other commercial processes.
Charges, propelling. Articles consisting of propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in cannon or for reducing drag for projectiles or as a component of rocket motors.
Charges, propelling for cannon. Articles consisting of a propellant charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in a cannon.
Charges, shaped commercial, without detonator. Articles consisting of a casing containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with rigid material, without means of initiation. They are designed to produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect.
Charges, shaped, flexible, linear. Articles consisting of a V-shaped core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible metal sheath.
Charges, supplementary, explosive. Articles consisting of a small removable booster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze and the bursting charge.
Components, explosive train, n.o.s. Articles containing an explosive designed to transmit a detonation or deflagration within an explosive train.
Contrivance, water-activated with burster, expelling charge or propelling charge. Articles whose functioning depends of physico-chemical reaction of their contents with water.
Cord, detonating, flexible. Articles consisting of a core of detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric with plastics or other covering.
Cord (fuse) detonating, metal clad. Articles consisting of a core of detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without protective covering. When the core contains a sufficiently small quantity of explosive, the words “mild effect” are added.
Cord igniter. Articles consisting of textile yarns covered with black powder or another fast-burning pyrotechnic composition and a flexible protective covering, or consisting of a core of black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a device to a charge or primer.
Cutters, cable, explosive. Articles consisting of a knife-edged device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into an anvil.
Detonator assemblies, non-electric, for blasting. Non-electric detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, shock tube, flash tube, or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous design or incorporate delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating detonating cord are included. Other detonating relays are included in Detonators, nonelectric.
Detonators. Articles consisting of a small metal or plastic tube containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN, or combinations of explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train. They may be constructed to detonate instantaneously, or may contain a delay element. They may contain no more than 10 g of total explosives weight, excluding ignition and delay charges, per unit. The term includes: detonators for ammunition; detonators for blasting, both electric and non-electric; and detonating relays without flexible detonating cord.
Dynamite. A detonating explosive containing a liquid explosive ingredient (generally nitroglycerin, similar organic nitrate esters, or both) that is uniformly mixed with an absorbent material, such as wood pulp, and usually contains materials such as nitrocellulose, sodium and ammonium nitrate.
Entire load and total contents. The phrase means such a substantial portion of the material explodes that the practical hazard should be assessed by assuming simultaneous explosion of the whole of the explosive content of the load or package.
Explode. The term indicates those explosive effects capable of endangering life and property through blast, heat, and projection of missiles. It encompasses both deflagration and detonation.
Explosion of the total contents. The phrase is used in testing a single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages.
Explosive, blasting. Detonating explosive substances used in mining, construction, and similar tasks. Blasting explosives are assigned to one of five types. In addition to the ingredients listed below for each type, blasting explosives may also contain inert components, such as kieselguhr, and other minor ingredients, such as coloring agents and stabilizers.
Explosive, blasting, type A. Substances consisting of liquid organic nitrates, such as nitroglycerin, or a mixture of such ingredients with one or more of the following: nitrocellulose, ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates, aromatic nitro-derivatives, or combustible materials, such as wood-meal and aluminum powder. Such explosives must be in powdery, gelatinous, plastic or elastic form. The term includes dynamite, blasting gelatine and gelatine dynamites.
Explosive, blasting, type B. Substances consisting of a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with an explosive, such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other substances, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a mixture of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives may not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates.
Explosive, blasting, type C. Substances consisting of a mixture of either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium perchlorate with organic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a hydrocarbon. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin or any similar liquid organic nitrate.
Explosive, blasting, type D. Substances consisting of a mixture of organic nitrate compounds and combustible materials, such as hydrocarbons and aluminum powder. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin, any similar liquid organic nitrate, chlorate or ammonium-nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives.
Explosive, blasting, type E. Substances consisting of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizer, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include nitro-derivatives, such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or aluminum powder. The term includes: explosives, emulsion; explosives, slurry; and explosives, watergel.
Explosive, deflagrating. A substance, e.g., propellant, which reacts by deflagration rather than detonation when ignited and used in its normal manner.
Explosive, detonating. A substance which reacts by detonation rather than deflagration when initiated and used in its normal manner.
Explosive, extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). A substance which, although capable of sustaining a detonation, has demonstrated through tests that it is so insensitive that there is very little probability of accidental initiation.
Explosive, primary. Explosive substance which is manufactured with a view to producing a practical effect by explosion, is very sensitive to heat, impact, or friction, and even in very small quantities, detonates. The major primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead styphnate.
Explosive, secondary. An explosive substance which is relatively insensitive (when compared to primary explosives) and is usually initiated by primary explosives with or without the aid of boosters or supplementary charges. Such an explosive may react as a deflagrating or as a detonating explosive.
Fireworks. Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment.
Flares. Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are designed to illuminate, identify, signal, or warn. The term includes: flares, aerial and flares, surface.
Flash powder. Pyrotechnic substance which, when ignited, produces an intense light.
Fracturing devices, explosive, for oil wells, without detonators. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a casing without the means of initiation. They are used to fracture the rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock.
Fuse/Fuze. Although these two words have a common origin (French fusee, fusil) and are sometimes considered to be different spellings, it is useful to maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord-like igniting device, whereas fuze refers to a device used in ammunition which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic components to initiate a train by deflagration or detonation.
Fuse, igniter. Articles consisting of a metal tube with a core of deflagrating explosives.
Fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating (Quickmatch). Article consisting of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder. It burns with an external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc.
Fuse, safety. Article consisting of a core of fine-grained black powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective outer coverings. When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without any explosive effect.
Fuzes. Articles designed to start a detonation or deflagration in ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic components and generally protective features. The term includes: Fuzes, detonating; fuzes detonating with protective features; and fuzes igniting.
Grenades, hand or rifle. Articles which are designed to be thrown by hand or to be projected by rifle. The term includes: grenades, hand or rifle, with bursting charge; and grenades, practice, hand or rifle. The term excludes: grenades, smoke.
Igniters. Articles containing one or more explosive substance used to start deflagration of an explosive train. They may be actuated chemically, electrically, or mechanically. The term excludes: cord, igniter; fuse, igniter; fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating; fuze, igniting; lighters, fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating; fuzes, igniting; lighters, fuse; primers, cap type; and primers, tubular.
Ignition, means of. A general term used in connection with the method employed to ignite a deflagrating train of explosive or pyrotechnic substances (for example: a primer for propelling charge, an igniter for a rocket motor or an igniting fuze).
Initiation, means of. (1) A device intended to cause the detonation of an explosive (for example: detonator, detonator for ammunition, or detonating fuze).
(2) The term with its own means of initiation means that the contrivance has its normal initiating device assembled to it and this device is considered to present a significant risk during transport but not one great enough to be unacceptable. The term does not apply, however, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation, provided the device is packaged so as to eliminate the risk of causing detonation of the contrivance in the event of functioning of the initiating device. The initiating device can even be assembled in the contrivance provided there are protective features ensuring that the device is very unlikely to cause detonation of the contrivance under conditions which are associated with transport.
(3) For the purposes of classification, any means of initiation without two effective protective features should be regarded as Compatibility Group B; an article with its own means of initiation, without two effective protective features, is Compatibility Group F. A means of initiation which itself possesses two effective protective features is Compatibility Group D, and an article with its own means of initiation which possesses two effective features is Compatibility Group D or E. A means of initiation, adjudged as having two effective protective features, must be approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. A common and effective way of achieving the necessary degree of protection is to use a means of initiation which incorporates two or more independent safety features.
Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well, without detonator. Articles consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, into which are inserted shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of initiation.
Lighters, fuse. Articles of various design actuated by friction, percussion, or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse.
Mass explosion. Explosion which affects almost the entire load virtually instantaneously.
Mines. Articles consisting normally of metal or composition receptacles and bursting charge. They are designed to be operated by the passage of ships, vehicles, or personnel. The term includes Bangalore torpedoes.
Powder cake (powder paste). Substance consisting of nitrocellulose impregnated with not more than 60 percent of nitroglycerin or other liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these.
Powder, smokeless. Substance based on nitrocellulose used as propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base (nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/nitroguanidine). Cast pressed or bag-charges of smokeless powder are listed under charges, propelling and charges, propelling for cannon.
Primers, cap type. Articles consisting of a metal or plastic cap containing a small amount of primary explosive mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting elements in small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for propelling charges.
Primers, tubular. Articles consisting of a primer for ignition and an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive, such as black powder, used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, etc.
Projectiles. Articles, such as a shell or bullet, which are projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle, or other small arm. They may be inert, with or without tracer, or may contain a burster, expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: projectiles, inert, with tracer; projectiles, with burster or expelling charge; and projectiles, with bursting charge.
Propellant, liquid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating liquid explosive, used for propulsion.
Propellant, solid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating solid explosive, used for propulsion.
Propellants. Deflagrating explosives used for propulsion or for reducing the drag of projectiles.
Release devices, explosive. Articles consisting of a small charge of explosive with means of initiation. They sever rods or links to release equipment quickly.
Rocket motors. Articles consisting of a solid, liquid, or hypergolic propellant contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They are designed to propel a rocket or guided missile. The term includes: rocket motors; rocket motors with hypergolic liquids with or without an expelling charge; and rocket motors, liquid fuelled.
Rockets. Articles containing a rocket motor and a payload which may be an explosive warhead or other device. The term includes: guided missiles; rockets, line-throwing; rockets, liquid fuelled, with bursting charge; rockets, with bursting charge; rockets, with expelling charge; and rockets, with inert head.
Signals. Articles consisting of pyrotechnic substances designed to produce signals by means of sound, flame, or smoke or any combination thereof. The term includes: signal devices, hand; signals, distress ship; signals, railway track, explosive; signals, smoke.
Sounding devices, explosive. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive. They are dropped from ships and function when they reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed.
Substance, explosive, very insensitive (Substance, EVI) N.O.S. Substances which present a mass explosive hazard but which are so insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation, or of transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of transport and which have passed test series 5.
Torpedoes. Articles containing an explosive or non-explosive propulsion system and designed to be propelled through water. They may contain an inert head or warhead. The term includes: torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with inert head; torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with or without bursting charge; and torpedoes, with bursting charge.
Tracers for ammunition. Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile.
Warheads. Articles containing detonating explosives, designed to be fitted to a rocket, guided missile, or torpedo. They may contain a burster or expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: warhead rocket with bursting charge; and warheads, torpedo, with bursting charge.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994]
§ 173.60
General packaging requirements for explosives.
(a) Unless otherwise provided in this subpart and in § 173.7(a), packaging used for Class 1 (explosives) materials must meet Packing Group II requirements. Each packaging used for an explosive must be capable of meeting the test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the specified level of performance, and the applicable general packaging requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) The general requirements for packaging of explosives are as follows:
(1) Nails, staples, and other closure devices, made of metal, having no protective covering may not penetrate to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosive against contact with the metal.
(2) The closure device of containers for liquid explosives must provide double protection against leakage, such as a screw cap secured in place with tape.
(3) Inner packagings, fittings, and cushioning materials, and the placing of explosive substances or articles in packages, must be such that the explosive substance is prevented from becoming loose in the outer packaging during transportation. Metallic components of articles must be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive substances not enclosed in an outer casing must be separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, molded plastics or receptacles may be used for this purpose.
(4) When the packaging includes water that could freeze during transportation, a sufficient amount of anti-freeze, such as denatured ethyl alcohol, must be added to the water to prevent freezing. If the anti-freeze creates a fire hazard, it may not be used. When a percentage of water in the substance is specified, the combined weight of water and anti-freeze may be substituted.
(5) If an article is fitted with its own means of ignition or initiation, it must be effectively protected from accidental actuation during normal conditions of transportation.
(6) The entry of explosive substances into the recesses of double-seamed metal packagings must be prevented.
(7) The closure device of a metal drum must include a suitable gasket; if the closure device includes metal-to-metal screw-threads, the ingress of explosive substances into the threading must be prevented.
(8) Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A2, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal receptacles), the metal packaging should be provided with an inner liner or coating.
(9) Packagings must be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafe in transportation, or the hazard division or compatibility group to change (see § 173.24(e)(2)).
(10) An explosive article containing an electrical means of initiation that is sensitive to external electromagnetic radiation, must have its means of initiation effectively protected from electromagnetic radiation sources (for example, radar or radio transmitters) through either design of the packaging or of the article, or both.
(11) Plastic packagings may not be able to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity to cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or inadvertently function. Metal packagings must be compatible with the explosive substance they contain.
(12) Explosive substances may not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the package.
(13) Packagings for water soluble substances must be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized substances must be closed to prevent changes in concentration during transport. When containing less alcohol, water, or phlegmatizer than specified in its proper shipping description, the substance is a “forbidden” material.
[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.61
Mixed packaging requirements.
(a) Unless specifically authorized in this subchapter, an explosive may not be packed in the same outside packaging with any other material, unless packaged by the DOD or DOE in accordance with § 173.7(a) of this subchapter.
(b) Hardware necessary for assembly of explosive articles at the point-of-use may be packed in the same outside packaging with the explosive articles. The hardware must be securely packed in a separate inside packaging. Sufficient cushioning materials must be used to ensure that all inside packagings are securely packed in the outside packaging.
(c) The following explosives may not be packed together with other Class 1 explosives: UN 0029, UN 0030, UN 0073, UN 0106, UN 0107, UN 0255, UN 0257, UN 0267, UN 0360, UN 0361, UN 0364, UN 0365, UN 0366, UN 0367, UN 0408, UN 0409, UN 0410, UN 0455, UN 0456, and NA 0350. These explosives may be mix-packed with each other in accordance with the compatibility requirements prescribed in paragraph (e).
(d) Division 1.1 and 1.2 explosives may not be packed with the following explosives: UN 0333, UN 0334, UN 0335, UN 0336, and UN 0337.
(e) Except as prescribed in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, different explosives may be packed in one outside packaging in accordance with the following compatibility requirements:
(1) Explosives of the same compatibility group and same division number may be packed together.
(2) Explosives of the same compatibility group or authorized combination of compatibility group but different division number may be packed together, provided that the whole package is treated as though its entire contents were comprised of the lower division number. For example, a mixed package of Division 1.2 explosives (Class A explosive) and Division 1.4 explosives (Class C explosive), compatibility group D, must be treated as 1.2D explosives. However, when 1.5D explosives (blasting agents) are packed together with 1.2D explosives (Class A explosives), the whole package must be treated as 1.1D explosives.
(3) Explosives of compatibility group S may be packed with explosives of all other compatibility group except A and L.
(4) Explosives of compatibility group L shall only be packed with an identical explosive.
(5) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, or E may be packed together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group E.
(6) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, E, or N may be packed together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D.
(7) Explosives substances of compatibility groups C and D may be packaged together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility group D.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.62
Specific packaging requirements for explosives.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, when the § 172.101 table specifies that an explosive must be packaged in accordance with this section, only non-bulk packagings which conform to the provisions of paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) of this section and the applicable requirements in §§ 173.60 and 173.61 may be used unless otherwise approved by the Associate Administrator. Intermediate bulk packagings may be used for explosives assigned to Packing Instruction 117 in paragraph (b) of this section. Intermediate bulk packagings must conform with the requirements of this subchapter.
(b) Explosives Table. The Explosives Table specifies the Packing Instructions assigned to each explosive. Explosives are identified in the first column in numerical sequence by their identification number (ID #), which is listed in column 4 of the § 172.101 table, of this subchapter. The second column of the Explosives Table specifies the Packing Instruction (PI) which must be used for packaging the explosive. The Explosives Packing Method Table in paragraph (c) of this section defines the methods of packaging. The Packing Instructions are identified using a 3 digit designation. The Packing Instruction prefixed by the letters “US” is particular to the United States and not found in applicable international regulations.
Explosives Table
ID# | PI
UN0004 | 112
UN0005 | 130
UN0006 | 130
UN0007 | 130
UN0009 | 130
UN0010 | 130
UN0012 | 130
UN0014 | 130
UN0015 | 130
UN0016 | 130
UN0018 | 130
UN0019 | 130
UN0020 | 101
UN0021 | 101
UN0027 | 113
UN0028 | 113
UN0029 | 131
UN0030 | 131
UN0033 | 130
UN0034 | 130
UN0035 | 130
UN0037 | 130
UN0038 | 130
UN0039 | 130
UN0042 | 132
UN0043 | 133
UN0044 | 133
UN0048 | 130
UN0049 | 135
UN0050 | 135
UN0054 | 135
UN0055 | 136
UN0056 | 130
UN0059 | 137
UN0060 | 132
UN0065 | 139
UN0066 | 140
UN0070 | 134
UN0072 | 112(a)
UN0073 | 133
UN0074 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0075 | 115
UN0076 | 112
UN0077 | 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0078 | 112
UN0079 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0081 | 116
UN0082 | 116 or 117
UN0083 | 116
UN0084 | 116
UN0092 | 135
UN0093 | 135
UN0094 | 113
UN0099 | 134
UN0101 | 140
UN0102 | 139
UN0103 | 140
UN0104 | 139
UN0105 | 140
UN0106 | 141
UN0107 | 141
UN0110 | 141
UN0113 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0114 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0118 | 112
UN0121 | 142
UN0124 | US1
UN0129 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0130 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0131 | 142
UN0132 | 114(b)
UN0133 | 112(a)
UN0135 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0136 | 130
UN0137 | 130
UN0138 | 130
UN0143 | 115
UN0144 | 115
UN0146 | 112
UN0147 | 112(b)
UN0150 | 112(a) or 112(b)
UN0151 | 112
UN0153 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0154 | 112
UN0155 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0159 | 111
UN0160 | 114(b)
UN0161 | 114(b)
UN0167 | 130
UN0168 | 130
UN0169 | 130
UN0171 | 130
UN0173 | 134
UN0174 | 134
UN0180 | 130
UN0181 | 130
UN0182 | 130
UN0183 | 130
UN0186 | 130
UN0190 | 101
UN0191 | 135
UN0192 | 135
| UN0193 | 135
UN0194 | 135
UN0195 | 135
UN0196 | 135
UN0197 | 135
UN0204 | 134
UN0207 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0208 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0209 | 112
UN0212 | 133
UN0213 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0214 | 112
UN0215 | 112
UN0216 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0217 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0218 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0219 | 112
UN0220 | 112
UN0221 | 130
UN0222 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0224 | 110(a) or 110(b)
UN0225 | 133
UN0226 | 112(a)
UN0234 | 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0235 | 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0236 | 114(a) or 114(b)
UN0237 | 138
UN0238 | 130
UN0240 | 130
UN0241 | 116 or 117
UN0242 | 130
UN0243 | 130
UN0244 | 130
UN0245 | 130
UN0246 | 130
UN0247 | 101
UN0248 | 144
UN0249 | 144
UN0250 | 101
UN0254 | 130
UN0255 | 131
UN0257 | 141
UN0266 | 112
UN0267 | 131
UN0268 | 133
UN0271 | 143
UN0272 | 143
UN0275 | 134
UN0276 | 134
UN0277 | 134
UN0278 | 134
UN0279 | 130
UN0280 | 130
UN0281 | 130
UN0282 | 112
UN0283 | 132
UN0284 | 141
UN0285 | 141
UN0286 | 130
UN0287 | 130
UN0288 | 138
UN0289 | 139
UN0290 | 139
UN0291 | 130
UN0292 | 141
UN0293 | 141
UN0294 | 130
UN0295 | 130
UN0296 | 134
UN0297 | 130
UN0299 | 130
UN0300 | 130
UN0301 | 130
UN0303 | 130
UN0305 | 113
UN0306 | 133
UN0312 | 135
UN0313 | 135
UN0314 | 142
UN0315 | 142
UN0316 | 141
UN0317 | 141
UN0318 | 141
UN0319 | 133
UN0320 | 133
UN0321 | 130
UN0322 | 101
UN0323 | 134
UN0324 | 130
UN0325 | 142
UN0326 | 130
UN0327 | 130
UN0328 | 130
UN0329 | 130
UN0330 | 130
UN0331 | 116 or 117
UN0332 | 116 or 117
UN0333 | 135
UN0334 | 135
UN0335 | 135
UN0336 | 135
UN0337 | 135
UN0338 | 130
UN0339 | 130
UN0340 | 112(a) or 112(b)
UN0341 | 112(b)
UN0342 | 114(a)
UN0343 | 111
UN0344 | 130
UN0345 | 130
UN0346 | 130
UN0347 | 130
UN0348 | 130
UN0349 | 101
UN0350 | 101
UN0351 | 101
UN0352 | 101
UN0353 | 101
UN0354 | 101
UN0355 | 101
UN0356 | 101
UN0357 | 101
UN0358 | 101
UN0359 | 101
UN0360 | 131
UN0361 | 131
UN0362 | 130
UN0363 | 130
UN0364 | 133
UN0365 | 133
UN0366 | 133
UN0367 | 141
UN0368 | 141
UN0369 | 130
UN0370 | 130
UN0371 | 130
UN0372 | 141
UN0373 | 135
UN0374 | 134
UN0375 | 134
UN0376 | 133
UN0377 | 133
UN0378 | 133
UN0379 | 136
| UN0380 | 101
UN0381 | 134
UN0382 | 101
UN0383 | 101
UN0384 | 101
UN0385 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0386 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0387 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0388 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0389 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0390 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0391 | 112(a)
UN0392 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0393 | 112(b)
UN0394 | 112(a)
UN0395 | 101
UN0396 | 101
UN0397 | 101
UN0398 | 101
UN0399 | 101
UN0400 | 101
UN0401 | 112
UN0402 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0403 | 135
UN0404 | 135
UN0405 | 135
UN0406 | 114(b)
UN0407 | 114(b)
UN0408 | 141
UN0409 | 141
UN0410 | 141
UN0411 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0412 | 130
UN0413 | 130
UN0414 | 130
UN0415 | 143
UN0417 | 130
UN0418 | 135
UN0419 | 135
UN0420 | 135
UN0421 | 135
UN0424 | 130
UN0425 | 130
UN0426 | 130
UN0427 | 130
UN0428 | 135
UN0429 | 135
UN0430 | 135
UN0431 | 135
UN0432 | 135
UN0433 | 111
UN0434 | 130
UN0435 | 130
UN0436 | 130
UN0437 | 130
UN0438 | 130
UN0439 | 137
UN0440 | 137
UN0441 | 137
UN0442 | 137
UN0443 | 137
UN0444 | 137
UN0445 | 137
UN0446 | 136
UN0447 | 136
UN0448 | 114(b)
UN0449 | 101
UN0450 | 101
UN0451 | 130
UN0452 | 141
UN0453 | 130
UN0454 | 142
UN0455 | 131
UN0456 | 131
UN0457 | 130
UN0458 | 130
UN0459 | 130
UN0460 | 130
UN0461 | 101
UN0462 | 101
UN0463 | 101
UN0464 | 101
UN0465 | 101
UN0466 | 101
UN0467 | 101
UN0468 | 101
UN0469 | 101
UN0470 | 101
UN0471 | 101
UN0472 | 101
UN0473 | 101
UN0474 | 101
UN0475 | 101
UN0476 | 101
UN0477 | 101
UN0478 | 101
UN0479 | 101
UN0480 | 101
UN0481 | 101
UN0482 | 101
UN0483 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0484 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0486 | 101
UN0487 | 135
UN0488 | 130
UN0489 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0490 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0491 | 143
UN0492 | 135
UN0493 | 135
UN0494 | US1
UN0495 | 115
UN0496 | 112(b) or 112(c)
UN0497 | 115
UN0498 | 114(b)
UN0499 | 114(b)
UN0500 | 131
NA0124 | US1
NA0276 | 134
NA0323 | 134
NA0331 | 116 or 117
NA0337 | 135
NA0349 | 133
NA0494 | US1
(c) Explosives Packing Instruction Table. Explosives must be packaged in accordance with the following table:
(1) The first column lists, in alphanumeric sequence, the packing methods prescribed for explosives in the Explosives Table of paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) The second column specifies the inner packagings that are required. If inner packagings are not required, a notation of “Not necessary” appears in the column. The term “Not necessary” means that a suitable inner packaging may be used but is not required.
(3) The third column specifies the intermediate packagings that are required. If intermediate packagings are not required, a notation of “Not necessary” appears in the column. The term “Not necessary” means that a suitable intermediate packaging may be used but is not required.
(4) The fourth column specifies the outer packagings which are required. If inner packagings and/or intermediate packagings are specified in the second and third columns, then the packaging specified in the fourth column must be used as the outer packaging of a combination packaging; otherwise it may be used as a single packaging.
(5) Packing Instruction 101 may be used for any explosive substance or article if an equivalent level of safety is shown to be maintained subject to the approval of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
Table of Packing Methods
Packing instruction | Inner packagings | Intermediate packagings | Outer packagings
101 | This Packing Instruction may be used as an alternative to a specifically assigned packing method with the approval of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety prior to transportation. When this packing instruction is used, the following must be marked on the shipping documents: “Packaging approved by the competent authority of the United States of America (USA)”.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. Samples of new or existing explosive substances or articles may be transported as directed by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety for purposes including: testing, classification, research and development, quality control, or as a commercial sample. Explosive samples which are wetted or desensitized must be limited to 25 kg. Explosive samples which are not wetted or desensitized must be limited to 10 kg in small packages as specified by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety
110(a) | Bags | Bags | Drums.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. The Intermediate packagings must be filled with water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning 2. Outer packagings must be filled with water saturated material such as an anti-freeze solution or wetted cushioning. Outer packagings must be constructed and sealed to prevent evaporation of the wetting solution, except when 0224 is being carried dry | plastics textile, plastic coated or lined rubber textile, rubberized textile | plastics textile, plastic coated or lined rubber textile, rubberized Receptacles plastics metal | steel, removable head (1A2). plastics, removable head (1H2)
110(b) | Bags | Dividing partitions | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS For UN 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224, the following conditions must be satisfied: a. inner packagings must not contain more than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to dry substance); b. each inner packaging must be separated from other inner packagings by dividing partitions; and c. the outer packaging must not be partitioned with more than 25 compartments | rubber, conductive plastics, conductive Receptacles metal wood rubber, conductive plastics, conductive | metal wood plastics fibreboard | natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F).
111 PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums are used as outer packagings | Bags paper, waterproofed plastics textile, rubberized Sheets plastics textile, rubberized | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded (4H1). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums steel, removable head (1A2). aluminum, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibreboard (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids | Bags | Bags | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings must be lead free 2. Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof drums are used as the outer packaging 3. For UN 0072 and UN 0226, intermediate packagings are not required | paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics | plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded (4H1). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids other than powders PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings must be lead free 2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a maximum net mass of 30 kg. 3. For UN 0222 and UN 0223, inner packagings are not required | Bags paper, Kraft paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics textile textile, rubberized plastics woven plastics | Bags (for UN 0150 only) plastics textile, plastic coated or lined | Bags. woven plastics sift-proof (5H2/3). plastics, film (5H4). textile, sift-proof (5L2). textile, water resistant (5L3). paper, multiwall, water resistant (5M2). Boxes steel (4A). aluminium (4B). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof (4C2). plywood (4D) reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded (4H1). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(c)This packing instruction applies to solid dry powders | Bags | Bags | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings must be lead free 2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state. Bags must not exceed a maximum net mass of 30 kg. 3. Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging. 4. At least one of the packagings must be sift-proof | paper, multiwall, water resistant plastics woven plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood | paper, multiwall, water resistant with inner lining plastics Receptacles metal plastics | steel (4A). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G).
113 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0094 and UN 0305, no more than 50 g of substance must be packed in an inner packaging 2. For UN 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as the outer packaging 3. At least one of the packagings must be sift- proof 4. Sheets must only be used for UN 0028 | paper plastics textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper, kraft paper, waxed | | steel (4A). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G).
114(a) This packing instruction applies to wetted solids PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0077, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free 2. For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A2 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums are used as outer packagings 3. Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging | Bags plastics textile woven plastics Receptacles metal plastics | Bags plastics textile, plastic coated or lined Receptacles metal plastics | Boxes. steel (4A). natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
114(b) This packing instruction applies to dry solids | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings must be lead free 2. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, when metal drums (1A2 or 1B2) are used as the outer packaging, metal packagings must be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increased internal pressure from internal or external causes is prevented 3. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging | paper, kraft plastics textile, sift-proof woven plastics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard metal paper plastics woven plastics, sift-proof | | natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2) plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2) plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2)
115 | Receptacles | Bags | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For liquid explosives, inner packagings must be surrounded with non-combustible absorbent cushioning material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire liquid content. Metal receptacles should be cushioned from each other. The net mass of explosive per package may not exceed 30 kg when boxes are used as outer packaging. The net volume of explosive in each package other than boxes must not exceed 120 litres 2. For UN 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497 when boxes are used as the outer packaging, inner packagings must have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity each. A composite packaging consisting of a plastic receptacle in a metal drum (6HA1) may be used in lieu of combination packagings. Liquid substances must not freeze at temperatures above −15 °C (+5 °F) 3. For UN 0144, intermediate packagings are not necessary. | metal plastics | plastics in metal receptacles Drums metal | natural wood, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). Specification MC-200 containers may be used for transport by motor vehicle.
116 | Bags | Not necessary | Bags.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not necessary if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging 2. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in a material impervious to liquid 3. For UN 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric esters 4. For UN 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used as outer packagings 5. Bags (5H2 or 5H3) must be used only for UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332 6. For UN 0081, bags must not be used as outer packagings | paper, water and oil resistant plastics texitile, plasic coated or lined woven plasics, sift-proof Receptacles fibreboard, water resistant metal plastics wood, sift-proof Sheets paper, water resistant paper, waxed plastics | | woven plastics (5H1/2/3). paper, mulitwall, water resistant (5M2). plastics, film (5H4). textile, sift-proof (5L2). textile, water resistant (5L3). Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2). Jerricans. steel, removable head (3A2). plastics, removable head (3H2).
117 | Not necessary | Not necessary | IBCs.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. This packing instruction may only be used for explosives of 0082 when they are mixtures of ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives must not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, liquid or solid nitrocarbons, or chlorates. 2. This packing instruction may only be used for explosives of UN 0241 which consist of water as an essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizers, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but must not include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. 3. Metal IBCs must not be used for UN 0082 and 0241. 4. Flexible IBCs may only be used for solids. | | | metal (11A), (11B), (11N), (21A), (21B), (21N), (31A), (31B), (31N). flexible (13H2), (13H3), (13H4), (13L2), (13L3), (13L4), (13M2). rigid plastics (11H1), (11H2), (21H1), (21H2), (31H1), (31H2). composite (11HZ1), (11HZ2), (21HZ1), (21HZ2), (31HZ1), (31HZ2).
130 | Not necessary | Not necessary | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. The following applies to UN 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0238, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0459 and 0488. Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems must be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of transport. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for transport unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices. | | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood natural, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded (4H1). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
131 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels may not be used as inner packagings 2. For UN 0030, 0255 and 0456, inner packagings are not required when detonators are packed in pasteboard tubes, or when their leg wires are wound on spools with the caps either placed inside the spool or securely taped to the wire on the spool, so as to restrict freedom of movement of the caps and to protect them from impact forces 3. For UN 0360, 0361 and 0500, detonators are not required to be attached to the safety fuse, metal-clad mild detonating cord, detonating cord, or shock tube. Inner packagings are not required if the packing configuration restricts freedom of movement of the caps and protects them from impact forces | paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
132(a) | Not necessary | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2).
| 132(b) | Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics Sheets paper plastics | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2).
133 | Receptacles | Receptacles | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306 trays are not authorized as inner packagings 2. Intermediate packagings are only required when trays are used as inner packagings fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions fibreboard plastics wood | | fibreboard metal plastics wood | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2).
134 | Bags water resistant Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets fibreboard, corrugated Tubes fibreboard | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2).
| 135 | Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper plastics | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, expanded (4H1). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
136 | Bags plastics textile Boxes. fibreboard plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B) wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
137 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: For UN 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity must face downwards and the package marked “THIS SIDE UP”. When the shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities must face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the event of accidental initiation plastics Boxes fibreboard Tubes fibreboard metal plastics Dividing partitions in the outer packagings | | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G).
138 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary | plastics | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2).
139 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord must be sealed, for example, by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of CORD DETONATING flexible must be fastened securely 2. For UN 0065 and UN 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are fastened securely in coils | plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Reels Sheets paper plastics | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
140 | Bags | Not necessary | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. If the ends of UN 0105 are sealed, no inner packagings are required 2. For UN 0101, the packaging must be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both ends of the tube are covered with removable caps 3. For UN 0101, steel or aluminium boxes or drums must not be used | plastics Reels Sheets paper, kraft plastics | | steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G).
141 | Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood Dividing partitions in the outer packagings | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
142 | Bags paper plastics Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics wood Sheets paper Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics | Not necessary | Boxes. steel (4A). aluminium (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
143 | Bag | Not necessary | Boxes.
| PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: 1. For UN 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491 when metal packagings are used, metal packagings must be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes is prevented 2. Composite packagings (6HH2) (plastic receptacle with outer solid box) may be used in lieu of combination packagings | paper, kraft plastics textile textile, rubberized Receptacles fibreboard metal plastics Trays, fitted with dividing partitions plastics wood | | steel (4A). aluminum (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1). wood, natural, sift proof walls (4C2). plywood (4D). reconstituted wood (4F). fibreboard (4G). plastics, solid (4H2). Drums. steel, removable head (1A2). aluminium, removable head (1B2). plywood (1D). fibre (1G). plastics, removable head (1H2).
144 | Receptacles | Not necessary | Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: For UN 0248 and UN 0249, packagings must be protected against the ingress of water. When CONTRIVANCES, WATER ACTIVATED are transported unpackaged, they must be provided with at least two independent protective features which prevent the ingress of water | fibreboard metal plastics Dividing partitions in the outer packagings | | 2steel (4A). aluminum (4B). wood, natural, ordinary (4C1) with metal liner. plywood (4D) with metal liner. reconstituted wood (4F) with metal liner. plastics, expanded (4H1).
US 1
1. A jet perforating gun, charged, oil well may be transported under the following conditions:
a. Initiation devices carried on the same motor vehicle or offshore supply vessel must be segregated; each kind from every other kind, and from any gun, tool or other supplies, unless approved in accordance with § 173.56. Segregated initiation devices must be carried in a container having individual pockets for each such device or in a fully enclosed steel container lined with a non-sparking material. No more than two segregated initiation devices per gun may be carried on the same motor vehicle.
b. Each shaped charge affixed to the gun may not contain more than 112 g (4 ounces) of explosives.
c. Each shaped charge if not completely enclosed in glass or metal, must be fully protected by a metal cover after installation in the gun.
d. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.1D or 1.4D may be transported by highway by private or contract carriers engaged in oil well operations.
(i) A motor vehicle transporting a gun must have specially built racks or carrying cases designed and constructed so that the gun is securely held in place during transportation and is not subject to damage by contact, one to the other or any other article or material carried in the vehicle; and
(ii) The assembled gun packed on the vehicle may not extend beyond the body of the motor vehicle.
e. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.4D may be transported by a private offshore supply vessel only when the gun is carried in a motor vehicle as specified in paragraph (d) of this packing method or on offshore well tool pallets provided that:
(i) All the conditions specified in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this packing method are met;
(ii) The total explosive contents do not exceed 90.8 kg (200 pounds) per tool pallet;
(iii) Each cargo vessel compartment may contain up to 90.8 kg (200 pounds) of explosive content if the segregation requirements in § 176.83(b)(3) of this subchapter are met; and
(iv) When more than one vehicle or tool pallet is stowed “on deck” a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m (9.8 feet) must be provided.
(d) Class 1 (explosive) materials owned by the Department of Defense and packaged prior to January 1, 1990, in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter in effect at that time, are excepted from the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter provided the packagings have maintained their integrity and the explosive material is declared as government-owned goods packaged prior to January 1, 1990.
[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 24720, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 1884, Jan. 12, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.63
Packaging exceptions.
(a) Cord, detonating (UN 0065), having an explosive content not exceeding 6.5 g (0.23 ounces) per 30 centimeter length (one linear foot) may be offered for transportation domestically and transported as Cord, detonating (UN 0289), Division 1.4 Compatibility Group D (1.4D) explosives, if the gross weight of all packages containing Cord, detonating (UN 0065), does not exceed 45 kg (99 pounds) per:
(1) Transport vehicle, freight container, or cargo-only aircraft;
(2) Off-shore down-hole tool pallet carried on an off-shore supply vessel;
(3) Cargo compartment of a cargo vessel; or
(4) Passenger-carrying aircraft used to transport personnel to remote work sites, such as offshore drilling units.
(b) Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices. (1) Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices (which are used to project fastening devices) which have been classed as a Division 1.4S explosive may be reclassed, offered for transportation, and transported as ORM-D material when packaged in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section; such transportation is excepted from the requirements of subparts E (Labeling) and F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices that may be shipped as ORM-D material is limited to:
(i) Ammunition for rifle, pistol or shotgun;
(ii) Ammunition with inert projectiles or blank ammunition;
(iii) Ammunition having no tear gas, incendiary, or detonating explosive projectiles;
(iv) Ammunition not exceeding 12.7 mm (50 caliber or 0.5 inch) for rifle or pistol, cartridges or 8 gauge for shotshells; and
(v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening devices.
(2) Packaging for cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices as ORM-D material must be as follows:
(i) Ammunition must be packed in inside boxes, or in partitions which fit snugly in the outside packaging, or in metal clips;
(ii) Primers must be protected from accidental initiation;
(iii) Inside boxes, partitions or metal clips must be packed in securely-closed strong outside packagings;
(iv) Maximum gross weight is limited to 30 kg (66 pounds) per package; and
(v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening devices and 22 caliber rim-fire cartridges may be packaged loose in strong outside packagings.
(c)-(e) [Reserved]
(f) Detonators containing no more than 1 g explosive (excluding ignition and delay charges) that are electric blasting caps with leg wires 4 feet long or longer, delay connectors in plastic sheaths, or blasting caps with empty plastic tubing 12 feet long or longer may be packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging requirements of § 173.62:
(1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;
(2) IME Standard 22 container or compartment is used as the outer packaging;
(3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and
(4) No material may be loaded on top of the IME Standard 22 container and no material may be loaded against the outside door of the IME Standard 22 compartment.
(g) Detonators that are classed as 1.4B or 1.4S and contain no more than 1 g of explosive (excluding ignition and delay charges) may be packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging requirements of § 173.62:
(1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;
(2) IME Standard 22 container is used as the outer packaging;
(3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and
(4) Each inner packaging is marked “l.4B Detonators” or “1.4S Detonators”, as appropriate.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50536, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996]

Subpart D—Definitions Classification, Packing Group Assignments and Exceptions for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

Source:
Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.
§ 173.115
Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3—Definitions.
(a) Division 2.1 (Flammable gas). For the purpose of this subchapter, a flammable gas (Division 2.1) means any material which is a gas at 20 °C (68 °F) or less and 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) of pressure (a material which has a boiling point of 20 °C (68 °F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi)) which—
(1) Is ignitable at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) when in a mixture of 13 percent or less by volume with air; or
(2) Has a flammable range at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) with air of at least 12 percent regardless of the lower limit.
Except for aerosols, the limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) of this section shall be determined at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) of pressure and a temperature of 20 °C (68 °F) in accordance with ASTM E681-85, Standard Test Method for Concentration Limits of Flammability of Chemicals or other equivalent method approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The flammability of aerosols is determined by the tests specified in § 173.306(i) of this part.
(b) Division 2.2 (non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas—including compressed gas, liquefied gas, pressurized cryogenic gas, compressed gas in solution, asphyxiant gas and oxidizing gas). For the purpose of this subchapter, a non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas (Division 2.2) means any material (or mixture) which—
(1) Exerts in the packaging an absolute pressure of 280 kPa (40.6 psia) or greater at 20 °C (68 °F), and
(2) Does not meet the definition of Division 2.1 or 2.3.
(c) Division 2.3 (Gas poisonous by inhalation). For the purpose of this subchapter, a gas poisonous by inhalation (Division 2.3) means a material which is a gas at 20 °C (68 °F) or less and a pressure of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) (a material which has a boiling point of 20 °C (68 °F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi)) and which—
(1) Is known to be so toxic to humans as to pose a hazard to health during transportation, or
(2) In the absence of adequate data on human toxicity, is presumed to be toxic to humans because when tested on laboratory animals it has an LC50 value of not more than 5000 ml/m^3 (see § 173.116(a) of this subpart for assignment of Hazard Zones A, B, C or D). LC50 values for mixtures may be determined using the formula in § 173.133(b)(1)(i) of this subpart.
(d) Non-liquefied compressed gas. A non-liquefied compressed gas means a gas, other than in solution, which in a packaging under the charged pressure is entirely gaseous at a temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
(e) Liquefied compressed gas. A liquefied compressed gas means a gas which in a packaging under the charged pressure, is partially liquid at a temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
(f) Compressed gas in solution. A compressed gas in solution is a non-liquefied compressed gas which is dissolved in a solvent.
(g) Cryogenic liquid. A cryogenic liquid means a refrigerated liquefied gas having a boiling point colder than -−90 °C (−130 °F) at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) absolute. A material meeting this definition is subject to requirements of this subchapter without regard to whether it meets the definition of a non-flammable, non-poisonous compressed gas in paragraph (b) of this section.
(h) Flammable range. The term flammable range means the difference between the minimum and maximum volume percentages of the material in air that forms a flammable mixture.
(i) Service pressure. The term service pressure means the authorized pressure marking on the packaging. For example, for a cylinder marked “DOT 3A1800”, the service pressure is 12410 kPa (1800 psi).
(j) Refrigerant gas or Dispersant gas. The terms Refrigerant gas or Dispersant gas apply to all non-poisonous refrigerant gases, dispersant gases (fluorocarbons) listed in §§ 172.101, 173.304(a)(2), 173.314(c), 173.315(a)(1) and 173.315(h), and mixtures thereof, or any other compressed gas having a vapor pressure not exceeding 1792 kPa (260 psi) at 54 °C (130 °F), and restricted for use as a refrigerant, dispersant or blowing agent.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67506, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.116
Class 2—Assignment of hazard zone.
(a) The hazard zone of a Class 2, Division 2.3 material is assigned in column 7 of the § 172.101 table. There are no hazard zones for Divisions 2.1 and 2.2. When the § 172.101 table provides more than one hazard zone for a Division 2.3 material, or indicates that the hazard zone be determined on the basis of the grouping criteria for Division 2.3, the hazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria:
Hazard zone | Inhalation toxicity
A | LC 50 less than or equal to 200 ppm.
B | LC 50 greater than 200 ppm and less than or equal to 1000 ppm.
C | LC 50 greater than 1000 ppm and less than or equal to 3000 ppm.
D | LC 50 greater than 3000 ppm or less than or equal to 5000 ppm.
(b) The criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section are represented graphically in § 173.133, Figure 1.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]
§§ 173.117-173.119
[Reserved]
§ 173.120
Class 3—Definitions.
(a) Flammable liquid. For the purpose of this subchapter, a flammable liquid (Class 3) means a liquid having a flash point of not more than 60.5 °C (141 °F), or any material in a liquid phase with a flash point at or above 37.8 °C (100 °F) that is intentionally heated and offered for transportation or transported at or above its flash point in a bulk packaging, with the following exceptions:
(1) Any liquid meeting one of the definitions specified in § 173.115.
(2) Any mixture having one or more components with a flash point of 60.5 °C (141 °F) or higher, that make up at least 99 percent of the total volume of the mixture, if the mixture is not offered for transportation or transported at or above its flash point.
(3) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 °C (95 °F) which does not sustain combustion according to ASTM 4206 or the procedure in appendix H of this part.
(4) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 °C (95 °F) and with a fire point greater than 100 °C (212 °F) according to ISO 2592.
(5) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35 °C (95 °F) which is in a water-miscible solution with a water content of more than 90 percent by mass.
(b) Combustible liquid. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, a combustible liquid means any liquid that does not meet the definition of any other hazard class specified in this subchapter and has a flash point above 60.5 °C (141 °F) and below 93 °C (200 °F).
(2) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or above 38 °C (100 °F) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard class may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply to transportation by vessel or aircraft, except where other means of transportation is impracticable. An elevated temperature material that meets the definition of a Class 3 material because it is intentionally heated and offered for transportation or transported at or above its flash point may not be reclassed as a combustible liquid.
(3) A combustible liquid which does not sustain combustion is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter as a combustible liquid. Either the test method specified in ASTM 4206 or the procedure in appendix H of this part may be used to determine if a material sustains combustion when heated under test conditions and exposed to an external source of flame.
(c) Flash point. (1) Flash point means the minimum temperature at which a liquid gives off vapor within a test vessel in sufficient concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of the liquid. It shall be determined as follows:
(i) For a homogeneous, single-phase, liquid having a viscosity less than 45 S.U.S. at 38 °C (100 °F) that does not form a surface film while under test, one of the following test procedures shall be used:
(A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, (ASTM D 56);
(B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3278); or
(C) Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3828).
(ii) For a liquid other than one meeting all of the criteria of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, one of the following test procedures shall be used:
(A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Pensky—Martens Closed Tester, (ASTM D 93). For cutback asphalt, use Method B of ASTM D 93 or alternate tests authorized in this standard; or
(B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash Closed Tester (ASTM D 3278).
(2) For a liquid that is a mixture of compounds that have different volatility and flash points, its flash point shall be determined as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, on the material in the form in which it is to be shipped. If it is determined by this test that the flash point is higher than −7 °C (20 °F) a second test shall be made as follows: a portion of the mixture shall be placed in an open beaker (or similar container) of such dimensions that the height of the liquid can be adjusted so that the ratio of the volume of the liquid to the exposed surface area is 6 to one. The liquid shall be allowed to evaporate under ambient pressure and temperature (20 to 25 °C (68 to 77 °F)) for a period of 4 hours or until 10 percent by volume has evaporated, whichever comes first. A flash point is then run on a portion of the liquid remaining in the evaporation container and the lower of the two flash points shall be the flash point of the material.
(3) For flash point determinations by Setaflash closed tester, the glass syringe specified need not be used as the method of measurement of the test sample if a minimum quantity of 2 ml (0.1 ounce) is assured in the test cup.
(d) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material is greater or less than indicated by the criteria specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may revise the classification or make the material subject or not subject to the requirements of parts 170-189 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67506, 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.121
Class 3—Assignment of packing group.
(a) The packing group of a Class 3 material is as assigned in column 5 of the § 172.101 table. When the § 172.101 table provides more than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall be determined by applying the following criteria:
Packing group | Flash point (closed-cup) | Initial boiling point
I | | ≤35 °C (95 °F)
II | <23 °C (73 °F) | > °C (95 °F)
III | ≥23 °C, ≤ 60.5 °C (141 °F) | > °C (95 °F)
(b) Criteria for inclusion of viscous Class 3 materials in Packing Group III. (1) Viscous Class 3 materials in Packing Group II with a flash point of less than 23 °C (73 °F) may be grouped in Packing Group III provided that—
(i) Less than 3 percent of the clear solvent layer separates in the solvent separation test;
(ii) The mixture contains not more than 5 percent of substances in Packing Group I or II of Division 6.1 or Class 8, or not more than 5 percent of substances in Packing Group I of Class 3 requiring a POISON or CORROSIVE subsidiary label (Note: The mixture is not necessarily required to bear a POISON or CORROSIVE subsidiary risk label.);
(iii) The capacity of the packaging is not more than 30 L (7.9 gallons); and
(iv) The viscosity and flash point are in accordance with the following table:
Flow time t in seconds | Jet diameter in mm | Flash point c.c.
20<t≤60 | 4 | above 17 °C (62.6 °F).
60<t≤100 | 4 | above 10 °C (50 °F).
20<t≤32 | 6 | above 5 °C (41 °F).
32<t≤44 | 6 | above −1 °C (31.2 °F).
44<t≤100 | 6 | above −5 °C (23 °F).
100<t | 6 | −5 °C (23 °F) and below.
(2) The methods by which the tests referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be performed are as follows:
(i) Viscosity test. The flow time in seconds is determined at 23 °C (73.4 °F) using the ISO standard cup with a 4 mm (0.16 inch) jet (ISO 2431:1984). Where the flow time exceeds 100 seconds, a further test is carried out using the ISO standard cup with a 6 mm (0.24 inch) jet.
(ii) Solvent Separation Test. This test is carried out at 23 °C (73 °F) using a 100.0 ml (3 ounces) measuring cylinder of the stoppered type of approximately 25.0 cm (9.8 inches) total height and of a uniform internal diameter of approximately 30 mm (1.2 inches) over the calibrated section. The sample should be stirred to obtain a uniform consistency, and poured in up to the 100 ml (3 ounces) mark. The stopper should be inserted and the cylinder left standing undisturbed for 24 hours. After 24 hours, the height of the upper separated layer should be measured and the percentage of this layer as compared with the total height of the sample calculated.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994 Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.124
Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3—Definitions.
(a) Division 4.1 (Flammable Solid). For the purposes of this subchapter, flammable solid (Division 4.1) means any of the following three types of materials:
(1) Desensitized explosives that—
(i) When dry are Explosives of Class 1 other than those of compatibility group A, which are wetted with sufficient water, alcohol, or plasticizer to suppress explosive properties; and
(ii) Are specifically authorized by name either in the § 172.101Table or have been assigned a shipping name and hazard class by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety under the provisions of—
(A) An exemption issued under subchapter A of this chapter; or
(B) An approval issued under § 173.56(i) of this part.
(2)(i) Self-reactive materials are materials that are thermally unstable and that can undergo a strongly exothermic decomposition even without participation of oxygen (air). A material is excluded from this definition if any of the following applies:
(A) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an explosive;
(B) The material is forbidden from being offered for transportation according to § 172.101 of this subchapter or § 173.21;
(C) The material meets the definition of an oxidizer or organic peroxide as prescribed in subpart D of this part, in which case it must be so classed;
(D) The material meets one of the following conditions:
(1) Its heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or
(2) Its self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is greater than 75 °C (167 °F) for a 50 kg package; or
(E) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety has determined that the material does not present a hazard which is associated with a Division 4.1 material.
(ii) Generic types. Division 4.1 self-reactive materials are assigned to a generic system consisting of seven types. A self-reactive substance identified by technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in § 173.224 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with that table. Self-reactive materials not identified in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in § 173.224 are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
(A) Type A. Self-reactive material type A is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation, can detonate or deflagrate rapidly. Transportation of type A self-reactive material is forbidden.
(B) Type B. Self-reactive material type B is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in a package.
(C) Type C. Self-reactive material type C is a self-reactive material which, as packaged for transportation, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.
(D) Type D. Self-reactive material type D is a self-reactive material which—
(1) Detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement;
(2) Does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no violent effect when heated under confinement; or
(3) Does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement.
(E) Type E. Self-reactive material type E is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement.
(F) Type F. Self-reactive material type F is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power.
(G) Type G. Self-reactive material type G is a self-reactive material which, in laboratory testing, does not detonate in the cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, shows no effect when heated under confinement, nor shows any explosive power. A type G self-reactive material is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for self-reactive material of Division 4.1 provided that it is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 °C (122 °F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). A self-reactive material meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal stability is classed as a type F self-reactive, temperature control material.
(iii) Procedures for assigning a self-reactive material to a generic type. A self-reactive material must be assigned to a generic type based on—
(A) Its physical state (i.e. liquid or solid), in accordance with the definition of liquid and solid in § 171.8 of this subchapter;
(B) A determination as to its control temperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of § 173.21(f);
(C) Performance of the self-reactive material under the test procedures specified in the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria and the provisions of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section; and
(D) Except for a self-reactive material which is identified by technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in § 173.224(b) or a self-reactive material which may be shipped as a sample under the provisions of § 173.224, the self-reactive material is approved in writing by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The person requesting approval shall submit to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety the tentative shipping description and generic type and—
(1) All relevant data concerning physical state, temperature controls, and tests results; or
(2) An approval issued for the self-reactive material by the competent authority of a foreign government.
(iv) Tests. The generic type for a self-reactive material must be determined using the testing protocol from Figure 14.2 (Flow Chart for Assigning Self-Reactive Substances to Division 4.1) from the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria.
(3) Readily combustible solids are materials that—
(i) Are solids which may cause a fire through friction, such as matches;
(ii) Show a burning rate faster than 2.2 mm (0.087 inches) per second when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria; or
(iii) Any metal powders that can be ignited and react over the whole length of a sample in 10 minutes or less, when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
(b) Division 4.2 (Spontaneously Combustible Material). For the purposes of this subchapter, spontaneously combustible material (Division 4.2) means—
(1) A pyrophoric material. A pyrophoric material is a liquid or solid that, even in small quantities and without an external ignition source, can ignite within five (5) minutes after coming in contact with air when tested according to UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
(2) A self-heating material. A self-heating material is a material that, when in contact with air and without an energy supply, is liable to self-heat. A material of this type which exhibits spontaneous ignition or if the temperature of the sample exceeds 200 °C (392 °F) during the 24-hour test period when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, is classed as a Division 4.2 material.
(c) Division 4.3 (Dangerous when wet material). For the purposes of this chapter, dangerous when wet material (Division 4.3) means a material that, by contact with water, is liable to become spontaneously flammable or to give off flammable or toxic gas at a rate greater than 1 liter per kilogram of the material, per hour, when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.125
Class 4—Assignment of packing group.
(a) The packing group of a Class 4 material is assigned in column (5) of the § 172.101 table. When the § 172.101 table provides more than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall be determined on the basis of test results following test methods given in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria and by applying the appropriate criteria given in this section.
(b) Packing group criteria for readily combustible materials of Division 4.1 are as follows:
(1) Powdered, granular or pasty materials must be classified in Division 4.1 when the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, is less than 45 seconds or the rate of burning is more than 2.2 mm/s. Powders of metals or metal alloys must be classified in Division 4.1 when they can be ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 10 minutes or less.
(2) Packing group criteria for readily combustible materials of Division 4.1 are assigned as follows:
(i) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), Packing Group II if the burning time is less than 45 seconds and the flame passes the wetted zone. Packing Group II must be assigned to powders of metal or metal alloys if the zone of reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 5 minutes or less.
(ii) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), Packing Group III must be assigned if the burning rate time is less than 45 seconds and the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least 4 minutes. Packing Group III must be assigned to metal powders if the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than 5 minutes but not more than 10 minutes.
(c) Packing group criteria for Division 4.2 materials is as follows:
(1) Pyrophoric liquids and solids of Division 4.2 are assigned to Packing Group I.
(2) A self-heating material is assigned to—
(i) Packing Group II, if the material gives a positive test result when tested with a 25 mm cube size sample at 140 °C; or
(ii) Packing Group III, if—
(A) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 140 °C and a negative test result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140 °C and the substance is transported in packagings with a volume of more than 3 cubic meters; or
(B) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 120 °C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140 °C and the substance is transported in packagings with a volume of more than 450 liters; or
(C) A positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample cube at 100 °C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140 °C and the substance is transported in packagings with a volume of less than 450 liters.
(d) A Division 4.3 dangerous when wet material is assigned to—
(1) Packing Group I, if the material reacts vigorously with water at ambient temperatures and demonstrates a tendency for the gas produced to ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gases is equal or greater than 10 liters per kilogram of material over any one minute;
(2) Packing Group II, if the material reacts readily with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gases is equal to or greater than 20 liters per kilogram of material per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I; or
(3) Packing Group III, if the material reacts slowly with water at ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of flammable gases is greater than 1 liter per kilogram of material per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I or II.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.127
Class 5, Division 5.1—Definition and assignment of packing groups.
(a) Definition. For the purpose of this subchapter, oxidizer (Division 5.1) means a material that may, generally by yielding oxygen, cause or enhance the combustion of other materials.
(1) A solid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, its mean burning time is less than or equal to the burning time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture.
(2) A liquid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, it spontaneously ignites or its mean time for a pressure rise from 690 kPa to 2070 kPa gauge is less then the time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture.
(b) Assignment of packing groups. (1) The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a solid shall be assigned using the following criteria:
(i) Packing Group I, for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of a 3:2 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture.
(ii) Packing Group II, for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to the mean burning time of a 2:3 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I are not met.
(iii) Packing Group III for any material which, in either concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to the mean burning time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I and II are not met.
(2) The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a liquid shall be assigned using the following criteria:
(i) Packing Group I for:
(A) Any material which spontaneously ignites when mixed with cellulose in a 1:1 ratio; or
(B) Any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than the pressure rise time of a 1:1 perchloric acid (50 percent)/cellulose mixture.
(ii) Packing Group II, any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the pressure rise time of a 1:1 aqueous sodium chlorate solution (40 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I are not met.
(iii) Packing Group III, any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than or equal to the pressure rise time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I and II are not met.
[Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.128
Class 5, Division 5.2—Definitions and types.
(a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subchapter, organic peroxide (Division 5.2) means any organic compound containing oxygen (O) in the bivalent -O-O- structure and which may be considered a derivative of hydrogen peroxide, where one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by organic radicals, unless any of the following paragraphs applies:
(1) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an explosive;
(2) The material is forbidden from being offered for transportation according to § 172.101 of this subchapter or § 173.21;
(3) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety has determined that the material does not present a hazard which is associated with a Division 5.2 material; or
(4) The material meets one of the following conditions:
(i) For materials containing no more than 1.0 percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, as calculated using the equation in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section, is not more than 1.0 percent, or
(ii) For materials containing more than 1.0 percent but not more than 7.0 percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, content (Oa) is not more than 0.5 percent, when determined using the equation:
where, for a material containing k species of organic peroxides:
ni = number of -O-O- groups per molecule of the i th species
ci = concentration (mass percent) of the i th species
mi = molecular mass of the i th species
(b) Generic types. Division 5.2 organic peroxides are assigned to a generic system which consists of seven types. An organic peroxide identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table in § 173.225 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with that table. Organic peroxides not identified in the Organic Peroxides table are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) Type A. Organic peroxide type A is an organic peroxide which can detonate or deflagrate rapidly as packaged for transport. Transportation of type A organic peroxides is forbidden.
(2) Type B. Organic peroxide type B is an organic peroxide which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but can undergo a thermal explosion.
(3) Type C. Organic peroxide type C is an organic peroxide which, as packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.
(4) Type D. Organic peroxide type D is an organic peroxide which—
(i) Detonates only partially, but does not deflagrate rapidly and is not affected by heat when confined;
(ii) Does not detonate, deflagrates slowly, and shows no violent effect if heated when confined; or
(iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate, and shows a medium effect when heated under confinement.
(5) Type E. Organic peroxide type E is an organic peroxide which neither detonates nor deflagrates and shows low, or no, effect when heated under confinement.
(6) Type F. Organic peroxide type F is an organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, does not deflagrate, shows only a low, or no, effect if heated when confined, and has low, or no, explosive power.
(7) Type G. Organic peroxide type G is an organic peroxide which will not detonate in a cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, shows no effect when heated under confinement, and shows no explosive power. A type G organic peroxide is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for organic peroxides of Division 5.2 provided that it is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 °C (122 °F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). An organic peroxide meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal stability and requiring temperature control is classed as a type F, temperature control organic peroxide.
(c) Procedure for assigning an organic peroxide to a generic type. An organic peroxide shall be assigned to a generic type based on—
(1) Its physical state (i.e., liquid or solid), in accordance with the definitions for liquid and solid in § 171.8 of this subchapter;
(2) A determination as to its control temperature and emergency temperature, if any, under the provisions of § 173.21(f); and
(3) Performance of the organic peroxide under the test procedures specified in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, and the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) Approvals. (1) An organic peroxide must be approved, in writing, by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, before being offered for transportation or transported, including assignment of a generic type and shipping description, except for—
(i) An organic peroxide which is identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table in § 173.225(b);
(ii) A mixture of organic peroxides prepared according to § 173.225(c)(5); or
(iii) An organic peroxide which may be shipped as a sample under the provisions of § 173.225(c).
(2) A person applying for an approval must submit all relevant data concerning physical state, temperature controls, and tests results or an approval issued for the organic peroxide by the competent authority of a foreign government.
(e) Tests. The generic type for an organic peroxide shall be determined using the testing protocol from Figure 20.1(a) (Classification and Flow Chart Scheme for Organic Peroxides) from the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.129
Class 5, Division 5.2—Assignment of packing group.
All Division 5.2 materials are assigned to Packing Group II in column 5 of the § 172.101 table.
§ 173.132
Class 6, Division 6.1—Definitions.
(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, poisonous material (Division 6.1) means a material, other than a gas, which is known to be so toxic to humans as to afford a hazard to health during transportation, or which, in the absence of adequate data on human toxicity:
(1) Is presumed to be toxic to humans because it falls within any one of the following categories when tested on laboratory animals (whenever possible, animal test data that has been reported in the chemical literature should be used):
(i) Oral Toxicity. A liquid with an LD 50 for acute oral toxicity of not more than 500 mg/kg or a solid with an LD 50 for acute oral toxicity of not more than 200 mg/kg.
(ii) Dermal Toxicity. A material with an LD 50 for acute dermal toxicity of not more than 1000 mg/kg.
(iii) Inhalation Toxicity. (A) A dust or mist with an LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of not more than 10 mg/L; or
(B) A material with a saturated vapor concentration in air at 20 °C (68 °F) of more than one-fifth of the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors and with an LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors of not more than 5000 ml/m^3; or
(2) Is an irritating material, with properties similar to tear gas, which causes extreme irritation, especially in confined spaces.
(b) For the purposes of this subchapter—
(1) LD 50 for acute oral toxicity means that dose of the material administered to both male and female young adult albino rats which causes death within 14 days in half the animals tested. The number of animals tested must be sufficient to give statistically valid results and be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in mg/kg body mass.
(2) LD 50 for acute dermal toxicity means that dose of the material which, administered by continuous contact for 24 hours with the shaved intact skin (avoiding abrading) of an albino rabbit, causes death within 14 days in half of the animals tested. The number of animals tested must be sufficient to give statistically valid results and be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed in mg/kg body mass.
(3) LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation means that concentration of vapor, mist, or dust which, administered by continuous inhalation for one hour to both male and female young adult albino rats, causes death within 14 days in half of the animals tested. If the material is administered to the animals as a dust or mist, more than 90 percent of the particles available for inhalation in the test must have a diameter of 10 microns or less if it is reasonably foreseeable that such concentrations could be encountered by a human during transport. The result is expressed in mg/L of air for dusts and mists or in mL/m^3 of air (parts per million) for vapors. See § 173.133(b) for LC 50 determination for mixtures and for limit tests.
(i) When provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of dusts and mists based on a one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation based on a four-hour exposure may be multiplied by four and the product substituted for the one-hour LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.
(ii) When the provisions of this subchapter require the use of the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors based on a one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation based on a four-hour exposure may be multiplied by two and the product substituted for the one-hour LC 50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.
(iii) A solid substance should be tested if at least 10 percent of its total mass is likely to be dust in a respirable range, e.g. the aerodynamic diameter of that particle-fraction is 10 microns or less. A liquid substance should be tested if a mist is likely to be generated in a leakage of the transport containment. In carrying out the test both for solid and liquid substances, more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen prepared for inhalation toxicity testing must be in the respirable range as defined in this paragraph (b)(3)(iii).
(c) For purposes of classifying and assigning packing groups to mixtures possessing oral or dermal toxicity hazards according to the criteria in § 173.133(a)(1), it is necessary to determine the acute LD 50 of the mixture. If a mixture contains more than one active constituent, one of the following methods may be used to determine the oral or dermal LD 50 of the mixture:
(1) Obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the actual mixture to be transported;
(2) If reliable, accurate data is not available, classify the formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the total concentration of all active constituents; or
(3) If reliable, accurate data is not available, apply the formula:
where:
C = the % concentration of constituent A, B ... Z in the mixture;
T = the oral LD 50 values of constituent A, B ... Z;
TM = the oral LD 50 value of the mixture.

Note to formula in paragraph (c)(3):
This formula also may be used for dermal toxicities provided that this information is available on the same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not take into account any potentiation or protective phenomena.
(d) The foregoing categories shall not apply if the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety has determined that the physical characteristics of the material or its probable hazards to humans as shown by documented experience indicate that the material will not cause serious sickness or death.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, August 28, 1997]
§ 173.133
Assignment of packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials.
(a) The packing group of Division 6.1 materials shall be as assigned in column 5 of the § 172.101 table. When the § 172.101 table provides more than one packing group or hazard zone for a hazardous material, the packing group and hazard zone shall be determined by applying the following criteria:
(1) The packing group assignment for routes of administration other than inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following table:
Packing Group | Oral toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) | Dermal toxicity LD 50 (mg/kg) | Inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists LC 50 (mg/L)
I | ≤ 5 | ≤ 40 | ≤ 0.5
II | > 5, ≤ 50 | > 40, ≤ 200 | > 0.5, ≤2
III | solids: > 50, ≤ 200; liquids: > 50, ≤ 500 | > 200, ≤ 1000 | > 2, ≤ 10
(2)(i) The packing group and hazard zone assignments for liquids (see § 173.115(c) of this subpart for gases) based on inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following table:
Packing Group | Vapor concentration and toxicity
I (Hazard Zone A) | V ≥ 500 LC 50 and LC 50 ≤ 200 mL/M^3.
I (Hazard Zone B) | V ≥ 10 LC 50; LC 50 ≤ 1000 mL/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A are not met.
II | V ≥ LC 50; LC 50 ≤ 3000 mL/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, are not met.
III | V ≥ .2 LC 50; LC 50 ≤ 5000 mL/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Groups I and II, are not met.
Note 1: V is the saturated vapor concentration in air of the material in mL/m^3 at 20C° and standard atmospheric pressure.
Note 2: A liquid in Division 6.1 meeting criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A or B stated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section is a material poisonous by inhalation subject to the additional hazard communication requirements in §§ 172.203(m)(3), 172.313 and table 1 of § 172.504(e) of this subchapter.
(ii) These criteria are represented graphically in Figure 1:
(3) When the packing group determined by applying these criteria is different for two or more (oral, dermal or inhalation) routes of administration, the packing group assigned to the material shall be that indicated for the highest degree of toxicity for any of the routes of administration.
(4) Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, the packing group and hazard zone of a tear gas substance is as assigned in column 5 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The packing group and hazard zone for Division 6.1 mixtures that are poisonous (toxic) by inhalation may be determined by one of the following methods:
(1) Where LC 50 data is available on each of the poisonous (toxic) substances comprising the mixture—
(i) The LC 50 of the mixture is estimated using the formula:
where
fi = mole fraction of the ith component substance of the liquid.
LC50i = mean lethal concentration of the ith component substance in ml/m3
(ii) The volatility of each component substance is estimated using the formula:
where:
Pi = partial pressure of the ith component substance in kPa at 20 °C and one atmospheric pressure. Pi may be calculated according to Raoult's Law using appropriate activity coefficients. Where activity coefficients are not available, the coefficient may be assumed to be 1.0.
(iii) The ratio of the volatility to the LC 50 is calculated using the formula:
(iv) Using the calculated values LC50 (mixture) and R, the packing group for the mixture is determined as follows:
Packaging group (hazard zone) | Ratio of volatility and LC 50
I (Hazard Zone A) | R ≥ 500 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 200 ml/m^3.
I (Hazard Zone B) | R ≥ 10 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 1000 ml/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A, are not met.
II | R ≥ 1 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 3000 ml/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A and B are not met.
III | R ≥ 1/5 and LC 50 (mixture) ≤ 5000 ml/m^3; and the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zones A and B, and Packing Group II are not met.
(2) In the absence of LC50 data on the poisonous (toxic) constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a packing group and hazard zone based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive packing group and hazard zone must be determined and used for the transportation of the mixture.
(i) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A only if both the following criteria are met:
(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 200 ml/m^3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere as determined by an analytical method appropriate for the material being classified for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 200 ml/m^3.
(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 499 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 500 times the mixture LC50.
(ii) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A:
(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 1000 ml/m^3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 1000 ml/m^3.
(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 times the mixture LC50.
(iii) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group II only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I (Hazard Zones A or B):
(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 3000 ml/m^3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 3000 ml/m^3.
(B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than the mixture LC50.
(iv) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group III only if both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria for Packing Groups I (Hazard Zones A or B) or Packing Group II (Hazard Zone C):
(A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air to create a test atmosphere of 5000 ml/m^3 vaporized mixture in air. Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 5000 ml/m^3.
(B) The vapor pressure of the liquid mixture is measured and if the vapor concentration is equal to or greater than 1000 ml/m^3, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 1/5 the mixture LC50.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268-66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461-45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.134
Class 6, Division 6.2—Definitions, exceptions and packing group assignments.
(a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subchapter, the categories of materials that constitute Division 6.2 are defined as follows:
(1) An infectious substance means a viable microorganism, or its toxin, that causes or may cause disease in humans or animals, and includes those agents listed in 42 CFR 72.3 of the regulations of the Department of Health and Human Services and any other agent that causes or may cause severe, disabling or fatal disease. The terms infectious substance and etiologic agent are synonymous.
(2) A diagnostic specimen means any human or animal material including, but not limited to, excreta, secreta, blood, blood components, tissue, and tissue fluids, being shipped for purposes of diagnosis.
(3) A biological product means a material that is prepared and manufactured in accordance with the provisions of 9 CFR part 102 (Licenses for biological products), 9 CFR part 103 (Experimental products, distribution, and evaluation of biological products prior to licensing), 9 CFR part 104 (Permits for biological products), 21 CFR part 312 (Investigational new drug application), or 21 CFR parts 600 to 680 (Biologics).
(4) A regulated medical waste means a waste or reusable material, other than a culture or stock of an infectious substance, that contains an infectious substance and is generated in—
(i) The diagnosis, treatment or immunization of human beings or animals;
(ii) Research pertaining to the diagnosis, treatment or immunization of human beings or animals; or
(iii) The production or testing of biological products.
(b) Exceptions. (1) The following are not subject to any requirements of this subchapter if the items as packaged do not contain any material otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter:
(i) Biological products;
(ii) Diagnostic specimens;
(iii) Laundry or medical equipment that conforms to 29 CFR 1910.1030 of the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of Labor;
(iv) A material, including waste, that previously contained an infectious substance and has been treated by steam sterilization, chemical disinfection, or other appropriate method, so that it no longer poses the hazard of an infectious substance;
(v) Any waste material, including garbage, trash and sanitary waste in septic tanks, derived from households, including but not limited to single and multiple residences, hotels and motels;
(vi) Corpses, remains and anatomical parts that are intended for ceremonial interment or cremation; and
(vii) Animal waste generated in animal husbandry or food production.
(2) A hazardous waste is not subject to regulation as a regulated medical waste.
(3) A regulated medical waste that is transported by a private or contract carrier is excepted from—
(i) The requirement of an “INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE” label if the outer packaging is marked with a “BIOHAZARD” marking in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1030; and
(ii) For other than a waste culture or stock of an infectious substance, the specific packaging requirements of § 173.197, if packaged in a rigid non-bulk packaging conforming to—
(A) The general packaging requirements of §§ 173.24 and 173.24a; and
(B) Packaging requirements specified in 29 CFR 1910.1030.
(4) A waste culture or stock of infectious substances may be offered for transportation and transported as a regulated medical waste when the culture or stock—
(i) Conforms to Biosafety Level 1, 2 or 3, as defined in HHS Publication No. (CDC) 93-8395, Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories. 3rd Edition, May 1993, Section II;
(ii) Is packaged in accordance with requirements specified in § 173.197; and
(iii) Is transported by a private or contract carrier using a vehicle dedicated to the transportation of medical waste.
(c) Assignment of packing groups and applicable packaging sections. (1) Division 6.2 materials, other than regulated medical waste, are not assigned a packing group. Packaging requirements for these materials are prescribed in § 173.196.
(2) Except as otherwise provided, regulated medical waste is assigned to Packing Group II and must be packaged as specified in § 173.197.
[Amdt. 173-247, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.136
Class 8—Definitions.
(a) For the purpose of this subchapter, “corrosive material” (Class 8) means a liquid or solid that causes full thickness destruction of human skin at the site of contact within a specified period of time. A liquid that has a severe corrosion rate on steel or aluminum based on the criteria in § 173.137(c)(2) is also a corrosive material.
(b) If human experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a material is greater or less than indicated by the results of the tests specified in paragraph (a) of this section, RSPA may revise its classification or make the determination that the material is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(c) Skin corrosion test data produced no later than September 30, 1995, using the procedures of part 173, appendix A, in effect on September 30, 1995 (see 49 CFR part 173, appendix A, revised as of October 1, 1994) for appropriate exposure times may be used for classification and assignment of packing group for Class 8 materials corrosive to skin.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.137
Class 8—Assignment of packing group.
The packing group of Class 8 material is indicated in column 5 of the § 172.101 table. When the § 172.101 table provides more than one packing group for a Class 8 material, the packing group must be determined using data obtained from tests conducted in accordance with the 1992 OECD Guideline for Testing of Chemicals, Number 404 “Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion” as follows:
(a) Packing Group I. Materials that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 60 minutes starting after the exposure time of three minutes or less.
(b) Packing Group II. Materials other than those meeting Packing Group I criteria that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than three minutes but not more than 60 minutes.
(c) Packing Group III. Materials, other than those meeting Packing Group I or II criteria—
(1) That cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or
(2) That do not cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue but exhibit a corrosion rate on steel or aluminum surfaces exceeding 6.25 mm (0.25 inch) a year at a test temperature of 55 °C (130 °F). For the purpose of testing steel P3 (ISO 9328-1) or a similar type, and for testing aluminum, non-clad types 7075-T6 or AZ5GU-T6 should be used. An acceptable test is described in ASTM G 31-72 (Reapproved 1995).
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.140
Class 9—Definitions.
For the purposes of this subchapter, miscellaneous hazardous material (Class 9) means a material which presents a hazard during transportation but which does not meet the definition of any other hazard class. This class includes:
(a) Any material which has an anesthetic, noxious or other similar property which could cause extreme annoyance or discomfort to a flight crew member so as to prevent the correct performance of assigned duties; or
(b) Any material that meets the definition in § 171.8 of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material, a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.
[Amdt. 173-224, 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993]
§ 173.141
Class 9—Assignment of packing group.
The packing group of a Class 9 material is as indicated in column 5 of the § 172.101 table.
§ 173.144
Other Regulated Materials (ORM)—Definitions.
For the purpose of this subchapter, “ORM-D material” means a material such as a consumer commodity, which, although otherwise subject to the regulations of this subchapter, presents a limited hazard during transportation due to its form, quantity and packaging. It must be a material for which exceptions are provided in the § 172.101 table. Each ORM-D material and category of ORM-D material is listed in the § 172.101 table.
§ 173.145
Other Regulated Materials—Assignment of packing group.
Packing groups are not assigned to ORM-D materials.
§ 173.150
Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable) and combustible liquids.
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter and the material does not meet the definition of another hazard class except Division 6.1, Packing Group III or Class 8, Packing Group III.
(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of flammable liquids (Class 3) and combustible liquids are excepted from labeling requirements, unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For flammable liquids in Packing Group I, inner packagings not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings;
(2) For flammable liquids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packaging; and
(3) For flammable liquids in Packing Group III and combustible liquids, inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
(c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
(d) Alcoholic beverages. An alcoholic beverage (wine and distilled spirits as defined in 27 CFR 4.10 and 5.11) is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it—
(1) Contains 24 percent or less alcohol by volume;
(2) Is in an inner packaging of five liters or less; or
(3) Is a Packing Group III alcoholic beverage in a packaging of 250 L (66 gallons) or less, unless transported by air.
(e) Aqueous solutions of alcohol. An aqueous solution containing 24 percent or less alcohol by volume and no other hazardous material—
(1) May be reclassed as a combustible liquid; and
(2) Is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it contains no less than 50 percent water.
(f) Combustible liquids. (1) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or above 38 °C (100 °F) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard class may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply to transportation by vessel or aircraft, except where other means of transportation is impracticable.
(2) The requirements in this subchapter do not apply to a material classed as a combustible liquid in a non-bulk packaging unless the combustible liquid is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.
(3) A combustible liquid that is in a bulk packaging or a combustible liquid that is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter except those pertaining to:
(i) Shipping papers, waybills, switching orders, and hazardous waste manifests;
(ii) Marking of packages;
(iii) Display of identification numbers on bulk packages;
(iv) Placarding requirements of subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter;
(v) Carriage aboard aircraft and vessels (for packaging requirements for transport by vessel, see § 176.340 of this subchapter);
(vi) Reporting incidents as prescribed by §§ 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter;
(vii) Packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and, in addition, non-bulk packagings must conform with requirements of § 173.203; and
(viii) The requirements of §§ 173.1, 173.21, 173.24, 173.24a, 173.24b, 174.1, 177.804, 177.817, and 177.834 of this subchapter.
(4) A combustible liquid that is not a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it is a mixture of one or more components that—
(i) Has a flash point at or above 93 °C (200 °F),
(ii) Comprises at least 99 percent of the volume of the mixture, and
(iii) Is not offered for transportation or transported as a liquid at a temperature at or above its flash point.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-242, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 173.151
Exceptions for Class 4.
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(b) Limited quantities of Division 4.1 flammable solids. Limited quantities of flammable solids (Division 4.1) in Packing Groups II and III are excepted from labeling, unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For flammable solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings; and
(2) For flammable solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
(c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and charcoal briquettes in packagings not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material, if the material is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
(d) Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) material. Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) solids in Packing Groups II and III are excepted from labeling, unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pound) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings; and
(2) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 1 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.152
Exceptions for Division 5.1 (oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of oxidizers (Division 5.1) in Packing Groups II and III and organic peroxides (Division 5.2) are excepted from labeling, unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For oxidizers in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(2) For oxidizers in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(3) For organic peroxides which do not require temperature control during transportation—
(i) For Type D, E, or F organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 125 ml (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacity for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(ii) For Type B or C organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 25 ml (0.845 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 100 g (3.528 ounces) net capacity for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(4) For polyester resin kits consisting of a base material component (Class 3, Packing Group II or III) and an activator component (Type C, D, E, or F organic peroxide which does not require temperature control)—
(i) the organic peroxide component must be packed in inner packagings not over 125 ml (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacity each for solids;
(ii) The flammable liquid component must be packed in inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallons) net capacity each for Packing Group II liquids or 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each for Packing Group III liquids; and
(iii) The flammable liquid component and the organic peroxide component may be packed in the same strong outer packaging provided they will not interact dangerously in the event of leakage.
(c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.153
Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(b) Limited quantities of Division 6.1 materials. Limited quantities of poisonous materials (Division 6.1) in Packing Group III are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For poisonous liquids, inner packagings not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings; and
(2) For poisonous solids, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
(c) Consumer commodities. The following provisions apply to consumer commodities:
(1) A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material.
(2) A poisonous material which is a drug or medicine and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material if packaged in a combination packaging not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) with inner packagings not over 250 ml (8 ounces) net capacity for liquids or 250 g (8.8 ounces) net capacity for solids packed in strong outer packagings. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part.
(3) Packages of ORM-D material are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter and from the labeling requirements of subpart E of part 172 of this subchapter. Shipments of ORM-D material are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156 and in paragraph (b) of this section and are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992]
§ 173.154
Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of corrosive materials (Class 8) in Packing Groups II and III are excepted from labeling, unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For corrosive materials in Packing Group II, in inner packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(2) For corrosive materials in Packing Group III, in inner packagings not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
(c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
(d) Materials corrosive to aluminum or steel only. Except for a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant, a material classed as a Class 8, Packing Group III, material solely because of its corrosive effect—
(1) On aluminum is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a packaging constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with or be degraded by the corrosive material; or
(2) On steel is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a bulk packaging constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with or be degraded by the corrosive material.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992]
§ 173.155
Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).
(a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter.
(b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of miscellaneous hazardous materials (Class 9) are excepted from labeling, unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
(1) For liquids, inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each. packed in strong outer packagings.
(2) For solids, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
(c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “Consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996]
§ 173.156
Exceptions for ORM materials.
(a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the specific hazardous material in the § 172.101 table or in a packaging section in this part.
(b) ORM-D. Packagings for ORM-D materials are specified according to hazard class in §§ 173.150 through 173.155 and in § 173.306. In addition to other exceptions specified for ORM-D materials in this part:
(1) Strong outer packagings as specified in this part, marking requirements specified in subpart D of part 172 of this subchapter, and the 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation are not required for materials classed as ORM-D when—
(i) Unitized in cages, carts, boxes or similar overpacks;
(ii) Offered for transportation or transported by:
(A) Rail;
(B) Private or contract motor carrier; or
(C) Common carrier in a vehicle under exclusive use for such service; and
(iii) Transported to or from a manufacturer, a distribution center, or a retail outlet, or transported to a disposal facility from one offeror.
(2) The 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation does not apply to materials classed as ORM-D when offered for transportation, or transported, by highway or rail between a manufacturer, a distribution center, and a retail outlet provided—
(i) Inner packagings conform to the quantity limits for inner packagings specified in §§ 173.150(b), 173.152(b), 173.154(b), 173.155(b) and 173.306 (a) and (b), as appropriate;
(ii) The inner packagings are packed into corrugated fiberboard trays to prevent them from moving freely;
(iii) The trays are placed in a fiberboard box which is banded and secured to a wooden pallet by metal, fabric, or plastic straps, to form a single palletized unit;
(iv) The package conforms to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part;
(v) The maximum net quantity of hazardous material permitted on one palletized unit is 250 kg (550 pounds); and
(vi) The package is properly marked in accordance with § 172.316 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]

Subpart E—Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

Source:
Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted.
§ 173.158
Nitric acid.
(a) Nitric acid exceeding 40 percent concentration may not be packaged with any other material.
(b) Nitric acid in any concentration which does not contain sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid as impurities, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water shall be packaged in specification containers as follows:
(1) 1A1 stainless steel drums are authorized, subject to the following limitations:
(i) Stainless steel used in drums must conform to the following thicknesses:
Nominal (marked) capacity (in liters) of 1A1 drum | Minimum thickness (in millimeters) of stainless steel
55 | 0.9
115 | 1.2
210 | 1.5
450 | 2.0
(ii) Drums weighing less than 85 percent of their original tare weight may not be used.
(iii) Type 304 or other grades of equivalent corrosion-resistant steels in the as-welded condition are permissible for nitric acid concentrations up to and including 78 percent.
(iv) For all concentrations of nitric acid, the following are permissible:
(A) Type 304 heat-treated (quenched in water at 1040 °C (1900 °F)),
(B) Stabilized Type 347 in the as-welded condition,
(C) Stabilized Type 347 stress-relieved (845-900 °C (1550-1650 °F)),
(D) Stabilized Type 347 heat-treated (quenched in water at 1040 °C (1900 °F)), or
(E) Other grades of equivalent corrosion resistance.
(v) All parts of drum exposed to lading must be capable of withstanding the corrosive effect of nitric acid to the extent that 65 percent boiling nitric acid does not penetrate the metal more than 0.0381 mm (0.002 inches) per month. (ASTM A 262-68 may be used for a suitable corrosion test procedure.)
(vi) In addition to marking required by § 178.503 of this subchapter, the following marks, in lettering of at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) height, must be placed on drums used to transport nitric acid:
(A) The type of steel used in body and head sheets as identified by American Iron and Steel Institute type number, and, in addition, the letters “HT” following the steel designation on containers subject to stress relieving or heat treatment during manufacture.
(B) The thickness in millimeters of metal in thinnest part. When the thickness of metal in the body differs from that in the head, both must be indicated with slanting line between and with the gauge of the body indicated first.
(C) Original tare weight in kilograms, preceded by the letters “TW.”
An example of the markings required by paragraphs (b)(1)(vi) (A), (B), and (C) of this section is “304HT/1.9/2.7/TW55.”
(2) 4H1 expanded plastics outer packagings with glass inner receptacles of not greater than 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each. No more than four 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) inner receptacles may be packed in one outer packaging.
(c) Nitric acid of 80 percent or greater concentration which does not contain sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid as impurities, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged in 1B1 aluminum drums.
(d) Nitric acid of 90 percent or greater concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged as follows:
(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with inner packagings consisting of glass bottles further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings. Glass bottles must be of 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) or less capacity and cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material within the metal packagings.
(2) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2 or 4G outer packagings with inner glass packagings of 2.5 L (0.66 gallons) or less capacity cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material and packed within a tightly closed intermediate packaging of metal or plastic.
(e) Nitric acid of less than 90 percent concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes or 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with inside glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each.
(f) Nitric acid of 70 percent or less concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, may be packaged as follows:
(1) In composite packagings 6PA1, 6PA2, 6PB1, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PH1, or 6PH2. 6HH1 and 6HA1 composite packaging with plastic inner receptacles meeting the compatibility requirements § 173.24(e) (e.g., PFA Teflon) are authorized.
(2) In 4H1 expanded plastic boxes with inner glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) each.
(3) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings and plastic inner packagings not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings.
(g) Nitric acid of more than 70 percent concentration, when offered for transportation or transported by cargo aircraft only, must be packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings with glass or earthenware inner packagings of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) or glass ampoules of not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon).
(h) Nitric acid of less than 70 percent concentration, when offered for transportation in cargo aircraft only must be packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings with inner packagings of—
(1) Glass or earthenware not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity;
(2) Plastic not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity further individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings; or
(3) Glass ampoule not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) capacity.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.159
Batteries, wet.
(a) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte acid or alkaline corrosive battery fluid, must be completely protected so that short circuits will be prevented; they may not be packed with other materials except as provided in §§ 173.220 and 173.222 of this part and paragraph (h) of this section.
(b) The following specification packagings are authorized for batteries packed without other materials:
(1) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden boxes.
(2) 4G fiberboard boxes.
(3) 1D plywood drums.
(4) 1G fiber drums.
(5) 1H2 and 3H2 plastic drums and jerricans.
(6) 4H2 plastic boxes.
(c) The following non-specification packagings are authorized for batteries packed without other materials:
(1) Electric storage batteries protected against short circuits and firmly secured to skids or pallets capable of withstanding the shocks normally incident to transportation, are authorized for transportation by rail, highway, or water. The height of the completed unit must not exceed 11/2 times the width of the skid or pallet. The unit must be capable of withstanding, without damage, a superimposed weight equal to two times the weight of the unit or, if the weight of the unit exceeds 907 kg (2000 pounds), a superimposed weight of 1814 kg (4000 pounds). Battery terminals must not be relied upon to support any part of the superimposed weight.
(2) Electric storage batteries weighing 225 kg (500 pounds) or more, consisting of carriers’ equipment, may be shipped by rail when mounted on suitable skids and protected against short circuits. Such shipments may not be offered in interchange service.
(3) One to three batteries not over 11.3 kg (25 pounds) each, packed in outer boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds).
(4) Not more than four batteries not over 7 kg (15 pounds) each, packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. Batteries must be securely cushioned and packed to prevent short circuits. The maximum authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).
(5) Not more than five batteries not over 4.5 kg (10 pounds) each, packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. Batteries must be securely cushioned and packed to prevent short circuits. The maximum authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).
(6) Single batteries not exceeding 34 kg (75 pounds) each, packed in 5-sided slip covers or in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Slip covers and boxes must be of solid or double-faced corrugated fiberboard of at least 91 kg (200 pounds) Mullen test strength. The slip cover or fiberboard box must fit snugly and provide inside top clearance of at least 1.3 cm (0.5 inch) above battery terminals and filler caps with reinforcement in place. Assembled for shipment, the bottom edges of the slipcover must come to within 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the bottom of the battery. The completed package (battery and box or slip cover) must be capable of withstanding a top-to-bottom compression test of at least 225 kg (500 pounds) without damage to battery terminals, cell covers or filler caps.
(7) Sin gle batteries exceeding 34 kg (75 pounds) each may be packed in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Boxes must be of double-wall corrugated fiberboard of at least 181 kg (400 pounds) test, or solid fiberboard testing at least 181 kg (400 pounds); a box may have hand holes in its ends provided that the handholes will not materially weaken the box. Sides and ends of the box must have cushioning between the battery and walls of the box; combined thickness of cushioning material and walls of the box must not be less than 1.3 cm (0.5 inch); and cushioning must be excelsior pads, corrugated fiberboard, or other suitable cushioning material. The bottom of the battery must be protected by a minimum of one excelsior or double-wall corrugated fiberboard pad. The top of the battery must be protected by a wood frame, corrugated trays or scored sheets of corrugated fiberboard having minimum test of 91 kg (200 pounds), or other equally effective cushioning material. Top protection must bear evenly on connectors and/or edges of the battery cover to facilitate stacking of batteries. No more than one battery may be placed in one box. The maximum authorized gross weight is 91 kg (200 pounds).
(d) A nonspillable wet electric storage battery is excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter under the following conditions:
(1) The battery must be protected against short circuits and securely packaged;
(2) For batteries manufactured after September 30, 1995, the battery and the outer packaging must be plainly and durably marked “NONSPILLABLE” or “NONSPILLABLE BATTERY”; and
(3) The battery must be capable of withstanding the following two tests, without leakage of battery fluid from the battery:
(i) Vibration test. The battery must be rigidly clamped to the platform of a vibration machine, and a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 0.8 mm (0.03 inches), with a 1.6 mm (0.063 inches) maximum total excursion must be applied. The frequency must be varied at the rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz to 55 Hz. The entire range of frequencies and return must be traversed in 95±5 minutes for each mounting position (direction of vibrator) of the battery. The battery must be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for equal time periods.
(ii) Pressure differential test. Following the vibration test, the battery must be stored for six hours at 24 °C±4 °C (75 °F±7 °F) while subjected to a pressure differential of at least 88 kPa (13 psi). The battery must be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six hours in each position.
(e) Electric storage batteries containing electrolyte or corrosive battery fluid are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for transportation by highway or rail if all of the following requirements are met:
(1) No other hazardous materials may be transported in the same vehicle;
(2) The batteries must be loaded or braced so as to prevent damage and short circuits in transit;
(3) Any other material loaded in the same vehicle must be blocked, braced, or otherwise secured to prevent contact with or damage to the batteries; and
(4) The transport vehicle may not carry material shipped by any person other than the shipper of the batteries.
(f) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte or corrosive battery fluid in a coil from which it is injected into the battery cells by a gas generator and initiator assembled with the battery, and which are nonspillable under the criteria of paragraph (d) of this section, are excepted from other requirements of this subchapter when examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(g) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid, packed with storage batteries wet or dry, must be packed in one of the following specification packagings:
(1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden boxes with inner receptacles of glass, not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) each with not over 8.0 L (2 gallons) total in each outside container. Inside containers must be well-cushioned and separated from batteries by a strong solid wooden partition. The completed package must conform to Packing Group III requirements.
(2) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid included with storage batteries and filling kits may be packed in strong plywood or wooden boxes when shipments are made by, for, or to the Departments of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States. Packagings must conform to military specifications. The electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid must be packed in polyethylene bottles of not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each. Not more than 24 bottles, securely separated from storage batteries and kits, may be offered for transportation or transported in each package.
(3) In 4G fiberboard boxes with not more than 12 inside packagings of polyethylene or other material resistant to the lading, each not over 2.0 L (0.5 gallon) capacity each. Completed packages must conform to Packing Group III requirements. Inner packagings must be adequately separated from the storage battery. The maximum authorized gross weight is 29 kg (64 pounds). These packages are not authorized for transportation by aircraft.
(h) Dry storage batteries or battery charger devices may be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner receptacles containing battery fluid. Completed packagings must conform to Packing Group III requirements. Not more than 12 inner receptacles may be packed in one outer box. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds).
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-235, 58 FR 50502, Sept. 27, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 173.160
Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).
Bombs, smoke, non-explosive’ may be shipped provided they are without ignition elements, bursting charges, detonating fuses or other explosive components. They must be packaged in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, or plywood drums (1D), which meet Packing Group II requirements.
§ 173.161
Chemical kits.
(a) Except as otherwise provided, chemical kits must be packed, marked, and labeled as prescribed by this subchapter for the specific corrosive materials contained therein.
(b) Chemical kits containing limited quantities of corrosive liquids in inner receptacles of not over 177 ml (6 fluid ounces) capacity each are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation or transported by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter if all of the following requirements are met:
(1) The kit may contain only corrosive liquids for which packaging exceptions are provided in the § 172.101 table.
(2) This kit must be a strong wooden or metal outer packaging, or must be packed in a strong wooden or metal packaging.
(3) The corrosive liquids must be cushioned with sufficient absorbent material to completely absorb the contents of the individual containers, and must be protected from damage by other materials in the kit.
(4) The contents of the kit must be of a nature and packed so there will be no possibility of the mixture of contents causing dangerous evolution of heat or gas.
In addition, chemical kits meeting these requirements are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), to part 174 (Carriage by rail) of this subchapter except § 174.24 (Shipping papers), and to part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except § 177.817 (Shipping papers).
(c) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, chemical kits must be packed in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner glass receptacles of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, securely cushioned and separated from other inside containers. The contents of the kit must be of such a nature and so packed that there will be no possibility of the mixture of contents causing dangerous evolution of heat or gas.
§ 173.162
Gallium.
Gallium metal must be packaged in packagings intended to contain liquids consisting of semi-rigid plastic inner packagings of not more than 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) net capacity each, individually enclosed in a sealed leak-tight bag of strong puncture-resistant material. The sealed bags must be packed in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), reconstituted wood (4F), fiberboard (4G) or plastic (4H1, 4H2) boxes or in fiber (1G) or steel (1A2) drums, which are lined with leak-tight, puncture-resistant material. Bags and liner material must be chemically resistant to gallium. In order to maintain the gallium in a completely solid state, the above packaging may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium must be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and must have impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas. Completed packaging must meet Packing Group I requirements for transportation by aircraft and Packing Group III requirements for transportation by vessel. Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of gallium and packaged so that the quantity of gallium per package does not exceed 1 g (0.35 ounce) are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.163
Hydrogen fluoride.
Hydrogen fluoride (hydrofluoric acid, anhydrous) must be offered for transportation or transported in Specification 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3BN, 3C, 3E, 4, 4A, 25, or 38 cylinders; or Specification 4B, 4BA, 4BW or 4C cylinders, if they are not brazed. Filling density must not exceed 85 percent of the water weight capacity of the cylinder. Cylinders used exclusively in this service may, in lieu of the periodic hydrostatic retest required by § 173.34(e), be given a complete external visual inspection as described in CGA Pamphlet C-6, at the time such periodic retest becomes due. Such inspections shall be made on cylinders cleaned to bare metal. The results shall be recorded on a data sheet, completed copies of which shall be kept as prescribed in § 173.34(e)(8). Items which must be checked and recorded on these data sheets are: Date of inspection (month and year); DOT specification number; cylinder identification (registered symbol and serial number, date of manufacture, and if needed for adequate identification, ownership symbol); tare weight; physical condition (record specifically any leakage, corrosion, gouges, dents or digs in shell or heads, broken or damaged footring or protective ring or fire damage); disposition of cylinders (returned to service, to cylinder manufacturer for repairs, or scrapped). A cylinder which passes the inspection prescribed must have the data recorded in the manner presently prescribed for the recording of the retest date except that an “E” is to follow the date (month and year) indicating requalification by the external inspection method. Cylinders removed from this service for any reason must be rendered unfit for any other regulated service.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-251, 61 FR 26763, May 28, 1996]
§ 173.164
Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury).
(a) For transportation by aircraft, mercury must be packaged in packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
(1) Earthenware or glass or suitable plastic inner packagings of not more than 3.5 kg (7.7 pounds) capacity each, packed in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G) or reconstituted wood (4F) or solid plastic (4H2) boxes, plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G) with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage. Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings must have inner linings or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, completely surrounding the contents, which will prevent the escape of mercury from the package irrespective of its position.
(2) Iron or steel “quicksilver flasks” of not more than 3.5 kg (7.7 pounds) capacity each packaged in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G), reconstituted wood (4F) or solid plastic (4H2) boxes, plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G) with leakproof linings as in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(3) Welded steel bottles with inner vaulted bottoms as single packagings. The closure must be a bolt with a conical thread, and the opening must not exceed 20 mm (0.79 inches). The maximum net mass must not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).
(b) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of mercury and packaged so that the quantity of mercury per package does not exceed 1 g (0.035 ounce) are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(c) Manufactured articles or apparatuses containing not more than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) mercury are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged as follows:
(1) Manufactured articles or apparatuses of which metallic mercury is a component part, such as manometers, pumps, thermometers, switches, etc. (for electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes, see paragraph (c)(3) of this section), must be in strong outer packagings, having sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury, which will prevent the escape of mercury from the package irrespective of its position. Mercury switches and relays are excepted from these packaging requirements, if they are totally enclosed, leakproof and in sealed metal or plastic units.
(2) Thermometers, switches and relays, each containing a total quantity of not more than 15 g (0.53 ounces) of mercury, are excepted from the requirements of this subchapter if installed as an integral part of a machine or apparatus and so fitted that shock of impact damage, leading to leakage of mercury, is unlikely to occur under conditions normally incident to transport.
(3) Electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes must be packaged as follows:
(i) Tubes which are packed in strong outer packagings with all seams and joints sealed with self-adhesive, pressure-sensitive tape which will prevent the escape of mercury from the package, are authorized up to a total net quantity of 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury per package;
(ii) Tubes with more than 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury are authorized only when packed in strong outer packagings, having sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of mercury from the package irrespective of its position;
(iii) Tubes which do not contain more than 5 g (0.2 ounce) of mercury each and which are packed in the manufacturer's original packagings, are authorized up to a total net quantity of 30 g (1.1 ounces) of mercury per package;
(iv) Tubes which are completely jacketed in sealed leakproof metal cases are authorized in the manufacturer's original packagings.
(4) A person offering for transportation electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes, and similar tubes shall indicate the quantity of mercury therein on the shipping paper.
(5) Mercurial barometers conforming to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, which are loaded and unloaded from an aircraft under the supervision of, and accompanied in flight by, a National Weather Service official or similar United States agency official, are excepted from any other requirements of this subchapter.
(d) For transportation by other than aircraft, mercury must be packaged—
(1) In any packaging which meets the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level; or
(2) In non-specification reusable metal packagings.
(e) Except for a hazardous substance or a hazardous waste or for transportation by aircraft or vessel, packages containing less than 0.45 kg (1.0 pound) net weight of mercury are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 173.166
Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners.
(a) Definitions. An air bag inflator (consisting of a casing containing an igniter, a booster material and a gas generant) is a gas generator used to inflate an air bag in a supplemental restraint system in a motor vehicle. An air bag module is the air bag inflator plus an inflatable bag assembly. A seat-belt pre-tensioner contains similar hazardous materials and is used in the operation of a seat-belt restraining system in a motor vehicle.
(b) Classification. An air bag inflator, air bag module, or seat-belt pre-tensioner may be classed as Class 9 only if it meets the following requirements—
(1) The manufacturer has submitted each design type air bag inflator or seat-belt pre-tensioner to a person approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety for examination and testing. The submission must contain a detailed description of the inflator or pre-tensioner (or, if more than a single inflator or pre-tensioner is involved, the maximum parameters of each particular inflator or pre-tensioner design type for which approval is sought) and details on the complete package.
(2) Samples of the inflator or pre-tensioner, packaged as for transport, have been subjected to test series 6(c) of the UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria, second revised edition, 1995 with no explosion of the device, no fragmentation of device casings, and no projection hazard or thermal effect which would significantly hinder fire-fighting or other emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity.
(3) The manufacturer submits an application, including—
(i) The test results and report recommending the shipping description and classification for each device or design type; or
(ii) An approved classification issued by the competent authority of a foreign government, to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, and is notified in writing by the Associate Administrator that the device has been classed as Class 9 and approved for transportation.
(4) No approval applications are required for air bag modules containing an approved air bag inflator.
(5) Air bag inflators or seat belt pre-tensioners previously reclassed from Class 1 to Division 4.1 under the terms of an exemption may be reclassed as Class 9 materials without further testing.
(c) EX numbers. When offered for transportation, the shipping paper must contain the EX number or product code for each approved inflator or pre-tensioner in association with the basic description required by § 172.202(a) of this subchapter. Product codes must be traceable to the specific EX number assigned to the inflator or pre-tensioner by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. A module must be identified with the same EX number or product code of the approved inflator.
(d) Exceptions. (1) An air bag module or seat-belt pretensioner that has been approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety and is installed in a motor vehicle or in completed vehicle components, such as steering columns or door panels, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(2) An air bag module, containing an inflator that has previously been examined and approved for transportation as a Division 4.1 material, is not required to be submitted for examination or approval.
(e) Packagings. The following packagings are authorized:
(1) 1A2, 1B2, 1G or 1H2 drums.
(2) 3A2 or 3H2 jerricans.
(3) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 boxes.
(4) Reusable high strength plastic or metal containers or dedicated handling devices are authorized for shipment of air bag inflators, air bag modules, and seat-belt pretensioners from a manufacturing facility to the assembly facility, subject to the following conditions:
(i) The gross weight of the container or handling device may not exceed 1000 kg (2205 pounds). The container or handling device structure must provide adequate support to allow them to be stacked at least three high with no damage to the containers or devices.
(ii) If not completely enclosed by design, the container or handling device must be covered with plastic, fiberboard, or metal. The covering must be secured to the container by banding or other comparable methods.
(iii) Internal dunnage must be sufficient to prevent movement of the devices within the container.
(f) Labeling. Notwithstanding the provisions of § 172.402 of this subchapter, each package or handling device must display a CLASS 9 label. Additional labeling is not required when the package contains no hazardous materials other than the devices.
[Amdt. 173-230, 57 FR 1878, Jan. 16, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.170
Black powder for small arms.
Black powder for small arms that has been classed in Division 1.1 may be reclassed as a Division 4.1 material, for domestic transportation by motor vehicle, rail freight, and cargo vessel only, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The powder must be examined and approved for Division 1.1 and Division 4.1 classification in accordance with §§ 173.56 and 173.58;
(b) The total quantity of black powder in one motor vehicle, rail car, or freight container may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 pounds) net mass, and no morethan four freight containers may be on board one cargo vessel;
(c) The black powder must be packed in inner metal or heavy wall conductive plastic receptacles not over 454 g (16 ounces) net capacity each, with no more than 25 cans in one outer UN 4G fiberboard box. The inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent simultaneous ignition of the contents. The complete package must be of the same type which has been examined as required in § 173.56;
(d) Each completed package must be marked “BLACK POWDER FOR SMALL ARMS” and “NA 0027”; and
(e) Each package must bear the FLAMMABLE SOLID label.
[Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996, as amended at Amdt. 173-255, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997]
§ 173.171
Smokeless powder for small arms.
Smokeless powder for small arms which has been classed in Division 1.3 may be reclassed in Division 4.1, for transportation by motor vehicle, rail car, vessel, or cargo-only aircraft, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The powder must be examined and approved for a Division 1.3 and Division 4.1 classification in accordance with §§ 173.56 and 173.58 of this part.
(b) The total quantity of smokeless powder may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 pounds) net mass in:
(1) One rail car, motor vehicle, or cargo-only aircraft; or
(2) One freight container on a vessel, not to exceed four freight containers per vessel.
(c) Only combination packagings with inner packagings not exceeding 3.6 kg (8 pounds) net mass are authorized. Inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent simultaneous ignition of the contents. The complete package must be of the same type which has been examined as required in § 173.56 of this part.
(d) Inside packages that have been examined and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may be packaged in UN 4G fiberboard boxes meeting the Packing Group I performance level, provided all inside containers are packed to prevent movement and the net weight of smokeless powder in any one box does not exceed 7.3 kg (16 pounds).
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996]
§ 173.172
Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank.
Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tanks containing a mixture of anhydrous hydrazine and monomethyl hydrazine (M86 fuel) and designed for installation as complete units in aircraft are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when they conform to either of the following conditions:
(a) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel made from tubing and having welded heads. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel must consist of a welded aluminum bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The outer vessel must have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1.275 kPa (185 psi) and a minimum burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa (400 psi). Each vessel must be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and must be found leakproof. The complete inner unit must be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 L (11 gallons); or
(b) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel. Primary containment of the fuel within this vessel must consist of a welded hermetically sealed fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The pressure vessel must have a minimum design gauge pressure of 5,170 kPa (750 psi). Each vessel must be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and must be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 L (11 gallons).
§ 173.173
Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins.
(a) When the § 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, the following requirements apply. Except as otherwise provided in this part, the description “Paint” is the proper shipping name for paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, varnish, liquid aluminum, liquid bronze, liquid gold, liquid wood filler, and liquid lacquer base. The description “Paint-related material” is the proper shipping name for a paint thinning, drying, reducing or removing compound. However, if a more specific description is listed in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter, that description must be used.
(b) Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins must be packaged as follows:
(1) As prescribed in § 173.202 of this part if it is a Packing Group II material or § 173.203 of this part if it is a Packing Group III material; or
(2) In inner glass packagings of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each or inner metal packagings of not over 5 L (1 gallon) each, packed in a strong outer packaging. Packages must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994]
§ 173.174
Refrigerating machines.
A refrigerating machine assembled for shipment and containing 7 kg (15 pounds) or less of a flammable liquid for its operation in a strong, tight receptacle is excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation or transported by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. In addition. shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), to part 174 of this subchapter (Carriage by rail) except § 174.24 (Shipping papers) and to part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except § 177.817 (Shipping papers).
§ 173.181
Pyrophoric materials (liquids).
When the § 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following non-bulk packagings are authorized:
(a) Specification steel or nickel cylinders prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene having a minimum design pressure of 1206 kPa (175 psi). Cylinders with valves must be:
(1) Equipped with steel valve protection caps or collars, unless overpacked; or
(2) Overpacked in a wooden box (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F); fiberboard box (4G), or plastic box (4H1 or 4H2). Cylinders must be secured to prevent movement in the box and, when offered for transportation or transported, must be so loaded that pressure relief devices remain in the vapor space of the cylinder. (See §§ 173.34(d)(7), 174.430 and 177.838(h) of this subchapter.)
(b) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiberboard boxes (4G) enclosing not more than four strong, tight metal cans with inner receptacles of glass or metal, not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, having positive screwcap closures adequately gasketed. Inner packagings must be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, incombustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The strong, tight metal cans must be closed by positive means, not by friction.
(c) Steel drums (1A2) or fiber drums (1G) not exceeding 220 L (58 gallons) capacity each with strong tight inner metal cans not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) capacity each, closed by positive means, not friction.
(1) Inner packagings must have no opening exceeding 25 mm (1 inch) diameter and must be surrounded with noncombustible cushioning material.
(2) Net quantity of pyrophoric liquids may not exceed two-thirds of the rated capacity of the outer drum. For example, a 220 L (58 gallons) outer drum may contain no more than 147 L (39 gallons) of pyrophoric liquids.
(3) Each layer of inner containers must be separated by a metal plate separator in addition to cushioning material.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.182
Barium azide—50 percent or more water wet.
Barium azide—50 percent or more water wet, must be packed in wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiber drums (1G) with inner glass packagings not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) capacity each. Packagings must have rubber stoppers wire tied for securement. If transportation is to take place when and where freezing weather is possible, a suitable antifreeze solution must be used to prevent freezing. Each packaging must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.
§ 173.183
Nitrocellulose base film.
Films, nitrocellulose base, must be packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level, as follows:
(a) In steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums (1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or plywood drums (1D) with each reel in a tightly closed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard inner packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or paper; or
(b) In fiberboard (4G) boxes or fiber drums (1G) with a single tightly closed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard inner packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or paper; authorized only for not over 600 m (1969 feet) of film.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996]
§ 173.184
Highway or rail fusee.
(a) A fusee is a device designed to burn at a controlled rate and to produce visual effects for signaling purposes. The composition of the fusee must be such that the fusee will not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked decomposition when subjected to a temperature of 75 °C (167 °F) for 48 consecutive hours.
(b) Fusees (highway and railway) must be packaged in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or in fiberboard boxes (4G), plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. If the fusees are equipped with spikes packagings must have reinforced ends to prevent penetration of spikes through the outer packagings; packages must be capable of passing drop test requirements (§ 178.603 of this subchapter), including at least one drop with spike in a downward position, and other requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packing Group II performance level.
§ 173.185
Lithium batteries and cells.
(a) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a lithium cell or battery is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to the provisions of this section.
(b) Exceptions. Cells and batteries are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if they meet the following requirements:
(1) Each cell with a liquid cathode may contain no more than 0.5 g of lithium or lithium alloy, and each cell with a solid cathode may contain no more than 1.0 g lithium or lithium alloy;
(2) Each battery with a liquid cathode may contain an aggregate quantity of no more than 1.0 g lithium or lithium alloy, and each battery with a solid cathode may contain an aggregate quantity of no more than 2.0 g of lithium or lithium alloy;
(3) Each cell or battery containing a liquid cathode must be hermetically sealed;
(4) Cells and batteries must be packed in such a way so as to prevent short circuits and must be packed in strong packagings, except when installed in equipment; and
(5) If a liquid cathode battery contains more than 0.5 g of lithium or lithium alloy or a solid cathode battery contains more than 1.0 g lithium or lithium alloy, it may not contain a liquid or gas that is a hazardous material according to this subchapter unless the liquid or gas, if free, would be completely absorbed or neutralized by other materials in the battery.
(c) Cells and batteries also are not subject to this subchapter if they meet the following requirements:
(1) Each cell contains not more than 5 g of lithium or lithium alloy;
(2) Each battery contains not more than 25 g of lithium or lithium alloy;
(3) Each cell or battery is of the type proven to be non-dangerous by testing in accordance with tests in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, such testing must be carried out on each type prior to the initial transport of that type; and
(4) Cells and batteries are designed or packed in such a way as to prevent short circuits under conditions normally encountered in transportation.
(d) Cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries which were first transported prior to January 1, 1995, and were assigned to Class 9 on the basis of the requirements of this subchapter in effect on October 1, 1993, may continue to be transported in accordance with the applicable requirements in effect on October 1, 1993.
(e) Cells and batteries may be transported as items of Class 9 if they meet the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(9) of this section:
(1) Cells must not contain more than 12 g of lithium or lithium alloy.
(2) Batteries must not contain more than 500 g of lithium or lithium alloy.
(3) Each cell and battery must be equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits.
(4) Each cell and battery must incorporate a safety venting device or be designed in a manner that will preclude a violent rupture under conditions normally incident to transportation.
(5) Batteries containing cells or series of cells connected in parallel must be equipped with diodes to prevent reverse current flow.
(6) Cells and batteries must be packed in strong inner packagings containing not more than 500 g of lithium or lithium alloy per inner packaging.
(7) Cells and batteries must be packed in inner packagings in such a manner as to effectively prevent short circuits and to prevent movement which could lead to short circuits.
(8) Cells and batteries must be packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level: Inner packagings must be packed within metal boxes (4A or 4B), wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D,or 4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), solid plastic boxes (4H2), fiber drums (1G), metal drums (1A2 or 1B2), plywood drums (1D), plastic jerricans (3H2), or metal jerricans (3A2 or 3B2).
(9) Each cell or battery must be of the type proven to meet the criteria of Class 9 by testing in accordance with tests in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
(10) Except as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, cells or batteries may not be offered for transportation or transported if any cell has been discharged to the extent that the open circuit voltage is less than two volts or is less than 2/3 of the voltage of the fully charged cell, whichever is less.
(f) Equipment containing or packed with cells and batteries meeting the requirements of paragraph (b) or (c) of this section is excepted from all other requirements of this subchapter.
(g) Equipment containing or packed with cells and batteries may be transported as items of Class 9 if the batteries and cells meet all the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section and are packaged as follows:
(1) Equipment containing cells and batteries must be packed in a strong outer packaging that is waterproof or is made waterproof through the use of a liner unless the equipment is made waterproof by nature of its construction. The equipment must be secured within the outer packaging and be packed as to effectively prevent movement, short circuits, and accidental operation during transport; and
(2) Cells and batteries packed with equipment must be packed in inner packagings conforming to paragraph (e)(8) of this section in such a manner as to effectively prevent movement and short circuits. The quantity of lithium contained in any piece of equipment must not exceed 12 g per cell and 500 g per battery. Not more than 5 kg of cells and batteries may be packed with each item of equipment.
(h) Cells and batteries, for disposal, may be offered for transportation or transported to a permitted storage facility and disposal site by motor vehicle when they meet the following requirements:
(1) Cells, when new, may not contain more than 12 g and batteries may not contain more than 500 g of lithium or lithium alloy;
(2) Be equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits; and
(3) Be packed in a strong outer packaging conforming to the requirements of §§ 173.24 and 173.24a. The packaging need not conform to performance requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
(i) Cells and batteries and equipment containing or packed with cells and batteries which do not comply with the provisions of this section may be transported only if they are approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(j) For testing purposes, when not contained in equipment, cells containing not more than 12 g of lithium or lithium alloy and batteries containing not more than 500 g of lithium or lithium alloy may be offered for transportation or transported by highway only as items of Class 9. Packaging must conform with paragraph (e)(8) of this section with not more than 100 cells per package.
[Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.186
Matches.
(a) Matches must be of a type which will not ignite spontaneously or undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 8 consecutive hours to a temperature of 93 °C (200 °F).
(b) Definitions. (1) Fusee matches are matches the heads of which are prepared with a friction-sensitive igniter composition and a pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no flame, but with intense heat.
(2) Safety matches are matches combined with or attached to the box, book or card that can be ignited by friction only on a prepared surface.
(3) Strike anywhere matches are matches that can be ignited by friction on a solid surface.
(4) Wax “Vesta” matches are matches that can be ignited by friction either on a prepared surface or on a solid surface.
(c) Safety matches and wax “Vesta” matches must be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation, and further packed in outer fiberboard, wooden, or other equivalent-type packagings. These matches in outer packagings not exceeding 23 kg (50 pounds) gross weight are not subject to any other requirement (except marking) of this subchapter. These matches may be packed in the same outer packaging with materials not subject to this subchapter.
(d) Strike-anywhere matches may not be packed in the same outer packaging with any material other than safety matches or wax “Vesta” matches, which must be packed in separate inner packagings.
(e) Packagings. Strike-anywhere matches must be tightly packed in securely closed chipboard, fiberboard, wooden, or metal inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each inner packaging may contain no more than 700 strike-anywhere matches and must be packed in outer steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums (1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), reconstituted wood (4F) or fiberboard (4G) boxes, plywood (1D) or fiber (1G) drums. Gross weight of fiberboard boxes (4G) must not exceed 27 kg (60 pounds). Gross weight of other outer packagings must not exceed 45 kg (100 pounds).
§ 173.187
Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, n.o.s.
Packagings for pyrophoric solids, metals, or alloys, n.o.s. must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the packing group performance level specified in the § 172.101 table. These materials must be packaged as follows:
(a) In wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.
(b) In steel drums (1A1 or 1A2) with a gross mass not exceeding 150 kg (331 pounds) per drum.
(c) In fiberboard boxes (4G) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 7.5 kg (17 pounds) each.
(d) In fiber drums (1G) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.
(e) In plywood drums (1D) with inner metal receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.
§ 173.188
White or yellow phosphorus.
Phosphorus, white or yellow, when offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, must be packaged in water or dry in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
(a) When placed in water, it must be packaged in specification packagings as follows:
(1) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) with:
(i) Inner hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, enclosed in other hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, or
(ii) Inner water-tight metal cans containing not over 0.5 kg (1 pound) of phosphorus with screw-top closures; or
(2) Steel drums (1A1) not over 250 L (66 gallons) capacity each or steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each.
(b) When dry, it must be cast solid and shipped in packagings as follows:
(1) Steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each, or
(2) In projectiles or bombs when shipped by, for, or to the Departments of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States Government, without bursting elements.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.189
Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium.
(a) Batteries and cells may not contain any hazardous material other than sodium, sulfur or polysulfides. Cells not forming a component of a completed battery may not be offered for transportation at a temperature at which any liquid sodium is present in the cell. Batteries may only be offered for transportation, or transported, at a temperature at which any liquid sodium present in the battery conforms to the conditions prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section.
(b) Cells must consist of hermetically sealed metal casings which fully enclose the hazardous materials and which are so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the hazardous materials under normal conditions of transport. Cells must be placed in suitable outer packagings with sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal surfaces of the outer packaging, and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer packaging occurs in transport. Cells must be packaged in 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level.
(c) Batteries must consist of cells secured within, and fully enclosed by a metal casing so constructed and closed as to prevent the release of the hazardous materials under normal conditions of transport. Batteries may be offered for transportation, and transported, unpacked or in protective packagings that are not subject to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
(d) Batteries containing any liquid sodium may not be offered for transportation, or transported, by aircraft. Batteries containing liquid sodium may be transported by motor vehicle, rail car or vessel under the following conditions:
(1) Batteries must be equipped with an effective means of preventing external short circuits, such as by providing complete electrical insulation of battery terminals or other external electrical connectors. Battery terminals or other electrical connectors penetrating the heat insulation fitted in battery casings must be provided with thermal insulation sufficient to prevent the temperature of the exposed surfaces of such devices from exceeding 55 °C (130 °F).
(2) No battery may be offered for transportation if the temperature at any point on the external surface of the battery exceeds 55 °C (130 °F).
(3) If any external source of heating is used during transportation to maintain sodium in batteries in a molten state, means must be provided to ensure that the internal temperature of the battery does not reach or exceed 400 °C (752 °F).
(4) When loaded in a transport vehicle or freight container:
(i) Batteries must be secured so as to prevent significant movement within the transport vehicle or freight container under conditions normally incident to transportation;
(ii) Adequate ventilation and/or separation between batteries must be provided to ensure that the temperature at any point on the external surface of the battery casing will not exceed 240 °C (464 °F) during transportation; and
(iii) No other hazardous materials, with the exception of cells containing sodium, may be loaded in the same transport vehicle or freight container. Batteries must be separated from all other freight by a distance of not less than 0.5 meters (1.6 feet).
(e) Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium, when installed as part of a motor vehicle, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996]
§ 173.192
Packaging for certain Packing Group I poisonous materials.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a poisonous material be packaged under this section, only specification cylinders are authorized, as follows:
(a) Specification 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3AL1800, 3D, 3E1800, or 33 cylinders, under the following conditions:
(1) Specification 3A, 3AA and 3AL cylinders may not exceed 57 kg (125 pounds) water capacity (nominal).
(2) Specification 3D and 33 cylinders may not exceed 57 kg (125 pounds) water capacity (nominal).
(3) Specification 3AL cylinders containing arsine or phosphine may only be offered for transportation or transported by highway and rail.
(b) Packagings must conform to the requirements of § 173.40 of this part.
(c) For cylinders used for phosgene,
(1) The filling density may not exceed 125 percent;
(2) A cylinder may not contain more than 68 kg (150 pounds) of phosgene; and
(3) Each filled cylinder must be tested for leakage before it is offered for transportation or transported and must show absolutely no leakage; this test must consist of immersing the cylinder and valve, without the protection cap attached, in a bath of water at a temperature of approximately 66 °C (150 °F) for at least 30 minutes, during which time frequent examinations must be made to note any escape of gas. The valve of the cylinder must not be loosened after this test and before the cylinder is offered for transportation or transported.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.193
Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures, etc.
(a) Bromoacetone must be packaged as follows in wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) with inner glass receptacles or tubes in hermetically sealed metal receptacles in corrugated fiberboard cartons. Bottles may not contain over 500 g (17.6 ounces) of liquid each and must be cushioned in cans with at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) of absorbent material. Total amount of liquid in the outer box must not exceed 11 kg (24 pounds). Packagings must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.
(b) Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide mixtures, chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixtures, and chloropicrin mixtures charged with non-flammable, non-liquefied compressed gas must be packed in Specification 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C, 3E, 4A, 4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4C cylinders having not over 113 kg (250 pounds) water capacity (nominal). This capacity does not apply to shipments of methyl bromide.
(c) Methyl bromide mixtures containing up to 2% chloropicrin must be packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inside metal cans containing not over one pound each, or inside metal cans with a minimum wall thickness of 0.007 inch containing not over 13/4 pounds each. The one-pound can must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 130 psig without leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must not exceed 130 psig at 55 °C (130 °F). The 13/4-pound can must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 140 psig without leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must not exceed 140 psig at 55 °C (130 °F). Cans must not be liquid full at 130 °F. Cans must be constructed of tinplate or lined with suitable material and must have concave or pressure ends.
(d) Cylinders, except those containing methyl bromide, must conform to § 173.40 of this part.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992]
§ 173.194
Gas identification sets.
Gas identification sets containing poisonous material must be packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
(a) In glass inner receptacles, hermetically sealed, of not over 40 ml (1.4 fluid ounces) each. Each glass inner receptacle must in turn be placed in a sealed fiberboard receptacle, cushioned with absorbent material. Not more than 12 fiberboard receptacles must in turn be placed in a 4G fiberboard box. No more than four boxes, well-cushioned, may in turn be placed in a steel cylinder. The cylinder must have a wall thickness of at least 3.7 mm (0.146 inch) and must have a hermetically sealed steel closure.
(b) When the poisonous material is absorbed in a medium such as activated charcoal or silical gel, gas identification sets may be shipped as follows:
(1) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 ml (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid or 5 g (0.2 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass inner receptacles of not over 120 ml (4.1 fluid ounces) each. Each glass receptacle, cushioned with absorbent material must be packed in a hermetically sealed metal can of not less than 0.30-mm (0.012 inch) wall thickness. Metal cans, surrounded on all sides by at least 25 mm (1 inch) of dry sawdust, must be packed in 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes. Not more than 100 ml (3.4 fluid ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces) of poisonous materials may be packed in one outer wooden box.
(2) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 ml (0.2 fluid ounce) if a liquid or 20 g (0.7 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass inner receptacles with screw-top closures of not less than 60 ml (2 ounces), hermetically sealed. Twelve bottles containing poisonous material, not to exceed 100 ml (3.4 ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces), or both, may be placed in a plastic carrying case, each glass receptacle surrounded by absorbent cushioning and each separated from the other by sponge rubber partitions. The plastic carrying case must be placed in a tightly fitting fiberboard box which in turn must be placed in a tightly fitting 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden box.
§ 173.195
Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution).
(a) Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized, must be packed in specification cylinders as follows:
(1) As prescribed in § 173.192, or
(2) Specification 3A480, 3A480X, 3AA480, or 3A1800 metal cylinders of not over 126 kg (278 pounds) water capacity (nominal). Shipments in 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway and rail.
(b) Cylinders may not be charged with more than 0.27 kg (0.6 pound) of liquid per 0.45 kg (1 pound) water capacity of cylinder. Each filled cylinder must be tested for leakage before being offered for transportation or transported and must show absolutely no leakage; this test must consist of passing a piece of Guignard's sodium picrate paper over the closure of the cylinder, without the protection cap attached, to detect any escape of hydrogen cyanide from the cylinder. Other equally efficient test methods may be used in place of sodium picrate paper.
(c) Packagings for hydrogen cyanide must conform to § 173.40.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.196
Infectious substances (etiologic agents).
(a) Authorized packagings and components are as follows:
(1) Inner packagings comprising:
(i) A watertight primary receptacle;
(ii) A watertight secondary packaging; and
(iii) An absorbent material must be placed between the primary receptacle and the secondary packaging. If multiple-primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they must be wrapped individually to ensure that contact between them is prevented. The absorbent material, such as cotton wool, must be sufficient to absorb the entire contents of all primary receptacles.
(2) An outer packaging must be of adequate strength for its capacity, mass and intended use.
(b) Each package for infectious substances must be capable of passing the tests specified in § 178.609 of this subchapter.
(c) Packages consigned as freight must be at least 100 mm (3.9 inches) in the smallest overall external dimensions.
(d) For all packages containing infectious substances, an itemized list of contents must be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.
(e) Although exceptional cases, such as whole organs, may require special packaging, the great majority of infectious substances can and must be packaged according to the following guidelines.
(1) Lypholized substances. Primary receptacles include flame-sealed glass ampoules or rubber-stopped glass vials fitted with metal seals.
(2) Liquid or solid substances—(i) Substances shipped at ambient temperatures or higher. Primary receptacles include those of glass, metal or plastic. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal, such as heat seal, skirted stopper or metal crimp seal must be provided. If screw caps are used, they must be reinforced with adhesive tape.
(ii) Substances shipped refrigerated or frozen (ice, pre-frozen packs, dry ice). Ice or dry ice must be placed outside the secondary packagings. Interior supports must be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the packaging must be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas.
(iii) Substances shipped in liquid nitrogen. Plastic primary receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperatures must be used. Secondary packaging must also withstand very low temperatures and in most cases will need to be fitted over individual primary receptacles. Requirements for shipment of liquid nitrogen must also be observed.
(f) Whatever the intended temperature of shipment, the primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectious substances must be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure which produces a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (14 psi) and temperatures in the range of −40 °C to +55 °C (−40 °F to +131 °F).
(g) The requirements of this section supplement the requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services contained in 42 CFR part 72.
(h) Exceptions. The following substances are not subject to any requirements of this subchapter if the items as packaged do not contain any material otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(1) Diagnostic specimens.
(2) Biological products.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994]
§ 173.197
Regulated medical waste.
(a) Regulated medical waste must be packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level. The packagings must be:
(1) Rigid;
(2) Leak resistant;
(3) Impervious to moisture;
(4) Of sufficient strength to prevent tearing or bursting under normal conditions of use and handling;
(5) Sealed to prevent leakage during transport;
(6) Puncture resistant for sharps and sharps with residual fluids; and
(7) Break-resistant and tightly lidded or stoppered for fluids in quantities greater than 20 cubic centimeters.
(b) Until October 1, 1994, packages do not have to be marked or tested but must be capable of meeting the requirements in subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.198
Nickel carbonyl.
(a) Nickel carbonyl must be packed in specification steel or nickel cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene. A cylinder used exclusively for nickel carbonyl may be given a complete external visual inspection in lieu of the interior hydrostatic pressure test required by § 173.34(e). Visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6.
(b) Packagings for nickel carbonyl must conform to § 173.40.
§ 173.201
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel, or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.202
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II performance level (unless otherwise excepted), and to the particular requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)
Wooden barrel: 2C1
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PDl or 6PD2
Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt 173-241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.203
Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II or III performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) The following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)
Wooden barrel: 2C1
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PD1 or 6PD2
Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except for Specifications 8 and 3HT
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.204
Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid or solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, any appropriate non-bulk packaging which conforms to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173 may be used for its transportation. Packagings need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
§ 173.205
Specification cylinders for liquid hazardous materials.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, any specification cylinder, except those specified for acetylene, is authorized. Cylinders used for poisonous materials (Division 6.1 or 2.3) must conform to the requirements of § 173.40.
§ 173.211
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.212
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Plywood drum: 1D
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3
Bag, plastic film: 5H4
Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3
Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel aluminum, wood, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.213
Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.
(a) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II or III performance level, and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) The following combination packagings are authorized:
Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules
(c) The following single packagings are authorized:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box with liner: 4A
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3
Bag, plastic film: 5H4
Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3
Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 6PH1 or 6PH2
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.214
Packagings which require approval by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, packagings and method of shipment must be approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety prior to the first shipment.
§ 173.216
Asbestos, blue, brown or white.
(a) Asbestos, blue, brown or white, includes each of the following hydrated mineral silicates: chrysolite, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and every product containing any of these materials.
(b) Asbestos which is immersed or fixed in a natural or artificial binder material (such as cement, plastic, asphalt, resins or mineral ore), and manufactured products containing asbestos are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(c) Packagings for asbestos must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Asbestos must be offered for transportation and transported in—
(1) Rigid, leaktight packagings, such as metal, plastic or fiber drums, portable tanks, hopper-type rail cars, or hopper-type motor vehicles;
(2) Bags or other non-rigid packagings in closed freight containers, motor vehicles, or rail cars that are loaded by and for the exclusive use of the consignor and unloaded by the consignee;
(3) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift-proof. When transported by other than private carrier by highway, such packagings containing asbestos must be palletized and unitized by methods such as shrink-wrapping in plastic film or wrapping in fiberboard secured by strapping. Pallets need not be used during transportation by vessel for loads with slings that are unitized by methods such as shrink-wrapping, if the slings adequately and evenly support the loads and the unitizing method prevents shifting of the bags or other non-rigid packagings during conditions normally incident to transportation; or
(4) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift-proof in strong outside fiberboard or wooden boxes.
§ 173.217
Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice).
(a) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), when offered for transportation or transported by aircraft or water, must be packed in packagings designed and constructed to permit the release of carbon dioxide gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings. Packagings must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. For each shipment by air exceeding 2.3 kg (5 lbs) per package, advance arrangements must be made between the shipper and each carrier.
(b) Railroad cars and motor vehicles containing solid carbon dioxide, when accepted for transportation on board ocean vessels, must be conspicuously marked on two sides “WARNING CO2 SOLID (DRY ICE).”
(c) Other packagings containing solid carbon dioxide, when offered or accepted for transportation on board ocean vessels, must be marked “CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID—DO NOT STOW BELOW DECKS.”
(d) Not more than 200 kg (441 pounds) of solid carbon dioxide may be transported in any one cargo compartment or bin on any aircraft except by specific and special written arrangement between the shipper and the aircraft operator.
(e) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) is excepted from the shipping paper and certification requirements of this subchapter if the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section are complied with and the package is marked “Carbon dioxide, solid” or “Dry ice” and marked with an indication that the material being refrigerated is used for diagnostic or treatment purposes (e.g., frozen medical specimens).
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]
§ 173.218
Fish meal or fish scrap.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, fish meal or fish scrap, containing at least 6 percent but not more than 12 percent water, is authorized for transportation by water only when packaged as follows:
(1) Burlap (jute) bag;
(2) Multi-wall paper bag;
(3) Polyethylene-lined burlap or paper bag;
(4) Cargo tank;
(5) Portable tank;
(6) Rail car; or
(7) Freight container.
(b) Fish meal or fish scrap may not be offered for transportation if the temperature of the material exceeds 49 °C (120 °F).
(c) When fish scrap or fish meal is offered for transportation by vessel in bulk in freight containers, the fish meal must contain at least 100 ppm of anti-oxident (ethoxyquin) at the time of shipment.
§ 173.219
Life-saving appliances.
(a) A life-saving appliance, self-inflating or non-self-inflating, containing small quantities of hazardous materials which are required as part of the life-saving appliance must conform to the requirements of this section. Packagings must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
(b) Hazardous materials therein must be packaged as follows:
(1) Nonflammable compressed gases must be packaged in cylinders in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter;
(2) Smoke and illumination signal flares must be in plastic or fiberboard receptacles;
(3) Strike-anywhere matches must be cushioned to prevent movement or friction in a cylindrical metal or composition receptacle with a screw-type closure;
(4) Flammable liquids must be in strong inner packagings in a repair kit; and
(5) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials are permitted if packaged in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
(c) Materials therein not subject to the requirements of this subchapter which are an integral part of the life-saving appliance must be packaged in a strong fiberglass kit case which is overpacked in a waterproof fiberboard packaging, or be packaged in other strong outer packagings.
§ 173.220
Internal combustion engines, self-propelled vehicles, and mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines or wet batteries.
(a) Applicability. An internal combustion engine, self-propelled vehicle, or mechanized equipment is subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported as cargo on a transport vehicle, vessel or aircraft, if—
(1) The engine or fuel tank contains a flammable liquid or gaseous fuel;
(2) It is equipped with a wet electric storage battery other than a nonspillable battery; or
(3) It contains other hazardous materials subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(b) Flammable liquid fuel. Except as provided in this paragraph, flammable liquid fuel tanks must be completely drained and securely closed. Up to 500 ml (17 ounces) of fuel may be left in engine components and fuel lines provided the lines are securely closed to prevent leakage of fuel. Fuel may remain in engines and tanks installed in self-propelled vehicles and mechanical equipment under the following conditions:
(1) For transportation by motor vehicle or rail car, the fuel tanks must be securely closed.
(2) For transportation by vessel, the shipment must conform to § 176.905 of this subchapter; and
(3) For transportation by aircraft, the shipment must conform to § 175.305 of this subchapter.
(c) Wet batteries. Wet batteries must either be installed, securely fastened in an upright position, and protected against short circuits and leakage or be removed and packaged separately under § 173.159. In addition—
(1) For transportation by vessel, the provisions of this subchapter do not apply to a motor vehicle or mechanical equipment which is electrically powered by a wet electric storage battery.
(2) For transportation by passenger-carrying aircraft, a wheelchair equipped with a wet battery must conform to § 173.222.
(d) Truck bodies or trailers on cars. Truck bodies or trailers with automatic heating or refrigerating equipment of the flammable liquid type may be shipped with fuel tanks filled and equipment operating or inoperative, when used for the transportation of other freight and loaded on flat cars as part of a joint rail and highway movement, provided the equipment and fuel supply conform to the requirements of § 177.834(l) of this subchapter and are of a type which has been examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(e) Gases. Compressed gas tanks and cylinders, containing gases, which are component parts of vehicles or mechanical equipment must conform to § 173.306.
(f) Other hazardous materials. Other hazardous materials must be packaged and transported in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
(g) Exceptions. Except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shipments made under the provisions of this section—
(1) Are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, for transportation by motor vehicle or rail car; and
(2) Are not subject to the requirements of subparts D, E, and F (marking, labeling, and placarding, respectively) of part 172 or § 172.604 (emergency response telephone number) of this subchapter for transportation by vessel or aircraft.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.221
Polymeric beads, expandable.
Polymeric beads or granules, expandable, impregnated with flammable gas or liquid as a blowing agent and plastic moulding materials in dough, sheet or extruded rope form must be packed in wooden (4C1 or 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes with sealed inner plastic liners, plywood drums (1D), fiber drums (1G) with sealed inner plastic liner or in metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1 or 1B2) packagings.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.222
Wheelchairs equipped with wet electric storage batteries.
Wheelchairs equipped with wet storage batteries are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter other than the provisions of § 175.10(a) (19) and (20) of this subchapter.
§ 173.224
Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials.
(a) General. When the § 172.101 table of this subchapter specifies that a Division 4.1 material be packaged in accordance with this section, only packagings which conform to the provisions of this section may be used. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing Group II performance levels. To avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. Self-reactive materials which require temperature control are subject to the provisions of § 173.21(f). Packagings required to bear a Class 1 subsidiary label must conform to §§ 173.60 through 173.62.
(b) Self-Reactive Materials Table. The Self-Reactive Materials Table specifies, by technical name, those self-reactive materials that are authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions of § 173.124(a)(2)(iii). A self-reactive material identified by technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. The column headings of the Self-Reactive Materials Table are as follows:
(1) Technical name. Column 1 specifies the technical name.
(2) ID number. Column 2 specifies the identification number which is used to identify the proper shipping name in the § 172.101 table.
(3) Concentration of self-reactive material. Column 3 specifies the concentration (percent) limitations, if any, in mixtures or solutions for the self-reactive material. Limitations are given as minimums, maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and upper limits (i.e., “53-100” means from, and including, 53 percent to, and including 100 percent).
(4) Packing method. Column 4 specifies the highest packing method which is authorized for the self-reactive material. A packing method corresponding to a smaller package size may be used, but a packing method corresponding to a larger package size may not be used. The Table of Packing Methods in § 173.225(d) defines the packing methods. Additional bulk packagings are authorized in paragraph (d) of this section for Type F self-reactive materials.
(5) Control temperature. Column 5 specifies the control temperature in °C. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are required (see § 173.21(f)).
(6) Emergency temperature. Column 6 specifies the emergency temperature in °C. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are required (see § 173.21(f)).
(7) Notes. Column 7 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in notes following the table.
Self-Reactive Substances
Self-reactive substance | Identification No. | Concentration—(%) | Packing method | Control temperature—( °C) | Emergency temperature | Notes
(1) | (2) | (3) | (4) | (5) | (6) | (7)
Azodicarbonamide formulation type B, temperature controlled | 3232 | <100 | OP5 | | | 1
Azodicarbonamide formulation type C | 3224 | <100 | OP6 | | |
Azodicarbonamide formulation type C, temperature controlled | 3234 | <100 | OP6 | | | 1
Azodicarbonamide formulation type D | 3226 | <100 | OP7 | | |
Azodicarbonamide formulation type D, temperature controlled | 3236 | <100 | OP7 | | | 1
2,2’-Azodi(2,4-dimethyl-4-methoxyvaleronitrile) | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | −5 | +5 |
2,2’-Azodi(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile) | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +10 | +15 |
2,2’-Azodi(ethyl 2-methylpropionate) | 3235 | 100 | OP7 | +20 | +25 |
1,1-Azodi(hexahydrobenzonitrile) | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
2,2-Azodi(isobutyronitrile) | 3234 | 100 | OP6 | +40 | +45 |
2,2-Azodi(2-methylbutyronitrile) | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +35 | +40 |
Benzene-1,3-disulphohydrazide, as a paste | 3226 | 52 | OP7 | | |
Benzene sulphohydrazide | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
4-(Benzyl(ethyl)amino)-3-ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
4-(Benzyl(methyl)amino)-3-ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
| 3-Chloro-4-diethylaminobenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-4-sulphochloride | 3222 | 100 | OP5 | | |
2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-5-sulphochloride | 3222 | 100 | OP5 | | |
2,5-Diethoxy-4-morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 67-100 | OP7 | +35 | +40 |
2,5-Diethoxy-4-morpholinobenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 66 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
2,5-Diethoxy-4-morpholinobenzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +30 | +35 |
2,5-Diethoxy-4-(phenylsulphonyl)benzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 67 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
Diethylene glycol bis(allyl carbonate) + Diisopropylperoxydicarbonate | 3237 | ≥88+≤12 | OP8 | −10 | 0 |
2,5-Dimethoxy-4-(4-methylphenylsulphony)benzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 79 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
4-Dimethylamino-6-(2-dimethylaminoethoxy)toluene-2-diazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
N,N’-Dinitroso-N, N’-dimethyl-terephthalamide, as a paste | 3224 | 72 | OP6 | | |
N,N’-Dinitrosopentamethylenetetramine | 3224 | 82 | OP6 | | | 2
Diphenyloxide-4,4’-disulphohydrazide | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
4-Dipropylaminobenzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-methoxy-4-(N-methyl-N- cyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 63-92 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
2-(N,N-Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-methoxy-4-(N-methyl-N- cyclohexylamino)benzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 62 | OP7 | +35 | +40 |
N-Formyl-2-(nitromethylene)-1,3-perhydrothiazine | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +45 | +50 |
2-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-1-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzene-4-diazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +45 | +50 |
3-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzenediazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +40 | +45 |
2-(N,N-Methylaminoethylcarbonyl)-4-(3,4-dimethyl-phenylsulphonyl)benzene diazonium zinc chloride | 3236 | 96 | OP7 | +45 | +50 |
4-Methylbenzenesulphonylhydrazide | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
3-Methyl-4-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzenediazonium tetrafluoroborate | 3234 | 95 | OP6 | +45 | +50 |
4-Nitrosophenol | 3236 | 100 | OP7 | +35 | +40 |
Self-reactive liquid, sample | 3223 | | OP2 | | | 3
Self-reactive liquid, sample, temperature control | 3233 | | OP2 | | | 3
Self-reactive solid, sample | 3224 | | OP2 | | | 3
Self-reactive solid, sample, temperature control | 3234 | | OP2 | | | 3
Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-sulphonate | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-sulphonate | 3226 | 100 | OP7 | | |
Tetramine palladium (II) nitrate | 3234 | 100 | OP6 | +30 | +35 |
Notes:
1. The emergency and control temperatures must be determined in accordance with § 173.21(f).
2. With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150 C.
3. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph(c)(4) of this section.
(c) New self-reactive materials, formulations and samples. (1) Except as provided for samples in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, no person may offer, accept for transportation, or transport a self-reactive material which is not identified by technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table of this section, or a formulation of one or more self-reactive materials which are identified by technical name in the table, unless the self-reactive material is assigned a generic type and shipping description and is approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety under the provisions of § 173.124(a)(2)(iii).
(2) Except as provided by an approval issued under § 173.124(a)(2)(iii), intermediate bulk and bulk packagings are not authorized.
(3) Samples. Samples of new self-reactive materials or new formulations of self-reactive materials identified in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in paragraph (b) of this section, for which complete test data are not available, and which are to be transported for further testing or evaluation, may be assigned an appropriate shipping description for Self-reactive materials Type C, packaged and offered for transportation under the following conditions:
(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of hazard no greater than that of a self-reactive material Type B and that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation;
(ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method OP2;
(iii) Packages of the self-reactive material may be offered for transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per transport vehicle; and
(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:
(A) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, 4.1, UN3223.
(B) Self-reactive, solid, type C, 4.1, UN3224.
(C) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3233.
(D) Self-reactive, solid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, UN3234.
(d) Self-reactive substances of Type F may not be transported in bulk or intermediate bulk containers except as approved, in writing, by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-242, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, 24735, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997]
§ 173.225
Packaging requirements and other provisions for organic peroxides.
(a) General. When the § 172.101 table specifies that an organic peroxide be packaged under this section, the organic peroxide must be packaged and offered for transportation in accordance with the provisions of this section. Each packaging must conform to the general requirements of subpart B of part 173 and to the applicable requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing Group II performance levels. To avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. No used material, other than production residues or regrind from the same production process, may be used in plastic packagings. Organic peroxides which require temperature control are subject to the provisions of § 173.21(f).
(b) Organic peroxides table. The following Organic Peroxides Table specifies, by technical name, those organic peroxides that are authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions of § 173.128 of this part. An organic peroxide identified by technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. For an organic peroxide not identified in the table by technical name or a formulation of identified organic peroxides, the provisions of paragraph (c) of § 173.128 apply. The column headings of the Organic Peroxides table are as follows:
(1) Technical name. The first column specifies the technical name.
(2) ID number. The second column specifies the identification (ID) number which is used to identify the proper shipping name in the § 172.101 table. The word “EXEMPT” appearing in the column denotes that the material is not regulated as an organic peroxide.
(3) Concentration of organic peroxide. The third column specifies concentration (mass percent) limitations, if any, in mixtures or solutions for the organic peroxide. Limitations are given as minimums, maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and upper limits (i.e., “53-100” means from, and including, 53 percent to, and including 100 percent).
(4) Concentration of diluents. The fourth column specifies the type and concentration (mass percent) of diluent or inert solid, when required. Other types and concentrations of diluents may be authorized if approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(i) The required mass percent of “Diluent type A” is specified in column 4a. A diluent type A is an organic liquid that does not detrimentally affect the thermal stability or increase the hazard of the organic peroxide and with a boiling point not less than 150 °C at atmospheric pressure. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides.
(ii) The required mass percent of “Diluent type B” is specified in column 4b. A diluent type B is an organic liquid which is compatible with the organic peroxide and which has a boiling point, at atmospheric pressure, of less than 150 °C (302 °F) but at least 60 °C (140 °F), and a flash point greater than 5 °C (41 °F). Type B diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides provided that the boiling point is at least 60 °C (140 °F) above the SADT of the peroxide in a 50 kg (110 lbs) package. A type A diluent may be used to replace a type B diluent in equal concentration.
(iii) The required mass percent of “Inert solid” is specified in column 4c. An inert solid is a solid that does not detrimentally affect the thermal stability or increase the hazard of the organic peroxide.
(5) Concentration of water. Column 5 specifies, in mass percent, the minimum amount of water, if any, which must be in formulation.
(6) Packing method. Column 6 specifies the highest packing method (largest packaging capacity) authorized for the organic peroxide. Lower numbered packing methods (smaller packaging capacities) are also authorized. For example, if OP3 is specified, then OP2 and OP1 are also authorized. When an IBC or bulk packaging is authorized and meets the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section, lower control temperatures than those specified for non-bulk packagings are required. The Table of Packing Methods in paragraph (d) of this section defines the non-bulk packing methods.
(7) Temperatures. Column 7a specifies the control temperature. Column 7b specifies the emergency temperature. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are required. (See § 173.21(f)).
(8) Notes. Column 8 specifies other applicable provisions, as set forth in notes following the table.
Organic Peroxide Table
Technical name | ID number | Concentration (mass %) | Diluent (mass %) | A | B | I | Water (mass %) | Packing method | Temperature (°C) | Control | Emergency | Notes
(1) | (2) | (3) | (4a) | (4b) | (4c) | (5) | (6) | (7a) | (7b) | (8)
Acetyl acetone peroxide | UN3105 | ≤42 | ≥48 | | | ≥8 | OP7 | | | 2
Acetyl acetone peroxide [as a paste] | UN3106 | ≤32 | | | | | OP7 | | | 21
Acetyl benzoyl peroxide | UN3105 | ≤45 | ≥55 | | | | OP7
Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide | UN3112 | ≤82 | | | | ≥12 | OP4 | −10 | 0
Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl peroxide | UN3115 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
tert-Amyl hydroperoxide | UN3107 | ≤88 | ≥6 | | | ≥6 | OP8
tert-Amyl peroxyacetate | UN3107 | ≤62 | ≥38 | | | | OP8
tert-Amyl peroxybenzoate | UN3105 | ≤96 | ≥4 | | | | OP7
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN3115 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | +20 | +25
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexyl carbonate | UN3105 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate | UN3115 | ≤77 | | ≥23 | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate | UN3113 | ≤77 | | ≥23 | | | OP5 | +10 | +15
tert-Amylperoxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate | UN3101 | ≤100 | | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide | UN3105 | >42−100 | | | | | OP7 | | | 1, 9
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide | UN3106 | ≤42 | | ≥58 | | | OP7 | | | 1, 9
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert- butylperoxy)valerate | UN3103 | >52−100 | | | | | OP5
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert- butylperoxy)valerate | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP7
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert- butylperoxy)valerate | UN3108 | ≤42 | | | ≥58 | | OP8
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide | UN3103 | >79−90 | | | | ≥10 | OP5 | | | 13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide | UN3105 | ≤80 | ≥20 | | | | OP7 | | 4, 13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide | UN3107 | ≤79 | | | | >14 | OP8 | | | 13, 16
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide | UN3109 | ≤72 | | | | ≥28 | OP8 | | | 7, 13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide [and] Di- tert-butylperoxide | UN3103 | <82+>9 | | | | ≥7 | OP5 | | | 13
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate | UN3102 | >52−100 | | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate | UN3103 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP6
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate | UN3108 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP8
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate [as a paste] | UN 3108 | ≥52 | | | | | OP8
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate [as a paste] | UN 3110 | ≥42 | | | | | OP8 | | | 7
tert-Butyl monoperoxyphthalate | UN 3102 | ≤100 | | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate | UN 3101 | >52-77 | ≥23 | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate | UN 3103 | >32-52 | ≥48 | | | | OP6
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate | UN 3109 | ≥32 | ≥68 | | | | OP8 | | | 10
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate | UN 3119 | ≥32 | | ≥68 | | | Bulk | +30 | +35 | 7
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate | UN 3109 | ≥22 | | ≥78 | | | OP8 | | | 14
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate | UN 3103 | >77-100 | ≥23 | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate | UN 3105 | <52-77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7 | | | 1
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate | UN 3106 | ≥52 | | | ≤48 | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxybutyl fumarate | UN 3105 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxycrotonate | UN 3105 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxydiethylacetate | UN 3113 | ≤100 | | | | | OP5 | +20 | +25
| tert-Butyl peroxydiethylacetate [and] tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate | UN 3105 | ≤33+≤33 | ≥33 | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3113 | >52-100 | | | | | OP6 | +20 | +25
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3117 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP8 | +30 | +35
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3118 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP8 | +20 | +25
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3119 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | OP8 | +40 | +45
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3119 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | 1BC | +30 | +35 | 10
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN 3119 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | Bulk | +10 | +15 | 14
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane | UN 3115 | ≤31+≤36 | | ≥33 | | | OP7 | +35 | +40
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-(tert-Butylperoxy)butane | UN 3106 | ≤12+≤14 | ≥14 | | ≥60 | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxy-2- ethylhexylcarbonate | UN 3105 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate | UN 3111 | >52-77 | | ≥23 | | | OP5 | +15 | +20
tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate | UN 3115 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP7 | +15 | +20
tert-Butylperoxy isopropylcarbonate | UN 3103 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP5
1-(2-
tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3- isopropenylbenzene | UN 3105 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7
1-(2-
tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3- isopropenylbenzene | UN 3108 | ≤42 | | | ≥58 | | OP8
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-methylbenzoate | UN3103 | ≤100 | | | | | OP5
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate | UN3115 | >77-100 | | | | | OP7 | −5 | +5
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate | UN3115 | ≤77 | | ≥23 | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3117 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | 0 | +10
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] | UN3118 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | 0 | +10
tert-Butyl peroxyneoheptanoate | UN3115 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7 | +10 | +15
3-tert-Butylperoxy-3-phenylphthalide | UN3106 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate | UN3113 | >67-77 | ≥23 | | | | OP5 | 0 | +10
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate | UN3115 | ≤67 | | ≥33 | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate | UN3119 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | OP8 | +30 | +35
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate | UN3119 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | IBC | +10 | +15 | 10
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate | UN3119 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | Bulk | −5 | +5 | 14
tert-Butylperoxy stearylcarbonate | UN3106 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate | UN3105 | >32-100 | | | | | OP7
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate | UN3109 | ≤32 | ≥68 | | | | OP8 | | | 10
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate | UN3119 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | Bulk | +35 | +40 | 14
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid | UN3102 | >57-86 | | | ≥14 | | OP1
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid | UN3106 | ≤77 | | | ≥6 | ≥17 | OP7
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid | UN3106 | ≤57 | | | ≥3 | ≥40 | OP7
Cumyl hydroperoxide | UN3107 | >90-98 | ≤10 | | | | OP8 | | | 13
Cumyl hydroperoxide | UN3109 | ≥90 | ≥10 | | | | OP8 | | | 7, 13, 15
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate | UN3115 | ≤77 | | ≥23 | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤52 | | | | | OP8 | −10 | 0
Cumyl peroxyneoheptanoate | UN3115 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
Cumyl peroxypivalate | UN3115 | ≤77 | | ≥23 | | | OP7 | −5 | +5
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) | UN3104 | ≤91 | | | | ≥9 | OP6 | | | 13
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) | UN3105 | ≤72 | | ≥28 | | | OP7 | | | 5
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) [as a paste] | UN3106 | ≤72 | | | | | OP7 | | | 5, 21
| Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) | Exempt | ≤32 | | | ≥68 | | Exempt
Diacetone alcohol peroxides | UN3115 | ≤57 | | ≥26 | | ≥8 | OP7 | +40 | +45 | 5
Diacetyl peroxide | UN3115 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | OP7 | +20 | +25 | 8,13
Di-tert-amyl peroxide | UN3107 | ≤100 | | | | | OP8
1,1-Di-(tert-amylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3103 | ≤82 | ≥18 | | | | OP6 |
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3102 | >51-100 | | | ≤48 | | OP2 | | | 3
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3102 | >77-94 | | | | ≥6 | OP4 | | | 3
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3104 | ≤77 | | | | ≥23 | OP6
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3106 | ≤62 | | | ≥28 | ≥10 | OP7 |
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] | UN3106 | >52-62 | | | | | OP7 | | | 21
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] | UN3108 | ≤56.5 | | | | ≥15 | OP8
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3106 | >35-52 | | | ≥48 | | OP7
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] | UN3108 | ≤52 | | | | | OP8 | | | 21
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] | Exempt | ≤50 | ≥14 | | | ≥18 | Exempt
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3107 | >36-42 | ≥18 | | | ≤40 | OP8
Dibenzoyl peroxide | UN3107 | >36-42 | ≥58 | | | | OP8
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3109 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | | | 10
Dibenzoyl peroxide | Exempt | ≤35 | | | ≥65 | | Exempt
Dibenzyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3112 | ≤87 | | | | ≥13 | OP5 | +25 | +30
Di-(4-tert- butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate | UN3114 | ≤100 | | | | | OP6 | +30 | +35
Di-(4-tert- butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | +30 | +35 | 10
Di-tert-butyl peroxide | UN3107 | >32-100 | | | | | OP8
Di-tert-butyl peroxide | UN3109 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP8 | | | 7, 24
Di-tert-butyl peroxyazelate | UN3105 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7
2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)butane | UN3103 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP6
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3101 | >80-100 | | | | | OP5
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3103 | >52-80 | ≤20 | | | | OP5
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3105 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3106 | ≤42 | ≥13 | | ≥45 | | OP7
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3109 | ≤42 | ≥58 | | | | OP8 | | | 10
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3107 | ≤27 | ≥36 | | | | OP8 | | | 22
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3109 | ≤25 | ≥25 | ≥50 | | | OP8 | | | 7
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)cyclohexane | UN3109 | ≤13 | ≥13 | ≥74 | | | OP8 | | | 7
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | >27-52 | | ≥48 | | | OP7 | −15 | 5
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] | UN3118 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | −15 | −5
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3117 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | OP8 | −10 | 0
Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3113 | >52-100 | | | | | OP4 | −20 | −10 | 6
Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP7 | −15 | −5
Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(s) | UN3106 | >42-100 | | | ≤57 | | OP7 | | | 1, 9
| Di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(s) | Exempt | ≤42 | | | ≥58 | | Exempt
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate | UN3105 | >42-52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7 |
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate [as a paste] | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | | | OP7 | | | 21
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate | UN3107 | ≤42 | ≥58 | | | | OP8
2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane | UN3105 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7
2,2-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)propane | UN3106 | ≤42 | ≥13 | | ≥45 | | OP7
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane | UN3101 | >90-100 | | | | | OP5
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane | UN3103 | >57-90 | ≥10 | | | | OP5
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane | UN3106 | ≤57 | | | ≥43 | | OP7
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,5,5- trimethylcyclohexane | UN3107 | ≤57 | ≥43 | | | | OP8
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexane | UN3107 | ≤32 | ≥26 | ≥42 | | | OP8
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3116 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | +30 | +35
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | +30 | +35 | 10
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide | UN3102 | ≤77 | | | | ≥23 | OP5
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste] | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | | | OP7 | | | 21
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide | Exempt | ≤32 | | | ≥68 | | Exempt
Dicumyl peroxide | UN3109 | >52-100 | | ≤48 | | | OP8 | | | 7, 9, 11
Dicumyl peroxide | UN3110 | >52-100 | | | ≤48 | | OP8 | | | 7, 9, 11
Dicumyl peroxide | Exempt | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | Exempt
Dicumyl peroxide | Exempt | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | Exempt
Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3112 | >91-100 | | | | | OP3 | +5 | +10
Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3114 | ≤91 | | | | ≥9 | OP5 | +5 | +10
Didecanoyl peroxide | UN3114 | ≤100 | | | | | OP6 | +30 | +35
2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert- butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane | UN3106 | ≤42 | | | ≥58 | | OP7
2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert- butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propane | UN3107 | ≤25 | | ≥75 | | | OP8
Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide | UN3102 | ≤77 | | | | ≥23 | OP5
Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | | | OP7
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate | UN3113 | >77-100 | | | | | OP5 | −20 | −10
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | ≤77 | | | | | OP7 | −15 | −5
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤52 | | | | | OP8 | −15 | −5
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water (frozen)] | UN3118 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | −15 | −5
Diethyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | ≤27 | ≥73 | | | | OP7 | >10 | 0
2,2-Dihydroperoxypropane | UN3102 | ≤27 | | | ≥73 | | OP5
Di-(1-hydroxycyclohexyl)peroxide | UN3106 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
Diisobutyryl peroxide | UN3111 | >32-52 | | ≥48 | | | OP5 | −20 | −10
Diisobutyryl peroxide | UN3115 | ≤32 | | ≥68 | | | OP7 | −20 | −10
Diisopropylbenzene dihydroperoxide | UN3106 | ≤82 | ≥5 | | | ≥5 | OP7 | | | 17
Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3112 | >52-100 | | | | | OP2 | −15 | −5
Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
Diisotridecyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3115 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
Dilauroyl peroxide | UN3106 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | |
Dilauroyl peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3109 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | | | 10
Di-(2-methylbenzoyl)peroxide | UN3112 | ≤87 | | | | ≥13 | OP5 | +30 | +35
Di-(4-methylbenzoyl)peroxide [as a paste with silicone oil] | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | | | OP7
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di- (benzoylperoxy)hexane | UN3102 | >82-100 | | | | | OP5
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di- (benzoylperoxy)hexane | UN3104 | ≤82 | | | | ≥18 | OP5
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(benzoylperoxy)hexane | UN3106 | ≤82 | | | ≥18 | | OP7
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexane | UN3105 | >52-100 | | | | | OP7
| 2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 | UN3101 | >87-100 | | | | | OP5
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 | UN3103 | >52-86 | | | | | OP5
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexane | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP7
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexane | UN3109 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP8 | | | 7
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexyne-3 | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP7
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert- butylperoxy)hexane [as a paste] | UN3108 | ≤47 | | | | | OP8
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(2- ethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane | UN3115 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | +20 | +25
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-dihydroperoxyhexane | UN3104 | ≤82 | | | | ≥18 | | OP6
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(3,5,5- trimethylhexanoylperoxy)hexane | UN3105 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7
1,1-Dimethyl-3- hydroxybutylperoxyneoheptanoate | UN3117 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | | OP8 | +0 | +10
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3116 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | +20 | +25
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤42 | | | | | OP8 | +20 | +25
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤42 | | | | | IBC | +15 | +25 | 10
Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene | UN3115 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
Di-n-nonanoyl peroxide | UN3116 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
Di-n-octanoyl peroxide | UN3114 | ≤100 | | | | | OP5 | +10 | +15
Diperoxy azelaic acid | UN3116 | ≤27 | | | ≥73 | | OP7 | +35 | +40
Diperoxy dodecane diacid | UN3116 | >13-42 | | | ≥58 | | OP7 | +40 | +45
Diperoxy dodecane diacid | Exempt | ≤13 | | | ≥87 | | Exempt
Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate | UN3102 | >85-100 | | | | | OP5
Di-(2-phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonate | UN3106 | ≤85 | | | | ≥15 | OP7
Dipropionyl peroxide | UN3117 | ≤27 | | ≥73 | | | OP8 | +15 | +20
Di-n-propyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3113 | ≤100 | | | | | OP4 | -25 | -15
Distearyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3106 | ≤87 | | | ≥13 | | OP7
Disuccinic acid peroxide | UN3102 | >72-100 | | | | | OP4 | | | 18
Disuccinic acid peroxide | UN3116 | ≤72 | | | | ≥28 | OP7 | +10 | +15
Di-(3,5,5-trimethyl-1,2-dioxolanyl- 3)peroxide [as a paste] | UN3116 | ≤52 | | | | | OP7 | +30 | +35 | 21
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide | UN3115 | >38-82 | ≥18 | | | | OP7 | 0 | +10
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3117 | ≤52 | | | | | OP8 | +10 | +15
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide | UN3119 | ≤38 | ≥62 | | | | OP8 | +20 | +25
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide | UN3119 | ≤38 | ≥62 | | | | IBC | +10 | +15 | 10
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide | UN3119 | ≤38 | ≥62 | | | | Bulk | −10 | 0 | 14
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-amylperoxy)butyrate | UN3105 | ≤67 | ≥33 | | | | OP7
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate | UN3103 | >77 - 100 | | | | | OP5
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate | UN3105 | ≤77 | ≥23 | | | | OP7
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-butylperoxy)butyrate | UN3106 | ≤52 | | | ≥48 | | OP7
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- tetraoxacyclononane | UN3102 | >52 - 100 | | | | | OP4
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- tetraoxacyclononane | UN3105 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP7
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- tetraoxacyclononane | UN3106 | ≤52 | | ≥48 | | OP7
| Isopropyl sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate + di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate + di-isopropyl peroxydicarbonate | UN3111 | ≤52 + ≤28 + ≤22 | | | | | OP5 | −20 | −10
Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide | UN3109 | ≤72 | ≥28 | | | | OP8 | | | 7, 13
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide | UN3105 | > 72 - 100 | | | | | OP7 | | | 13
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide | UN3109 | ≤72 | ≥28 | | | | OP8 | | | 7,25
Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s) | UN3115 | ≤67 | | ≥33 | | | OP7 | +35 | +40
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) | UN3101 | ≤52 | ≥48 | | | | OP5 | | | 5, 13
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) | UN3105 | ≤45 | ≥55 | | | | OP7 | | | 5
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s) | UN3107 | ≤40 | ≥60 | | | | OP8 | | | 5
Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s) | UN3105 | ≤62 | ≥19 | | | | OP7 | | | 5, 23
Organic peroxide, liquid, sample | UN3103 | | | | | | OP2 | | | 12
Organic peroxide, liquid, sample, temperature controlled | UN3113 | | | | | | OP2 | | | 12
Organic peroxide, solid, sample | UN3104 | | | | | | OP2 | | | 12
Organic peroxide, solid, sample, temperature controlled | UN3114 | | | | | | OP2 | | | 12
Peracetic acid with not more than 20% hydrogen peroxide | Exempt | ≤6 | | | | ≥60 | Exempt
Peracetic acid with not more than 26% hydrogen peroxide | UN3109 | ≤17 | | | | ≥27 | OP8 | | | 10, 13
Peracetic acid with 7% hydrogen peroxide | UN3107 | ≤36 | | | | ≥15 | OP8 | | | 13
Peroxyacetic acid, type D, stabilized | UN3105 | ≤43 | | | | | OP7 | | | 13, 20
Peroxyacetic acid, type E, stabilized | UN3107 | ≤43 | | | | | OP8 | | | 13, 20
Peroxyacetic acid, type F, stabilized | UN3109 | ≤43 | | | | | OP8 | | | 13, 20
Pinanyl hydroperoxide | UN3105 | ≥56-100 | | | | | OP7 | | | 13
Pinanyl hydroperoxide | UN3109 | <56 | >44 | | | | OP8 | | | 7
Tetrahydronaphthyl hydroperoxide | UN3106 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl hydroperoxide | UN3105 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutylperoxy-2-ethylhexanoate | UN3115 | ≤100 | | | | | OP7 | +20 | +25
2,4,4-Trimethylpentyl-2-peroxyneodecanoate | UN3115 | ≤72 | | ≥28 | | | OP7 | −5 | +5
2,4,4-Trimethylpentyl-2-peroxyneodecanoate [as a stable dispersion in water] | UN3119 | ≤52 | | | | | OP8 | −5 | +5
2,4,4-Trimethylpentyl-2-peroxy phenoxyacetate | UN3115 | ≤37 | | ≥63 | | | OP7 | −10 | 0
Notes:
1. For domestic shipments, OP8 is authorized.
2. Available oxygen must be <4.7 percent.
3. For concentrations <80 percent OP5 is allowed. For concentrations of at least 80 percent but <85 percent, OP4 is allowed. For concentrations of at least 85 percent, maximum package size is OP2.
4. The diluent may be replaced by di-tert-butyl peroxide.
5. Available oxygen must be ≤9 percent.
6. For domestic shipments, OP5 is authorized.
7. This material may be transported in intermediate bulk containers and bulk packagings under the provisions of paragraph (e) of this section.
8. Only non-metallic packagings are authorized.
9. For domestic shipments, this material may be transported in bulk packagings under the provisions of paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section.
10. This material may be transported in intermediate bulk containers under the provisions of paragraph (e) of this section.
11. Up to 2000 kg per container authorized.
12. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
13. “Corrosive” subsidiary risk label is required.
14. This material may be transported in bulk packagings under the provisions of paragraph (e) of this section.
15. No “Corrosive” subsidiary risk label is required for concentrations below 80%.
16. With <6% di-tert-butyl peroxide.
17. With ≥8% 1-isopropylhydroperoxy-4-isopropylhydroxybenzene.
18. Addition of water to this organic peroxide will decrease its thermal stability.
19. [Reserved]
20. Mixtures with hydrogen peroxide, water and acid(s).
21. With diluent type A, with or without water.
22. With >36 percent, by mass, ethylbenzene.
23. With >19 percent, by mass, methyl isobutyl ketone.
24. Diluent type b with boiling point >100 C.
25. No “Corrosive” subsidiary risk label is required for concentrations below 56%.
(c) New organic peroxides, formulations and samples. (1) Except as provided for samples in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, no person may offer for transportation an organic peroxide which is not identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table of this section, or a formulation of one or more organic peroxides which are identified by technical name in that table, unless the organic peroxide is assigned a generic type and shipping description and is approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety under the provisions of § 173.128(c) of this subchapter.
(2) Samples. Samples of new organic peroxides or new formulations of organic peroxides identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (b) of this section, for which complete test data are not available, and which are to be transported for further testing or evaluation, may be assigned an appropriate shipping description for organic peroxide Type C, packaged and offered for transportation, under the following conditions:
(i) Data available to the person offering the material for transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of hazard no greater than that of an organic peroxide Type B and that the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous phase separation;
(ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method OP2, for a liquid or solid, respectively;
(iii) Packages of the organic peroxide may be offered for transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per transport vehicle; and
(iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:
(A) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, 5.2, UN 3103;
(B) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, 5.2, UN 3104;
(C) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3113; or
(D) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 3114.
(3) Mixtures. Mixtures of organic peroxides individually identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (b) of this section may be classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most dangerous component and be transported under the conditions for transportation given for this type. If the stable components form a thermally less stable mixture, the SADT of the mixture must be determined and the new control and emergency temperature derived under the provisions of § 173.21(f).
(d) Packing Method Table. Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in the Maximum Quantity per Packing Method Table. The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method represent the maximum that is authorized.
(1) The following types of packagings are authorized:
(i) Drums: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H1, 1H2;
(ii) Jerricans: 3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2;
(iii) Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 4A, 4B; or
(iv) Composite packagings with a plastic inner receptacle: 6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1, 6HH2.
(2) Metal packaging (including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings) are used only for packing methods OP7 and OP8.
(3) In combination packagings, glass receptacles are used only as inner packagings with a maximum content of 0.5 kg or 0.5 liter.
(4) The maximum quantity per packaging or package for Packing Methods OP1-OP8 must be as follows:
Maximum Quantity Per Packaging/Package for Packing Methods OP1 to OP8
Maximum quantity | Packing method | OP1 | OP2^1 | OP3 | OP4^1 | OP5 | OP6 | OP7 | OP8
Solids and combination packagings (liquid and solid) (kg) | 0.5 | 0.5/10 | 5 | 5/25 | 25 | 50 | 50 | ^2200
| Liquids (L) | 0.5 | | 5 | | 30 | 60 | 60 | ^3225
^1 If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the maximum net mass of the complete package.
^2 60 kg for jerricans and 100 kg for boxes.
^3 60 L for jerricans.
(e) Bulk packagings for organic peroxides. When bulk packagings are authorized under the provisions of the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (b) of this section, only the following packagings are authorized:
(1) Rail cars. Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-weld tank car tank are authorized. DOT 103W, 111A60F1 and 111A60W1 tank car tanks must have bottom outlets effectively sealed from inside. Gauging devices are required on DOT 103W tank car tanks. Riveted tank car tanks are not authorized.
(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles with a tank design pressure of at least 172 kPa (25 psig) are authorized.
(3) Portable tanks.
(i) Specification IM 101 intermodal portable tanks are authorized as follows:
(A) Each tank must have a minimum design pressure of 267 kPa (39 psig), a minimum shell thickness of 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) mild steel.
(B) Each tank must be equipped with at least two self-reclosing pressure relief devices of at least 7.6 cm (3.0 inches) diameter. The pressure relief devices must be set at a pressure that is determined by the following formula:
Pressure relief valve setting = 1.2 × [Vapor pressure of lading at 46 °C (115 °F)+Static head of lading+Pressure of gas padding, if any]
(ii) Specification 57 metal portable tanks are authorized only for tert-butyl cumyl peroxide, di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl-benzene(s), dicumyl peroxide and mixtures of two or more of these peroxides.
(4) For tertiary butyl hydroperoxide (TBHP), each tank car, cargo tank or portable tank must contain 7.6 cm (3.0 inches) low density polyethylene (PE) saddles having a melt index of at least 0.2 grams per 10 minutes (ASTM D1238, condition E) as part of the lading, with a ratio of PE to TBHP over a range of 0.008 to 0.012 by mass. Alternatively, plastic or metal containers equipped with fusible plugs having a melting point between 69 °C (156 °F) and 71 °C (160 °F) and filled with a sufficient quantity of water to dilute the TBHP to 65 percent or less by mass may be used. The PE saddles must be visually inspected after each trip and, at a minimum, once every 12 months, and replaced when discoloration, fracture, severe deformation, or other indication of change is noted.
(5) Intermediate bulk containers. Intermediate bulk containers that are tested at the Packing Group II performance level in accordance with subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter are authorized as follows:
(i) Composite: 31HA1;
(ii) Rigid plastic: 31H1; and
(iii) Metal: 31A.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.225, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.226
Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A.
Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials that are poisonous by inhalation and that fall within the boundaries of Hazard Zone A in the graph found in § 173.133 must be packed in non-bulk packagings in accordance with the following paragraphs:
(a) In specification cylinders, as authorized in § 173.40.
(b) In 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, or 6HA1 drums further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum. Both inner and outer drums must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. The outer drum must have a minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inch) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.30 mm (0.248 inch) for a 1H2 outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psi). Capacity of the inner drum may not exceed 220 L (58 gallons). In addition, the inner drum must—
(1) Be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the hydrostatic pressure test in § 178.605 of this subchapter at a test pressure of 550 kPa (80 psig);
(2) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in § 178.604 of this subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least twice the vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the material to be packaged;
(3) Have screw-type closures that are—
(i) Closed and tightened to a torque prescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a device that is capable of measuring torque;
(ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation; and
(iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in accordance with the cap seal manufacturer's recommendations and is capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 psig).
(4) Have a minimum thickness as follows:
(i) If the capacity of the inner drum is less than or equal to 120 L (32 gallons), the minimum thickness of the inner drum is—
(A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.3 mm (0.051 inch);
(B) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 inch);
(C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
(D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0622 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 0.96 mm (0.0378 inch).
(ii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 120 L (32 gallons), the thickness of the inner drum is—
(A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.7 mm (0.067 inch);
(B) For a 1B1 drum, 4.7 mm (0.185 inch);
(C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
(D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0622 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 1.08 mm (0.043 inch); and
(5) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive material.
(c) In combination packagings, consisting of an inner packaging system and an outer packaging, as follows:
(1) Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B2
Metal drum, other than steel or aluminum: 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H2
Solid plastic box: 4H2
(2) Inner packaging system. The inner packaging system consists of two packagings: an impact-resistant receptacle of glass, earthenware, plastic or metal securely cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material and packed within a leak-tight packaging of metal or plastic. This combination packaging in turn is packed within the outer packaging. Capacity of each inner receptacle may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). An inner receptacle that has a closure must have a closure which is physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation. Both the inner packaging system and the outer packaging must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packaging Group I performance level. The inner packaging system must meet these tests without the benefit of the outer packaging. The total amount of liquid contained in the outer packaging may not exceed 16 L (4 gallons).
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67517, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt 173-261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.227
Materials poisonous by inhalation. Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B.
Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials that are poisonous by inhalation and that fall within the boundaries of Hazard Zone B in the graph found in § 173.133 shall be packed in non-bulk packagings which conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packing Group I performance level. The following packagings are authorized:
(a) Packagings as authorized in § 173.226.
(b) 1A1, 1B1, 1N1 or 1H1 drum or 6HA1 composite further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum. Both the inner and outer drums must conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. The outer drum must have a minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inches) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.30 mm (0.248 inches) for a 1H2 outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psi). In addition, the inner drum must—
(1) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in § 178.604 of this subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least two times the vapor pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the material to be packaged;
(2) Have screw closures that are—
(i) Closed and tightened to a torque prescribed by the closure manufacturer, using a device that is capable of measuring torque;
(ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during transportation; and
(iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in accordance with the cap seal manufacturer's recommendations and is capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 psig).
(3) Have a minimum thickness as follows:
(i) If the capacity of the inner drum is less than or equal to 30 L (7.9 gallons), the minimum thickness of the inner drum is:
(A) For a 1A1 drum, 0.69 mm (0.027 inch);
(B) For a 1B1 drum, 2.79 mm (0.110 inch);
(C) For a 1H1 drum, 1.14 mm (0.045 inch); and
(D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0625 inch), the outer steel drum shall be 0.70 mm (0.027 inch).
(ii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 30 L (7.9 gallons) but less than or equal to 120 L (32 gallons), the minimum thickness of the inner drum is—
(A) For a 1A1 drum, 1.08 mm (.043 inch);
(B) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 inch);
(C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
(D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0625 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 0.96 mm (0.0378 inches).
(iii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 120 L (31.7 gallons), the thickness of the inner drum is—
(A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.35 mm (0.053 inches);
(B) For a 1B1 drum, 4.7 mm (0.185 inches);
(C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inches); and
(D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm (0.0625 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 1.08 mm (0.043 inch).
(4) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-reactive material; and
(5) Have a capacity not greater than 220 L (58 gallons).
(c) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1 or 6HA1 drums described in paragraph (b) of this section may be used without being further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 drum if the shipper loads the material, blocks and braces the drums within the transport vehicle and seals the transport vehicle used. Drums may not be stacked (double decked) within the transport vehicle. Shipments must be from one origin to one destination only without any intermediate pickup or delivery.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994]
§ 173.228
Bromine pentafluoride or bromine trifluoride.
(a) When the § 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk packagings prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section are authorized for its transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of this part, to the specification requirements of part 178 of this subchapter and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(b) Specification 3A150, 3AA150, 3B240, 3BN150, 4B240, 4BA240, 4BW240 and 3E1800 cylinders are authorized. Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded plug. Cylinder valves must be protected as specified for corrosive gases in § 173.301(g). No cylinder may be equipped with any pressure relief device. Specification 3E1800 cylinders must be packaged in accordance with the requirements of § 173.301(k).
§ 173.229
Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.
When the § 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be packaged in accordance with this section, only 4G fiberboard boxes, with inner packagings of polyethylene or other suitable material, are authorized. Fiberboard boxes must be reinforced and insulated and sufficient dry ice must be used to maintain the hydrate or acid in a frozen state during transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. Transportation is authorized only by private or contract carrier by motor vehicle.

Subpart F—Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7
§ 173.240
Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks; and metal non-DOT specification, sift-proof tank car tanks and sift-proof closed cars.
(b) Motor vehicles: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; non-DOT specification, sift-proof cargo tank motor vehicles; and sift-proof closed vehicles.
(c) Portable tanks and closed bulk bins: DOT 51, 52, 53, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; and sift-proof non-DOT specification portable tanks and closed bulk bins.
(d) Intermediate bulk containers. Intermediate bulk containers are authorized subject to the conditions and limitations of this paragraph and paragraph (d)(2) of this section provided they conform to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level specified in column 5 of the § 172.101 table of this subchapter for the material being transported.
(1) The following are authorized:
(i) Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, or 31HZ2. For composite intermediate bulk containers, the letter “Z” must be replaced with a capital letter which indicates the material of construction of the outer packaging. For example 21HA1 is a composite intermediate bulk container with a metal outer packaging (see § 178.702 of this subchapter);
(ii) Fiberboard: 11G;
(iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, or 13M2;
(iv) Metal: 11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, or 31N;
(v) Rigid plastic: 11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1, or 31H2; or
(vi) Wooden intermediate bulk containers: 11C, 11D, or 11F.
(2) The following conditions and limitations apply to the use of intermediate bulk containers:
(i) Flexible, fiberboard and wooden intermediate bulk containers are intended for the transport of solids only and may not be used for liquids or materials that may become liquid during transportation; or
(ii) Flexible, fiberboard, or wooden intermediate bulk containers containing materials in Packing Group II must be packed in a closed freight container or a closed transport vehicle.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996]
§ 173.241
Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid materials.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks and AAR Class 203W, 206W, and 211W tank car tanks.
(b) Cargo tanks: DOT specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicles suitable for transport of liquids.
(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51, 52, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; and non-DOT specification portable tanks suitable for transport of liquids.
(d) Intermediate bulk containers. (1) Intermediate bulk containers are authorized subject to the conditions and limitations of this paragraph and paragraph (d)(2) of this section provided they conform to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level specified in column 5 of the § 172.101 table of this subchapter for the material being transported.
(i) The following are authorized for liquids or solids:
(A) Composite: 31HZ1 or 31HZ2; For each composite intermediate bulk container, the letter “Z” must be replaced with a capital letter which indicates the material of construction of the outer packaging. For example, 31HA1 is a composite intermediate bulk container with a metal outer packaging (see § 178.702 of this subchapter);
(B) Metal: 31A, 31B, or 31N; or
(C) Rigid plastic: 31H1 or 31H2.
(ii) The following are authorized for solids only:
(A) Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, or 21HZ2. For each composite intermediate bulk container, the letter “Z” must be replaced with a capital letter which indicates the material of construction of the outer packaging. For example, 21HA1 is a composite intermediate bulk container with a metal outer packaging (see § 178.702 of this subchapter);
(B) Fiberboard: 11G;
(C) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, or 13M2;
(D) Metal: 11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, or 21N;
(E) Rigid plastic: 11H1, 11H2, 21H1, or 21H2; or
(F) Wooden: 11C, 11D, or 11F.
(2) The following conditions and limitations apply to the use of intermediate bulk containers:
(i) Flexible, fiberboard and wooden intermediate bulk containers are intended for the transport of solids only and may not be used for liquids or materials that may become liquid during transportation;
(ii) Only liquids with a vapor pressure less than or equal to 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C (122 °F), or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F), are authorized in metal intermediate bulk containers; or
(iii) Flexible, fiberboard, or wooden intermediate bulk containers containing materials in Packing Group II must be packed in a closed freight container or a closed transport vehicle.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996]
§ 173.242
Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, including solids with dual hazards.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks and AAR Class 206W tank car tanks.
(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles. Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3, Packing Group I or II, or Packing Group III with a flash point of less than 38 °C (100 °F); Class 6, Packing Group I or II; and Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials must conform to the following special requirements:
(1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by § 173.33(d), each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting the requirements of § 178.346-3 or § 178.347-4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet the requirement in § 178.337-9 of this subchapter.
(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT 412 must be equipped with stop-valves meeting the requirements of § 178.345-11 of this subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely closed within 30 seconds of actuation by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 °C (250 °F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements in § 178.337-11 of this subchapter.
(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51, 52, 53, 56, 57 and 60 portable tanks; and marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64. DOT 57 portable tanks used for the transportation by vessel of Class 3, Packing Group II, materials must conform to the following:
(1) Each tank must have a minimum design pressure of 62 kPa (9 psig) and be equipped in accordance with § 178.253-4 of this subchapter, except that frangible devices are not authorized; and
(2) No pressure relief device may open at less than 34.4 kPa (5 psig).
(d) Intermediate bulk containers. (1) Intermediate bulk containers are authorized subject to the conditions and limitations of this paragraph and paragraph (d)(2) of this section provided they conform to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level specified in column 5 of the § 172.101 table of this subchapter for the material being transported.
(i) The following are authorized for liquids or solids:
(A) Composite intermediate bulk containers: 31HZ1 or 31HZ2; for each composite intermediate bulk container, the letter “Z” must be replaced with a capital letter which indicates the material of construction of the outer packaging. For example, 21HA1 is a composite intermediate bulk container with a metal outer packaging (see § 178.702 of this subchapter);
(B) Metal: 31A, 31B, or 31N; or
(C) Rigid plastic: 31H1 or 31H2;
(ii) The following are authorized for solids only:
(A) Composite: 11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, or 21HZ2. For each composite intermediate bulk container, the letter “Z” must be replaced with a capital letter which indicates the material of construction of the outer packaging. For example, 21HA1 is a composite intermediate bulk container with a metal outer packaging (see § 178.702 of this subchapter);
(B) Fiberboard: 11G;
(C) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, or 13M2;
(D) Metal: 11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, or 21N;
(E) Rigid plastic: 11H1, 11H2, 21H1, or 21H2; or
(F) Wooden intermediate bulk containers: 11C, 11D, or 11F.
(2) Intermediate bulk containers are authorized subject to the following conditions and limitations:
(i) No Packing Group I liquids or materials classified as Division 4.2 Packing Group I are authorized in intermediate bulk containers. Packing Group I solids are only authorized in metal intermediate bulk containers with capacities up to 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) and in rigid plastic, composite, flexible, fiberboard and wooden intermediate bulk containers with capacities of up to 1.5 cubic meters (53 cubic feet);
(ii) Flexible, fiberboard and wooden intermediate bulk containers are intended for the transport of solids only and may not be used for liquids or materials that may become liquid during transportation;
(iii) Only liquids with a vapor pressure less than or equal to 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C (122 °F), or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F), are authorized in metal intermediate bulk containers; or
(iv) Flexible, fiberboard, or wooden intermediate bulk containers and composite intermediate bulk containers, with a fiberboard outer body, containing materials in Packing Group I must be packed in a closed freight container or a closed transport vehicle. Flexible, fiberboard, or wooden intermediate bulk containers containing materials in Packing Group II must be packed in a closed freight container or a closed transport vehicle.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.243
Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks.
(b) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 304, MC 307, MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; and MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles with tank design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig). Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3 or Division 6.1 materials, or Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials must conform to the following special requirements:
(1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by § 173.33(d), each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting the requirements of § 178.346-3 or 178.347-4 of this subchapter. However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 cargo tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet the requirement in § 178.337-9 of this subchapter.
(2) Bottom outlets: DOT 407 and DOT 412 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves meeting the requirements of § 178.345-11 of this subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely closed within 30 seconds of actuation by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II) by a closure activated at a temperature not over 121 °C (250 °F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements in § 178.337-11 of this subchapter.
(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51 and DOT 60 portable tanks; and marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64 with design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig).
(d) Intermediate bulk containers. (1) Metal intermediate bulk containers (31A, 31B, 31N) are authorized subject to the conditions and limitations of paragraph (d)(2) of this section provided they conform to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level specified in column 5 of the § 172.101 table of this subchapter for the material being transported.
(2) Intermediate bulk containers are authorized subject to the following conditions and limitations:
(i) No Packing Group I liquids or materials classified as Division 4.2 Packing Group I are authorized in intermediate bulk containers.
(ii) Packing Group I solids are authorized only in metal intermediate bulk containers with capacities up to three cubic meters (106 cubic feet); and
(iii) Liquids with a vapor pressure greater than 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50 °C (122 °F), or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55 °C (131 °F), are not authorized in metal intermediate bulk containers.
(e) A dual hazard material may be packaged in accordance with § 173.242 if:
(1) The subsidiary hazard is Class 3 with a flash point greater than 38 °C (100 °F); or
(2) The subsidiary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.244
Bulk packaging for certain pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous liquids with inhalation hazards (Division 6.1).
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 105, 109, 112, 114, or 120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks.
(b) Cargo tanks: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles and, except for Division 4.2 materials, MC 312 and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles.
(c) Portable tanks: DOT 51 portable tanks.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996]
§ 173.245
Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3).
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Tank car tanks and multi-unit tank car tanks, when approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(b) Cargo tank motor vehicles and portable tanks, when approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.247
Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials (Class 9) and certain flammable elevated temperature materials (Class 3).
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions in column 7 of the § 172.101 table. On or after October 1, 1993, authorized packagings must meet all requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, unless otherwise excepted.
(a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 120 tank car tanks; Class DOT 106, 110 multi-unit tank car tanks; AAR Class 203W, 206W, 211W tank car tanks; and non-DOT specification tank car tanks equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings.
(b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; DOT 406, DOT 407, DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicles equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings. A non-DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicle constructed of carbon steel which is in elevated temperature material service is excepted from § 178.345-7(d)(5) of this subchapter.
(c) Portable tanks: Specification 51, 52, 53, 56, 57, 60 portable tanks; IM 101, 102 portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; and non-specification portable tanks equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance to specification packagings.
(d) Crucibles: Nonspecification crucibles designed and constructed such that the stress in the packaging does not exceed one fourth (0.25) of the ultimate strength of the packaging material at any temperature within the design temperature range. Stress is determined under a load equal to the sum of the static or working pressure in combination with the loads developed from accelerations and decelerations incident to normal transportation. For highway transportation, these forces are assumed to be “1.7g” vertical, “0.75g” longitudinal, and “0.4g” transverse, in reference to the axes of the transport vehicle. Each accelerative or decelerative load may be considered separately.
(e) Kettles: A kettle, for the purpose of this section, is a bulk packaging (portable tank or cargo tank) having a capacity not greater than 5678 L (1500 gallons) with an integral heating apparatus used for melting various bituminous products such as asphalt. Kettles used for the transport of asphalt or bitumen are subject to the following requirements:
(1) Low stability kettles. Kettles with a ratio of track-width to fully loaded center of gravity (CG) height less than 2.5 must meet all requirements of paragraph (g) of this section (track-width is the distance measured between the outer edge of the kettle tires; CG height is measured perpendicular from the road surface).
(2) High stability kettles. (i) Kettles with a total capacity of less than 2650 L (700 gallons) and a ratio of track-width to fully loaded CG height of 2.5 or more are excepted from all requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of this section, if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.
(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more and a ratio of track-width to fully loaded CG height of 2.5 or more are excepted from the “substantially leak tight” requirements of paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of this section if closures meet the requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.
(iii) Closures must be securely closed during transportation. Closures also must be designed to prevent opening and the expulsion of lading in a rollover accident.
(f) Other bulk packagings: Bulk packagings, other than those specified in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section, which are used for the transport of elevated temperature materials, must conform to all requirements of paragraph (g) of this section on or after October 1, 1993.
(g) General requirements. Bulk packagings authorized or used for transport of elevated temperature materials must conform to the following requirements:
(1) Pressure and vacuum control equipment. When pressure or vacuum control equipment is required on a packaging authorized in this section, such equipment must be of a self-reclosing design, must prevent package rupture or collapse due to pressure, must prevent significant release of lading due to packaging overturn or splashing or surging during normal transport conditions, and may be external to the packaging.
(i) Pressure control equipment is not required if pressure in the packaging would increase less than 10 percent as a result of heating the lading from the lowest design operating temperature to a temperature likely to be encountered if the packaging were engulfed in a fire. When pressure control equipment is required, it must prevent rupture of the packaging from heating, including fire engulfment.
(ii) Vacuum control equipment is not required if the packaging is designed to withstand an external pressure of 100 kPa (14.5 psig) or if pressure in the packaging would decrease less than 10 percent as a result of the lading cooling from the highest design operating temperature to the lowest temperature incurred in transport. When vacuum control equipment is required, it must prevent collapse of the packaging from a cooling-induced pressure differential.
(iii) When the regulations require a reclosing pressure relief device, the lading must not render the devices inoperable (i.e. from clogging, freezing, or fouling). If the lading affects the proper operation of the device, the packaging must have:
(A) A safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum effective area of 22 cm^2 (3.4 in.^2), for transportation by highway;
(B) For transportation of asphalt by highway, a safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a maximum effective area of 48 cm ^2 (7.4 in ^2); or
(C) For transportation by rail, a safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc, meeting the requirements of § 179.15 of this subchapter.
(iv) Reclosing pressure relief devices, frangible discs or permanent openings must not allow the release of lading during normal transportation conditions (i.e., due to splashing or surging).
(2) Closures. All openings, except permanent vent openings authorized in paragraph (g)(1)(iii) of this section, must be securely closed during transportation. Packagings must be substantially leak-tight so as not to allow any more than dripping or trickling of a non-continuous flow when overturned. Closures must be designed and constructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice the static loading produced by the lading in any packaging orientation and at all operating temperatures.
(3) Strength. Each packaging must be designed and constructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice the static loading produced by the lading in any orientation and at all operating temperatures.
(4) Compatibility. The packaging and lading must be compatible over the entire operating temperature range.
(5) Markings. In addition to any other markings required by this subchapter, each packaging must be durably marked in a place readily accessible for inspection in characters at least 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) with the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, design temperature range, and maximum product weight (or “load limit” for tank cars) or volumetric capacity.
(6) Accident damage protection. For transportation by highway, external loading and unloading valves and closures must be protected from impact damage resulting from collision or overturn. Spraying equipment and the road oil application portion of a packaging are excepted from this requirement.
(7) New construction. Specification packagings that are being manufactured for the transport of elevated temperature materials must be authorized for current construction.
(h) Exceptions—(1) General. Packagings manufactured for elevated temperature materials service prior to October 1, 1993, which are not in full compliance with the requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this part and meet the closure requirements in paragraph (g)(2) of this section by March 30, 1995.
(2) Kettles. Kettles in service prior to October 1, 1993, which are used to transport asphalt or bitumen, are excepted from specific provisions of this section as follows:
(i) Kettles with a total capacity of less than 2650 L (700 gallons), which are not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured during transport to resist opening in an overturn.
(ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more, which are not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured during transport to resist opening in an overturn and no opening exceeds 46 cm^2 (7.1 in^2).
(3) Molten metals and molten glass. This section does not apply to packagings used for transportation of molten metals and molten glass by rail when movement is restricted to operating speeds less than 15 miles per hour. (See § 172.203(g)(3) of this subchapter for shipping paper requirements.)
(4) Solid elevated temperature materials. A material which meets the definition of a solid elevated temperature material is excepted from all requirements of this subchapter except § 172.325 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-227, 58 FR 3349, Jan. 8, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 173-237, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.249
Bromine.
When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table.
(a) Class DOT 105A300W or 105A500W tank cars. Class 105A500W tank cars may be equipped with manway cover plates, pressure relief valves, vent valves, and loading/unloading valves that are required on Class 105A-300W tank cars. Tank cars must conform with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section.
(b) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 312 or DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles conforming with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section. The total quantity in one tank may not be less than 88 percent nor more than 96 percent of the volume of the tank. Cargo tanks in bromine service built prior to August 31, 1991 may continue in service under the requirements contained in § 173.252(a)(4) of this part in effect on September 30, 1991.
(c) Specification IM 101 portable tanks conforming with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section. The total quantity in one tank may not be less than 88 percent nor more than 92 percent of the volume of the tank.
(d) The tank must be made from nickel-clad or lead-lined steel plate. Nickel cladding or lead lining must be on the inside of the tank. Nickel cladding must comprise at least 20 percent of the required minimum total thickness. Nickel cladding must conform to ASTM Specification B162-69. Lead lining must be at least 4.763 mm (0.188 inch) thick. All tank equipment and appurtenances in contact with the lading must be lined or made from metal not subject to deterioration by contact with lading.
(e) Maximum filling density is 300 percent of the tank's water capacity. Minimum filling density is 287 percent of the tank's water capacity. Maximum water capacity is 9,253 kg (20,400 pounds) for DOT 105A300W tank cars. Maximum quantity of lading in DOT 105A300W tank cars is 27,216 kg (60,000 pounds). Maximum water capacity is 16,964 kg (37,400 pounds) for DOT 105A500W tank cars and DOT 105A500W tank cars equipped as described in paragraph (a) of this section. Maximum quantity of lading in DOT 105A500W tank cars is 49,895 kg (110,000 pounds).
(f) Tank shell and head thickness for cargo tank motor vehicles and portable tanks must be at least 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) excluding lead lining.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, Dec. 20, 1991]

Subpart G—Gases; Preparation and Packaging
§ 173.300
[Reserved]
§ 173.300a
Approval of independent inspection agency.
(a) Any person who (1) does not manufacture cylinders for use in the transportation of hazardous materials and (2) is not directly or indirectly controlled by any person or firm which manufactures cylinders for use in the transportation of hazardous materials, may apply to the Department of Transportation for approval as an independent inspection agency for the purpose of performing cylinder inspections and verifications required by part 178 of this subchapter.
(b) Each application filed under this section for approval as an independent inspection agency must:
(1) Be submitted in writing to: Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001;
(2) State the name, address, principal business activity, and telephone number of the applicant and the name and address of each facility where tests and inspections are to be performed;
(3) State the name, address and principal business activity of each person having any direct or indirect ownership interest in the applicant greater than three percent and of each subsidiary or division of the applicant;
(4) If the applicant is not a permanent resident of the United States, include a designation of a permanent resident of the United States as his agent for service of process in accordance with § 107.7 of this title;
(5) Set forth a detailed description of the inspection and testing facilities to be used by the applicant and the applicant's capability to perform the inspections and verify the tests required by part 178 of this subchapter;
(6) Identify by name each individual whom the applicant proposes to employ as an inspector responsible for certifying inspection and test results and a statement of that person's qualifications; and
(7) Specify the identification or qualification number assigned to each inspector who is supervised by a certifying inspector identified in § 173.300a(b)(6).
(c) Upon the request of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety the applicant shall allow the Associate Administrator or his or her representative to inspect the applicant's inspection and testing facilities. In the case of inspection and testing facilities located outside the United States, the applicant shall bear the cost of the inspection.
(d) If, on the basis of information submitted in the application and his own investigation, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety finds that the applicant is qualified to perform the inspections and verifications required by part 178 of this subchapter for cylinders to be used in the transportation of hazardous materials, he issues an approval subject to such terms and conditions as he considers necessary. After approval, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, may authorize, upon request, the independent inspection agency to perform other inspections and functions for which the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, finds the applicant to be qualified. Such additional authorizations will be noted on each inspector's approval documents.
(e) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety will issue an approval as an independent inspection agency for the purpose of performing inspections and verifications within the United States to any competent and disinterested inspector of cylinders so designated by the Bureau of Explosives before May 1, 1976, who submits a copy of that designation by July 15, 1976, together with the name, the assigned identification or qualification number, and a statement of the qualifications of each person employed as an inspector under that designation to: Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001.
(f) Notwithstanding any requirement of this subchapter to the contrary, between May 30, 1976, and August 15, 1976, inspections and verifications required by part 178 of this subchapter may be performed within the United States by any competent and disinterested inspector so designated by the Bureau of Explosives prior to May 1, 1976.
(g) An approval issued under this section is not transferable and is effective until surrendered or withdrawn or otherwise terminated by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(h) The holder of an approval issued under this section shall notify the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety within 20 days after the date there is any change in the information submitted in the application for the approval.
(i) Upon the request of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety the holder of an approval issued under this section shall allow the Director to inspect the holder's inspection and testing facilities and shall make available for inspection the holder's records pertaining to inspections and verifications required by part 178 of this subchapter. In the case of inspection and testing facilities located outside the United States and records made available for inspection outside the United States, the holder shall bear the costs of inspection.
[Amdt. 173-97, 41 FR 18414, May 4, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-142, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 173-158, 47 FR 43065, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 173-194 50 FR 46056, Nov. 6, 1985; Amdt. 173-223, 55 FR 39981, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996]
§ 173.300b
Approval of non-domestic chemical analyses and tests.
(a) Any person who manufactures cylinders outside the United States may apply to the Department for approval to have the chemical analyses and tests of those cylinders required by part 178 of this subchapter performed outside the United States for the purpose of qualifying them for use in the transportation of hazardous materials to, from or within the United States.
(b) Each application filed under this section for approval to perform chemical analyses and tests of cylinders outside the United States must:
(1) Be submitted in writing to: Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001;
(2) State the name, address, and telephone number of the applicant and the name, address and a description of each facility at which cylinders are to be manufactured and chemical analyses and tests are to be performed;
(3) If the applicant is not a resident of the United States, include a designation of a permanent resident of the United States as his agent for service of process in accordance with § 107.7 of this title;
(4) Set forth complete details concerning the dimension, materials of construction, wall thickness, water capacity, shape, type of joints, location and size of openings and other pertinent physical characteristics of each specification cylinder for which approval is being requested, including calculations for cylinder wall stress and wall thickness which may be shown on a drawing or on separate sheets attached to a descriptive drawing. If units of weights and measures are expressed in the metric system, they must also be stated in the English system equivalents; and
(5) Identify the independent inspection agency to be used.
(c) Upon the request of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety the applicant shall allow the Director to inspect the applicant's cylinder manufacturing and testing facilities and shall provide such materials and cylinders for analyses and tests as the Director may specify. The applicant shall bear the cost of the inspections, analyses, and tests.
(d) If, on the basis of the information submitted in the application and his own investigation, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety finds that the applicant has the proper manufacturing equipment and facilities and is otherwise capable of insuring the proper performance of the chemical analyses and tests required by part 178 of this subchapter for cylinders to be used in the transportation of hazardous materials, he issues an approval, subject to such terms and conditions as he considers necessary.
(e) An approval issued under this section is not transferable and is effective until surrendered or withdrawn or otherwise terminated by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(f) The holder of an approval issued under this section shall notify the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety within 20 days after the date there is any change in the information submitted in the application for the approval.
(g) Upon the request of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety the holder of an approval issued under this section shall allow the Director to inspect the holder's cylinder manufacturing and testing facilities, any cylinder manufactured under that approval, the holder's inspection and test records, and technical data files pertaining to any cylinder manufactured under that approval. In the case of facilities located outside the United States, or cylinders, records or files made available for inspection outside the United States, the holder shall bear the costs of inspection.
[Amdt. 173-97, 41 FR 18415, May 4, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-142, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 173-158, 47 FR 43065, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 173-223, 55 FR 39981, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.300c
Termination of approval.
(a) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may terminate an approval issued under § 173.300a or § 173.300b of this subpart if he determines:
(1) That information upon which approval was based is fraudulent or substantially erroneous;
(2) That the holder has not complied with subchapter C of this chapter;
(3) That, in the case of an independent inspection agency, the agency or an employee thereof is or appears to be controlled or improperly influenced by cylinder manufacturing interests;
(4) That the holder is subject to an outstanding final judgment of a Federal court which concerns the enforcement of subchapter C of this chapter and which has not been satisfied within a reasonable period of time; or
(5) That continuation of the approval is not consistent with the requirements of transportation safety.
(b) The Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, before he terminates an approval issued under § 173.300a or § 173.300b of this subpart, notifies the holder in writing of the reasons therefor and provides the holder an opportunity to show why the approval should not be terminated.
[Amdt. 173-97, 41 FR 18415, May 4, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-142, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.301
General requirements for shipment of compressed gases in cylinders and spherical pressure vessels.
(a) Gases capable of combining chemically. A cylinder charged with compressed gas must not contain gases or materials that are capable of combining chemically with each other or with the cylinder material so as to endanger its serviceability. See § 173.34(e)(17) regarding the requalification of a cylinder that previously contained a corrosive liquid.
(b) Ownership of container. A container charged with a compressed gas must not be shipped unless it was charged by or with the consent of the owner of the container.
(c) Retest of container. A container for which prescribed periodic retest has become due must not be charged and shipped until such retest has been properly made.
(d) Manifolding containers in transportation. No means of interconnecting such as manifolding of individual containers may be employed for the transportation of compressed gases, except as hereinafter authorized. Containers so manifolded shall be supported and held together as a unit by structurally adequate means. Safety relief devices on manifolded horizontal containers charged with flammable compressed gas shall be arranged to discharge upward and unobstructed to the open air in such a manner as to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the containers.
(1) Manifolding is authorized for containers of the following gases: argon, air, carbon dioxide, helium, neon, nitrogen, nitrous oxide, oxygen or sulfur hexafluoride provided that each container is individually equipped with pressure relief devices as required by § 173.34(d) or § 173.315(i).
(2) Manifolding is authorized for specification cylinders containing the following nonliquefied gases: boron trifluoride, carbon monoxide, ethylene, hydrogen, hydrocarbon gases, methane, nitrogen trifluoride, and tetrafluoroethylene, inhibited, except that aluminum cylinders are not authorized for boron trifluoride or nitrogen trifluoride service. Individual cylinders must be equipped with approved pressure relief devices as required by § 173.34(d) or § 173.315(i) of this part. Each cylinder must be equipped with an individual shutoff valve that must be tightly closed while in transit. Manifold branch lines of these individual shutoff valves must be sufficiently flexible to prevent damage to the valves which otherwise might result from the use of rigid branch lines. A temperature measuring device may be inserted in one cylinder of a manifold installation in place of the shutoff valve.
(3) Manifolding is authorized for specification cylinders containing the following gases: 1,1-Difluoroethylene, ethane, ethylene, hydrogen chloride, liquefied hydrocarbon gas, liquefied petroleum gas and propylene, except that aluminum cylinders are not authorized for hydrogen chloride service, provided each cylinder is equipped with approved pressure relief devices as required by § 173.34(d) or § 173.315(i) of this part: and provided further, that each cylinder is equipped with an individual shutoff valve that must be tightly closed while in transit. Each cylinder must be separately charged and means must be provided to insure that no interchange of cylinder contents can occur during transportation. Manifold branch lines to these individual shutoff valves must be sufficiently flexible to prevent injury to the valves which otherwise might result from the use of rigid branch lines.
(4) Manifolding is authorized for containers of acetylene, provided that each container is individually equipped with approved safety relief devices as required by § 173.34(d): And further provided, That each container is equipped with an individual shutoff valve, or valves, which shall be tightly closed while in transit. Manifold branch lines to these individual shutoff valves shall be sufficiently flexible to prevent injury to the valves which otherwise might result from the use of rigid branch lines. All manifold containers shall be transported in a vertical position. For the checking of tare weights or for replacement of solvent the container shall be removed from the manifold. This requirement is not intended to prohibit the charging of the acetylene cylinders while manifolded.
(5) Manifolding is authorized for cargo tanks of the following gas provided individual cargo tanks are equipped with the safety relief valves and gaging devices, as required by § 173.315(h) and (i): And further provided, That each cargo tank is equipped with individual valve, or valves, which shall be tightly closed while in transit and that each such container must be separately charged: Anhydrous ammonia.
(e) Container pressure. The pressure in the container at 70 °F. must not exceed the service pressure for which the container is marked or designated, except as provided in § 173.302(c).

Note 1:
In certain cases with liquefied gases the pressure at 70 °F. must be lower than the marked service pressure to avoid having a greater pressure at a temperature of 130 °F. than is permitted.
(1) For authorized containers not marked with a service pressure, the service pressure is designated as follows:
Specification marking | Service pressure—psig
DOT 3 | 1,800
3E | 1,800
4 | 300
8 | 250
9 | 200
25 | 300
33 | 480
38 | 250
40 | 200
41 | 240
(2) For containers made prior to the effective date of specifications, the service pressure is designated as the same as for the same type of container made in accordance with current specifications.
(f) Container pressure at 130 °F. The pressure in the container at 130 °F. shall not exceed 5/4 times the service pressure, except:
(1) Containers charged with acetylene, liquefied nitrous oxide and liquefied carbon dioxide.
(2) When a cylinder is charged in accordance with § 173.302(c), the pressure in the cylinder at 130 °F. must not exceed 5/4 times the filling pressure authorized therein.
(g) Container valve protection. Containers charged with flammable, corrosive, or noxious gases, must have their valves protected by one of the following methods:
(1) By equipping the containers with securely attached metal caps of sufficient strength to protect the valves from injury during transit.
(2) By boxing or crating the containers so as to give proper protection to the valves.
(3) By so constructing the containers that the valve is recessed into the container or otherwise protected so that it will not be subjected to a blow when the container is dropped on a flat surface.
(4) By loading the containers compactly in an upright position and securely bracing in cars or motor vehicles, when loaded by the consignor and to be unloaded by the consignee.
(5) By equipping with valves strong enough to avoid damage during transit for containers containing non-liquefied gas under pressure not exceeding 300 psi at 70 °F.
(h) Compressed gas containers. Compressed gases must be in metal containers built in accordance with the DOT specifications, as shown below, in effect at the time of manufacture, and marked as required by the specification and the regulation for retesting if applicable;
Packagings
DOT-2P | DOT-3D | DOT-4BW | DOT-8AL
2Q | 3E | 4B240ET | 9^1
ICC-3 ^1 | 3HT | 4C | 1CC-25^1
DOT-3A | DOT-3T | 4D | 26^1
DOT- 3AL
DOT-3AX | 4 | 4DA | 33^1
3A480X | 4A | 4DS | 38^1
3AA | 4AA | 4E | DOT-39
DOT-3AAX | 4B | 4L | 40^1
3B | 4B240FLW | 5 | 41^1
3BN | 4B240X ^1 | 5F
3C | 4BA | 8
^1 Use of existing cylinders authorized, but new construction not authorized.
(i) Foreign cylinders in domestic use. Except as provided in paragraph (j) of this section, a charged cylinder manufactured outside the United States may not be offered for transportation to, from, or within the United States unless it has been manufactured, inspected, and tested in accordance with the applicable DOT specification set forth in part 178 of this subchapter.
(j) Charging of foreign cylinders for export. (1) A cylinder manufactured outside the United States that has not been manufactured, inspected, tested and marked in accordance with part 178 of this subchapter may be charged with compressed gas in the United States, and shipped solely for export if it meets the following requirements, in addition to other requirements of the subchapter:
(i) It has been inspected, tested and marked (with only the month and year of retest) in conformance with the procedures and requirements of § 173.34(e) or the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety has authorized the charging company to fill foreign cylinders under an alternative method of qualification; and
(ii) It meets the maximum filling density and service pressure requirements of this part.
(2) The bill of lading or other shipping paper must identify the cylinder and carry the following certification: “This cylinder has [These cylinders have] been retested and refilled in accordance with DOT requirements for export.”
(k) Outside packagings. Specification 2P, 2Q, 3E, 3HT, 4BA spherical type, 4D, 4DA, 4DS, 91 , 39, 401, and 411 must be shipped in strong outside packagings, except that the 4BA spherical type may be securely mounted on pallets to provide protection for the spheres and any attachments.
1 Use of existing cylinders authorized, but new construction not authorized.
(1) Outside packaging must provide protection for the cylinder. Unless the cylinder has a protective collar or neck ring, the outside packaging must provide protection to the valve against accidental functioning and damage.
(l) Specifications 3AX, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders are authorized for transportation only when horizontally mounted on a motor vehicle or in an ISO framework or other framework of equivalent structural integrity. Cylinders may be transported in COFC or TOFC service only under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator for Safety, Federal Railroad Administration. Cylinder valves and safety devices must be protected as follows:
(1) Each cylinder must be fixed at one end of the vehicle or framework with provision for thermal expansion at the opposite end attachment.
(2) The valve and safety relief device protective structure must be sufficiently strong to withstand a force equal to twice the weight involved with a safety factor of four, based on the ultimate strength of the material used; and
(3) Each discharge for a safety relief device on a cylinder containing a flammable gas must be upward and unobstructed.
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.301, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.302
Charging of cylinders with non-liquefied compressed gases.
(a) Detailed requirements. Nonliquefied compressed gases (except gas in solution) for which charging requirements are not definitely prescribed in § 173.304(a)(2) must be shipped, subject to § 173.301, and § 173.305 in specification containers as follows:
(1) Specification 3,1 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C,1 3D,1 3E, 4,1 4A,1 4B, 4BA, 4BW, 4C,1 25,1 26,1 33,1 or 38,1 (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.38, 178.42, 178.50, 178.51, 178.61 of this subchapter). See §§ 173.34 and 173.301(e).
1 Use of existing cylinders authorized, but new construction not authorized.

Note 1:
Authorized cylinders containing oxygen which is continuously fed to tanks containing live fish may be shipped irrespective of the provisions of § 173.24.
(2) Specification 3HT (§ 178.44 of this subchapter) cylinders for aircraft use only, having a maximum service life of 24 years. Authorized only for nonflammable gases. Cylinders must be equipped with safety relief devices only of the frangible disc type which meet the requirements of § 173.34(d). Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting pressure which does not exceed 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted. Spec. 3HT cylinders may be shipped only when packed in strong outside packagings.
(3) Specification 3AX, 3AAX, or 3T (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178,45 of this subchapter) cylinders are authorized only for the following nonliquefied gases: Air, argon, boron trifluoride, carbon monoxide, ethane, ethylene, helium, hydrogen, methane, neon, nitrogen, or oxygen, except that specification 3T is not authorized for hydrogen. As used in this paragraph methane is a nonliquefied gas which has a minimum purity of 98.0 percent methane and which is commerically free of corroding components.
(4) Specification 39 (§ 178.65 of this subchapter) cylinder. For flammable gases, internal volume may not exceed 75 cubic inches. Aluminum cylinders are authorized for oxygen only under the following conditions:
(i) Cylinder threads must be straight threads;
(ii) Cylinder must be equipped only with brass or stainless steel valve; and
(iii) Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901c, dated January 15, 1981, paragraphs 3.7.2 and 3.8.2. Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901c, may be used; however any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or less cleaned at the same time, must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with specification RR-C-901c, paragraph 4.4.2.3 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified.
(5) Specification 3AL (§ 178.46 of this subchapter) cylinders are authorized only for the following nonliquefied gases: air, argon, carbon monoxide, diborane, ethylene, helium, mercury free hydrogen, krypton, methane, nitrogen, neon, oxygen and xenon. Flammable gases shipped in 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway, rail and cargo-only aircraft. When used in oxygen service, aluminum cylinders must be in compliance with the following conditions:
(i) Cylinder must be equipped only with brass or stainless steel valve;
(ii) Cylinder must have only straight threads in the opening;
(iii) Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901c, dated August 1, 1967, paragraphs 3.7.2, and 3.8.2. Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901c may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or less, cleaned at the same time, must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR-C-901c, paragraph 4.4.2.3, and meet the standard of cleanliness specified; and
(iv) The pressure in the cylinder may not exceed 3,000 psig at 70 °F.
(b) Filling limits. (See § 173.301(e).)
(c) Special filling limits for Specifications 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders. Specifications 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.45 of this subchapter) cylinders may be charged with compressed gases, other than liquefied, dissolved, poisonous, or flammable gases to a pressure 10 percent in excess of their marked service pressure, provided:
(1) That such cylinders are equipped with frangible disc safety relief devices (without fusible metal backing) having a bursting pressure not exceeding the minimum prescribed test pressure.
(2) That the elastic expansion shall have been determined at the time of the last test or retest by the water jacket method.
(3) That either the average wall stress or the maximum wall stress does not exceed the wall stress limitation shown in the following table (see Notes 1, 2 and 3):
Type of steel | Average wall stress limitation | Maximum wall stress limitation
Plain carbon steels over 0.35 carbon and medium manganese steels | 53,000 | 58,000
Steels of analysis and heat-treatment specified in spec. 3AA | 67,000 | 73,000
Steel of analysis and heat treatment specified in Spec. DOT-3T | 87,000 | 94,000
Plain carbon steels less than 0.35 carbon made prior to 1920 | 45,000 | 48,000

Note 1:
The average wall stress shall be computed from the elastic expansion data using the following formula:
S = 1.7 EE / KV − 0.4P
where:
S = wall stress, pounds per square inch;
EE = elastic expansion (total less permanent) in cubic centimeters;
K = factor×10−7 , experimentally determined for the particular type of cylinder being tested, or derived in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-5;
V = internal volume in cubic centimeter (1 cubic inch=16.387 cubic centimeters);
P = test pressure, pounds per square inch.
Formula derived from formula of Note 2 and the following:
EE = (PKVD 2) / (D 2 − d 2)

Note 2:
The maximum wall stress shall be computed from the formula:
S = (P(1.3D 2+0.4d 2)) / (D 2 − d 2)
where:
S = wall stress, pounds per square inch;
P = test pressure, pounds per square inch;
D = outside diameter, inches;
d = D − 2 t, where t= minimum wall thickness determined by a suitable method

Note 3:
Compliance with average wall stress limitation may be determined through computation of the elastic expansion rejection limit in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-5 or through the use of the manufacturer's marked elastic expansion rejection limit (REE) on the cylinder.
(4) That an external and internal visual examination made at the time of test or retest shows the cylinder to be free from excessive corrosion, pitting, or dangerous defects.
(5) That a plus sign (+) be added following the test date marking on the cylinder to indicate compliance with paragraphs (c) (2), (3), and (4) of this section.
(d) Fluorine. Fluorine must be shipped in Specification 3A1000, 3AA1000, or 3BN400 (§ 178.36, § 178.37 or § 178.39 of this subchapter) cylinders without safety relief device and equipped with valve protection cap. Such containers must not be charged to over 400 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. and must not contain over 6 pounds of gas.
(e) Verification of container pressure. (1) Each day, the pressure in a container representative of that day's compression must be checked by the charging plant after the container has cooled to a settled temperature and a record of this test kept for at least 30 days.
(f) Carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide must be shipped in a Specification 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, 3AL, 3, 3E, or 3T, (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.46, 178.42, 178.45 of this subchapter) cylinder having a minimum service pressure of 1,800 psig. The pressure in the cylinder must not exceed 1000 psig at 70 °F. except that if the gas is dry and sulfur free, the cylinder may be charged to five-sixths of the cylinder service pressure or 2000 psig, whichever is the lesser. Specification 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway, rail and cargo-only aircraft.
(g) Diborane and diborane mixtures. Diborane and diborane mixed with compatible compressed gas in Specification 3AA1800 (§ 178.37 of this subchapter), cylinders. The maximum filling density of the diborane shall not exceed 7 percent. Diborane mixed with compatible compressed gas must not have a pressure exceeding the service pressure of the cylinder if complete decomposition of the diborane occurs. Cylinder valves must be protected either by metal caps or by over packing cylinder in strong wooden boxes.
(h) Poisonous mixtures. Cylinders containing poison gases and poison gas mixtures meeting Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A must conform to the requirements of § 173.40 of this part.
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.302, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.303
Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution (acetylene).
(a) Cylinder, filler and solvent requirements. (Refer to applicable parts of Specification 8 and 8AL). Acetylene gas must be shipped in Specification 8 or 8AL (§ 178.59 or § 178.60 of this subchapter) cylinders. The cylinders shall consist of metal shells filled with a porous material, and this material must be charged with a suitable solvent. The cylinders containing the porous material and solvent, shall be tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-12. Representative samples of cylinders charged with acetylene shall be tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-12.
(1) The specific gravity of acetone solvent in acetylene cylinders must be 0.796 or over at 15.5 °C. (59.9 °F.).
(2) The amount of solvent added in the refilling operation must not cause the tare weight of the cylinder to exceed its marked tare weight. The tare weight includes the weight of the cylinder shell, porous filling, valve, safety relief devices and solvent, but without removable cap.
(b) Filling limits. The pressure in cylinders containing acetylene gas must not exceed 250 psi at 70 °F., and in case the cylinders are marked for a lower allowable charging pressure, at 70 °F., then that pressure must not be exceeded.
(c) Data requirements on filler and solvent. Cylinders containing acetylene gas must not be shipped unless they were charged by or with the consent of the owner, and by a person, firm, or company having possession of complete information as to the nature of the porous filling, the kind and quantity of solvent in the cylinders, and the meaning of such markings on the cylinders as are prescribed by the Department's regulations and specifications applying to containers for the transportation of acetylene gas.
(d) Verification of container pressure. (1) Each day, the pressure in a container representative of that day's compression must be checked by the charging plant after the container has cooled to a settled temperature and a record of this test kept for at least 30 days.
(e) Prefill requirements. Before each filling of an acetylene cylinder, the person filling the cylinder must visually inspect the outside of the cylinder in accordance with the prefill requirements contained in CGA Pamphlet C-13, Section 3.
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.303, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.304
Charging of cylinders with liquefied compressed gas.
(a) Detailed charging requirements. Liquefied gases shall be charged in accordance with the specific provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this section or paragraph (e) of this section. Where charging requirements are not specifically prescribed, liquefied gases, except gas in solution, must be shipped, subject to the applicable paragraphs under General Requirements for Shipment (see § 173.301), the charging requirements of this section for liquefied compressed gas, or the charging requirements for mixtures (see § 173.305), in containers manufactured under specifications, as follows:
(1) Specification 3,1 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3BN, 3D1 3E, 4,1 4A,1 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, 9,1 25,1 26,1 38,1 39, 40,1 or 41,1 (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.38, 178.39, 178.42, 178.50, 178.51, 178.55, 178.61, 178.65, 178.68 of this subchapter), except that no Specification 4E, 9, 39, 40, 41 packaging may be charged and shipped with a mixture containing a pyroforic liquid, carbon bisulfide (disulfide), ethyl chloride, ethylene oxide, nickel carbonyl, spirits of nitroglycerin, or poisonous material (Division 6.1 or 2.3), unless specifically authorized in this part.
1 Use of existing cylinders authorized, but new construction not authorized.
(2) The following requirements must be complied with for the gases named (for cryogenic liquids, see § 173.316):
Kind of gas | Maximum permitted filling density (percent) (see Note 1) | Containers marked as shown in this column or of the same type with higher service pressure must be used except as provided in § 173.34 (a), (b), § 173.301(j) (see notes following table)
Anhydrous ammonia | 54 | DOT-4; DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3A480X; DOT-4A480; DOT-3; DOT-4AA480; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL480.
Bromotri- fluoro- methane (R-13B1 or H-1301) | 124 | DOT-3A400; DOT-3AA400; DOT-3B400; DOT-4A400; DOT-4AA480; DOT-4B400; DOT-4BA400; DOT-4BW400; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL400.
Carbon dioxide (see notes 4, 7, and 8) | 68 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid (see paragraph (h)) | | DOT-4L.
Chlorine (see Note 2) | 125 | DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-25; DOT-3; DOT-3BN480; DOT-3E1800.
Chlorodifluroethane (R-142b) or 1-chloro-1, 1-difluoroethane (see Note 8) | 100 | DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39, DOT-3AL150.
Chlorodifluoromethane (R-22) (see Note 8) | 105 | DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-4E240; DOT-39; DOT-41; DOT-3E1800; and DOT-3ALA240.
Chloropentafluorethane, (R-115) | 110 | DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT-4A225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL225.
Chlorotrifluoromethane (R-13) (see Note 8) | 100 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL1800.
Cyclopropane (see Notes 8 and 9) | 55 | DOT-3A225; DOT-3A480X; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT-4A225; DOT-4AA480; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL225.
Dichlorodifluoromethane (R-12) (see Note 8) | 119 | DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT-4A225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-4E225; DOT-9; DOT-39; DOT-41; DOT-3E1800; and DOT-3AL225.
Dichlorodifluoromethane and difluoroethane mixture (constant boiling mixture) (R-500) (see Note 8) | Not liquid full at 130 °F | DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240, DOT-3B240; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4A240; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-9, DOT-39.
Difluoroethane (R-152a) (see Note 8) | 79 | DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL150.
1,1-Difluoroethylene (R-1132A) | 73 | DOT-3A2200, DOT-3AA2200, DOT-3AX2200, DOT-3AAX2200, DOT-3T2200, DOT-39.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous | 59 | DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4B150 DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; ICC-3E1800.
Ethane (see Notes 8 and 9) | 35.8 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3T1800; DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800.
Ethane (see Notes 8 and 9) | 36.8 | DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000; DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; DOT-3AL2000.
Ethylene (see Notes 8 and 9) | 31.0 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800 DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3T1800; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL1800 .
Ethylene (see Notes 8 and 9) | 32.5 | DOT-3A2000; DOT-3AX2000; DOT-3AA2000; DOT-3AAX2000; DOT-3T2000; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL2000.
Ethylene (see Notes 8 and 9) | 35.5 | DOT-3A2400; DOT-3AX2400; DOT-3AA2400; DOT-3AAX2400; DOT-3T2400; DOT-39; DOT-3AL2400.
Hydrogen chloride | 65 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3T1800; DOT-3E1800.
| Hydrogen sulfide (see Note 10) | 62.5 | DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3B480; DOT-4A480; DOT-4B480; DOT-4BA480; DOT-4BW480.; DOT-26-480; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL480.
Insecticide, liquefied gas (See Notes 8 and 12) | Not liquid full at 130 °F | DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B300; DOT-4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT-9; DOT-40; DOT-41; DOT-3E1800.
Liquefied nonflammable gases, liquid other than those classified as flammable, corrosive, or poisonous, and mixtures or solutions thereof, charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide, or air (see Notes 7 and 8) | Not liquid full at 130 °F | Specification packaging authorized in paragraph (a)(1) of this section and DOT-3HT; DOT-4D; DOT-4DA; DOT-4DS.
Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized (see Note 5) | Not liquid full at 130 °F | DOT-4B240 without brazed seams; DOT-4BA240 without brazed seams; DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-4; DOT-41; DOT-3AL240.
Methyl chloride | 84 | DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT-4A225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3; DOT-4; DOT-25; DOT-26-300; DOT-38; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4B240ET. Cylinders complying with DOT-3A150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4A150, and DOT-4B150 manufactured prior to Dec. 7, 1936 are also authorized.
Methyl mercaptan | 80 | DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-4B240; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240.
Monomethylamine, anhydrous | 60 | DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3E1800.
Nitrosyl chloride | 110 | DOT-3BN400 only.
Nitrous oxide (see Notes 7, 8, and 11) | 68 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AX1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3T1800; DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39; DOT-.AL1800.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid (see paragraph (h)) | | DOT-4L.
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s. (see Notes 8 and 13) | Not liquid full at 130 °F | DOT-3A240; DOT-3AA240; DOT-3B240; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4A240; DOT-4B240; DOT-4BA240; DOT-4BW240; DOT-4E240; DOT-9; DOT-39; and DOT-3AL240.
Sulfur dioxide (see note 8) | 125 | DOT-3A225; DOT-3AA225; DOT-3B225; DOT-4A225; DOT-4B225; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3; DOT-4; DOT-25; DOT-26-150; DOT-38; DOT-39; DOT-3E1800; and DOT-3AL225.
Sulfur hexafluoride | 120 | DOT-3A1000; DOT-3AA1000; DOT-3AAX2400; DOT-3; DOT-3AL1000; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3T1800.
Sulfuryl fluoride | 106 | DOT-3A480; DOT-3AA480; DOT-3E1800; DOT-4B480; DOT-4BA480; DOT-4BW480.
Tetrafluoroethylene, inhibited | 90 | DOT-3A1200; DOT-3AA1200; DOT-3E1800.
Trifluorochloroethylene | 115 | DOT-3A300; DOT-3AA300; DOT-3B300; DOT-4A300; DOT-4B300; DOT-4BA300; DOT-4BW300; DOT-3E1800.
Trimethylamine, anhydrous | 57 | DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-4B150; DOT-4BA225; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3E1800.
Vinyl chloride (see Note 5) | 84 | DOT-4B150 without brazed seams; DOT-4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-25; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL150.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited | 62 | DOT-3A1800; DOT-3AA1800; DOT-3E1800; DOT-3AL1800.
Vinyl methyl ether (see Note 5) | 68 | DOT-4B150, without brazed seams; DOT-4BA225 without brazed seams; DOT-4BW225; DOT-3A150; DOT-3AA150; DOT-3B150; DOT-25; DOT-3E1800.
Note 1: The “filling density” is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the weight of gas in a container to the weight of water that the container will hold at 60 °F. (1 lb of water=27.737 cubic inches at 60 °F.).
Note 2: Cylinders purchased after Oct. 1, 1944, for the transportation of chlorine must contain no aperture other than that provided in the neck of the cylinder for attachment of a valve equipped with an approved safety relief device. Cylinders purchased after Nov. 1, 1935, and charged with chlorine must not contain over 150 pounds of gas.
Note 3: [Reserved]
Note 4: Special carbon dioxide mining devices containing a heating element and charged with not over 6 pounds of carbon dioxide may be filled to a density of not over 85 percent, provided the cylinder is made of steel with a calculated bursting pressure in excess of 39,000 psi, be fitted with a frangible disc that will operate at not over 57 percent of that pressure, and be able to withstand a drop of 10 feet when striking crosswise on a steel rail while under a pressure of at least 3,000 psi. Such devices must be shipped in strong boxes or must be wrapped in heavy burlap and bound by 12-gauge wire with the wire completely covered by friction tape. Wrapping must be applied so as not to interfere with the functioning of the frangible disc safety relief device. Shipments must be described as “liquefied carbon dioxide gas (mining device)” and marked, labeled, and certified as prescribed for liquefied carbon dioxide.
Note 5: All parts of valve and safety relief devices in contact with contents of cylinders must be of a metal or other material, suitably treated if necessary, which will not cause formation of any acetylides.
Note 6: [Reserved]
Note 7: Specification 3HT cylinders for aircraft use only, having a maximum service life of 24 years. Authorized only for nonflammable gases. Cylinders must be equipped with pressure relief devices only of the frangible disc type which meet the requirements of § 173.34(d). Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting pressure which does not exceed 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted. Cylinders may be shipped only when packed in strong outside packagings.
Note 8: See § 173.301(k).
Note 9: When used for shipment of flammable gases, the internal volume of a specification 39 cylinder must not exceed 75 cubic inches.
Note 10: Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or a threaded solid plug.
Note 11: See § 173.304(a)(4).
Note 12: For an insecticide gas which is nonpoisonous and nonflammable, see § 173.305(c).
Note 13: For a refrigerant or dispersant gas which is nonpoisonous and nonflammable, see § 173.304(e).
(3) Specification 3AL (§ 178.46 of this subchapter) cylinders are authorized for the following liquefied gases: cyclobutane, hydrogen selenide, propylene, silane, carbonyl sulfide, vinyl bromide, and dimethyl ether. Shipments of flammable gases are authorized only when transported by highway, rail and cargo aircraft only.
(4) Specification DOT 3AL (§ 178.46 of this subchapter) cylinders when used in nitrous oxide service must be in compliance with the following conditions:
(i) Cylinder must be equipped only with brass or stainless steel valve; and
(ii) Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901c paragraphs 3.7.2 and 3.8.2. Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901c may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or less cleaned at the same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR-C-901c paragraph 4.4.2.3 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified.
(b) Filling limits. Except for carbon dioxide, 1,1-Difluoroethylene (R-1132A), nitrous oxide and vinyl fluoride, inhibited, the liquid portion of a liquefied gas must not completely fill the packaging at any temperature up to and including 130 °F. The liquid portion of vinyl fluoride, inhibited, may completely fill the cylinder at 130 °F. provided the pressure at the critical temperature does not exceed one and one-fourth times the service pressure.
(c) Verification of content in cylinder. (1) Liquefied gases must be charged by weight, by volume measurement of liquid, charging line, by the use of proper scales or when lower in pressure than required for liquefaction a pressure-temperature chart may be used in charging to insure that the service pressure at 70 °F. times 5/4 will not be exceeded at 130 °F.
(2) Except as noted in paragraph (d)(4) of this section, the amount of liquefied gas charged into a container must be determined by weight, or if charged at a pressure lower than the liquefaction point, by pressure shown on a chart for the specific gas. Weight must be checked, after disconnecting from the charging line, by the use of proper scales.
(d) Requirements for liquefied petroleum gas. (1) Filling density limited as follows:
Minimum specific gravity of the liquid material at 60 °F. | Maximum filling density in percent of the water-weight capacity of the container
0.271 to 0.289 | 26
0.290 to 0.306 | 27
0.307 to 0.322 | 28
0.323 to 0.338 | 29
0.339 to 0.354 | 30
0.355 to 0.371 | 31
0.372 to 0.398 | 32
0.399 to 0.425 | 33
| 0.426 to 0.440 | 34
0.441 to 0.452 | 35
0.453 to 0.462 | 36
0.463 to 0.472 | 37
0.473 to 0.480 | 38
0.481 to 0.488 | 39
0.489 to 0.495 | 40
0.496 to 0.503 | 41
0.504 to 0.510 | 42
0.511 to 0.519 | 43
0.520 to 0.527 | 44
0.528 to 0.536 | 45
0.537 to 0.544 | 46
0.545 to 0.552 | 47
0.553 to 0.560 | 48
0.561 to 0.568 | 49
0.569 to 0.576 | 50
0.577 to 0.584 | 51
0.585 to 0.592 | 52
0.593 to 0.600 | 53
0.601 to 0.608 | 54
0.609 to 0.617 | 55
0.618 to 0.626 | 56
0.627 to 0.634 | 57
(2) Subject to § 173.301(f), any filling density percentage prescribed in this section is authorized to be increased by 2 for liquefied petroleum gas in Spec. 26 or 3 cylinders or in Spec. 3A marked for 1,800 psig, or higher, service pressure.
(3) Liquefied petroleum gas must be shipped in specification containers as follows:
(i) Specification 3, ^1
3A, 3AA, 3B, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240FLW, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4B240X,1 4E, 4,1 4A,1 9,1 25,1 26,1 38,1 39, or 411 (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.38, 178.42, 178.46, 178.50, 178.51, 178.54, 178.55, 178.61, 178.65, 178.68 of this subchapter) cylinders. The internal volume of a Specification 39 cylinder must not exceed 75 cubic inches. Shipments of flammable gases in 3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway, rail and cargo-only aircraft.
^1 Use of existing cylinders authorized, but new construction not authorized.

Note 1:
Cylinders marked as complying with DOT Spec. 4B240FLW bearing manufacturer's symbol WCO and serial numbers 47A-1 to 47A-59200, inclusive, varying from the specification requirements as to physical properties of steel, are authorized for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gases.
(ii) Additional containers may be used within the limits of quantity and pressure as follows:
Type of container | Maximum capacity | Cubic inches | Gallons | Maximum charging pressure—p.s.i.g.
DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) | 31.83 | | 45 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. and 105 p.s.i.g. at 130 °F. (see Note 2).
DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1) | 31.83 | | 35 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. and 100 p.s.i.g. at 130 °F.
DOT-3C or DOT-4C | 3,881 | 16+5% tolerance | 145 p.s.i.g. at 130 °F.

Note 1:
Containers must be packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design as to protect valves from injury or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Each completed container filled for shipment must have been heated until contents reached a minimum temperature of 130 °F., without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.”

Note 2:
Containers must be equipped with safety relief devices which will prevent rupture of the containers and dangerous projection of the closing devices when the containers are exposed to the action of fire.
(4) Verification of content. Containers with a water capacity of 200 pounds or more and for use with a liquefied petroleum gas with a specific gravity at 60 °F. of 0.504 or greater may have their contents determined by using a fixed length dip tube gauging device. The length of the dip tube shall be such that when a liquefied petroleum gas with a specific volume of 0.03051 cu. ft./lb. at a temperature of 40 °F. is charged into the container it just reaches the bottom of the tube. The weight of this liquid shall not exceed 42 percent of the water capacity of the container which must be stamped thereon. The length of the dip tube, expressed in inches carried out to one decimal place and prefixed with the letters “DT” shall be stamped on the container and on the exterior of removable type dip tube; for the purpose of this requirement the marked length shall be expressed as the distance measured along the axis of a straight tube from the top of the boss through which the tube is inserted to the proper level of the liquid in the container. The length of each dip tube shall be checked when installed by weighing each container after filling except when installed in groups of substantially identical containers in which case one of each 25 containers shall be weighed. The quantity of liquefied gas in each container must be checked by means of the dip tube after disconnecting from the charging line. The outlet from the dip tube shall be not larger than a No. 54 drill size orifice. A container representative of each day's filling at each charging plant shall have its contents checked by weighing after disconnecting from the charging line.
(e) Refrigerant gases. Refrigerant gases which are nonpoisonous and nonflammable under this part, must be shipped in cylinders as prescribed in paragraph (a) (1) or (2) of this section, or as follows:
(1) Specifications 2P and 2Q (§§ 178.33, 178.33a of this subchapter). Inside metal containers packed in a strong wooden or fiberboard box of such design as to protect valves from injury or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in the container must not exceed 85 pounds per square inch absolute at 70 °F. Each completed metal container filled for shipment must be heated until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130 °F. without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked “Inside Containers Comply With Prescribed Specification.”
(2) [Reserved]
(f) Engine starting fluid. Engine starting fluid containing compressed gas or gases which are flammable under this part must be shipped in cylinders as prescribed in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, or as follows:
(1) Inside nonrefillable metal containers having a capacity not over 32 cubic inches. Containers must be packaged in strong, tight packagings. Pressure in the container must not exceed 140 psi, absolute, at 130 °F. However, if the pressure exceeds 140 psi, absolute at 130 °F., a Spec. 2P (§ 178.33 of this subchapter) container must be used. In any event, the metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting a pressure of one and one-half times the pressure of the content at 130 °F. The liquid content of the material and gas must not completely fill the container at 130 °F. Each completed container filled for shipment must have been heated until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130 °F., without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked, “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.”
(2) [Reserved]
(g) Poisonous mixtures. Cylinders containing poison gases and poison gas mixtures meeting Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A must conform to the requirements of § 173.40 of this part.
(h) Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. (1) The following provisions apply to carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid:
(i) DOT 4L cylinders conforming to the provisions of this paragraph are authorized.
(ii) Each cylinder must be protected with at least one pressure relief valve and at least one frangible disc conforming to §§ 173.34(d) and 173.304(a)(2). The relieving capacity of the pressure relief device system must be equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.9 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.1.
(iii) The temperature and pressure of the gas at the time of loading may not exceed −18 °C (0 °F) and 2007 kPa (291 psig) for carbon dioxide and −15.6 °C (+4 °F) and 2007 kPa (291 psig) for nitrous oxide. Maximum time in transit may not exceed 120 hours.
(2) The following pressure control valve settings, design service temperatures and filling densities apply:
Pressure control valve setting maximum start—to discharge gauge pressure in kPa (psig) | Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) | Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid | Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid
724 kPa (105 psig) | 108 | 104
1172 kPa (170 psig) | 105 | 101
1586 kPa (230 psig) | 104 | 99
2034 kPa (295 psig) | 102 | 97
2483 kPa (360 psig) | 100 | 95
3103 kPa (450 psig) | 98 | 83
3723 kPa (540 psig) | 92 | 87
4309 kPa (625 psig) | 86 | 80
Design service temperature °C ( °F) | −196 °C (−320 °F) | −196 °C (−320 °F)
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.304, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.305
Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and other material.
(a) Detailed requirements. A mixture of a compressed gas and any other material must be shipped as a compressed gas if the mixture is a compressed gas as designated in § 173.115 and when not in violation of § 173.301(a).
(b) Filling limits. (See § 173.301(e).) For mixtures, the liquid portion of the liquefied compressed gas at 130 °F. plus any additional liquid or solid must not completely fill the container.
(c) Nonpoisonous and nonflammable mixtures. Mixtures containing compressed gas or gases including insecticides, which mixtures are nonpoisonous and nonflammable under this part must be shipped in cylinders as prescribed in § 173.304(a) or as follows:
(1) Specification 2P (§ 178.33 of this subchapter). Inside metal containers equipped with safety relief devices of a type examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, and packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design as to protect valves from injury or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Pressure in the container may not exceed 85 psia at 70 °F. Each completed metal container filled for shipment must be heated until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130 °F., without evidence of leakage, distortion or other defect. Each outside shipping container must be plainly marked “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.”
(2) [Reserved]
(d) Poisonous mixtures. A mixture containing any poisonous material (Division 6.1 or 2.3) in such proportions that the mixture would be classed as poisonous under § 173.115 or § 173.132 must be shipped in packagings as authorized for these poisonous materials.
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 173-70, 38 FR 5309, Feb. 27, 1973, Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976; 45 FR 32697, May 19, 1980; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66275, 66279, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 173.306
Limited quantities of compressed gases.
(a) Limited quantities of compressed gases for which exceptions are permitted as noted by reference to this section in § 172.101 of this subchapter are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and, unless required as a condition of the exception, specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packed in accordance with the following paragraphs. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter except § 177.817. Each package may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight.
(1) When in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity (7.22 cubic inches or less) except cigarette lighters. Special exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM-D class are provided in paragraph (h) of this section.
(2) When in metal containers filled with a material that is not classed as a hazardous material to not more than 90 percent of capacity at 70 °F. and then charged with nonflammable, nonliquefied gas. Each container must be tested to three times the pressure at 70 °F. and, when refilled, be retested to three times the pressure of the gas at 70 °F. Also, one of the following conditions must be met:
(i) Container is not over 1 quart capacity and charged to not more than 170 psig at 70 °F. and must be packed in a strong outside packaging, or
(ii) Container is not over 30 gallons capacity and charged to not more than 75 psig at 70 °F.
(3) When in a metal container for the sole purpose of expelling a nonpoisonous (other than a Division 6.1 Packing Group III material) liquid, paste or powder, provided all of the following conditions are met. Special exceptions for shipment of aerosols in the ORM-D class are provided in paragraph (h) of this section.
(i) Capacity must not exceed one liter (61.0 cubic inches).
(ii) Pressure in the container must not exceed 180 psig at 130 °F. If the pressure exceeds 140 psig at 130 °F., but does not exceed 160 psig at 130 °F., a specification DOT 2P (§ 178.33 of this subchapter) inside metal container must be used; if the pressure exceeds 160 psig at 130 °F., a specification DOT 2Q (§ 178.33a of this subchapter) inside metal container must be used. In any event, the metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the content at 130 °F.
(iii) Liquid content of the material and gas must not completely fill the container at 130 °F.
(iv) The container must be packed in strong outside packagings.
(v) Each container must be subjected to a test performed in a hot water bath; the temperature of the bath and the duration of the test must be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be reached at 55 °C (131 °F) (50 °C (122 °F) if the liquid phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the container at 50 °C (122 °F)). If the contents are sensitive to heat, the temperature of the bath must be set at between 20 °C (68 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F) but, in addition, one container in 2,000 must be tested at the higher temperature. No leakage or permanent deformation of a container may occur.
(vi) Each outside packaging must be marked “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.”
(4) Gas samples must be transported under the following conditions:
(i) A gas sample may only be transported as non-pressurized gas when its pressure corresponding to ambient atmospheric pressure in the container is not more than 105 kPa absolute (15.22 psia).
(ii) Non-pressurized gases, toxic (or toxic and flammable) must be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not more than one L (0.3 gallons) overpacked in a strong outer packaging.
(iii) Non-pressurized gases, flammable must be packed in hermetically-sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not more than 2.5 L (0.5 gallons) overpacked in a strong outer packaging.
(b) Exemptions for foodstuffs, soap, biologicals, electronic tubes, and audible fire alarm systems. Limited quantities of compressed gases, (except poisonous gases as defined by § 173.115(a)(3) of this part) for which exceptions are provided as indicated by reference to this section in § 172.101 of this subchapter, when in accordance with one of the following paragraphs are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter, except § 177.817. Special exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM-D class are provided in paragraph (h) of this section.
(1) Foodstuffs or soaps in a nonrefillable metal container not exceeding one liter (61.0 cubic inches), with soluble or emulsified compressed gas, provided the pressure in the container does not exceed 140 p.s.i.g. at 130 °F. The metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the content at 130 °F.
(i) Containers must be packed in strong outside packagings.
(ii) Liquid content of the material and the gas must not completely fill the container at 130 °F.
(iii) Each outside packaging must be marked “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.”
(2) Cream in refillable metal receptacles with soluble or emulsified compressed gas. Containers must be of such design that they will hold pressure without permanent deformation up to 375 psig and must be equipped with a device designed so as to release pressure without bursting of the container or dangerous projection of its parts at higher pressures. This exception applies to shipments offered for transportation by refrigerated motor vehicles only.
(3) Nonrefillable metal containers charged with a Division 6.1 Packing Group III or nonflammable solution containing biological products or a medical preparation which could be deteriorated by heat, and compressed gas or gases. The capacity of each container may not exceed 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces). The pressure in the container may not exceed 140 psig at 130 °F., and the liquid content of the product and gas must not completely fill the containers at 130 °F. One completed container out of each lot of 500 or less, filled for shipment, must be heated, until the pressure in the container is equivalent to equilibrium pressure of the content at 130 °F. There must be no evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Container must be packed in strong outside packagings.
(4) Electronic tubes, each having a volume of not more than 30 cubic inches and charged with gas to a pressure of not more than 35 psig and packed in strong outside packagings.
(5) Audible fire alarm systems powered by a compressed gas contained in an inside metal container when shipped under the following conditions:
(i) Each inside container must have contents which are not flammable, poisonous, or corrosive as defined under this part,
(ii) Each inside container may not have a capacity exceeding 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces),
(iii) Each inside container may not have a pressure exceeding 70 psig at 70 °F. and the liquid portion of the gas may not completely fill the inside container at 130 °F., and
(iv) Each nonrefillable inside container must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than four times its charged pressure at 130 °F. Each refillable inside container must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times its charged pressure at 130 °F.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Truck bodies or trailers on flat cars; automobiles, motorcycles, tractors, or other self-propelled vehicles. (1) Except as specified in § 173.21, truck bodies or trailers with automatic heating or refrigerating equipment of the gas burning type may be shipped with tanks containing fuel and equipment operating or not operating, when used for the transportation of other freight and loaded on flat cars as part of a joint rail-highway movement. The heating or refrigerating equipment is considered to be a part of the truck body or trailer and is not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter.
(2) Automobiles, motorcycles, tractors, or other self-propelled vehicles equipped with liquefied petroleum gas or other compressed gas fuel tanks, provided such tanks are securely closed, are not subject to any other requirements for transportation by rail or highway. For transportation by water, see §§ 176.905 and 176.78(k) of this subchapter. For transportation by air, the fuel tank must be removed or emptied and securely closed.
(3) A cylinder which is a component part of a passenger restraint system and is installed in a motor vehicle, charged with nonliquefied, nonflammable compressed gas and having no more than two actuating cartridges per valve, is excepted from the requirements of parts 170-189 of this subchapter except:
(i) Unless otherwise authorized by the Department, each cylinder must be in compliance with one of the cylinder specifications in part 178 of this subchapter and authorized for use in § 173.302 for the gas it contains;
(ii) Each cylinder must be in compliance with the filling requirements of § 173.301; and
(iii) Each actuating cartridge must be approved in accordance with § 173.56.
(4) A cylinder which is part of a tire inflator system in a motor vehicle, charged with a nonliquefied, nonflammable compressed gas is excepted from the requirements of parts 170-189 of this subchapter except:
(i) Unless otherwise authorized by the Department, each cylinder must be in compliance with one of the cylinder specifications in part 178 and authorized for use in § 173.302 for the gas it contains;
(ii) Each cylinder must be in compliance with the filling requirements of § 173.301.
(iii) Each cylinder must be securely installed in the trunk of the motor vehicle and the valve must be protected against accidental discharge.

Note:
A cylinder containing a gas generator may be included within the provisions of this exception if the requirements of § 173.34(d) are satisfied.
(e) Refrigerating machines. (1) New (unused) refrigerating machines or components thereof are excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this part if they meet the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter except § 177.817.
(i) Each pressure vessel may not contain more than 5,000 pounds of Group A1 refrigerant as classified in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 or not more than 50 pounds of refrigerant other than Group A1.
(ii) Machines or components having two or more charged vessels may not contain an aggregate of more than 2,000 pounds of Group I refrigerant or more than 100 pounds of refrigerant other than Group I.
(iii) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a safety device meeting the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
(iv) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a shut-off valve at each opening except openings used for safety devices and with no other connection. These valves must be closed prior to and during transportation.
(v) Pressure vessels must be manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, or when over 6 inches internal diameter, in accordance with the ASME Code.
(vi) All parts subject to refrigerant pressure during shipment must be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
(vii) The liquid portion of the refrigerant, if any, may not completely fill any pressure vessel at 130 °F.
(viii) The amount of refrigerant, if liquefied, may not exceed the filling density prescribed in § 173.304.
(f) Accumulators. The following applies to accumulators, which are hydraulic accumulators containing nonliquefied, nonflammable gas, and nonflammable liquids or pneumatic accumulators containing nonliquefied, nonflammable gas, fabricated from materials which will not fragment upon rupture.
(1) Accumulators installed in motor vehicles, construction equipment, and assembled machinery and designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times their charged pressure at 70 °F., when shipped, are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
(2) Accumulators charged with limited quantities of compressed gas to not more than 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter except § 177.817.
(i) Each accumulator must be shipped as an inside packaging,
(ii) Each accumulator may not have a gas space exceeding 2,500 cubic inches under stored pressure, and
(iii) Each accumulator must be tested, without evidence of failure or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure of 70 °F., but not less than 120 p.s.i. before initial shipment and before each refilling and reshipment.
(3) Accumulators with a charging pressure exceeding 200 p.s.i.g. at 70 °F. are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions:
(i) Each accumulator must be in compliance with the requirements stated in paragraph (f)(2), (i), (ii), and (iii) of this section, and
(ii) Each accumulator must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five times its charged pressure at 70 °F. when shipped.
(g) Water pump system tank. Water pump system tanks charged with compressed air or limited quantities of nitrogen to not over 40 psig for single-trip shipment to installation sites are excepted from labeling (transportation by air not authorized) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 and part 177 except § 177.817.
(1) The tank must be of steel, welded with heads concave to pressure, having a rated water capacity not exceeding 120 gallons and with outside diameter not exceeding 24 inches. Safety relief devices not required.
(2) The tank must be pneumatically tested to 100 psig. Test pressure must be permanently marked on the tank.
(3) The stress at prescribed pressure must not exceed 20,000 psi using formula:
S = Pd / 2t
where:
S = wall stress in pounds per square inch:
P = prescribed pressure for the tank of at least 3 times charged pressure at 70 °F or 100 psig, whichever is greater;
d = inside diameter in inches;
t = minimum wall thickness, in inches.
(4) The burst pressure must be at least 6 times the charge pressure at 70 °F.
(5) Each tank must be overpacked in a strong outside container in accordance with § 173.301(k).
(h) A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1), (a)(3), or (b) of this section and is a “consumer commodity” as defined in § 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed “consumer commodity” and reclassed as ORM-D material. Each package may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section—
(1) Outside packagings are not required to be marked “INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS”;
(2) Shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance or hazardous waste or unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft; and
(3) Shipments of ORM-D materials are eligible for the exceptions provided in § 173.156.
(i) An aerosol is flammable if a positive test result is obtained using any of the following test methods:
(1) Using the Bureau of Explosives’ Flame Projection Apparatus, the flame projects more than 18 inches beyond the ignition source with valve opened fully, or the flame flashes back and burns at the valve with any degree of valve opening.
(2) Using the Bureau of Explosives’ Open Drum Apparatus, there is any significant propagation of flame away from the ignition source.
(3) Using the Bureau of Explosives’ Closed Drum Apparatus, there is any explosion of the vapor-air mixture in the drum.
[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.306, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.307
Exceptions for compressed gases.
(a) The following materials are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter:
(1) Carbonated beverages.
(2) Except as provided in § 175.10(a)(2) of this subchapter, tires when inflated to pressures not greater than their rated inflation pressures.
(3) Balls used for sports.
(4) Refrigerating machines including dehumidifiers and air conditioners, and components thereof such as precharged tubing containing 25 pounds or less of nonflammable liquefied gas.
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-135, 45 FR 13090, Feb. 28, 1980]
§ 173.308
Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel.
(a) In addition to the requirements of § 173.21(i), a cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with a flammable gas must be shipped as follows:
(1) No more than 70 ml (2.3 fluid ounces) of liquefied gas may be loaded into each device;
(2) The liquid portion of the gas may not exceed 85 percent of the volumetric capacity of each fluid chamber at 15 °C (59 °F);
(3) Each device, including closures, must be capable of withstanding without leakage or rupture an internal pressure of at least two times the vapor pressure of the fuel at 55 °C (131 °F); and
(4) Devices must be overpacked in packaging that is designed or arranged to prevent movement of the device itself.
(b) When no more than 1,500 devices covered by this section are transported in one motor vehicle by highway, the requirements of subparts C through H of part 172 of this subchapter, and part 177 of this subchapter do not apply. However, no person may offer for transportation or transport the devices or prepare the devices for shipment unless that person has been specifically informed of the requirements of this section. The outer packaging, as specified in Special Provision N10 of § 172.102(c)(5) of this subchapter, must be plainly and durably marked with the required proper shipping name specified in § 172.101 of this subchapter, or the words “CIGARETTE LIGHTERS” and the number of devices contained in the package.
(c) For transportation by water in a closed transport vehicle or a closed freight container, the following warning must be affixed to the access doors:
WARNING—MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES WITH AIR—KEEP IGNITION SOURCES AWAY WHEN OPENING.
The warning must be on a contrasting background and must be readily legible from a distance of 8 m (26 feet).
[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-94A, 41 FR 40683, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 173-120, 43 FR 39792, Sept. 7, 1978; Amdt. 173-165, 48 FR 28101, June 20, 1983; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52665 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66276, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]
§ 173.309
Fire extinguishers.
(a) Fire extinguishers charged with a limited quantity of compressed gas to not more than 1660 kPa (241 psig) at 21 - °C (70 °F) are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except § 174.24 or to part 177 of this subchapter except § 177.817.
(1) Each fire extinguisher must have contents which are nonflammable, non-poisonous, and noncorrosive as defined under this subchapter.
(2) Each fire extinguisher must be shipped as an inner packaging.
(3) Nonspecification cylinders are authorized subject to the following conditions:
(i) The internal volume of each cylinder may not exceed 18 liters (1,100 cubic inches). For fire extinguishers not exceeding 900 ml (55 cubic inches) capacity, the liquid portion of the gas plus any additional liquid or solid must not completely fill the container at 55 °C (130 °F). Fire extinguishers exceeding 900 ml (55 cubic inches) capacity may not contain any liquefied compressed gas;
(ii) Each fire extinguisher manufactured on and after January 1, 1976, must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than six times its charged pressure at 21 °C -(70 °F) when shipped;
(iii) Each fire extinguisher must be tested, without evidence of failure or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure at 21 °C (70 °F) but not less than 825 kPa (120 psig) before initial shipment, and must be marked to indicate the year of the test (within 90 days of the actual date of the original test) and with the words “MEETS DOT REQUIREMENTS.” This marking is considered a certification that the fire extinguisher is manufactured in accordance with the requirements of this section. The words “This extinguisher meets all requirements of 49 CFR 173.306” may be displayed on fire extinguishers manufactured prior to January 1, 1976; and
(iv) For any subsequent shipment, each fire extinguisher must be in compliance with the retest requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations of the Department of Labor, 29 CFR 1910.157(e).
(4) Specification 2P or 2Q (§§ 178.33 and 178.33a of this subchapter) inner nonrefillable metal packagings are authorized for use as fire extinguishers subject to the following conditions:
(i) The liquid portion of the gas plus any additional liquid or solid may not completely fill the packaging at 55 °C (130 °F);
(ii) Pressure in the packaging shall not exceed 1250 kPa (181 psig) at 55 °C (130 °F). If the pressure exceeds 920 kPa (141 psig) at 55 °C (130 °F), but does not exceed 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 °C (130 °F), a specification DOT 2P inner metal packaging must be used; if the pressure exceeds 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 °C (130 °F), a specification DOT 2Q inner metal packaging must be used. The metal packaging must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 °C (130 °F); and
(iii) Each completed inner packaging filled for shipment must have been heated until the pressure in the container is equivalent to the equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55 °C (130 °F) without evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect.
(b) Specification 3A, 3AA, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.42, 178.46, 178.50, 178.51, 178.55 and 178.61 of this subchapter) cylinders are authorized for use as fire extinguishers.
[Amdt. 173-235, 58 FR 50503, Sept. 27, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-258, 61 FR 51240, Oct. 1, 1996]
§ 173.314
Compressed gases in tank cars and multi-unit tank cars.
(a) Definitions. For definitions of compressed gases, see § 173.115.
(b) General requirements. (1) Tank car tanks containing compressed gases must not be shipped unless they were loaded by or with the consent of the owner thereof.
(2) Tank car tanks must not contain gases capable of combining chemically and must not be loaded with any gas which combines chemically with the gas previously loaded therein, until all residue has been removed and interior of tank thoroughly cleaned.
(3) For tanks of the DOT-106A and 110A class, the tanks must be placed in position and attached to car structure by the shipper.
(4) Wherever the word “approved” is used in this part of the regulations, it means approval by the Association of American Railroads Committee on Tank Cars as prescribed in § 179.3 of this subchapter.
(5) Each tank car used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia or any material that meets the criteria of Division 2.1 or 2.3 must have gaskets for manway cover plates and for mounting of fittings designed (for temperature, application, media, pressure, and size) to create a positive seal so that, under conditions normally incident to transportation, there will not be an identifiable release of the material to the environment. The use of sealants to install gaskets is prohibited.
(c) Authorized gases, filling limits for tank cars. A compressed gas in a tank car or a multi-unit tank car must be offered for transportation in accordance with § 173.31 and this section. The named gases must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with the following table:
Proper shipping name | Outage and filling limits (see note 1) | Authorized tank car class
Ammonia, anhydrous, or ammonia solutions > 50 percent ammonia | Notes 2, 10 | 105, 112, 114, 120.
| Note 3 | 106.
Ammonia solutions with > 35 percent, but ≤ 50 percent ammonia by mass | Note 3 | 105, 109, 112, 114, 120.
Argon, compressed | Note 4 | 107.
Boron trichloride | Note 3 | 105, 106.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid | Note 5 | 105.
Chlorine | Note 6 | 105.
| 125 | 106.
Chlorine trifluoride | Note 3 | 106, 110.
Chlorine pentafluoride | Note 3 | 106, 110.
Dimethyl ether | Note 3 | 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous | Note 3 | 105, 106, 112.
Dinitrogen tetroxide, inhibited | Note 3 | 105, 106, 110.
Division 2.1 materials not specifically identified in this table | Notes 9, 10 | 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Division 2.2 materials not specifically identified in this table | Note 3 | 105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Division 2.3 Zone A materials not specifically identified in this table | None | See § 173.245.
Division 2.3 Zone B materials not specifically identified in this table | Note 3 | 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Division 2.3 Zone C materials not specifically identified in this table | Note 3 | 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Division 2.3 Zone D materials not specifically identified in this table | Note 3 | 105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Ethylamine | Note 3 | 105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Helium, compressed | Note 4 | 107.
Hydrogen | Note 4 | 107.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid | Note 7 | 105.
Hydrogen sulphide, liquified | 68 | 106.
Methyl bromide | Note 3 | 105, 106.
Methyl chloride | Note 3 | 105, 106, 112.
Methyl mercaptan | Note 3 | 105, 106.
Methylamine, anhydrous | Note 3 | 105, 106, 112.
Nitrogen, compressed | Note 4 | 107.
Nitrosyl chloride | 124 | 105.
| 110 | 106.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid | Note 5 | 105.
Oxygen, compressed | Note 4 | 107.
Phosgene | Note 3 | 106.
Sulfur dioxide, liquified | 125 | 105, 106, 110.
Sulfuryl fluoride | 120 | 105.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited | Note 8 | 105.
Notes:
1. The percent filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the mass of gas in the tank to the mass of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in kilograms, the mass of one liter of water at 15.5 °C in air is 1 kg. (the mass of one gallon of water at 60 °F in air is 8.32828 pounds).
2. The liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least two percent of the total capacity of the tank at the reference temperature of 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 °C (105 °F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential.
3. The requirements of § 173.24b(a) apply.
4. The gas pressure at 54.44 °C (130 °F.) in any non-insulated tank car may not exceed 7/10 of the marked test pressure, except that a tank may be charged with helium to a pressure 10 percent in excess of the marked maximum gas pressure at 54.44 °C (130 °F.) of each tank.
5. The liquid portion of the gas at -17.77 °C (0 °F.) must not completely fill the tank.
6. The maximum permitted filling density is 125 percent. The quantity of chlorine loaded into a single unit-tank car may not be loaded in excess of the normal lading weights nor in excess of 81.65 Mg (90 tons).
7. 89 percent maximum to 80.1 percent minimum at a test pressure of 6.2 Bar (90 psi).
8. 59.6 percent maximum to 53.6 percent minimum at a test pressure of 7.2 Bar (105 psi).
9. For a liquefied petroleum gas, the liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least one percent of the total capacity of the tank at the reference temperature of 46 °C (115 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 43 °C (110 °F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41 °C (105 °F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential.
10. For liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous ammonia, during the months of November through March (winter), the following reference temperatures may be used: 38 °C (100 °F) for a noninsulated tank; 32 °C (90 °F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 29 °C (85 °F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket and insulation that provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5 °C (60 °F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential. The winter reference temperatures may only be used for a tank car shipped directly to a consumer for unloading and not stored in transit. The offeror of the tank must inform each customer that the tank car was filled based on winter reference temperatures. The tank must be unloaded as soon as possible after March in order to retain the specified outage and to prevent a release of hazardous material which might occur due to the tank car becoming liquid full at higher temperatures.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Verification of content. The amount of liquefied gas loaded into each tank may be determined either by measurement or calculation of the weight. If by measurement, the weight must be checked after disconnecting the loading line by the use of proper scales. If by calculation, the weight of liquefied petroleum gas, methylacetylene propadiene, stabilized, dimethylamine, monomethylamine, or trimethylamine may be calculated using the outage tables supplied by the tank car owners and the specific gravities as determined at the plant, and this computation must be checked by determination of specific gravity of product after loading. Carriers may verify calculated weights by use of proper scales. The use of a fixed tube gauge device is authorized for determining the weight of methyl mercaptan in Specification 105A300W tanks instead of weighing.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) Special requirements for hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, and vinyl fluoride, inhibited.
(1) The shipper shall notify the Bureau of Explosives whenever a car is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of shipment.
(2) A tank car containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid must have the auxiliary valve on the pressure relief device closed during transportation.
(3) See § 179.102-17 of this subchapter for additional requirements.
(4) Tank cars containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, must be unloaded to such an extent that any residue remaining in the tank at a reference temperature of 32 °C (90 °F) will not actuate the safety relief device.
(h)-(i) [Reserved]
(j) Special requirements for materials having a primary or secondary Division 2.1 (flammable gas) hazard. For single unit tank cars, interior pipes of loading and unloading valves, sampling devices, and gauging devices with an opening for the passage of the lading exceeding 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) diameter must be equipped with excess flow valves. For single unit tank cars constructed before January 1, 1972, gauging devices must conform to this paragraph by no later than July 1, 2006. The protective housing cover must be provided with an opening, with a weatherproof cover, above each safety relief valve that is concentric with the discharge of the safety relief valve and that has an area at least equal to the valve outlet area. Class DOT 109 tank cars and tank cars manufactured from aluminum or nickel plate are not authorized.
(k) Special requirements for chlorine. Tank cars built after September 30, 1991, must have an insulation system consisting of 5.08 cm (2 inches) glass fiber placed over 5.08 cm (2 inches) of ceramic fiber. Tank cars must have excess flow valves on the interior pipes of liquid discharge valves. Tank cars constructed to a DOT 105A500W specification may be marked as a DOT 105A300W specification with the size and type of safety relief valves required by the marked specification.
(l) Special requirements for hydrogen sulphide. Each multi-unit tank car must be equipped with adequate safety relief devices of the fusible plug type having a yield temperature not over 76.66 °C (170 °F.), and not less than 69.44 °C (157 °F.). Each device must be resistant to extrusion of the fusible alloy and leak tight at 55 °C (130 °F.). Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded solid plug. In addition, all valves must be protected by a metal cover.
(m) Special requirements for nitrosyl chloride. Single unit tank cars and their associated service equipment, such as venting, loading and unloading valves, and safety relief valves, must be made of metal or clad with a material that is not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading. Multi-unit tank car tanks must be nickel-clad and have safety relief devices incorporating a fusible plug having a yield temperature of 79.44 °C (175 °F.). Safety relief devices must be vapor tight at 54.44 °C (130 °F.).
(n) Special requirements for hydrogen. Each tank car must be equipped with one or more safety relief devices. The discharge outlet for each safety relief device must be connected to a manifold having a non-obstructed discharge area of at least 1.5 times the total discharge area of the safety relief devices connected to the manifold. All manifolds must be connected to a single common header having a non-obstructed discharge pointing upward and extending above the top of the car. The header and the header outlet must each have a non-obstructed discharge area at least equal to the total discharge area of the manifolds connected to the header. The header outlet must be equipped with an ignition device that will instantly ignite any hydrogen discharged through the safety relief device.
(o) Special requirements for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Each tank car must have an insulation system so that the thermal conductance is not more than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per square meter, per degree Celsius (0.03 B.t.u. per square foot per hour, per degree Fahrenheit) temperature differential. Each tank car must be equipped with one safety relief valve set to open at a pressure not exceeding 75 percent of the tank test pressure and one frangible disc design to burst at a pressure less than the tank test pressure. The discharge capacity of each safety relief device must be sufficient to prevent building up of pressure in the tank in excess of 82.5 percent of the test pressure of the tank. Tanks must be equipped with two regulating valves set to open at a pressure not to exceed 24.1 Bar (350 psi) on DOT 105A500W tanks and at a pressure not to exceed 27.6 Bar (400 psi) on DOT 105A600W tanks. Each regulating valve and safety relief device must have its final discharge piped to the outside of the protective housing.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52665, Dec. 21, 1990]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.314, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.315
Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks.
(a) A compressed gas offered for transportation in a cargo tank motor vehicle or a portable tank must be prepared in accordance with this section, §§ 173.32, 173.33 and subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter; for cryogenic liquids, see § 173.318; for marking requirements, see §§ 172.326 and 172.328 of this subchapter. A compressed gas must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with the following table:
Kind of gas | Maximum permitted filling density | Percent by weight (see Note 1) | Percent by volume (see par. (f) of this section) | Specification container required | Type (see Note 2) | Minimum design pressure (psig)
Ammonia, anhydrous or Ammonia solutions with greater than 50 percent ammonia (see Notes 14 and 17) | 56 | 82, See Note 5 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Notes 12 and 17 | 265; See Note 17.
Ammonia solutions with more than 35 percent but not more than 50 percent ammonia | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; see Note 12 | 100; See par. (c) of this section.
Bromotrifluoromethane (R-13B1 or H-1301); (See Note 9) | 133 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 365.
Butadiene, inhibited | See par. (b) of this section | See par. (b) of this section | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 100.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid | See par. (c)(1) of this section | 95 | ......do | 200; see Note 3.
Chlorine | 125 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 225; See Notes 4 and 8.
Chlorodifluoroethane (R-142b) (1-Chloro 1,1-difluoroethane); (See Note 9) | 100 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 100.
Chlorodifluoromethane (R-22); (See Note 9) | 105 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 250.
| Chloropentafluoroethane (R-115); (See Note 9) | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See par. (c) of this section.
Chlorotrifluoromethane (R-13); (See Note 9) | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See par. (c) of this section.
Dichlorodifluoromethane (R-12); (See Note 9) | 119 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 150.
Difluoroethane (R-152a); (See Note 9) | 79 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 150.
Dimethyl ether (see Note 16) | 59 | ......do | ......do | 200.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous | 59 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 150.
Division 2.1, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See Note 18.
Division 2.2, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See Note 19.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 23 | See Note 20.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone B, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 23 | See Note 20.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone C, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 24 | See Note 21.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone D, materials not specifically provided for in this table | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 25 | See Note 22.
Ethane, refrigerated liquid | | See par. (c) of this section | MC-331, MC-338 | 100; see Note 11.
Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid | | See par. (c) of this section | MC-331, MC-338 | 275; see Note 11.
Hexafluoropropylene | 110 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 250.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid | 103.0 | See Note 7 | MC-331, MC-338 | 100; see Note 11.
| 91.6 | ......do | ......do | 300; see Note 11.
| 86.7 | ......do | ......do | 450; see Note 11.
Liquefied petroleum gas (see Note 15) | See par. (b) of this section | See par. (b) of this section | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See par. (c) of this section.
Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized (see Note 13) | 53 | 90 | DOT 51, MC 330, MC 331 | 200.
Methylamine, anhydrous | 60 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331. |
Methyl chloride | 84 | 88.5 | ......do | 150.
Methyl chloride (optional portable tank 2,000 pounds water capacity, fusible plug) | ......do | See Note 6 | DOT-51 | 225.
Methyl mercaptan | 80 | 90 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 23 | 100.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid | See par. (c)(1) of this section | 95 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 200; See Note 3.
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s. (See Note 9) | See par. (c) of this section | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | See par. (c) of this section.
Sulfur dioxide (tanks not over 1,200 gallons water capacity) | 125 | 87.5 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 24 | 150; See Note 4.
Sulfur dioxide (tanks over 1,200 gallons water capacity) | 125 | 87.5 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331; See Note 24 | 125; See Note 4.
Sulfur dioxide (optional portable tank 1,000-2,000 pounds water capacity, fusible plug) | 125 | See Note 6 | DOT-51; See Note 24 | 225.
Trimethylamine, anhydrous | 57 | See Note 7 | DOT-51, MC-330, MC-331 | 150.
Vinyl chloride | 84 (see Note 13) | See Note 7 | MC-330, MC-331 | 150.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited | 66 | ......do | ......do | 250; see Note 11.
| Vinyl methyl ether | 68 | See Notes 7 and 13 | ......do | 100.
Note 1: Maximum filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the weight of gas in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in pounds, the weight of a gallon (231 cubic inches) of water at 60 °F. in air shall be 8.32828 pounds.
Note 2: See § 173.32 for authority to use other portable tanks and for manifolding cargo tanks, see § 173.301(d). Specifications MC 330 cargo tanks may be painted as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks.
Note 3: If cargo tanks and portable tank containers for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid are designed to conform to the requirements of the ASME Code for Low Temperature Operation, the design pressure may be reduced to 100 p.s.i.g. or the controlled pressure, whichever is greater.
Note 4: Material must be steel. Packagings must have a corrosion allowance of 20 percent or 0.10 inch, whichever is less, added to the metal thickness. The minimum wall thickness for chlorine packagings is 0.300 inch for stainless steel or 0.625 inch for carbon steel, including corrosion allowance.
Note 5: Unlagged cargo tanks and portable tank containers for liquid anhydrous ammonia may be filled to 87.5 percent by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being loaded into such tanks is determined to be not lower than 30 °F. or provided the filling of such tanks is stopped at the first indication of frost or ice formation on the outside surface of the tank and is not resumed until such frost or ice has disappeared.
Note 6: Tanks equipped with fusible plugs must be filled by weight.
Note 7: Tanks must be filled by weight.
Note 8: Chlorine packagings may be shipped only if the contents are to be unloaded at one unloading point.
Note 9: This gas may be transported in authorized cargo tanks and portable tanks marked “dispersant gas,” or “refrigerant gas.”
Note 10: [Reserved]
Note 11: MC-330, MC-331 and MC-338 cargo tanks must be insulated. Cargo tanks must meet all the following requirements. Each tank must have a design service temperature of minus 100 °F., or no warmer than the boiling point at one atmosphere of the hazardous material to be shipped therein, whichever is colder, and must conform to the low-temperature requirements of the ASME Code. When the normal travel time is 24 hours or less, the tank's holding time as loaded must be at least twice the normal travel time. When the normal travel time exceeds 24 hours, the tank's holding time as loaded must be at least 24 hours greater than the normal travel time. The holding time is the elapsed time from loading until venting occurs under equilibrium conditions. The cargo tank must have an outer jacket made of steel when the cargo tank is used to transport a flammable gas.
Note 12: No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc or an alloy of any of these metals shall be used in packaging construction where it comes into contact with the lading.
Note 13: All parts of valves and safety devices in contact with contents of tank must be of a metal or other material suitably treated if necessary, which will not cause formation of any acetylides.
Note 14: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel “(NQT)” are authorized for all grades of anhydrous ammonia. Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered steel “(QT)” (see marking requirements of § 172.328(c) of this subchapter) are authorized for anhydrous ammonia having a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any tank being placed in anhydrous ammonia service or a tank which has been in other service or has been opened for inspection, test, or repair, must be cleaned of the previous product and must be purged of air before loading. See § 172.203(h) of this subchapter for special shipping paper requirements.
Note 15: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel (NQT) are authorized for all grades of liquefied petroleum gases. Only grades of liquefied petroleum gases determined to be “noncorrosive” are authorized in Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered steel (QT). “Noncorrosive” means the corrosiveness of the gas does not exceed the limitations for classification 1 of the ASTM Copper Strip Classifications when tested in accordance with ASTM D1838-64, “Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases.” (For (QT) and (NQT) marking requirements see § 172.328(c) of this subchapter. For special shipping paper requirements, see § 172.203(h) of this subchapter.)
Note 16: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with emergency discharge controls that conform to § 178.337-11(c) of this subchapter.
Note 17: A Specification MC-330 or MC-331 cargo tank or a nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated, may be used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia if it:
(1) Has a minimum design pressure not lower than 250 psig;
(2) Was manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and manufacturer's data report;
(3) Is painted white or aluminum;
(4) Complies with Note 12 of this paragraph;
(5) Has been inspected and tested in accordance with subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks.
(6) Was used to transport anhydrous ammonia prior to January 1, 1981;
(7) Is operated exclusively in intrastate commerce (including its operation by a motor carrier otherwise engaged in interstate commerce) in a state where its operation was permitted by the laws of that State (not including the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981; and
(8) Is operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter.
Note 18: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of the lading plus one percent or 173.4 kPa (25 psig), whichever is less.
Note 19: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference temperature of the lading.
Note 20: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C (115 °F).
Note 21: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.3 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C (115 °F).
Note 22: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.1 times the vapor pressure of the lading at 46 °C (115 °F).
Note 23: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 7.62 mm (0.300 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure.
Note 24: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and heads must be the greater of 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum design pressure. For sulphur dioxide, this Note does not apply until October 1, 1994.
Note 25: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of § 173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness for shell and heads must be as calculated for the packaging at its minimum design pressure.
(b) Maximum permitted filling densities for cargo and portable tank containers for transportation of butadiene, inhibited, and liquefied petroleum gas are as follows:
Maximum specific gravity of the liquid material at 60 °F. | Maximum permitted filling density in percent of the water-weight capacity of the tanks (percent) See Note 1 | 1200 gallons or less | Over 1200 gallons
0.473 to 0.480 | 38 | 41
0.481 to 0.488 | 39 | 42
0.489 to 0.495 | 40 | 43
0.496 to 0.503 | 41 | 44
0.504 to 0.510 | 42 | 45
0.511 to 0.519 | 43 | 46
0.520 to 0.527 | 44 | 47
0.528 to 0.536 | 45 | 48
0.537 to 0.544 | 46 | 49
0.545 to 0.552 | 47 | 50
0.553 to 0.560 | 48 | 51
0.561 to 0.568 | 49 | 52
0.569 to 0.576 | 50 | 53
0.577 to 0.584 | 51 | 54
0.585 to 0.592 | 52 | 55
0.593 to 0.600 | 53 | 56
0.601 to 0.608 | 54 | 57
0.609 to 0.617 | 55 | 58
0.618 to 0.626 | 56 | 59
0.627 and over | 57 | 60
Note 1: Filling is permitted by volume provided the same filling density is used as permitted by weight, except when using fixed length dip tube or other fixed maximum liquid level indicators (paragraph (f) of this section), in which case the maximum permitted filling density shall not exceed 97 percent of the maximum permitted filling density by weight contained in the table.
(1) Odorization. All liquefied petroleum gas shall be effectively odorized as required in Note 2 of this paragraph to indicate positively, by a distinctive odor, the presence of gas down to a concentration in air of not over one-fifth the lower limit of combustibility: Provided, however, That odorization is not required if harmful in the use or further processing of the liquefied petroleum gas, or if odorization will serve no useful purpose as a warning agent in such use or further processing.

Note 1:
The lower limits of combustibility of the more commonly used liquefied petroleum gases are: Propane, 2.15 percent; butane, 1.55 percent. These figures represent volumetric percentages of gas-air mixtures in each case.

Note 2:
The use of 1.0 pound of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0 pound of thiophane, or 1.4 pounds of amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of liquefied petroleum gas shall be considered sufficient to meet the requirements of § 173.315(b)(1). This note does not exclude the use of any other odorant in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of § 173.315(b)(1).
(c) Except as otherwise provided, the loading of a liquefied gas into a cargo tank or portable tank shall be determined by weight or by a suitable liquid level gauging device. The vapor pressure (psig) at 115 °F. must not exceed the design pressure of the cargo tank or portable tank container. The outage and filling limits for liquefied gases must be as prescribed in § 173.24b of this part, except that this requirement does not apply to:
(1) A tank containing carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Such tank is required to be equipped with suitable pressure control valves and may not be filled to a level exceeding 95 percent of the volumetric capacity of the tank.
(2) A tank containing ethane, refrigerated liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid. Such tank must be filled to allow at least two percent outage below the inlet of the pressure relief valve or pressure control valve under conditions of incipient opening, with the tank in a level attitude.
(d) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is to be determined by weight, the gross weight shall be checked after the filling line is disconnected in each instance. The gross weight shall be calculated from the tank capacity and tare weight set forth on the metal plate required by the specification, and the maximum filling density permitted for the material being loaded into the tank as set forth in the table, paragraph (a) of this section.
(e) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is to be determined by adjustable liquid level device, each tank and each compartment thereof shall have a thermometer well, so that the internal liquid temperature can easily be determined, and the amount of liquid in the tank shall be corrected to a 60 °F. basis. Liquid levels shall not exceed a level corresponding to the maximum filling density permitted for the material being loaded into the tank as set forth in the table in paragraph (a) of this section.
(f) When the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with liquefied gases is determined only by fixed length dip tube or other fixed maximum liquid level indicator, the device shall be arranged to function at a level not to exceed the maximum permitted volume prescribed by the table, paragraph (a)(1) of this section. Loading shall be stopped when the device functions.
(g) Containers, the liquid level of which has been determined by means of a fixed length dip tube gauging device, shall not be acceptable for stowage as cargo on vessels in commerce subject to the jurisdiction of the United States Coast Guard. Nothing contained in this section shall be so construed as to prohibit the transportation on car floats or car ferries of motor vehicles laden with containers nor cargo tanks the liquid level of either of which has been determined by means of fixed length dip tube devices.
(h) Each cargo tank and portable tank, except a tank filled by weight, must be equipped with one or more of the gauging devices described in the following table which indicate accurately the maximum permitted liquid level. Additional gauging devices may be installed but may not be used as primary controls for filling of cargo tanks and portable tanks. Gauge glasses are not permitted on any cargo tank or portable tank. Primary gauging devices used on cargo tanks of less than 3500 gallons water capacity are exempt from the longitudinal location requirements specified in paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section provided: The tank length does not exceed three times the tank diameter; and the cargo tank is unloaded within 24 hours after each filling of the tank.
Kind of gas | Gaging device permitted for filling purposes
Anhydrous ammonia | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Anhydrous dimethylamine | None.
Anhydrous monomethylamine | Do.
Anhydrous trimethylamine | Do.
Aqua ammonia solution containing anhydrous ammonia | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Butadiene, inhibited | Do.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid | Do.
Chlorine | None.
Dichlorodifluoromethane | Do.
Difluoroethane | Do.
Difluoromonochloroethane | Do.
Dimethyl ether | Do.
Ethane, refrigerated liquid | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid | Do.
Hexafluoropropylene | None.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid | Do.
Liquefied petroleum gases | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Methyl chloride | Fixed length dip tube.
Methyl mercaptan | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Monochlorodifluoromethane | None.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid | Rotary tube; adjustable slip tube; fixed length dip tube.
Methylacetylenepropadiene, stabilized | Do.
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas, n.o.s | None.
Sulfur dioxide | Fixed length dip tube.
Vinyl chloride | None.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited | Do.
(1) The design pressure of the liquid level gauging devices shall be at least equal to the design pressure of the tank.
(2) If the primary gauging device is adjustable, it must be capable of adjustment so that the end of the tube will be in the location specified in paragraph (h)(3) of this section for at least one of the ladings to be transported, at the filling level corresponding to an average loading temperature. Exterior means must be provided to indicate this adjustment. The gauging device must be legibly and permanently marked in increments not exceeding 20 Fahrenheit degrees (or not exceeding 25 p.s.i.g. on tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid), to indicate the maximum levels to which the tank may be filled with liquid at temperatures above 20 °F. However, if it is not practicable to so mark the gauging device, this information must be legibly and permanently marked on a plate affixed to the tank adjacent to the gauging device.
(3) A dip tube gauging device consists of a pipe or tube with a valve at its outer end with its intake limited by an orifice not larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. If a fixed length dip tube is used, the intake must be located midway of the tank both longitudinally and laterally and at maximum permitted filling level. In tanks for liquefied petroleum gases, the intake must be located at the level reached by the lading when the tank is loaded to maximum filling density at 40 °F.
(4) Except on a tank used exclusively for the transportation of carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid, each opening for a pressure gauge must be restricted at or inside the tank by an orifice no larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. For carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid service, the pressure gauge need only be used during the filling operation.
(i) Each tank must be provided with one or more safety relief devices which, unless otherwise specified in this part, must be safety relief valves of the spring-loaded type. Each valve must be arranged to discharge upward and unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing to prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the tank. For each chlorine tank the protective housing must be in compliance with the requirements set forth in the applicable specification.
(1) The safety relief valves on each tank must meet the following conditions:
(i) The total relieving capacity, as determined by the flow formulas contained in Section 5 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2, must be sufficient to prevent a maximum pressure in the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure;
(ii) The flow capacity rating, testing and marking must be in accordance with Sections 5, 6 and 7 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
(iii) For an insulated tank, the required relieving capacity of the relief valves must be the same as for an uninsulated tank, unless the insulation will remain in place and will be effective under fire conditions. In this case, each insulated tank must be covered by a sheet metal jacket of not less than 16 gauge thickness.
(iv) An MC 330 cargo tank that has relief valves sized by Fetterly's formula dated November 27, 1928, may be continued in service. Copies of this formula may be obtained from the Bureau of Explosives.
(2) Each safety relief valve must be arranged to minimize the possibility of tampering. If the pressure setting or adjustment is external to the valve, the safety relief valve must be provided with means for sealing the adjustment and it must be sealed.
(3) Each safety relief valve on a tank must be set to start-to-discharge at pressure no higher than 110 percent of the tank design pressure and no lower than the design pressure specified in paragraph (a) of this section for the gas transported.
(4) Each safety relief valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure in p.s.i.g. at which it is set to discharge, with the actual rate of discharge of the device in cubic feet per minute of the gas or of air at 60 °F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a., and with the manufacturer's name or trade name and catalog number. The start-to-discharge valve must be visible after the valve is installed. The rated discharge capacity of the device must be determined at a pressure of 120 percent of the design pressure of the tank.
(5) Each safety relief valve must have direct communication with the vapor space in the tank.
(6) Each connection to a safety relief valve must be of sufficient size to provide the required rate of discharge through the safety relief valve.
(7) No shut-off valve may be installed between a safety relief valve and the tank except in cases where two or more safety relief valves are installed on the same tank, and one or more safety shut-off valves are arranged to always provide the required relief capacity through at least one of the safety relief valves.
(8) Each safety relief valve outlet must be provided with a protective device to prevent the entrance and accumulation of dirt and water. This device must not impede flow through the valve.
(9) On tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid each safety relief device must be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents will not prevent the effective operation of the device. In addition to the required safety relief valves, these tanks may be equipped with one or more pressure controlling devices.
(10) Each tank for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid also may be equipped with one or more frangible disc devices set to function at a pressure not over two times nor less than 1.5 times the design pressure of the tank.
(11) Each portion of connected liquid piping or hose that can be closed at both ends must be provided with a safety relief valve without an intervening shut-off valve to prevent excessive hydrostatic pressure that could burst the piping or hose.
(12) Subject to conditions of paragraph (a) of this section for the methyl chloride and sulfur dioxide optional portable tanks, one or more fusible plugs examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety may be used on these tanks in place of safety relief valves of the spring-loaded type. The fusible plug or plugs must be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2, to prevent a pressure rise in the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure. If the tank is over 30 inches long, each end must have the total specified safety discharge area.
(13) A safety relief valve on a chlorine cargo tanks must conform to one of the following standards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.: Type 11/2 JQ225, Dwg. H51970, dated October 7, 1968; or Type 11/2 JQ225, Dwg. H50155, Revision A, dated April 28, 1969.
(j) Storage containers for liquefied petroleum gas for permanent installation on consumer premises may be shipped by private motor carrier only under the following conditions:
(1) Each container must be constructed in compliance with the requirements of the ASME Code (containers built in compliance with earlier editions starting with 1943 are authorized) and must be marked to indicate compliance in the manner specified by the respective Code.
(2) Each container must be equipped with safety devices in compliance with the requirements for safety devices on containers as specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 58.
(3) The containers shall be so braced or otherwise secured on the vehicle as to prevent relative motion while in transit. Valves or other fittings shall be adequately protected against injury during transportation. (See § 177.834(g) of this subchapter.)
(4) Except as provided in paragraph (j)(5) of this section, containers shall not be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum gas to more than 5 percent of their water capacity.
(5) Storage containers of less than 1,042 pounds water capacity (125 gallons) may be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum gas in compliance with DOT filling density.
(k) A nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated, may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas if it:
(1) Has a minimum design pressure no lower than 250 psig;
(2) Has a capacity of 3,500 gallons or less;
(3) Was manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and manufacturer's data report;
(4) Conforms to NFPA Pamphlet 58;
(5) Has been inspected and tested in accordance with subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo tanks;
(6) Is operated exclusively in intrastate commerce (including its operation by a motor carrier otherwise engaged in interstate commerce) in a state where its operation was permitted by the laws of that State (not including the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981;
(7) Was used to transport liquefied petroleum gas prior to January 1, 1981; and
(8) Is operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter.
(l) Anhydrous ammonia must not be offered for transportation or transported in specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of quenched and tempered (“QT”) steel except as provided in this paragraph.
(1) The ammonia must have a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any addition of water must be made using steam condensate, deionized, or distilled water.
(2) Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each person offering for transportation or transporting anhydrous ammonia shall perform a periodic analysis for prescribed water content in the ammonia. The analysis must be performed:
(i) From a sample of the ammonia in storage taken at least once every 7 days, or each time ammonia is added to the storage tanks, whichever is less frequent; or
(ii) At the time the cargo tanks are loaded, then a sample of the ammonia taken from at least one loaded cargo tank out of each 10 loads, or from one cargo tank every 24 hours, whichever is less frequent; or
(iii) At the same frequency as described in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of this section, from a sample taken from the loading line to the cargo tank.
(3) If water is added at the time of loading:
(i) The sample for analysis must be taken from a point in the loading line between the water injection equipment and the cargo tank; and
(ii) Positive provisions must be made to assure water injection equipment is operating.
(4) If water injection equipment becomes inoperative, suitable corrective maintenance must be performed after which a sample from the first loaded cargo tank must be analyzed for prescribed water content.
(5) The analysis method for water content must be as prescribed in CGA Pamphlet G-2.2, titled “Tentative Standard Method for Determining Minimum of 0.2 per cent water in Anhydrous Ammonia,” 1975 edition.
(6) Records indicating the results of the analysis taken, as required by this paragraph, must be retained for 2 years and must be open to inspection by representative of the Department.
(7) Each person receiving anhydrous ammonia containing 0.2 per cent water by weight may offer for transportation or transport that ammonia without performing the prescribed analysis for water content provided:
(i) The ammonia received was certified as containing 0.2 percent water as prescribed in §§ 172.203(h)(l)(i) and 177.817(a) of this subchapter; and
(ii) The amount of water in the ammonia has not been reduced by any means.
(m) A cargo tank (commonly known as a nurse tank and considered an implement of husbandry) transporting anhydrous ammonia, and operated by a private carrier exclusively for agricultural purposes does not have to meet the specification requirements of part 178 of this subchapter if it:
(1) Has a minimum design pressure of 250 psig and meets the requirements of the edition of the ASME code in effect at the time it was manufactured and is marked accordingly;
(2) Is equipped with safety relief valves meeting the requirements of CGA pamphlet S1.2;
(3) Is painted white or aluminum;
(4) Has capacity of 3,000 gallons or less;
(5) Is loaded to a filling density no greater than 56 percent;
(6) Is securely mounted on a farm wagon; and
(7) Is in conformance with the requirements of part 172 of this subchapter except that shipping papers are not required; and it need not be marked or placarded on one end if that end contains valves, fittings, regulators or gauges when those appurtenances prevent the markings and placard from being properly placed and visible.
(n) Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank used to transport a flammable gas, anhydrous ammonia or hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid must have each liquid opening equipped in accordance with § 178.337-11 of this subchapter.
(o) Chlorine cargo tanks. Each cargo tank motor vehicle used for the transportation of chlorine must meet the requirements in the following:
(1) Any hose, piping, or tubing used for loading or unloading that is mounted or carried on the motor vehicle may not be attached to any valve and must be capped at all ends to prevent the entry of moisture, except at the time of loading or unloading. Except at the time of loading and unloading, the pipe connection of each angle valve must be closed with a screw plug which is chained or otherwise fastened to prevent misplacement.
(2) Each chlorine cargo tank angle valve must be tested to be leak free at not less than 225 psig using dry air or inert gas before installation and thereafter every 2 years when performing the required periodic retest in § 180.407(c) of this subchapter. Prior to each loading, the cargo tank must be inspected and the angle valves and gasketed joints must be examined and tested at a pressure of not less than 50 psig to determine that they are not leaking and are in proper condition for transportation. Any leaks must be corrected before the cargo tank is offered for transportation.
(3) Excess flow valves on the cargo tank must meet the requirements in § 178.337-11(a)(4) of this subchapter.
[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.315, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.316
Cryogenic liquids in cylinders.
(a) General requirements. (1) A cylinder may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the packaging.
(2) A cylinder may not be loaded with any material which may combine chemically with any residue in the packaging to produce an unsafe condition.
(3) The jacket covering the insulation on a cylinder used to transport any flammable cryogenic liquid must be made of steel.
(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the cryogenic liquid form may not be installed on any cylinder used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts are anodized in accordance with ASTM Standard B 580.
(5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting may not be installed on any cylinder used to transport any flammable cryogenic liquid.
(6) Each cylinder must be provided with one or more pressure relief devices, which must be installed and maintained in compliance with the requirements of this subchapter.
(7) Each pressure relief device must be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents during venting will not prevent effective operation of the device.
(8) The maximum weight of the contents in a cylinder with a design service temperature colder than −320 °F. may not exceed the design weight marked on the cylinder (see § 178.35 of this subchapter).
(b) Pressure control systems. Each cylinder containing a cryogenic liquid must have a pressure control system that conforms to § 173.34(d) and is designed and installed so that it will prevent the cylinder from becoming liquid full.
(c) Specification cylinder requirements and filling limits. Specification DOT-4L cylinders (§ 178.57 of this subchapter) are authorized for the transportation of cryogenic liquids when carried in the vertical position as follows:
(1) For purposes of this section, “filling density,” except for hydrogen, is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the packaging to the weight of water that the packaging will hold at 60 °F. (1 lb. of water = 27.737 cubic inches at 60 °F.).
(2) The cryogenic liquids of argon, nitrogen, oxygen, helium and neon must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:
Pressure control valve setting (maximum start-to-discharge pressure psig) | Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) | Air | Argon | Nitrogen | Oxygen | Helium | Neon
45 | 82.5 | 133 | 76 | 108 | 12.5 | 109
75 | 80.3 | 130 | 74 | 105 | 12.5 | 104
| 105 | 78.4 | 127 | 72 | 103 | 12.5 | 100
170 | 76.2 | 122 | 70 | 100 | 12.5 | 92
230 | 75.1 | 119 | 69 | 98 | 12.5 | 85
295 | 73.3 | 115 | 68 | 96 | 12.5 | 77
360 | 70.7 | 113 | 65 | 93 | 12.5 |
450 | 65.9 | 111 | 61 | 91 | 12.5 |
540 | 62.9 | 107 | 58 | 88 | 12.5 |
625 | 60.1 | 104 | 55 | 86 | 12.5 |
Design service temperature ( °F.) | −320 | −320 | −320 | −320 | −452 | −411
(3) Hydrogen (minimum 95 percent parahydrogen) must be loaded and shipped as follows:
Column 1 | Column 2
Design service temperature | Minus 423 °F. or colder.
Maximum permitted filling density, based on cylinder capacity at minus 423 °F (see Note 1) | 6.7 percent.
The pressure control valve must be designed and set to limit the pressure in the cylinder to not more than | 17 psig.

Note 1:
The filling density for hydrogen, cryogenic liquid is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in a packaging to the weight of water that the packaging will hold at minus 423 °F. The volume of the packaging at minus 423 °F is determined in cubic inches. The volume is converted to pounds of water (1 lb. of water = 27.737 cubic inches).
(i) Each cylinder must be constructed, insulated and maintained so that during transportation the total rate of venting shall not exceed 30 SCF of hydrogen per hour.
(ii) In addition to the marking requirements in § 178.35 of this subchapter, the total rate of venting in SCF per hour (SCFH) shall be marked on the top head or valve protection band in letters at least one-half inch high as follows: “VENT RATE**SCFH” (with the asterisks replaced by the number representing the total rate of venting, in SCF per hour).
(iii) Carriage by highway is subject to the conditions specified in § 177.840(a) of this subchapter.
(d) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where charging requirements are not specifically prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the cryogenic liquid must be shipped in packagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27695, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-166, 49 FR 24314, June 12, 1984; Amdt. 173-180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 173-201, 52 FR 13041, Apr. 20, 1987: Amdt. 173-250, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997]
§ 173.318
Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.
(a) General requirements. (1) A cargo tank may not be loaded with a cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the packaging.
(2) A cargo tank may not be loaded with any material that may combine chemically with any residue in the packaging to produce an unsafe condition (see § 178.338-15).
(3) The jacket covering the insulation on a tank used to transport a cryogenic liquid must be made of steel if the cryogenic liquid:
(i) Is to be transported by vessel (see § 176.76(h)(1) of this subchapter); or
(ii) Is oxygen or a flammable material.
(4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the cryogenic liquid form may not be installed on any cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts are anodized in accordance with ASTM Standard B 580.
(5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting, external to the jacket that retains lading during transportation may not be installed on any cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid or any flammable cryogenic liquid.
(6) A cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid must be provided with a manhole (see § 178.338-6 of this subchapter).
(b) Pressure relief systems and pressure control valves—(1) Types of pressure relief systems—(i) Tanks in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each tank in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service must be protected by two independent pressure relief systems which are not connected in series, namely:
(A) A primary system of one or more pressure relief valves; and
(B) A secondary system of one of more frangible discs or pressure relief valves. For a tank in carbon monoxide service, the secondary system must be pressure relief valves only.
(ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the tank must be protected by at least one pressure relief system consisting of:
(A) One or more pressure relief valves; or
(B) A combination of one or more pressure relief valves and one or more frangible discs.
(2) Capacities of pressure relief systems—(i) Tanks in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service, the primary system and the secondary system of pressure relief devices must each have a flow capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.3.2 or paragraph 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. In addition:
(A) The primary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(B) The secondary pressure relief system must have a total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(C) The flow capacity and rating must be verified and marked by the manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
(ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief system must have a flow capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraphs 5.3.2 or 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. If the pressure relief system consists of a combination of pressure relief valves and frangible discs, the pressure relief valves must have a total venting capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 4.1.10.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. The pressure relief system must have this total flow capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of the tank's design pressure. The flow capacity and rating must be verified and marked by the manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
(3) Type and construction of pressure relief devices. (i) Each pressure relief device must be designed and constructed for a pressure equal to or exceeding the tank's design pressure at the coldest temperature reasonably expected to be encountered.
(ii) Pressure relief devices must be either spring-loaded pressure relief valves or frangible discs. Pressure relief valves must be of a type that automatically open and close at predetermined pressures.
(4) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i) On a tank used in oxygen or flammable cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices must perform as follows.
(A) Each pressure relief valve in the primary relief system must be set-to-discharge at a pressure no higher than 110 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(B) Each pressure relief device in the secondary pressure relief system must be designed to commence functioning at a pressure no lower than 130 percent and no higher than 150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices in the pressure relief system must be designed to commence functioning at no higher than 150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(5) Optional pressure relief devices and pressure control valves. In addition to the required pressure relief devices, a cargo tank in cryogenic liquid (except carbon monoxide) service may be equipped with one or both of the following:
(i) One or more pressure control valves set at a pressure below the tank's design pressure.
(ii) One or more frangible discs set to function at a pressure not less than one and one-half times or more than two times the tank's design pressure.
(6) Maximum filling rate. (i) For a tank used in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the primary pressure relief system rated at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate at which the tank is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the pressure relief valves rated at 150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
(7) Arrangement and location of pressure relief devices. (i) The discharge from any pressure relief system must be directed upward and be unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing in such a manner as to prevent impingement of gas upon the jacket or any structural part of the vehicle.
(ii) Each pressure relief valve must be arranged or protected to prevent the accumulation of foreign material between the relief valve and the atmospheric discharge opening in any relief piping. The arrangement must not impede flow through the device.
(iii) Each pressure relief valve must be designed and located to minimize the possibility of tampering. If the pressure setting or adjustment is external to the valve, the valve adjustment must be sealed.
(iv) Each pressure relief device must have direct communication with the vapor space of the tank at the midlength of the top centerline.
(v) Each pressure relief device must be installed and located so that the cooling effect of the contents during venting will not prevent the effective operation of the device.
(8) Connections. (i) Each connection to a pressure relief device must be of sufficient size to allow the required rate of discharge through the pressure relief device. The inlet connection must be not less than one-half inch nominal pipe size.
(ii) A shut-off valve may be installed in a pressure relief system only when the required relief capacity is provided at all times.
(9) Pressure relief devices for piping hose and vacuum-insulated jackets. (i) Each portion of connected liquid piping or hose that can be closed at both ends must be provided with either a hydrostatic pressure relief valve without an intervening shut-off valve, or a check valve permitting flow from the pipe or hose into the tank. If used, the relief valve must be located so as to prevent its discharge from impinging on the tank, piping, or operating personnel.
(ii) On a vacuum-insulated cargo tank the jacket must be protected by a suitable relief device to release internal pressure. The discharge area of this device must be at least 0.00024 square inch per pound of water capacity of the tank. This relief device must function at a pressure not exceeding the internal design pressure of the jacket, calculated in accordance with the ASME Code, or 25 psig, whichever is less.
(10) Tank inlet, outlet, pressure relief device and pressure control valve markings. (i) Each tank inlet and outlet, except pressure relief devices and pressure control valves, must be permanently marked to indicate whether it communicates with “vapor” or “liquid” when the tank is filled to the maximum permitted filling density.
(ii) Each pressure relief valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge, the discharge rate of the device in SCF per minute(SCFM) of free air, and the manufacturer's name or trade name and catalog number. The marked set-to-discharge pressure valve must be visible with the valve in its installed position. The rated discharge capacity of the device must be determined at a pressure of 120 percent of the design pressure of the tank.
(iii) Each pressure control valve must be plainly and permanently marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge.
(c) Weight of lading requirements. The weight of a cryogenic liquid in the tank must be determined by weighing or by the use of a liquid level gauging device authorized in § 178.338-14(a) of this subchapter, and may not exceed the lesser of:
(1) The weight of lading in the tank, based on the water capacity stamped on the nameplate (§ 178.338-18(a)(4) of this subchapter) and the appropriate maximum permitted filling density specified in paragraph (f) of this section; or
(2) The maximum weight of lading for which the cargo tank was designed, as marked on the specification plate (see § 178.338-18(b) of this subchapter).
(d) Outage. Except for a cargo tank containing helium, cryogenic liquid, a cargo tank offered for transportation must have an outage of at least two percent below the inlet of the pressure relief device or pressure control valve, under conditions of incipient opening, with the tank in a level attitude.
(e) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank at the start of travel must be at a temperature sufficiently cold that the pressure setting of the pressure control valve or the required pressure relief valve, whichever is lower, will not be reached in less time than the marked rated holding time for the cryogenic liquid (see paragraph (g)(3) of this section and § 178.338-9(b) of this subchapter).
(f) Specification MC-338 (§ 178.338 of this subchapter) cargo tanks are authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional requirements:
(1) For purposes of this section, “filling density” is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one pound of water=27.737 cubic inches at 60 °F., or one gallon of water = 231 cubic inches at 60 °F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).
(2) Air, argon, helium, nitrogen, and oxygen, cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:
Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) | Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) | Air | Argon | Helium | Nitrogen | Oxygen
26 | | | 12.5 | |
30 | 80.3 | 129 | 12.5 | 74 | 105
40 | 79.2 | | 12.5 | |
50 | 78.0 | | 12.5 | |
55 | 77.3 | 125 | 12.5 | 71 | 102
60 | 76.9 | | 12.5 | |
80 | 75.3 | | 12.5 | |
85 | 75.1 | 121 | 12.5 | | 99
100 | 73.0 | | 12.5 | |
105 | 73.7 | | 12.5 | 67 |
120 | 72.2 | | 12.5 | |
140 | 71.4 | | 12.5 | |
145 | 70.9 | 115 | 12.5 | 64 | 94
180 | 68.3 | | 12.5 | |
200 | 67.3 | 110 | 12.5 | 61 | 91
250 | 63.3 | 106 | 12.5 | 57 | 87
275 | 62.3 | 105 | 12.5 | 56 | 86
325 | 59.4 | 101 | | 53 | 83
Design service temperature | −320 °F | −320 °F | −452 °F | −320 °F | −320 °F
(3) Carbon monoxide, hydrogen (minimum 95 percent para-hydrogen), ethylene, and methane or natural gas, cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:
Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
Maximum set-to-discharge pressure (psig) | Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) | Carbon monoxide | Ethylene | Hydrogen | Methane or natural gas
13 | | | 6.6 |
15 | 75.0 | | 6.6 | 40.5
17 | 74.0 | | 6.6 |
20 | | 53.5 | | 40.0
25 | 73.0 | | |
30 | 72.0 | 52.7 | 6.3 | 39.1
35 | | | |
40 | | 52.0 | | 38.6
45 | 71.5 | | |
50 | | 51.4 | 6.0 | 38.2
55 | | | |
60 | | 50.8 | |
70 | | 50.2 | 5.7 | 37.5
90 | | 49.2 | |
95 | | | |
100 | | 48.4 | 5.4 | 36.6
115 | | 48.2 | |
125 | | | 5.0 |
150 | | | 4.5 |
175 | 62.5 | 45.8 | |
285 | 56.0 | | |
Design service temperature | −320 °F | −155 °F | −423 °F | −260 °F
(4) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where charging requirements are not specifically prescribed in this paragraph (f), the cryogenic liquid must be shipped in packagings and under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(g) One-way travel time; marking. The jacket of a cargo tank to be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be marked on its right side near the front, in letters and numbers at least two inches high, “One-Way-Travel-Time __ hrs.”, with the blank filled in with a number indicating the one-way travel time (OWTT), in hours, of the cargo tank for the flammable cryogenic liquid to be transported. A cargo tank that is partially unloaded at one or more locations must have additional marking “One-Way-Travel-Time __ hrs. __ psig to __ psig at __ percent filling density,” with the second blank filled in with the pressure existing after partial unloading and the third blank filled in with the set-to-discharge pressure of the control valve or pressure relief valve, and the fourth blank with the filling density following partial unloading. Multiple OWTT markings for different pressure levels are permitted. The abbreviation “OWTT” may be used in place of the words “One-way-travel-time” in the marking required by this paragraph.
(1) OWTT is based on the marked rated holding time (MRHT) of the cargo tank for the cryogenic liquid to be transported in the cargo tank. If the MRHT for the flammable cryogenic liquid is not displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate, this MRHT may be derived.
(2) The MRHT is converted to OWTT, in hours, as follows:
(i) For a tank with an MRHT of 72 hours or less,
OWTT = (MRHT − 24) / 2
(ii) For a tank with an MRHT greater than 72 hours,
OWTT = MRHT − 48
(3) Each cargo tank motor vehicle used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be examined after each shipment to determine its actual holding time. The record required by § 177.840(h) of this subchapter may be used for this determination. If the examination indicates that the actual holding time of the cargo tank, after adjustment to reflect an average ambient temperature of 85 °F, is less than 90 percent of the marked rated holding time (MRHT) for the cryogenic liquid marked on the specification plate or adjacent thereto (see § 178.338-18(b) of this subchapter), the tank may not be refilled with any flammable cryogenic liquid until it is restored to its marked rated holding time value or it is re-marked with the actual marked rated holding time determined by this examination. If the name of the flammable cryogenic liquid that was transported and its marked rated holding time is not displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate, this requirement may be met by deriving the MRHT of the cargo tank for that flammable cryogenic liquid and comparing that derived MRHT with the actual holding time after adjustment.
[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27696, June 16, 1983]

Editorial Note:
For Federal Register citations affecting § 173.318, see the List of CFR Sections Affected appearing in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
§ 173.319
Cryogenic liquids in tank cars.
(a) General requirements. (1) A tank car containing a flammable cryogenic liquid may not be shipped unless it was loaded by, or with the consent of, the owner of the tank car.
(2) The amount of flammable cryogenic liquid loaded into a tank car must be determined, either by direct measurement or by calculation based on weight, to verify that the tank has not been filled to a level in excess of the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. The weight of any flammable cryogenic liquid loaded, except hydrogen, must be checked by use of scales after disconnecting the loading line.
(3) Whenever a tank car containing any flammable cryogenic lading is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of shipment, the shipper of the lading shall notify the Bureau of Explosives.
(4) A tank car may not be loaded with any flammable cryogenic liquid:
(i) That may combine chemically with any residue in the tank to produce an unsafe condition,
(ii) That is colder than the design service temperature of the tank,
(iii) If the average daily pressure rise in the tank exceeded 3 psi during the prior shipment,
(iv) Unless it is marked with the name of contents, in accordance with § 172.330 of this subchapter.
(b) When a tank car containing a flammable cryogenic liquid is offered for transportation:
(1) At least 0.5 percent outage must be provided below the inlet of the pressure relief or pressure control valve at the start-to-discharge pressure setting of the valve, with the tank car in a level attitude, and
(2) The absolute pressure in the annular space must be less than 75 microns of mercury.
(c) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid must be loaded into a tank car at such a temperature that the average daily pressure rise during transportation will not exceed 3 psi (see paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section and § 173.31(c)(13)).
(d) A Class DOT-113 tank car is authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional requirements:
(1) For purposes of this section, “filling density” is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one pound of water = 27.737 cubic inches at 60 °F., or one gallon of water = 231 cubic inches at 60 °F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).
(2) Ethylene, and hydrogen (minimum 95 percent parahydrogen), cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:
Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
Maximum start-to-discharge pressure (psig) | Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight) | Ethylene | Ethylene | Ethlyene | Hydrogen
17 | | | | 6.60.
45 | 52.8 | | |
75 | | 51.1 | 51.1 |
Maximum pressure when offered for transportation | 10 psig | 10 psig | 20 psig |
Design service temperature | Minus 260 °F | Minus 260 °F | Minus 155 °F | Minus 423 °F.
| Specification (see § 173.31(a)(9)) | 113D60W 113C60W | 113C120W | 113D120W | 113A175W. 113A60W.
(e) Special requirements for class DOT 113 tank cars. (1) A class DOT-113 tank car need not be periodically pressure tested; however, each shipment must be monitored to determine the average daily pressure rise in the tank car. If the average daily pressure rise during any shipment exceeds 0.2 Bar (3 psi) per day, the tank must be tested for thermal integrity prior to any subsequent shipment.
(2) Thermal integrity test. When required by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, either of the following thermal integrity tests may be used:
(i) Pressure rise test. The pressure rise in the tank may not exceed 0.34 Bar (5 psi) in 24 hours. When the pressure rise test is performed, the absolute pressure in the annular space of the loaded tank car may not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period; or
(ii) Calculated heat transfer rate test. The insulation system must be performance tested as prescribed in § 179.400-4 of this subchapter. When the calculated heat transfer rate test is performed, the absolute pressure in the annular space of the loaded tank car may not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period. The calculated heat transfer rate in 24 hours may not exceed:
(A) 120 percent of the appropriate standard heat transfer rate specified in § 179.401-1 of this subchapter, for DOT-113A60W and DOT-113C120W tank cars;
(B) 122.808 joules (0.1164 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for DOT-113A175W tank cars;
(C) 345.215 joules (0.3272 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for DOT-113C60W and 113D60W tank cars; or
(D) 500.09 joules (0.4740 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water capacity, for DOT-113D120W tank cars.
(3) A tank car that fails a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section must be removed from hazardous materials service. A tank car removed from hazardous materials service because it failed a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section may not be used to transport a hazardous material unless the tank car conforms to all applicable requirements of this subchapter.
(4) Each frangible disc must be replaced with a new frangible disc every 12 months, and the replacement date must be marked on the car near the pressure relief valve information.
(5) Pressure relief valves and alternate pressure relief valves must be tested every five years. The start-to-discharge pressure and vapor tight pressure requirements for the pressure relief valves must be as specified in § 179.401-1 of this subchapter. The alternate pressure relief device values specified in § 179.401-1 of this subchapter for a DOT-113C120W tank car apply to a DOT-113D120W tank car.
(49 U.S.C. 1803, 1804, 1808; 49 CFR 1.53, app. A to part 1)
[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27698, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-245, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 173.320
Cryogenic liquids; exceptions.
(a) Atmospheric gases and helium, cryogenic liquids, in Dewar flasks, insulated cylinders, insulated portable tanks, insulated cargo tanks, and insulated tank cars, designed and constructed so that the pressure in such packagings will not exceed 25.3 psig under ambient temperature conditions during transportation are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or railcar except as specified in paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) of this section.
(1) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter pertaining to the reporting of incidents, not including a release that is the result of venting through a pressure control valve, or the neck of the Dewar flask.
(2) Subparts A, B, C, and D of part 172, (§§ 174.24 for rail and 177.817 for highway) and in addition, part 172 in its entirety for oxygen.
(3) Subparts A and B of part 173, and §§ 174.1 and 177.800, 177.804, and 177.823 of this subchapter.
(b) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to atmospheric gases and helium:
(1) During loading and unloading operations (pressure rises may exceed 25.3 psig); or
(2) When used in operation of a process system; such as a refrigeration system (pressure may exceed 25.3 psig).
(c) For transportation aboard aircraft, see § 171.11 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-201, 52 FR 13043, Apr. 20, 1987, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]
§ 173.321
Ethylamine.
Ethylamine must be packaged as follows:
(a) In 1A1 drums which meet Packing Group I performance level requirements.
(b) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.322
Ethyl chloride.
Ethyl chloride must be packaged in any of the following single or combination non-bulk packagings which meet Packing Group I performance level requirements:
(a) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with glass, earthenware, or metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each;
(b) In 4G fiberboard boxes with glass, earthenware, or metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each. Outer packagings may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight;
(c) In 1A1 drums of not over 100 L (26 gallons) capacity each; or
(d) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.323
Ethylene oxide.
(a) For packaging ethylene oxide in non-bulk packagings, silver mercury or any of its alloys or copper may not be used in any part of a packaging, valve, or other packaging appurtenance if that part, during normal conditions of transportation, may come in contact with ethylene oxide liquid or vapor. Copper alloys may be used only where gas mixtures do not contain free acetylene at any concentration that will form copper acetylene. All packaging and gaskets must be constructed of materials which are compatible with ethylene oxide and do not lower the auto-ignition temperature of ethylene oxide.
(b) Ethylene oxide must be packaged in one of the following:
(1) In 4G fiberboard boxes with inner glass ampoules or vials. Total quantity of ethylene oxide may not exceed 100 grams (3.5 ounces) per package. The completed package must be capable of passing Packing Group I performance tests.
(2) In 4G fiberboard boxes constructed with top and bottom pads and perimeter liner. Inner packagings must be aluminum receptacles of no more than 135 g (4.8 ounces) capacity cushioned with incombustible material. No more than 12 receptacles may be packed in one box, and no more than 10 boxes may be overpacked under the provisions of § 173.25 of this part. Each completed package must be capable of passing Packing Group I performance tests.
(3) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes or 4G fiberboard boxes with inner metal receptacles of no more than 340 g (12 ounces) capacity. The metal receptacle must be capable of withstanding no less than a 1241.1 kPa (180 psig) burst pressure. No more than 12 receptacles may be packed in one box, and each receptacle may not be liquid full below 82 °C (180 °F). Each inner receptacle must be insulated and equipped with a relief device of the fusible plug type with yield temperature of 69 °C to 77 °C (156 °F to 171 °F). The capacity of relief device and insulation must be such that the charged receptacle will not explode when tested by the method described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or other equivalent method. Each completed package must be capable of passing all Packing Group I performance tests.
(4) In specification cylinders, as authorized for any compressed gas except acetylene. Pressurizing valves and insulation are required for cylinders over 4 L (1 gallon) capacity. Eductor tubes must be provided for cylinders over 19 L (5 gallons) capacity. Cylinders must be seamless or welded steel (not brazed) with a nominal capacity of no more than 115 L (30 gallons) and may not be liquid full below 82 °C (180 °F). Before each refilling, each cylinder must be tested for leakage at no less than 103.4 kPa (15 psig) pressure. In addition, each cylinder must be equipped with a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 69 °C to 77 °C (157 °F to 170 °F). The capacity of the relief device and the effectiveness of the insulation must be such that the charged cylinder will not explode when tested by the method described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or other equivalent method.
(5) In 1A1 steel drums of no more than 231 L (61 gallons) and meeting Packing Group I performance standards. The drum must be lagged, of all welded construction with the inner shell having a minimum thickness of 1.7 mm (0.068 inches) and the outer shell having a minimum thickness of 2.4 mm (0.095 inches). Drums must be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic test pressure of 690 kPa (100 psig). Lagging must be of sufficient thickness so that the drum, when filled with ethylene oxide and equipped with the required pressure relief device, will not rupture when exposed to fire. The drum may not be liquid full below 85 °C (185 °F), and must be marked “THIS END UP” on the top head. Before each refilling, each drum must be tested for leakage at no less than 103 kPa (15 psig) pressure. Each drum must be equipped with a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 69 °C to 77 °C (157 °F to 170 °F), and the capacity of the relief device must be such that the filled drum is capable of passing, without rupture, the test method described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or other equivalent method.
(c) When § 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and B of this part, the special provisions specified in column 7 of the § 172.101 table, and paragraphs (d) through (j) of this section:
(1) Tank cars. Class DOT 105J tank cars: Notwithstanding the requirements of § 173.31(c), each tank car must have a tank test pressure of at least 20.7 Bar (300 psi) no later than July 1, 2006.
(2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles.
(3) Portable tanks. DOT 51 portable tanks.
(d) The pressure relief devices must be set to function at 517 kPa (75 psig). Portable tanks fitted with non-reclosing devices made and in use prior to December 31, 1987, may continue to be used in ethylene oxide service.
(e) In determining outage, consideration must be given to the lading temperature and solubility of inert gas padding in ethylene oxide as well as the partial pressure exerted by the gas padding.
(f) Each tank, loaded or empty, must be padded with dry nitrogen or other suitable inert gas of sufficient quantity to render the vapor space of the tank nonflammable up to 41 °C (105 °F). The gas used for padding must be free of impurities which may cause the ethylene oxide to polymerize, decompose or undergo other violent chemical reaction.
(g) Copper, silver, mercury, magnesium or their alloys may not be used in any part of the tank or appurtenances that are normally in contact with the lading.
(h) Neoprene, natural rubber and asbestos gaskets are prohibited. All packing and gaskets must be made of materials which do not react with or lower the autoignition temperature of the lading.
(i) Each tank must be insulated with cork (at least 10 cm (4 inches) thick), or mineral wool, fiberglass or other suitable insulation material of sufficient thickness so that the thermal conductance at 16 °C (60 °F) is not more than 0.075 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F. temperature differential. Portable tanks made and in use prior to December 31, 1987 equipped with fusible plugs instead of a safety relief valve or frangible disc, must have sufficient insulation so that the tank as filled for shipment will not rupture in a fire. The insulation on portable tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles must be protected with a steel jacket at least 2.54 mm (0.100 inch) thick, or as required by the specification.
(j) Tank car tanks built after December 30, 1971 must be equipped with a thermometer well.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-145, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 173.334
Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas.
Hexaethyl tetraphosphate, parathion, tetraethyl dithio pyrophosphate, tetraethyl pyrophosphate, or other Division 6.1 organic phosphates (including a compound or mixture), may be mixed with a non-flammable compressed gas. This mixture must not contain more than 20 percent by weight of organic phosphate and must be packaged in specification 3A240, 3AA240, 3B240, 4A240, 4B240, 4BA240, or 4BW240 cylinders meeting the following requirements.
(a) Each cylinder may be charged with not more than 5 kg (11.0 pounds) of the mixture, to a maximum filling density of not more than 80 percent of the water capacity;
(b) Each cylinder must be charged in compliance with § 173.301 (e) and (f);
(c) No cylinder may be equipped with an eduction tube or a fusible plug;
(d) No cylinder may be equipped with any valve unless the valve is a type approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety;
(e) Cylinders must be overpacked in a box so arranged to protect each valve or other closing device from damage. Except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, no more than four cylinders may be packed in a box. Each box with its closing device protection must be sufficiently strong to protect all parts of each inside cylinder from deformation or breakage if the completed package is dropped 1.8 m (5.9 feet) onto solid concrete and impacted at the package's weakest point.
(f) Cylinders may be packed in strong wooden boxes with valves or other closing devices protected from injury, with not more than twelve cylinders in one outside wooden box. An outer fiberboard box may be used when not more than four such cylinders are to be shipped in one packaging. Valves must be adequately protected. Box and valve protection must be of strength sufficient to protect all parts of inner packagings and valves from deformation or breakage resulting from a drop of at least 1.8 m (5.9 feet) onto a concrete floor, impacting at the weakest point.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52668, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.335
Gas generator assemblies.
Gas generator assemblies (aircraft) containing liquefied non-flammable, non-toxic gas and a solid propellant cartridge must be packaged as follows:
(a) The gas must be packaged in specification steel cylinders authorized for any compressed gas except acetylene not exceeding 10.5 L (2.8 gallons) internal volume and having a minimum design burst pressure of 19,700 kPa (2,857 psi);
(b) Fittings must be protected against damage under conditions normal incident to transport, any trigger must be fitted with a safety locking pin, and a non-propulsive plug must be installed on the discharge tube; and
(c) Each complete unit must be individually and tightly packed to prevent movement in wooden boxes (4C1 or 4C2), plywood boxes (4D), reconstituted wood boxes (4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), or plastic boxes, (4H1and 4H2) of Packing Group II performance level, or in the original manufacturer's transit box.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.336
Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied.
Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied, must be packaged in specification cylinders as follows:
(a) As prescribed in § 173.192, or
(b) Specification 3A480, 3AA480, 3AL1800, or 3E1800 metal cylinders, with valves removed, are authorized. Each valve opening must be closed by means of a solid metal plug with tapered thread properly luted to prevent leakages; valve protection cap must be used and be at least 4.76 mm (0.187 inches) thick gas-tight, with 4.76 mm (0.187 inches) faced seat for gasket and with United States standard form thread. Transportation in 3AL cylinders is authorized only by highway or rail. Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901c, paragraphs 3.7.2 and 3.8.2. Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901b may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or less cleaned at the same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR-C-901b paragraph 4.4.2.3 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45464, Oct. 1, 1992]
§ 173.337
Nitric oxide.
Nitric oxide must be packed in Specification 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3E1800, or 3AL1800 cylinders charged to a pressure of not more than 5,170 kPa (750 psi) at 21 °C (70 °F). Cylinders must be equipped with a valve of stainless steel and valve seat of material which will not be deteriorated by contact with nitric oxide or nitrogen dioxide. Cylinders or valves may not be equipped with pressure relief devices of any type. Valve outlets must be sealed by a solid threaded cap or plug and an inert gasketing material. In addition—
(a) Specification 3E1800 cylinders must be overpacked in strong wooden boxes of such design as to protect valves from injury or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Each overpack must conform to § 173.25.
(b) Specification 3A, 3AA, and 3AL cylinders must have their valves protected by metal caps or other equally protective guards securely attached to the cylinders and be of sufficient strength to protect the valves from injury during transit, or by overpacking in strong wooden boxes of such design as to protect valves from injury or accidental functioning under conditions incident to transportation. Each overpack must conform to § 173.25. Transportation in 3AL cylinders is authorized only by highway or rail.
(c) Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901C, paragraphs 3.7.2 and 3.8.2. Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901C may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or less cleaned at the same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR-C-901C paragraph 4.4.2.3 and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.338
Tungsten hexafluoride.
Tungsten hexafluoride must be packed in specification 3A, 3AA, 3BN, or 3E (§§ 178.36, 178.37, 178.39, 178.42 of this subchapter) cylinders. Cylinders must be equipped with a valve protection cap or be packed in a strong outside container complying with the provisions of § 173.40. Outlets of any valves must be capped or plugged. As an alternative, the cylinder opening may be closed by the use of a metal plug. Specification 3E cylinders must be shipped in an overpack that complies with the provisions of § 173.40.
][Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990]
§ 173.340
Tear gas devices.
(a) Packagings for tear gas devices must be approved prior to initial transportation by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(b) Tear gas devices may not be assembled with, or packed in the same packaging with, mechanically- or manually-operated firing, igniting, bursting, or other functioning elements unless of a type and design which has been approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(c) Tear gas grenades, tear gas candles, and similar devices must be packaged in one of the following packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level:
(1) In UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metal-strapped wooden boxes. Functioning elements not assembled in grenades or devices must be in a separate compartment of these boxes, or in inner or separate outer boxes, UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F, and must be so packed and cushioned that they may not come in contact with each other or with the walls of the box during transportation. Not more than 50 tear gas devices and 50 functioning elements must be packed in one box, and the gross weight of the outer box may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).
(2) In a UN 1A2 metal drum. Functioning elements must be packed in a separate inner packaging or compartment. Not more than 24 tear gas devices and 24 functioning elements must be packed in one outer drum, and the gross weight of the drum may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).
(3) In a UN 4G fiberboard box with inside tear gas devices meeting Specifications 2P or 2Q. Each inside packaging must be placed in fiberboard tubes fitted with metal ends or a fiber box with suitable padding. Not more than 30 inner packagings must be packed in one outer box, and the gross weight of the outer box may not exceed 16 kg (35 pounds).
(4) In other packagings of a type or design which has been approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(d) Tear gas devices may be shipped completely assembled when offered by or consigned to the U.S. Department of Defense, provided the functioning elements are so packed that they cannot accidentally function. Outer packagings must be UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metal-strapped wooden boxes.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990]

Subpart H [Reserved]

Subpart I—Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

Source:
Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, unless otherwise noted.
§ 173.401
Scope.
(a) This subpart sets forth requirements for the packaging and transportation of Class 7 (radioactive) materials by offerors and carriers subject to this subchapter. The requirements prescribed in this subpart are in addition to, not in place of, other requirements set forth in this subchapter for Class 7 (radioactive) materials and those of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in 10 CFR part 71.
(b) This subpart does not apply to:
(1) Class 7 (radioactive) materials produced, used, transported, or stored within an establishment other than during the course of transportation, including storage in transportation.
(2) Class 7 (radioactive) materials contained in a medical device, such as a heart pacemaker, which is implanted in a human being or live animal.
(3) Class 7 (radioactive) materials that have been injected into, ingested by, or are otherwise placed into, and are still in, human beings or live animals.
§ 173.403
Definitions.
For purposes of this subpart—
A1 means the maximum activity of special form Class 7 (radioactive) material permitted in a Type A package.
A2 means the maximum activity of Class 7 (radioactive) material, other than special form, LSA or SCO, permitted in a Type A package. These values are either listed in § 173.435 or derived in accordance with the procedure prescribed in § 173.433.
Class 7 (radioactive) material. See the definition of Radioactive material in this section.
Closed transport vehicle means a transport vehicle or conveyance equipped with a securely attached exterior enclosure that during normal transportation restricts the access of unauthorized persons to the cargo space containing the Class 7 (radioactive) materials. The enclosure may be either temporary or permanent, and in the case of packaged materials may be of the “see-through” type, and must limit access from top, sides, and bottom.
Containment system means the assembly of components of the packaging intended to retain the radioactive contents during transportation.
Conveyance means:
(1) For transport by public highway or rail: any transport vehicle or large freight container;
(2) For transport by water: any vessel, or any hold, compartment, or defined deck area of a vessel including any transport vehicle on board the vessel; and
(3) For transport by aircraft, any aircraft.
Design means the description of a special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, a package, packaging, or LSA-III, that enables those items to be fully identified. The description may include specifications, engineering drawings, reports showing compliance with regulatory requirements, and other relevant documentation.
Exclusive use (also referred to in other regulations as “sole use” or “full load”) means sole use by a single consignor of a conveyance for which all initial, intermediate, and final loading and unloading are carried out in accordance with the direction of the consignor or consignee. The consignor and the carrier must ensure that any loading or unloading is performed by personnel having radiological training and resources appropriate for safe handling of the consignment. The consignor must issue specific instructions in writing, for maintenance of exclusive use shipment controls, and include them with the shipping paper information provided to the carrier by the consignor.
Fissile material means plutonium-238, plutonium-239, plutonium-241, uranium-233, uranium-235, or any combination of these radionuclides. The definition does not apply to unirradiated natural uranium and depleted uranium, and natural uranium or depleted uranium that has been irradiated in a thermal reactor. Certain additional exceptions are provided in § 173.453.
Fissile material, controlled shipment means any shipment that contains one or more packages that have been assigned, in accordance with § 173.457, nuclear criticality control transport indices greater than 10.
Freight container means a reusable container having a volume of 1.81 cubic meters (64 cubic feet) or more, designed and constructed to permit its being lifted with its contents intact and intended primarily for containment of packages in unit form during transportation. A “small freight container” is one which has either one outer dimension less than 1.5 meters (4.9 feet) or an internal volume of not more than 3.0 cubic meters (106 cubic feet). All other freight containers are designated as “large freight containers.”
Highway route controlled quantity means a quantity within a single package which exceeds:
(1) 3,000 times the A1 value of the radionuclides as specified in § 173.435 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material;
(2) 3,000 times the A2 value of the radionuclides as specified in § 173.435 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material; or
(3) 1,000 TBq (27,000 Ci), whichever is least.
Limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material means a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material not exceeding the materials package limits specified in § 173.425 and conforming with requirements specified in § 173.421.
Low Specific Activity (LSA) material means Class 7 (radioactive) material with limited specific activity which satisfies the descriptions and limits set forth below. Shielding materials surrounding the LSA material may not be considered in determining the estimated average specific activity of the package contents. LSA material must be in one of three groups:
(1) LSA-I.
(i) Ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides (e.g., uranium, thorium) and uranium or thorium concentrates of such ores; or
(ii) Solid unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or natural thorium or their solid or liquid compounds or mixtures; or
(iii) Class 7 (radioactive) material, other than fissile material, for which the A2 value is unlimited; or
(iv) Mill tailings, contaminated earth, concrete, rubble, other debris, and activated material in which the Class 7 (radioactive) material is essentially uniformly distributed and the average specific activity does not exceed 10− ^6A2/g.
(2) LSA-II.
(i) Water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/liter (20.0 Ci/liter); or
(ii) Material in which the Class 7 (radioactive) material is distributed throughout and the average specific activity does not exceed 10− ^4A2/g for solids and gases, and 10− ^5A2/g for liquids.
(3) LSA-III. Solids (e.g., consolidated wastes, activated materials) that meet the requirements of § 173.468 and which:
(i) The Class 7 (radioactive) material is distributed throughout a solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially uniformly distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen, ceramic, etc.); and
(ii) The Class 7 (radioactive) material is relatively insoluble, or it is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble material, so that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of Class 7 (radioactive) material per package by leaching when placed in water for seven days would not exceed 0.1 A2; and
(iii) The average specific activity of the solid does not exceed 2×10− ^3A2/g.
Low toxicity alpha emitters are:
(1) Natural uranium, depleted uranium, and natural thorium;
(2) Ores, concentrates or tailings containing uranium-235, uranium-238, thorium-232, thorium-228 and thorium-230; or
(3) Alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days.
Maximum normal operating pressure means the maximum gauge pressure that would develop in a receptacle in a period of one year, in the absence of venting or cooling, under the heat conditions specified in 10 CFR 71.71(c)(1)
Multilateral approval means approval of a package or shipment by the relevant competent authority of the country of origin and of each country through or into which the package or shipment is to be transported. This definition does not include approval from a country over which Class 7 (radioactive) materials are carried in aircraft, if there is no scheduled stop in that country.
Natural thorium means thorium with the naturally occurring distribution of thorium isotopes (essentially 100 percent by weight of thorium-232).
Non-fixed radioactive contamination means radioactive contamination that can be readily removed from a surface by wiping with an absorbent material. Non-fixed (removable) radioactive contamination is not significant if it does not exceed the limits specified in § 173.443.
Normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 (radioactive) material which has not been demonstrated to qualify as “special form Class 7 (radioactive) material.”
Package means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the packaging together with its radioactive contents as presented for transport.
(1) “Excepted package” means a packaging together with its excepted Class 7 (radioactive) materials as specified in §§ 173.421-173.426 and 173.428.
(2) “Type A package” means a packaging that, together with its radioactive contents limited to A1 or A2 as appropriate, meets the requirements of §§ 173.410 and 173.412 and is designed to retain the integrity of containment and shielding required by this part under normal conditions of transport as demonstrated by the tests set forth in § 173.465 or § 173.466, as appropriate. A Type A package does not require Competent Authority Approval.
(3) “Type B package” means a Type B packaging that, together with its radioactive contents, is designed to retain the integrity of containment and shielding required by this part when subjected to the normal conditions of transport and hypothetical accident test conditions set forth in 10 CFR part 71.
(i) “Type B(U) package” means a Type B packaging that, together with its radioactive contents, for international shipments requires unilateral approval only of the package design and of any stowage provisions that may be necessary for heat dissipation.
(ii) “Type B(M) package” means a Type B packaging, together with its radioactive contents, that for international shipments requires multilateral approval of the package design, and may require approval of the conditions of shipment. Type B(M) packages are those Type B package designs which have a maximum normal operating pressure of more than 700 kilopascals per square centimeter (100 pounds per square inch) gauge or a relief device which would allow the release of Class 7 (radioactive) material to the environment under the hypothetical accident conditions specified in 10 CFR part 71.
(4) “Industrial package” means a packaging that, together with its low specific activity (LSA) material or surface contaminated object (SCO) contents, meets the requirements of §§ 173.410 and 173.411. Industrial packages are categorized in § 173.411 as either:
(i) “Industrial package Type 1 (IP-1)”;
(ii) “Industrial package Type 2 (IP-2)”; or
(iii) “Industrial package Type 3 (IP-3)”.
Packaging means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the assembly of components necessary to ensure compliance with the packaging requirements of this subpart. It may consist of one or more receptacles, absorbent materials, spacing structures, thermal insulation, radiation shielding, service equipment for filling, emptying, venting and pressure relief, and devices for cooling or absorbing mechanical shocks. The conveyance, tie-down system, and auxiliary equipment may sometimes be designated as part of the packaging.
Radiation level means the radiation dose-equivalent rate expressed in millisievert(s) per hour or mSv/h (millirem(s) per hour or mrem/h). Neutron flux densities may be converted into radiation levels according to table 1:
Table 1—Neutron Fluence Rates To Be Regarded as Equivalent to a Radiation Level of 0.01 mSv/h (1 mrem/h) ^1
Energy of neutron | Flux density equivalent to 0.01 mSv/h (1 mrem/h) neutrons per square centimeter per second (n/cm^2/s)
Thermal (2.510E-8)MeV | 272.0
1 keV | 272.0
10 keV | 281.0
100 keV | 47.0
500 keV | 11.0
1 MeV | 7.5
5 MeV | 6.4
10 MeV | 6.7
^1 Flux densities equivalent for energies between those listed in this table may be obtained by linear interpolation.
Radioactive contents means a Class 7 (radioactive) material, together with any contaminated liquids or gases within the package.
Radioactive instrument and article means any manufactured instrument and article such as an instrument, clock, electronic tube or apparatus, or similar instrument and article having Class 7 (radioactive) material in gaseous or non-dispersible solid form as a component part.
Radioactive material means any material having a specific activity greater than 70 Bq per gram (0.002 microcurie per gram) (see definition of “specific activity”).
Special form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 (radioactive) material which satisfies the following conditions:
(1) It is either a single solid piece or is contained in a sealed capsule that can be opened only by destroying the capsule;
(2) The piece or capsule has at least one dimension not less than 5 millimeters (0.2 inch); and
(3) It satisfies the test requirements of § 173.469. Special form encapsulations designed in accordance with the requirements of § 173.389(g) in effect on June 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1982), and constructed prior to July 1, 1985 and special form encapsulations designed in accordance with the requirements of § 173.403 in effect on March 31, 1996 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1995), and constructed prior to April 1, 1997, may continue to be used. Any other special form encapsulation must meet the requirements of this paragraph.
Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity of the radionuclide per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a material in which the radionuclide is essentially uniformly distributed is the activity per unit mass of the material.
Surface Contaminated Object (SCO) means a solid object which is not itself radioactive but which has Class 7 (radioactive) material distributed on any of its surfaces. SCO must be in one of two groups with surface activity not exceeding the following limits:
(1) SCO-I: A solid object on which:
(i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm2 (10−4 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm2 (10−5 microcurie/cm2) for alpha emitters;
(ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 (1.0 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0.1 microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and
(iii) The non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 × 104 Bq/cm2 (1 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 × 103 Bq/cm2 (0.1 microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.
(2) SCO-II: A solid object on which the limits for SCO-I are exceeded and on which:
(i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm2 (10−2 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters or 40 Bq/cm2 (10−3 microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha emitters;
(ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 (20 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and
(iii) The non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 × 105 Bq/cm2 (20 microcuries/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 × 104 Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/cm2) for all other alpha emitters.
Transport index (TI) means the dimensionless number (rounded up to the next tenth) placed on the label of a package to designate the degree of control to be exercised by the carrier during transportation. The transport index is determined as follows:
(1) For nonfissile material packages, the number determined by multiplying the maximum radiation level in milliSievert(s) per hour at one meter (3.3 feet) from the external surface of the package by 100 (equivalent to the maximum radiation level in millirem per hour at one meter (3.3 feet)); or
(2) For fissile material packages, the number determined by multiplying the maximum radiation level in milliSievert per hour at one meter (3.3 feet) from any external surface of the package by 100 (equivalent to the maximum radiation level in millirem per hour at one meter (3.3 feet)) or, for criticality control purposes, the number obtained by dividing 50 by the allowable number of packages which may be transported together, whichever number is larger.
Type A quantity means a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material, the aggregate radioactivity which does not exceed A1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material or A2 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material, where A1 and A2 values are given in § 173.435 or are determined in accordance with § 173.433.
Type B quantity means a quantity of material greater than a Type A quantity.
Unilateral approval means approval of a package solely by the competent authority of the country of origin.
Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 10−7 grams uranium-233 per gram of thorium-232.
Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 10−6 grams plutonium per gram of uranium-235 and a fission product activity of not more than 9 MBq (0.24 millicuries) of fission products per gram of uranium-235.
Uranium—natural, depleted or enriched means the following:
(1) “Natural uranium” means uranium with the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 0.711 weight percent uranium-235, and the remainder essentially uranium-238).
(2) “Depleted uranium” means uranium containing less uranium-235 than the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes.
(3) “Enriched uranium” means uranium containing more uranium-235 than the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.410
General design requirements.
In addition to the requirements of subparts A and B of this part, each package used for the shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be designed so that—
(a) The package can be easily handled and properly secured in or on a conveyance during transport.
(b) Each lifting attachment that is a structural part of the package must be designed with a minimum safety factor of three against yielding when used to lift the package in the intended manner, and it must be designed so that failure of any lifting attachment under excessive load would not impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements of this subpart. Any other structural part of the package which could be used to lift the package must be capable of being rendered inoperable for lifting the package during transport or must be designed with strength equivalent to that required for lifting attachments.
(c) The external surface, as far as practicable, will be free from protruding features and will be easily decontaminated.
(d) The outer layer of packaging will avoid, as far as practicable, pockets or crevices where water might collect.
(e) Each feature that is added to the package will not reduce the safety of the package.
(f) The package will be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance that may arise under normal conditions of transport without any deterioration in the effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a whole and without loosening or unintentionally releasing the nuts, bolts, or other securing devices even after repeated use (see §§ 173.24, 173.24a, and 173.24b).
(g) The materials of construction of the packaging and any components or structure will be physically and chemically compatible with each other and with the package contents. The behavior of the packaging and the package contents under irradiation will be taken into account.
(h) All valves through which the package contents could escape will be protected against unauthorized operation;
(i) For transport by air—
(1) The temperature of the accessible surfaces of the package will not exceed 50 °C (122 °F) at an ambient temperature of 38 °C (100 °F) with no account taken for insulation;
(2) The integrity of containment will not be impaired if the package is exposed to ambient temperatures ranging from −40 °C (−40 °F) to +55 °C (131 °F); and
(3) Packages containing liquid contents will be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure that produces a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (13.8 lb/in^2).
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.411
Industrial packagings.
(a) General. Each industrial packaging must comply with the requirements of this section which specifies packaging tests, and record retention applicable to Industrial Packaging Type 1 (IP-1), Industrial Packaging Type 2 (IP-2), and Industrial Packaging Type 3 (IP-3).
(b) Industrial packaging certification and tests. (1) Each IP-1 must meet the general design requirements prescribed in § 173.410.
(2) Each IP-2 must meet the general design requirements prescribed in § 173.410 and when subjected to the tests specified in § 173.465 (c) and (d) or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by § 173.461(a), must prevent:
(i) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(ii) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at the external surfaces for the condition before the test.
(3) Each IP-3 packaging must meet the requirements for an IP-1 and an IP-2, and must meet the requirements specified in § 173.412(a) through § 173.412(j).
(4) Each specification IM 101 or IM 102 portable tank (§§ 178.270, 178.271, 178.272 of this subchapter) that is certified as meeting the requirements for an IP-2 or IP-3 must:
(i) Satisfy the requirements for IP-2 or IP-3, respectively;
(ii) Be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa (37.1 pounds per square inch) gauge;
(iii) Be designed so that any added shielding is capable of withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from normal handling and normal conditions of transport; and
(iv) Be designed so that loss of shielding will not result in a significant increase in the radiation levels recorded at the external surfaces.
(5) Each freight container that is certified as meeting the requirements of IP-2 or IP-3, must—
(i) Satisfy the requirements for IP-2 or IP-3, respectively;
(ii) Be designed to conform to the requirements of ISO 1496-3-1995(E), “Series 1 Freight Containers—Specifications and Testing—Part 3: Tank Containers for Liquids, Gases and Pressurized Dry Bulk”;
(iii) Be designed so that loss of shielding will not result in a significant increase in the radiation levels recorded at the external surfaces if they are subjected to the tests specified in ISO 1496/1-1995(E); and
(iv) For international transportation, have a safety approval plate in conformance with 49 CFR 451.21 through 451.25.
(c) Except for IP-1 packagings, each offeror of an industrial package must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and shall provide to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety on request, complete documentation of tests and an engineering evaluation or comparative data showing that the construction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction comply with that specification.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.412
Additional design requirements for Type A packages.
In addition to meeting the general design requirements prescribed in § 173.410, each Type A packaging must be designed so that—
(a) The outside of the packaging incorporates a feature, such as a seal, that is not readily breakable, and that, while intact, is evidence that the package has not been opened. In the case of packages shipped in closed transport vehicles in exclusive use, the cargo compartment, instead of the individual packages, may be sealed.
(b) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 centimeters (4 inches).
(c) Containment and shielding is maintained during transportation and storage in a temperature range of −40 °C (−40 °F) to 70 °C (158 °F). Special attention shall be given to liquid contents and to the potential degradation of the packaging materials within the temperature range.
(d) The packaging must include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device that cannot be opened unintentionally or by pressure that may arise within the package during normal transport. Special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, as demonstrated in accordance with § 173.469, may be considered as a component of the containment system. If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, it must be securely closed by a positive fastening device that is independent of any other part of the package.
(e) For each component of the containment system account is taken, where applicable, of radiolytic decomposition of materials and the generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis.
(f) The containment system will retain its radioactive contents under the reduction of ambient pressure to 25 kPa (3.6 pounds per square inch).
(g) Each valve, other than a pressure relief device, is provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage.
(h) Any radiation shield that encloses a component of the packaging specified as part of the containment system will prevent the unintentional escape of that component from the shield.
(i) Failure of any tie-down attachment that is a structural part of the packaging, under both normal and accident conditions, must not impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements of this subpart.
(j) When evaluated against the performance requirements of this section and the tests specified in § 173.465 or using any of the methods authorized by § 173.461(a), the packaging will prevent—
(1) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(2) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or calculated at the external surfaces for the condition before the test.
(k) Each packaging designed for liquids will—
(1) Be designed to provide for ullage to accommodate variations in temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics;
(2) Meet the conditions prescribed in paragraph (j) of this section when subjected to the tests specified in § 173.466 or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by § 173.461(a); and
(3) Either—
(i) Have sufficient suitable absorbent material to absorb twice the volume of the liquid contents. The absorbent material must be compatible with the package contents and suitably positioned to contact the liquid in the event of leakage; or
(ii) Have a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary outer containment components designed to assure retention of the liquid contents within the secondary outer component in the event that the primary inner component leaks.
(l) Each package designed for gases, other than tritium not exceeding 40 TBq (1000Ci) or noble gases not exceeding the A2 value appropriate for the noble gas, will be able to prevent loss or dispersal of contents when the package is subjected to the tests prescribed in § 173.466 or evaluated against these tests by any of the methods authorized by § 173.461(a).
§ 173.413
Requirements for Type B packages.
Except as provided in § 173.416, each Type B(U) or Type B(M) package must be designed and constructed to meet the applicable requirements specified in 10 CFR part 71.
§ 173.415
Authorized Type A packages.
The following packages are authorized for shipment if they do not contain quantities exceeding A1 or A2 as appropriate:
(a) DOT Specification 7A (§ 178.350 of this subchapter) Type A general packaging. Each offeror of a Specification 7A package must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and shall provide to DOT on request, complete documentation of tests and an engineering evaluation or comparative data showing that the construction methods, packaging design, and materials of construction comply with that specification. Use of Specification 7A packagings designed in accordance with the requirements of § 178.350 of this subchapter in effect on June 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 178 revised as of October 1, 1982), is not authorized after April 1, 1997.
(b) Any other Type A packaging that also meets the applicable standards for fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71 and is used in accordance with § 173.471.
(c) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to § 173.416.
(d) Any foreign-made packaging that meets the standards in IAEA “Safety Series No. 6” and bears the marking “Type A” and was used for the import of Class 7 (radioactive) materials. Such packagings may be subsequently used for domestic and export shipments of Class 7 (radioactive) materials provided the offeror obtains the applicable documentation of tests and engineering evaluations and maintains the documentation on file in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section. These packagings must conform with requirements of the country of origin (as indicated by the packaging marking) and the IAEA regulations applicable to Type A packagings.
§ 173.416
Authorized Type B packages.
Each of the following packages is authorized for shipment of quantities exceeding A1 or A2, as appropriate:
(a) Any Type B, Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging that meets the applicable requirements of 10 CFR part 71 and that has been approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission may be shipped pursuant to § 173.471.
(b) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging that meets the applicable requirements of the regulations of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) in its “Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials, Safety Series No. 6” and for which the foreign competent authority certificate has been revalidated by DOT pursuant to § 173.473. These packagings are authorized only for export and import shipments.
(c) DOT Specification 6M (§ 178.354 of this subchapter) metal packaging, only for solid or gaseous Class 7 (radioactive) materials that will not undergo pressure-generating decomposition at temperatures up to 121 °C (250 °F) and that do not generate more than 10 watts of radioactive decay heat.
(d) For contents in other than special form; DOT Specification 20WC (§ 178.362 of this subchapter), wooden protective jacket, when used with a single, snug-fitting inner DOT Specification 2R (§ 178.360 of this subchapter). For liquid contents, the inner packaging must conform to § 173.412(j) and (k).
(e) For contents in special form only; DOT Specification 20WC (§ 178.362 of this subchapter), wooden protective jacket, with a single snug-fitting inner Type A packaging that has a metal outer wall and conforms to § 178.350 of this subchapter. Radioactive decay heat may not exceed 100 watts.
(f) For contents in special form only; DOT Specification 21WC (§ 178.364 of this subchapter), wooden protective overpack, with a single inner DOT Specification 2R (§ 178.360 of this subchapter). Contents must be loaded within the inner packaging in such a manner as to prevent loose movement during transportation. The inner packaging must be securely positioned and centered within the overpack so that there will be no significant displacement of the inner packaging if the overpack containing it is subjected to the 9 meter (30 feet) drop test described in 10 CFR part 71.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.417
Authorized fissile materials packages.
(a) Except as provided in § 173.453, fissile materials containing not more than A1 or A2 as appropriate, must be packaged in one of the following packagings:
(1) DOT Specification 6L (§ 178.352 of this subchapter), metal packaging, for materials prescribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(2) DOT Specification 6M (§ 178.354 of this subchapter), metal packaging, for materials prescribed in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(3) Any packaging listed in § 173.415, limited to the Class 7 (radioactive) materials specified in 10 CFR part 71, subpart C.
(4) Any other Type A or Type B, Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging for fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials that also meets the applicable standards for fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71.
(5) Any other Type A or Type B, Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging that also meets the applicable requirements for fissile material packaging in Section V of the International Atomic Energy Agency “Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials, Safety Series No. 6,” and for which the foreign competent authority certificate has been revalidated by the U.S. Competent Authority, in accordance with § 173.473. These packages are authorized only for export and import shipments.
(6) A 55-gallon 1A2 steel drum, meeting the applicable packaging testing requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the packing group I performance level, subject to the following conditions:
(i) The quantity may not exceed 350 grams of uranium-235 in any non-pyrophoric form, enriched to any degree in the uranium-235 isotope;
(ii) Each drum must have a minimum 18 gauge body and bottom head and 16 gauge removable top head with one or more corrugations in the cover near the periphery;
(iii) Closure must conform to § 178.352 of this subchapter;
(iv) At least four equally spaced 12 millimeter (0.5 inch) diameter vent holes must be provided on the sides of the drum near the top, each covered with weatherproof tape; or equivalent device;
(v) Appropriate primary, inner containment of the contents and sufficient packaging material, such as plastic or metal jars or cans, must be provided such that Specification 7A (§ 178.350 of this subchapter) provisions are satisfied by the inner packaging;
(vi) Each inner container must be capable of venting if subjected to the thermal test described in 10 CFR part 71;
(vii) Liquid contents must be packaged in accordance with § 173.412 (j) and (k); and
(viii) The maximum weight of contents, including internal packaging, may not exceed 91 kilograms (200 pounds) with fissile material content limited as shown in table 2:
Table 2—Fissile Material Content and Transport Index for UN1A2 Package
Maximum quantity and minimum transport index | U-235 per package (grams) | Minimum transport index per package | Maximum No. of packages transported as a fissile material controlled shipment
350 | 1.8 | 72
300 | 1.0 | 129
250 | 0.5 | 256
200 | 0.3 | 500
150 | 0.1 | 500
100 | 0.1 | 500
50 | (^1) | (^2)
^1 Transport index is limited by the external radiation levels.
^2 Maximum number is limited by the total transport index.
(7) Any metal cylinder that meets the requirements of § 173.415 and § 178.350 of this subchapter for Specification 7A Type A packaging may be used for the transport of residual “heels” of enriched solid uranium hexafluoride without a protective overpack in accordance with table 3, as follows:
Table 3—Allowable Content of Uranium Hexafluoride (UF6) “Heels” in a Specification 7A Cylinder
Maximum cylinder diameter | Centimeters | Inches | Cylinder volume | Liters | Cubic feet | Maximum uranium-235 enrichment (weight percent) | Maximum “Heel” weight per cylinder | UF6 | kg | lb | Uranium-235 | kg | lb
12.7 | 5 | 8.8 | 0.311 | 100.0 | 0.045 | 0.1 | 0.031 | 0.07
20.3 | 8 | 39.0 | 1.359 | 12.5 | 0.227 | 0.5 | 0.019 | 0.04
30.5 | 12 | 68.0 | 2.410 | 5.0 | 0.454 | 1.0 | 0.015 | 0.03
76.0 | 30 | 725.0 | 25.64 | 5.0 | 11.3 | 25.0 | 0.383 | 0.84
122.0 | 48 | 3,084.0 | 1108.9 | 4.5 | 22.7 | 50.0 | 0.690 | 1.52
122.0 | 48 | 4,041.0 | 2142.7 | 4.5 | 22.7 | 50.0 | 0.690 | 1.52
^1 10 ton.
^2 14 ton.
(8) DOT Specification 20PF-1, 20PF-2, or 20PF-3 (§ 178.356 of this subchapter), or Specification 21PF-1A, 21PF-1B, or 21PF-2 (§ 178.358 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fitting inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of §§ 173.24, 173.410, 173.412, and 173.420 and the following:
(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance with DOE Report ORO-651 or ANSI N14.1.
(ii) Quantities of uranium hexafluoride are authorized as shown in table 6 of this section, with each package assigned a minimum transport index as also shown.
(b) Fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials with radioactive content exceeding A1 or A2 must be packaged in one of the following packagings:
(1) DOT Specification 6L (§ 178.352 of this subchapter), metal packaging. These packages may contain only uranium-235, plutonium-239, or plutonium-241, as metal, oxide, or compounds that do not decompose at temperatures up to 149 °C (300 °F). Radioactive decay heat output may not exceed 5 watts. Class 7 (radioactive) materials in normal form must be packaged in one or more tightly sealed metal or polyethylene bottles within a DOT Specification 2R (§ 178.360 of this subchapter) containment vessel. Authorized contents are limited in accordance with table 4, as follows:
Table 4—Authorized Contents in Kilograms (kg) and Conditions for Specification 6L Packages
Uranium-235 | H/X<=3^1 | 3 H/X<= 10 | Plutonium (Plutonium solutions are not authorized) | H/X<= 10 | 10 <= H/X <= 20 | Minimum fissile transport index | Maximum No. of packages transported as a fissile material control shipment
14 | ^2 3.6 | | | 1.3 | 80
| | 2.5 | 2.4 | 1.8 | 50
^1 H/X is the ratio of hydrogen to fissile atoms in their inner containment with all sources of hydrogen in the containment considered.
^2 Volume not to exceed 3.6 liters.
(2) DOT Specification 6M (§ 178.354 of this subchapter), metal packaging. These packages must contain only solid Class 7 (radioactive) materials that will not decompose at temperatures up to 121 °C (250 °F). Radioactive decay heat output may not exceed 10 watts. Class 7 (radioactive) materials in other than special form must be packaged in one or more tightly sealed metal cans or polyethylene bottles within a DOT Specification 2R (§ 178.360 of this subchapter) containment vessel.
(i) For fissile material with a criticality TI equal to 0.0, packages are limited to the following amounts of fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials: 1.6 kilograms of uranium-235; 0.9 kilograms of plutonium (except that due to the 10-watt thermal decay heat limitation, the limit for plutonium-238 is 0.02 kilograms); and 0.5 kilograms of uranium-233. The maximum ratio of hydrogen to fissile material may not exceed three, including all of the sources of hydrogen within the DOT Specification 2R containment vessel.
(ii) Maximum quantities of fissile material and other restrictions for materials with a criticality TI of greater than 0.0 are given in table 5. The minimum transport index to be assigned per package and, for fissile material, controlled shipments, the allowable number of similar packages per conveyance and per transport vehicle are shown in table 5. Where a maximum ratio of hydrogen to fissile material is specified in table 5, only the hydrogen interspersed with the fissile material must be considered. For a uranium-233 shipment, the maximum inside diameter of the inner containment vessel may not exceed 12.1 centimeters (4.75 inches). Where necessary, a tight-fitting steel insert must be used to reduce a larger diameter inner containment vessel specified in § 178.354 of this subchapter to the 12.1 centimeter (4.75 inch) limit. Table 5 is as follows:
Table 5—Authorized Contents for Specification 6M Packages^1
Uranium-233^5 | Metal or alloy | H/X=0^8 | Compounds | H/X=0 | H/X<=3 | Uranium-235^4 , ^7 | Metal or alloy | H/X=0 | Compounds | H/X=0 | H/X<=3 | Plutonium^2 , ^3 , ^4 | Metal or alloy | H/X=0 | Compounds | H/X=0 | H/X<=3 | Minimum transport index | Maximum no. pkgs. transported as a fissile material control shipment
0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 1.6 | 1.6 | 1.6 | ^90.9 | ^90.9 | ^90.9 | 0 | N/A
3.6 | 4.4 | 2.9 | 7.2 | 7.6 | 5.3 | 3.1 | 4.1 | 3.4 | 0.1 | 1,250
^64.2 | 5.2 | 3.5 | 8.7 | 9.6 | 6.4 | 3.4 | 4.5 | 4.1 | 0.2 | 625
^65.2 | 6.8 | 4.5 | 11.2 | 13.9 | 8.3 | 4.2 | | 4.5 | 0.5 | 250
| | | 13.5 | 16.0 | 10.1 | 4.5 | | | 1.0 | 125
| | | | 26.0 | 16.1 | | | | 5.0 | 25
| | | | 32.0 | 19.5 | | | | 10.0 | 12
^1 Quantity in kilograms.
^2 Minimum percentage of plutonium-240 is 5 weight percent.
^3 4.5 kilogram limitation of plutonium due to watt decay heat limitation.
^4 For a mixture of uranium-235 and plutonium an equal amount of uranium-235 may be substituted for any portion of the plutonium authorized.
^5 Maximum inside diameter of specification 2R containment vessel not to exceed 12.1 centimeters (4.75 inches) (see paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section).
^6 Granulated or powdered metal with any particle less than 6.4 millimeters (0.25 inch) in the smallest dimension is not authorized.
7 Except for material with a criticality TI of 0.0, the maximum permitted uranium-235 enrichment is 93.5 percent.
^8 H/X is the ratio of hydrogen to fissile atoms in the inner containment.
^9 For Pu-238, the limit is 0.02 kg because of the 10 watt thermal decay heat limitation.
(3) Type B, or Type B(U), or B(M) packaging that meets the standards for packaging of fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71, and is approved by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission and used in accordance with § 173.471.
(4) Type B, B(U), or B(M) packaging that meets the applicable requirements for fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials in Section V of the IAEA “Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials, Safety Series No. 6” and for which the foreign competent authority certificate has been revalidated by the U.S. Competent Authority in accordance with § 173.473. These packagings are authorized only for import and export shipments.
(5) DOT Specifications 20PF-1, 20PF-2, or 20PF-3 (§ 178.356 of this subchapter), or DOT Specifications 21PF-1A or 21PF-1B (§ 178.358 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fitting inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of §§ 173.24, 173.410, and 173.412, and the following:
(i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance with DOE Report ORO-651 or ANSI N14.1; and
(ii) Quantities of uranium hexa-fluoride are authorized as shown in table 6, with each package assigned a minimum transport index as also shown:
Table 6—Authorized Quantities of Uranium Hexafluoride
Protective overpack specification number | Maximum inner cylinder diameter | Centimeters | Inches | Maximum weight of UF6 contents | Kilograms | Pounds | Maximum U-235 enrichment (weight/ percent) | Minimum transport index
20PF-1 | 12.7 | 5 | 25 | 55 | 100.0 | 0.1
20PF-2 | 20.3 | 8 | 116 | 255 | 12.5 | 0.4
20PF-3 | 30.5 | 12 | 209 | 460 | 5.0 | 1.1
21PF-1A 1 or 21PF-1B 1 | 2 76.0 | 2 30 | 2,250 | 4,950 | 5.0 | 5.0
21PF-1A 1 or 21PF-1B 1 | 376.0 | 330 | 2,282 | 5,020 | 5.0 | 5.0
21PF-2 1 | 2 76.0 | 2 30 | 2,250 | 4,950 | 5.0 | 5.0
21PF-2 1 | 3 76.0 | 3 30 | 2,282 | 5,020 | 5.0 | 5.0
^1 For 76 cm (30 in) cylinders, the maximum H/U atomic ratio is 0.088.
^2 Model 30A inner cylinder (reference ORO-651).
^3 Model 30B inner cylinder (reference ORO-651).
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.418
Authorized packages—pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials, as referenced in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter, in quantities not exceeding A2 per package must be transported in DOT Specification 7A packagings constructed of materials that will not react with, nor be decomposed by, the contents. Contents of the package must be—
(a) In solid form and must not be fissile unless excepted by § 173.453;
(b) Contained in sealed and corrosion resistant receptacles with positive closures (friction or slip-fit covers or stoppers are not authorized);
(c) Free of water and contaminants that would increase the reactivity of the material; and
(d) Inerted to prevent self-ignition during transport by either—
(1) Mixing with large volumes of inerting materials, such as graphite, dry sand, or other suitable inerting material, or blended into a matrix of hardened concrete; or
(2) Filling the innermost receptacle with an appropriate inert gas or liquid.
§ 173.419
Authorized packages—oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) An oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) material, as referenced in the § 172.101 table of this subchapter, is authorized in quantities not exceeding an A2 per package, in a DOT Specification 7A package provided that—
(1) The contents are:
(i) Not fissile;
(ii) Packed in inside packagings of glass, metal or compatible plastic; and
(iii) Cushioned with a material that will not react with the contents; and
(2) The outside packaging is made of wood, metal, or plastic.
(b) The package must be capable of meeting the applicable test requirements of § 173.465 without leakage of contents.
(c) For shipment by air, the maximum quantity in any package may not exceed 11.3 kilograms (25 pounds).
§ 173.420
Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile excepted and non-fissile).
(a) In addition to any other applicable requirements of this subchapter, uranium hexafluoride, fissile, fissile excepted or non-fissile, must be offered for transportation as follows:
(1) Before initial filling and during periodic inspection and test, packagings must be cleaned in accordance with American National Standard N14.1.
(2) Packagings must be designed, fabricated, inspected, tested and marked in accordance with—
(i) American National Standard N14.1 (1990, 1987, 1982, 1971) in effect at the time the packaging was manufactured;
(ii) Specifications for Class DOT-106A multi-unit tank car tanks (§§ 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter); or
(iii) Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Code, provided the packaging—
(A) Was manufactured on or before June 30, 1987;
(B) Conforms to the edition of the ASME Code in effect at the time the packaging was manufactured;
(C) Is used within its original design limitations; and
(D) Has shell and head thicknesses that have not decreased below the minimum value specified in the following table:
Packaging model | Minimum thickness; millimeters (inches)
1S, 2S | 1.58 (0.062)
5A, 5B, 8A | 3.17 (0.125)
12A, 12B | 4.76 (0.187)
30B | 7.93 (0.312)
48A, F, X, and Y | 12.70 (0.500)
48T, O, OM, OM Allied, HX, H, AND G | 6.35 (0.250)
(3) Uranium hexafluoride must be in solid form.
(4) The volume of solid uranium hexafluoride, except solid depleted uranium hexafluoride, at 20 °C (68 °F) may not exceed 61% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging. The volume of solid depleted uranium hexafluoride at 20 °C (68 °F) may not exceed 62% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging.
(5) The pressure in the package at 20 °C (68 °F) must be less than 101.3 kPa (14.8 psia).
(b) Packagings for uranium hexafluoride must be periodically inspected, tested, marked and otherwise conform with the American National Standard N14.1-1990.
(c) Each repair to a packaging for uranium hexafluoride must be performed in accordance with American National Standard N14.1-1990.
§ 173.421
Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) A Class 7 (radioactive) material whose activity per package does not exceed the limits specified in § 173.425 and its packaging are excepted from the specification packaging, marking, labeling and, if not a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, the shipping paper and certification requirements of this subchapter and requirements of this subpart if:
(1) Each package meets the general design requirements of § 173.410;
(2) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of the package does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/ hour);
(3) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified in § 173.443(a);
(4) The outside of the inner packaging or, if there is no inner packaging, the outside of the packaging itself bears the marking “Radioactive”;
(5) Except as provided in § 173.426, the package does not contain more than 15 grams of uranium-235; and
(6) The material is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in accordance with § 173.422.
(b) A limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is a hazardous substance or a hazardous waste, is not subject to the provisions in § 172.203(d) or § 172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter.
§ 173.422
Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) Except for materials subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, excepted packages prepared for shipment under the provisions of § 173.421, § 173.424, § 173.426, or § 173.428 must be certified as being acceptable for transportation by having a notice enclosed in or on the package, included with the packing list, or otherwise forwarded with the package. This notice must include the name of the consignor or consignee and one of the following statements, as appropriate:
(1) “This package conforms to the conditions and limitations specified in 49 CFR 173.421 for radioactive material, excepted package-limited quantity of material, UN2910”;
(2) “This package conforms to the conditions and limitations specified in 49 CFR 173.424 for radioactive material, excepted package-instruments or articles, UN2910”;
(3) “This package conforms to the conditions and limitations specified in 49 CFR 173.426 for radioactive material, excepted package-articles manufactured from natural or depleted uranium, or natural thorium, UN2910”; or
(4) “This package conforms to the conditions and limitations specified in 49 CFR 173.428 for radioactive material, excepted package-empty package, UN2910.”
(b) An excepted package of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is classed as Class 7 and is prepared for shipment under the provisions of § 173.421, § 173.423, § 173.424, § 173.426, or § 173.428 is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter, except for—
(1) Sections 171.15, 171.16, 174.750 and 176.710 of this subchapter, pertaining to the reporting of incidents and decontamination, when transported by a mode other than air;
(2) Sections 171.15, 171.16, and 175.700(b) of this subchapter pertaining to the reporting of incidents and decontamination when transported by aircraft; and
(3) The training requirements of subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter and, for materials that meet the definition of a hazardous substance or a hazardous waste, the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.423
Requirements for multiple hazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) Except as provided in § 173.4, when a limited quantity radioactive material meets the definition of another hazard class or division, it must be—
(1) Classed for the additional hazard;
(2) Packaged to conform with the requirements specified in § 173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or § 173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate; and
(3) Offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements applicable to the hazard for which it is classed.
(b) A limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) material which is classed other than Class 7 in accordance with this subchapter is excepted from the requirements of §§ 173.422(a), 172.203(d), and 172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter if the entry “Limited quantity radioactive material” appears on the shipping paper in association with the basic description.
§ 173.424
Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles.
A radioactive instrument or article and its packaging is excepted from the specification packaging, shipping paper and certification, marking and labeling requirements of this subchapter and requirements of this subpart, if:
(a) Each package meets the general design requirements of § 173.410;
(b) The activity of the instrument or article does not exceed the relevant limit listed in table 7 in § 173.425;
(c) The total activity per package does not exceed the relevant limit listed in table 7 in § 173.425;
(d) The radiation level at 10 cm (4 in) from any point on the external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 0.1 mSv/hour (10 mrem/hour);
(e) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of a package bearing the article or instrument does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/hour), or, for exclusive use domestic shipments, 0.02 mSv (2 mrem/hour);
(f) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified in § 173.443(a);
(g) Except as provided in § 173.426, the package does not contain more than 15 grams of uranium-235; and
(h) The package is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in § 173.422.
§ 173.425
Table of activity limits—excepted quantities and articles.
The limits applicable to instruments, articles, and limited quantities subject to exceptions under §§ 173.421 and 173.424 are set forth in table 7 as follows:
Table 7—Activity Limits for Limited Quantities, Instruments, and Articles
Nature of contents | Instruments and articles | Limits for each instrument or article ^1 | Package limits ^1 | Limited quantity package limits ^1
Solids:
Special form | 10−2 A1 | A1 | 10−3 A1
Normal form | 10−2 A2 | A2 | 10−3 A2
Liquids:
Tritiated water:
<0.0037 TBq/liter (0.1 Ci/L) | | | 37 TBq (1,000 Ci)
0.0037 TBq to 0.037 TBq/L (0.1 Ci to 1.0 Ci/L) | | | 3.7 TBq (100 Ci)
>0.037 TBq/L (1.0 Ci/L) | | | 0.037 TBq (1.0 Ci)
Other Liquids | 10−3 A2 | 10−1 A2 | 10−4 A2
Gases:
Tritium ^2 | 2 × 10−2 A2 | 2 × 10−1 A2 | 2 × 10−2 A2
Special form | 10−3 A1 | 10−2 A1 | 10−3 A1
Other form | 10−3 A2 | 10−2 A2 | 10−3 A2
^1 For mixtures of radionuclides see § 173.433(d).
^2 These values also apply to tritium in activated luminous paint and tritium adsorbed on solid carriers.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.426
Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium.
A manufactured article in which the sole Class 7 (radioactive) material content is natural or unirradiated depleted uranium or natural thorium and its packaging is excepted from the specification packaging, shipping paper and certification, marking, and labeling requirements of this subchapter and requirements of this subpart if:
(a) Each package meets the general design requirements of § 173.410;
(b) The outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an inactive sheath made of metal or other durable protective material;
(c) The conditions specified in § 173.421(a) (2), (3) and (4) are met; and
(d) The article is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in § 173.422.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.427
Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive) materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO).
(a) In addition to other applicable requirements specified in this subchapter, low specific activity (LSA) materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO), unless excepted by paragraph (d) of this section, must be packaged in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section and must be transported in accordance with the following conditions:
(1) The external dose rate must not exceed an external radiation level of 10 mSv/h (1 rem/h) at 3 meters from the unshielded material;
(2) The quantity of LSA and SCO material in any single conveyance must not exceed the limits specified in table 9;
(3) LSA material and SCO that are or contain fissile material must meet the applicable requirements of §§ 173.453, 173.457, 173.459 and 173.467;
(4) Packages must meet the contamination control limits specified in § 173.443;
(5) External radiation levels must comply with § 173.441; and
(6) For LSA material and SCO required by this section to be consigned as exclusive use:
(i) Shipments must be loaded by the consignor and unloaded by the consignee from the conveyance or freight container in which originally loaded;
(ii) There must be no loose Class 7 (radioactive) material in the conveyance, however, when the conveyance is the packaging there must be no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material from the conveyance;
(iii) Packages must be braced so as to prevent shifting of lading under conditions normally incident to transportation;
(iv) Specific instructions for maintenance of exclusive use shipment controls must be provided by the offeror to the carrier. Such instructions must be included with the shipping paper information;
(v) Except for shipments of unconcentrated uranium or thorium ores, the transport vehicle must be placarded in accordance with subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter;
(vi) For domestic transportation only, packages are excepted from the marking and labeling requirements of this subchapter. However, the exterior of each nonbulk package must be stenciled or otherwise marked “Radioactive—LSA” or “Radioactive—SCO”, as appropriate, and nonbulk packages that contain a hazardous substance must also be stenciled or otherwise marked with the letters “RQ” in association with the above description; and
(vii) Except when transported in an industrial package in accordance with table 8, transportation by aircraft is prohibited.
(b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, LSA material and SCO must be packaged as follows:
(1) In an industrial package (IP-1, IP-2 or IP-3; § 173.411), subject to the limitations of table 8;
(2) For domestic transportation only, in a DOT Specification 7A (§ 178.350 of this subchapter) Type A package. The requirements of § 173.412 (a), (b), (c) and (k) do not apply;
(3) For domestic transportation only, in a strong, tight package that prevents leakage of the radioactive content under normal conditions of transport. In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, the following requirements must be met:
(i) The shipment must be exclusive use;
(ii) The quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material in each packaging may not exceed an A2 quantity;
(4) For domestic transportation only, in a packaging that complies with the provisions of 10 CFR 71.52, and is transported in exclusive use; or
(5) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to § 173.416.
(c) LSA-I and SCO-I (see § 173.403), unless packaged in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, must be packaged in bulk packagings in accordance with this paragraph. The shipment must be, in addition to complying with the applicable requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, exclusive use:
(1) Solids. Packages must be strong tight packagings, meeting the requirements of subpart B of this part. The requirements of § 173.410 do not apply.
(2) Liquids. Liquids must be transported in the following packagings:
(i) Specification 103CW, 111A60W7 (§§ 179.200, 179.201, 179.202 of this subchapter) tank cars. Bottom openings in tanks are prohibited; or
(ii) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 331 or DOT 412 (§ 178.348 or § 178.337 of this subchapter) cargo tank motor vehicles. Bottom outlets are not authorized. Trailer-on-flat-car service is not authorized.
(d) Except for transportation by aircraft, LSA material and SCO that conform to the provisions specified in 10 CFR 20.2005 are excepted from all requirements of this subchapter pertaining to Class 7 (radioactive) materials when offered for transportation for disposal or recovery. A material which meets the definition of another hazard class is subject to the provisions of this subchapter relating to that hazard class.
(e) LSA and SCO that exceed the packaging limits in this section must be packaged in accordance with 10 CFR part 71.
(f) Tables 8 and 9 are as follows:
Table 8—Industrial Package Integrity Requirements for LSA Material and SCO
Contents | Industrial packaging type | Exclusive use shipment | Nonexclusive use shipment
LSA-I:
Solid | IP-1 | IP-1
Liquid | IP-1 | IP-2
LSA-II:
Solid | IP-2 | IP-2
Liquid and gas | IP-2 | IP-3
LSA-III | IP-2 | IP-3
SCO-I | IP-1 | IP-1
SCO-II | IP-2 | IP-2
Table 9—Conveyance Activity Limits for LSA Material and SCO
Nature of material | Activity limit for conveyances
LSA-I | No limit.
LSA-II and LSA-III; noncombustible solids | No limit.
LSA-II and LSA-III; Combustible solids and all liquids and gases | 100 A2
SCO | 100 A2
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.428
Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging.
A packaging which previously contained Class 7 (radioactive) materials and has been emptied of contents as far as practical, is excepted from the shipping paper and certification, marking and labeling requirements of this subchapter, and from requirements of this chapter, provided that—
(a) The packaging meets the requirements of § 173.421(a) (2), (3), and (5) of this subpart;
(b) The packaging is in unimpaired condition and is securely closed so that there will be no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material under conditions normally incident to transportation;
(c) Internal contamination does not exceed 100 times the limits in § 173.443(a);
(d) Any labels previously applied in conformance with subpart E of part 172 of this subchapter are removed, obliterated, or covered and the “Empty” label prescribed in § 172.450 of this subchapter is affixed to the packaging; and
(e) The packaging is prepared for shipment as specified in § 173.422.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.431
Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages.
(a) Except for LSA material and SCO, a Type A package may not contain a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) materials greater than A1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material or A2 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material as listed in § 173.435, or, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials not listed in § 173.435, as determined in accordance with § 173.433.
(b) The limits on activity contained in a Type B, Type B(U), or Type B(M) package are those prescribed in §§ 173.416 and 173.417, or in the applicable approval certificate under §§ 173.471, 173.472 or 173.473.
§ 173.433
Requirements for determining A1 and A2 values for radionuclides and for the listing of radionuclides on shipping papers and labels.
(a) Values of A1 and A2 for individual radionuclides that are the basis for many activity limits elsewhere in this subchapter are given in the table in § 173.435.
(b) For individual radionuclides whose identities are known, but which are not listed in the table in § 173.435, the determination of the values of A1 and A2 requires approval from the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety except that the values of A1 and A2 in table 10 may be used without obtaining approval from Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
(c) In calculating A1 and A2 values for a radionuclide not listed in the table in § 173.435, a single radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are present in their naturally-occurring proportions, and in which no daughter nuclide has a half life either longer than 10 days or longer than that of the parent nuclide, will be considered as a single radionuclide, and the activity to be taken into account and the A1 or A2 value to be applied will be those corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. Otherwise, the parent and daughter nuclides will be considered as a mixture of different nuclides.
(d) Mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective activities are known, must conform to the following conditions:
(1) For special form Class 7 (radioactive) material:
Where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i and A 1 (i) is the A1 value for radionuclide i;
or
(2) For other forms of Class 7 (radioactive) material, either—
Where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i and A2(i) is the A2 value for radionuclide i;
or
where f(i) is the fraction of activity of nuclide i in the mixture and A2(i) is the appropriate A2 value for nuclide i.
(e) When the identity of each nuclide is known but the individual activities of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides may be grouped and the lowest A1 or A2 value, as appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying the formulas in paragraph (d) of this section. Groups may be based on the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these are known, using the lowest A1 or A2 values for the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.
(f) Shipping papers and labeling. (1) For mixtures of radionuclides, the radionuclides (n) that must be shown on shipping papers and labels in accordance with §§ 172.203 and 172.403 of this subchapter, respectively, must be determined on the basis of the following formula:
Where n + m represents all the radionuclides in the mixture, m are the radionuclides that do not need to be considered, ai is the activity of radionuclide i in the mixture, and Ai is the A1 or A2 value, as appropriate for radionuclide i.
(g) Table 10 is as follows:
Table 10—General Values for A1 and A2
Contents | A1 | (TBq) | (Ci) | A2 | (TBq) | (Ci)
Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be present | 0.2 | 5 | 0.02 | 0.5
Alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present or no relevant data are available | 0.10 | 2.70 | 2×10−5 | 5.41×10−4
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.434
Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.
The table of activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium are as follows:
Thorium and uranium enrichment1(Wt% 235 U present) | Specific activity | TBq/gram | Grams/Tbq | Ci/gram | Grams/Ci
0.45 (depleted) | 1.9×10−8 | 5.4×107 | 5.0×10−7 | 2.0×106
0.72 (natural) | 2.6×10−8 | 3.8×107 | 7.1×10−7 | 1.4×106
1.0 | 2.8×10−8 | 3.6×107 | 7.6×10−7 | 1.3×106
1.5 | 3.7×10−8 | 2.7×107 | 1.0×10−6 | 1.0×106
5.0 | 1.0×10−7 | 1.0×107 | 2.7×10−6 | 3.7×105
10.0 | 1.8×10−7 | 5.6×106 | 4.8×10−6 | 2.1×105
20.0 | 3.7×10−7 | 2.7×106 | 1.0×10−5 | 1.0×105
35.0 | 7.4×10−7 | 1.4×106 | 2.0×10−5 | 5.0×104
50.0 | 9.3×10−7 | 1.1×106 | 2.5×10−5 | 4.0×104
90.0 | 2.1×10−6 | 4.7×105 | 5.8×10−5 | 1.7×104
93.0 | 2.6×10−6 | 3.9×105 | 7.0×10−5 | 1.4×104
95.0 | 3.4×10−6 | 3.0×105 | 9.1×10−5 | 1.1×104
Natural thorium | 8.1×10−9 | 1.2×108 | 2.2×10−7 | 4.6×106
^1 The figures for uranium include representative values for the activity of uranium-234 which is concentrated during the enrichment process. The activity for thorium includes the equilibrium concentration of thorium-228.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.435
Table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides.
The table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides is as follows:
Symbol of radionuclide | Element and atomic number | A1 (TBq) | A1 (Ci) | A2 (TBq) | A2 (Ci) | Specific activity | (TBq/g) | (Ci/g)
Ac-225 | Actinium(89) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 1×10−2 | 0.270 | 2.1×103 | 5.8×104
Ac-227 | | 40 | 1080 | 2×10−5 | 5.41×10−4 | 2.7 | 7.2×101
Ac-228 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 8.4×104 | 2.2×106
Ag-105 | Silver(47) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.1×103 | 3.0×104
Ag-108m | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 9.7×10−1 | 2.6×101
Ag-110m | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 1.8×102 | 4.7×103
Ag-111 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 5.8×103 | 1.6×105
Al-26 | Aluminum(13) | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 7.0×10−4 | 1.9×10−2
Am-241 | Americium(95) | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 1.3×101 | 3.4
| Am-242m | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.4.1×10−3 | 3.6×10−1 | 1.0×101
Am-243 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 7.4×10−3 | 2.0×10−1
Ar-37 | Argon(18) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.7×103 | 9.9×104
Ar-39 | | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 1.3 | 3.4×101
Ar-41 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 1.5×106 | 4.2×107
Ar-42 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 9.6 | 2.6×102
As-72 | Arsenic(33) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 6.2×104 | 1.7×106
As-73 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 8.2×102 | 2.2×104
As-74 | | 1 | 27.0 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.7×103 | 9.9×104
As-76 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 5.8×104 | 1.6×106
As-77 | | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.9×104 | 1.0×106
At-211 | Astatine(85) | 30 | 811 | 2 | 54.1 | 7.6×104 | 2.1×106
Au-193 | Gold(79) | 6 | 162 | 6 | 162 | 3.4×104 | 9.2×105
Au-194 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 1.5×104 | 4.1×105
Au-195 | | 10 | 270 | 10 | 270 | 1.4×102 | 3.7×103
Au-196 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 4.0×103 | 1.1×105
Au-198 | | 3 | 81.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 9.0×103 | 2.4×105
Au-199 | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 7.7×103 | 2.1×105
Ba-131 | Barium(56) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 3.1×103 | 8.4×104
Ba-133m | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.2×104 | 6.1×105
Ba-133 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 9.4 | 2.6×102
Ba-140 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 2.7×103 | 7.3×104
Be-7 | Beryllium(4) | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 1.3×104 | 3.5×105
Be-10 | | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 8.3×10−4 | 2.2×10−2
Bi-205 | Bismuth(83) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 1.5×103 | 4.2×104
Bi-206 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 3.8×103 | 1.0×105
Bi-207 | | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 1.9 | 5.2×101
Bi-210m | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 3×10−2 | 0.811 | 2.1×10−5 | 5.7×10−4
Bi-210 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.6×103 | 1.2×105
Bi-212 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 5.4×105 | 1.5×107
Bk-247 | Berkelium(97) | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 3.8×10−2 | 1.0
Bk-249 | | 40 | 1080 | 8×10−2 | 2.16 | 6.1×101 | 1.6×103
Br-76 | Bromine(35) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 9.4×104 | 2.5×106
Br-77 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 2.6×104 | 7.1×105
Br-82 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 4.0×104 | 1.1×106
C-11 | Carbon(6) | 1 | 27 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.1×107 | 8.4×108
C-14 | | 40 | 1080 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.6×10−1 | 4.5
Ca-41 | Calcium(20) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.1×10−3 | 8.5×10−2
Ca-45 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.6×102 | 1.8×104
Ca-47 | | 0.9 | 24.3 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.3×104 | 6.1×105
Cd-109 | Cadmium(48) | 40 | 1080 | 1 | 27.0 | 9.6×101 | 2.6×103
Cd-113m | | 20 | 541 | 9×10−2 | 2.43 | 8.3×104 | 2.2×102
Cd-115m | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 9.4×102 | 2.5×104
Cd-115 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.9×104 | 5.1×105
Ce-139 | Cerium(58) | 6 | 162 | 6 | 162 | 2.5×1026 | .8×103
Ce-141 | | 10 | 270 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.1×103 | 2.8×104
Ce-143 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.5×104 | 6.6×105
Ce-144 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 1.2×102 | 3.2×103
Cf-248 | Californium (98) | 30 | 811 | 3×10−3 | 8.11×10−2 | 5.8×101 | 1.6×103
Cf-249 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 1.5×10−1 | 4.1
Cf-250 | | 5 | 135 | 5×10−4 | 1.35×10−2 | 4.0 | 1.1×102
Cf-251 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 5.9×10−2 | 1.6
Cf-252 | | 0.1 | 2.70 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | 2.0×101 | 5.4×102
Cf-253 | | 40 | 1080 | 6×10−2 | 1.62 | 1.1×103 | 2.9×104
Cf-254 | | 3×10−3 | 8.11×10−2 | 6×10−4 | 1.62×10−2 | 3.1×102 | 8.5×103
Cl-36 | Chlorine (17) | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.2×10−3 | 3.3×10−2
Cl-38 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4.9×106 | 1.3×108
Cm-240 | Curium(96) | 40 | 1080 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 7.5×102 | 2.0×104
Cm-241 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.1×102 | 1.7×104
Cm-242 | | 40 | 1080 | 1×10−2 | 0.270 | 1.2×102 | 3.3×103
Cm-243 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3×10−4 | 8.11×10−3 | 1.9 | 5.2×101
Cm-244 | | 4 | 108 | 4×10−4 | 1.08×10−2 | 3.0 | 8.1×105
Cm-245 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 6.4×10−3 | 1.7×10−1
Cm-246 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 1.1×10−2 | 3.1×10−1
Cm-247 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 3.4×10−6 | 9.3×10−5
Cm-248 | | 4×10−2 | 1.08 | 5×10−5 | 1.35×10−3 | 1.6×10−4 | 4.2×10−3
Co-55 | Cobalt(27) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.1×105 | 3.1×106
Co-56 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.1×103 | 3.0×104
Co-57 | | 8 | 216 | 8 | 216 | 3.1×102 | 8.4×103
Co-58m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 2.2×105 | 5.9×106
Co-58 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 1.2×103 | 3.2×104
Co-60 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 4.2×101 | 1.1×103
| Cr-51 | Chromium(24) | 30 | 811 | 30 | 811 | 3.4×103 | 9.2×104
Cs-129 | Cesium(55) | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 2.8×104 | 7.6×105
Cs-131 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.8×103 | 1.0×105
Cs-132 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 5.7×103 | 1.5×105
Cs-134m | | 40 | 1080 | 9 | 243 | 3.0×105 | 8.0×106
Cs-134 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.8×101 | 1.3×103
Cs-135 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 4.3×10−5 | 1.2×10−3
Cs-136 | | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.7×103 | 7.3×104
Cs-137 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.2 | 8.7×101
Cu-64 | Copper(29) | 5 | 135 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 1.4×105 | 3.9×106
Cu-67 | | 9 | 243 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.8×104 | 7.6×105
Dy-159 | Dysprosium(66) | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 2.1×102 | 5.7×103
Dy-165 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.0×105 | 8.2×106
Dy-166 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 8.6×103 | 2.3×105
Er-169 | Erbium(68) | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.1×103 | 8.3×104
Er-171 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 9.0×104 | 2.4×106
Es-253 | Einsteinium(99)a | 200 | 5400 | 2.1×10−2 | 5.4×100−1 | |
Es-254 | | 30 | 811 | 3×10−3 | 8.11×10−2 | |
Es-254m | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.4 | 10.8 | |
Es-255 | | | | | | |
Eu-147 | Europium(63) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.4×103 | 3.7×104
Eu-148 | | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 6.0×102 | 1.6×104
Eu-149 | | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 3.5×102 | 9.4×103
Eu-150 | | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 6.1×104 | 1.6×106
Eu-152m | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 8.2×104 | 2.2×106
Eu-152 | | 0.9 | 24.3 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.5 | 1.8×102
Eu-154 | | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 9.8 | 2.6×102
Eu-155 | | 20 | 541 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.8×101 | 4.9×102
Eu-156 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.0×103 | 5.5×104
F-18 | Fluorine(9) | 1 | 27.0 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.5×106 | 9.5×107
Fe-52 | Iron(26) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 2.7×105 | 7.3×106
Fe-55 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 8.8×101 | 2.4×103
Fe-59 | | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.8 | 21.6 | 1.8×103 | 5.0×104
Fe-60 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 7.4×10−4 | 2.0×10−2
Fm-255 | Fermium(100)b | 40 | 1080 | 0.8 | 21.6 | |
Fm-257 | | 10 | 270 | 8×10−3 | 21.6×10−1 | |
Ga-67 | Gallium(31) | 6 | 162 | 6 | 162 | 2.2×104 | 6.0×105
Ga-68 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.5×106 | 4.1×107
Ga-72 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 1.1×105 | 3.1×106
Gd-146 | Gadolinium(64) | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 6.9×102 | 1.9×104
Gd-148 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3×10−4 | 8.11×10−3 | 1.2 | 3.2×101
Gd-153 | | 10 | 270 | 5 | 135 | 1.3×102 | 3.5×103
Gd-159 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.9×104 | 1.1×106
Ge-68 | Germanium(32) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 2.6×102 | 7.1×103
Ge-71 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 5.8×103 | 1.6×105
Ge-77 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.3×105 | 3.6×106
H-3 | Hydrogen(1) SeeT-Tritium | | | | | |
Hf-172 | Hafnium(72) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 4.1×101 | 1.1×103
Hf-175 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 3.9×102 | 1.1×104
Hf-181 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.3×102 | 1.7×104
Hf-182 | | 4 | 108 | 3×10−2 | 0.811 | 8.1×10−6 | 2.2×10−4
Hg-194 | Mercury(80) | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 1.3×10−1 | 3.5
Hg-195m | | 5 | 135 | 5 | 135 | 1.5×104 | 4.0×105
Hg-197m | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.5×104 | 6.7×105
Hg-197 | | 10 | 270 | 10 | 270 | 9.2×103 | 2.5×105
Hg-203 | | 4 | 108 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 5.1×102 | 1.4×104
Ho-163 | Holmium(67) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 2.7 | 7.6×101
Ho-166m | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 6.6×10−2 | 1.8
Ho-166 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 2.6×104 | 7.0×105
I-123 | Iodine(53) | 6 | 162 | 6 | 162 | 7.1×104 | 1.9×106
I-124 | | 0.9 | 24.3 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 9.3×103 | 2.5×105
I-125 | | 20 | 541 | 2 | 54.1 | 6.4×102 | 1.7×104
I-126 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.9×103 | 8.0×104
I-129 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 6.5×10−6 | 1.8×10−4
I-131 | | 3 | 81.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.6×103 | 1.2×105
I-132 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 3.8×105 | 1.0×107
I-133 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.2×104 | 1.1×106
I-134 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 9.9×105 | 2.7×107
I-135 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.3×105 | 3.5×106
In-111 | Indium(49) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.5×104 | 4.2×105
In-113m | | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 6.2×105 | 1.7×107
| In-114m | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 8.6×102 | 2.3×104
In-115m | | 6 | 162 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.2×105 | 6.1×106
Ir-189 | Iridium(77) | 10 | 270 | 10 | 270 | 1.9×103 | 5.2×104
Ir-190 | | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 2.3×103 | 6.2×104
Ir-192 | | 1 | 27.0 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.4×102 | 9.2×103
Ir-193m | | 10 | 270 | 10 | 270 | 2.4×103 | 6.4×104
Ir-194 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.1×104 | 8.4×105
K-40 | Potassium(19) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 2.4×10−7 | 6.4×10−6
K-42 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 2.2×105 | 6.0×106
K-43 | | 1.0 | 27.0 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.2×105 | 3.3×106
Kr-81 | Krypton(36) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 7.8×10−4 | 2.1×10−2
Kr-85m | | 6 | 162 | 6 | 162 | 3.0×105 | 8.2×106
Kr-85 | | 20 | 541 | 10 | 270 | 1.5×101 | 3.9×102
Kr-87 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 1.0×106 | 2.8×107
La-137 | Lanthanum(57) | 40 | 1080 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.6×10−3 | 4.4×10−2
La-140 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 2.1×104 | 5.6×105
Lu-172 | Lutetium(71) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.2×103 | 1.1×105
Lu-173 | | 8 | 216 | 8 | 216 | 5.6×101 | 1.5×103
Lu-174m | | 20 | 541 | 8 | 216 | 2.0×102 | 5.3×103
Lu-74 | | 8 | 216 | 4 | 108 | 2.3×101 | 6.2×102
Lu-177 | | 30 | 811 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 4.1×103 | 1.1×105
MFP | | (see § 173.433) | | (see § 173.433) | | |
Mg-28 | Magnesium(12) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 2.0×105 | 5.4×106
Mn-52 | Manganese(25) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.6×104 | 4.4×105
Mn-53 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 6.8×10−5 | 1.8×10−3
Mn-54 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 2.9×102 | 7.7×103
Mn-56 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 8.0×105 | 2.2×107
Mo-93 | Molybdenum(42) | 40 | 1080 | 7 | 189 | 4.1×10−2 | 1.1
Mo-99 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5c | 1.8×104 | 4.8×105
N-13 | Nitrogen(7) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 5.4×107 | 1.5×109
Na-22 | Sodium(11) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.3×102 | 6.3×103
Na-24 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.2×105 | 8.7×106
Nb-92m | Niobium(41) | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 5.2×103 | 1.4×105
Nb-93m | | 40 | 1080 | 6 | 162 | 8.8 | 2.4×102
Nb-94 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 6.9×10−3 | 1.9×10−1
Nb-95 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 1.5×103 | 3.9×104
Nb-97 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 9.9×105 | 2.7×107
Nd-147 | Neodymium(60) | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.0×103 | 8.1×104
Nd-149 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.5×105 | 1.2×107
Ni-59 | Nickel(28) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.0×10−3 | 8.0×10−2
Ni-63 | | 40 | 1080 | 30 | 811 | 2.1 | 5.7×101
Ni-65 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 7.1×105 | 1.9×107
Np-235 | Neptunium(93) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 5.2×101 | 1.4×103
Np-236 | | 7 | 189 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | 4.7×10−4 | 1.3×10−2
Np-237 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 2.6×10−5 | 7.1×10−4
Np-239 | | 6 | 162 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 8.6×103 | 2.3×105
Os-185 | Osmium(76) | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 2.8×102 | 7.5×103
Os-191m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 4.6×104 | 1.3×106
Os-191 | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 1.6×103 | 4.4×104
Os-193 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.0×104 | 5.3×105
Os-194 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 1.1×101 | 3.1×102
P-32 | Phosphorus(15) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.1×104 | 2.9×105
P-33 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 5.8×103 | 1.6×105
Pa-230 | Protactinium(91) | 2 | 54.1 | 0.1 | 2.70 | 1.2×103 | 3.3×104
Pa-231 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 6×10−5 | 1.62×10−3 | 1.7×10−3 | 4.7×10−2
Pa-233 | | 5 | 135 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 7.7×102 | 2.1×104
Pb-201 | Lead(82) | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 6.2×104 | 1.7×106
Pb-202 | | 40 | 1080 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.2×10−4 | 3.4×10−3
Pb-203 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 1.1×104 | 3.0×105
Pb-205 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 4.5×10−6 | 1.2×10−4
Pb-210 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 9×10−3 | 0.243 | 2.8 | 7.6×101
Pb-212 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 5.1×104 | 1.4×106
Pd-103 | Palladium(46) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 2.8×103 | 7.5×104
Pd-107 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 1.9×10−5 | 5.1×10−4
Pd-109 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 7.9×104 | 2.1×106
Pm-143 | Promethium(61) | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 1.3×102 | 3.4×103
Pm-144 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 9.2×101 | 2.5×103
Pm-145 | | 30 | 811 | 7 | 189 | 5.2 | 1.4×102
Pm-147 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.4×101 | 9.3×102
Pm-148m | | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 7.9×102 | 2.1×104
Pm-149 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.5×104 | 4.0×105
| Pm-151 | | 3 | 81.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.7×104 | 7.3×105
Po-208 | Polonium(84) | 40 | 1080 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 2.2×101 | 5.9×102
Po-209 | | 40 | 1080 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 6.2×10−1 | 1.7×101
Po-210 | | 40 | 1080 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 1.7×102 | 4.5×103
Pr-142 | Praseodymium (59) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4.3×104 | 1.2×106
Pr-143 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.5×103 | 6.7×104
Pt-188 | Platinum(78) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.6 | 16.2 | 2.5×103 | 6.8×104
Pt-191 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 8.7×103 | 2.4×105
Pt-193m | | 40 | 1080 | 9 | 243 | 5.8×103 | 1.6×105
Pt-193 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 1.4 | 3.7×101
Pt-195m | | 10 | 270 | 2 | 54.1 | 6.2×103 | 1.7×105
Pt-197m | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.7×105 | 1.0×107
Pt-197 | | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.2×104 | 8.7×105
Pu-236 | Plutonium(94) | 7 | 189 | 7×10−4 | 1.89×10−2 | 2.0×101 | 5.3×102
Pu-237 | | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 4.5×102 | 1.2×104
Pu-238 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 6.3×10−1 | 1.7×101
Pu-239 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 2.3×10−3 | 6.2×10−2
Pu-240 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 8.4×10−3 | 2.3×10−1
Pu-241 | | 40 | 1080 | 1×10−2 | 0.270 | 3.8 | 1.0×102
Pu-242 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 1.5×10−4 | 3.9×10−3
Pu-244 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 6.7×10−7 | 1.8×10−5
Ra-223 | Radium(88) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 3×10−2 | 0.811 | 1.9×103 | 5.1×104
Ra-224 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 6×10−2 | 1.62 | 5.9×103 | 1.6×105
Ra-225 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 1.5×103 | 3.9×104
Ra-226 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 2×10−2 | 0.541 | 3.7×10−2 | 1.0
Ra-228 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 4×10−2 | 1.08 | 1.0×101 | 2.7×102
Rb-81 | Rubidium(37) | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.1×105 | 8.4×106
Rb-83 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 6.8×102 | 1.8×104
Rb-84 | | 1 | 27.0 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 1.8×103 | 4.7×104
Rb-86 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 3.0×103 | 8.1×104
Rb-87 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 3.2×10−9 | 8.6×10−8
Rb (natural) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 6.7×106 | 1.8×108
Re-183 | Rhenium(75) | 5 | 135 | 5 | 135 | 3.8×102 | 1.0×104
Re-184m | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 1.6×102 | 4.3×103
Re-184 | | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 6.9×102 | 1.9×104
Re-186 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 6.9×103 | 1.9×105
Re-187 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 1.4×10−9 | 3.8×10−8
Re-188 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.6×104 | 9.8×105
Re-189 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.5×104 | 6.8×105
Re (natural) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | —— | 2.4×108
Rh-99 | Rhodium(45) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 3.0×103 | 8.2×104
Rh-101 | | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 4.1×101 | 1.1×103
Rh-102m | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.3×102 | 6.2×103
Rh-102 | | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.5×101 | 1.2×103
Rh-103m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 1.2×106 | 3.3×107
Rh-105 | | 10 | 270 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.1×104 | 8.4×105
Rn-222 | Radon(86) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4x10−3 | 0.108 | 5.7x103 | 1.5×105
Ru-97 | Ruthenium(44) | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 1.7×104 | 4.6×105
Ru-103 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 1.2×103 | 3.2×104
Ru-105 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.5×105 | 6.7×106
Ru-106 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 1.2×102 | 3.3×103
S-35 | Sulfur(16) | 40 | 1080 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.6×103 | 4.3×104
Sb-122 | Antimony(51) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.5×104 | 4.0×105
Sb-124 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 6.5×102 | 1.7×104
Sb-125 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.9×101 | 1.0×103
Sb-126 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 3.1×103 | 8.4×104
Sc-44 | Scandium(21) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 6.7×105 | 1.8×107
Sc-46 | | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.3×103 | 3.4×104
Sc-47 | | 9 | 243 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.1×104 | 8.3×105
Sc-48 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 5.5×104 | 1.5×106
Se-75 | Selenium(34) | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 5.4×102 | 1.5×104
Se-79 | | 40 | 1080 | 2 | 54.1 | 2.6×10−3 | 7.0×10−2
Si-31 | Silicon(14) | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.4×106 | 3.9×107
Si-32 | | 40 | 10800 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.9 | 1.1×102
Sm-145 | Samarium(62) | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 9.8×101 | 2.610 3
Sm-147 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 8.510−10 | 2.310−8
Sm-151 | | 40 | 1080 | 4 | 108 | 9.710−1 | 2.6×101
Sm-153 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.6×104 | 4.4×105
Sn-113 | Tin(50) | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 3.7×102 | 1.0×104
| Sn-117m | | 6 | 162 | 2 | 54.1 | 3.0×103 | 8.2×104
Sn-119m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 1.4×102 | 3.7×103
Sn-121m | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.0 | 5.4×101
Sn-123 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.0×102 | 8.2×103
Sn-125 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4.0×103 | 1.1×105
Sn-126 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.010−3 | 2.810−2
Sr-82 | Strontium(38) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 2.3×103 | 6.2×104
Sr-85m | | 5 | 135 | 5 | 135 | 1.2×106 | 3.3×107
Sr-85 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 8.8×102 | 2.4×104
Sr-87m | | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 4.8×105 | 1.3×107
Sr-89 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.1×103 | 2.9×104
Sr-90 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.1 | 2.70 | 5.1 | 1.4×102
Sr-91 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 1.3×105 | 3.6×106
Sr-92 | | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.7×105 | 1.3×107
T | Tritium(1) | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.6×102 | 9.7×103
Ta-178 | Tantalum(73) | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 4.2×106 | 1.1×108
Ta-179 | | 30 | 811 | 30 | 811 | 4.1×101 | 1.1×103
Ta-182 | | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.3×102 | 6.2×103
Tb-157 | Terbium(65) | 40 | 1080 | 10 | 270 | 5.610−1 | 1.5×101
Tb-158 | | 1 | 27.0 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 5.610−1 | 1.5×101
Tb-160 | | 0.9 | 24.3 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 4.2×102 | 1.1×104
Tc-95m | Technetium(43) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 8.3×102 | 2.2×104
Tc-96m | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 1.4×106 | 3.8×107
Tc-96 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 1.2×104 | 3.2×105
Tc-97m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 5.6×102 | 1.5×104
Tc-97 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 5.2×10−5 | 1.4×10−3
Tc-98 | | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.7 | 18.9 | 3.2×10−5 | 8.7×10−4
Tc-99m | | 8 | 216 | 8 | 216 | 1.9×105 | 5.3×106
Tc-99 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.3×10−4 | 1.7×10−2
Te-118 | Tellurium(52) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 6.8×103 | 1.8×105
Te-121m | | 5 | 135 | 5 | 135 | 2.6×102 | 7.0×103
Te-121 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 2.4×103 | 6.4×104
Te-123m | | 7 | 189 | 7 | 189 | 3.3×102 | 8.9×103
Te-125m | | 30 | 811 | 9 | 243 | 6.7×102 | 1.8×104
Te-127m | | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.5×102 | 9.4×103
Te-127 | | 20 | 541 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 9.8×104 | 2.6×106
Te-129m | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.1×103 | 3.0×104
Te-129 | | 0.6 | 16.2 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 7.7×105 | 2.1×107
Te-131m | | 0.7 | 18.9 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 3.0×104 | 8.0×105
Te-132 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 1.1×104 | 3.0×105
Th-227 | Thorium(90) | 9 | 243 | 1×10−2 | 0.270 | 1.1×103 | 3.1×104
Th-228 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 4×10−4 | 1.08×10−2 | 3.0×101 | 8.2×102
Th-229 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 3×10−5 | 8.11×10−4 | 7.9×10−3 | 2.1×10−1
Th-230 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2×10−4 | 5.41×10−3 | 7.6×10−4 | 2.1×10−2
Th-231 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 2.0×104 | 5.3×105
Th-232 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 4.0×10−9 | 1.1×10−7
Th-234 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 8.6×102 | 2.3×104
Th (natural) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 8.1×10−9 | 2.2×10−7
Ti-44 | Titanium(22) | 0.5 | 13.5 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 6.4 | 1.7×102
Tl-200 | Thallium(81.1) | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.8 | 21.6 | 2.2×104 | 6.0×105
Tl-201 | | 10 | 270 | 10 | 270 | 7.9×103 | 2.1×105
Tl-202 | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 2.0×103 | 5.3×104
Tl-204 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.7×101 | 4.6×102
Tm-167 | Thulium(69) | 7 | 189 | 7 | 189 | 3.1×103 | 8.5×104
Tm-168 | | 0.8 | 21.6 | 0.8 | 21.6 | 3.1×102 | 8.3×103
Tm-170 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.2×102 | 6.0×103
Tm-171 | | 40 | 1080 | 10 | 270 | 4.0×101 | 1.1×103
U-230 | Uranium(92) | 40 | 1080 | 1×10−2 | 0.270 | 1.0×103 | 2.7×104
U-232 | | 3 | 81.1 | 3×10−4 | 8.11×10−3 | 8.3×10−1 | 2.2×101
U-233 | | 10 | 270 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | 3.6×10−4 | 9.7×10−3
U-234 | | 10 | 270 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | 2.3×10−4 | 6.2×10−3
U-235 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 8.0×10−8 | 2.2×10−6
U-236 | | 10 | 270 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | 2.4×10−6 | 6.5×10−5
U-238 | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 1.2×10−8 | 3.4×10−7
U (natural) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | 2.6×10−8 | 7.1×10−7
U (enriched 5% or less) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | ——— | (see § 173.434)
| U (enriched more than 5%) | | 10 | 270 | 1×10−3 | 2.70×10−2 | —— | (see § 173.434)
U (depleted) | | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | Unlimited | —— | (see § 173.434)
V-48 | Vanadium(23) | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 6.3×103 | 1.7×105
V-49 | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.0×102 | 8.1×103
W-178 | Tungsten(74) | 1 | 27.0 | 1 | 27.0 | 1.3×10−3 | 3.4×104
W-181 | | 30 | 811 | 30 | 811 | 2.2×102 | 6.0×103
W-185 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 3.5×102 | 9.4×103
W-187 | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 2.6×104 | 7.0×105
W-188 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.7×102 | 1.0×104
Xe-122 | Xenon(54) | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4.8×104 | 1.3×106
Xe-123 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 4.4×105 | 1.2×107
Xe-127 | | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 1.0×103 | 2.8×104
Xe-131m | | 40 | 1080 | 40 | 1080 | 3.1×103 | 8.4×104
Xe-133 | | 20 | 541 | 20 | 541 | 6.9×103 | 1.9×105
Xe-135 | | 4 | 108 | 4 | 108 | 9.5×104 | 2.6×106
Y-87 | Yttrium(39) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.7×104 | 4.5×105
Y-88 | | 0.4 | 10.8 | 0.4 | 10.8 | 5.2×102 | 1.4×104
Y-90 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 2.0×104 | 5.4×105
Y-91m | | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 1.5×106 | 4.2×107
Y-91 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 9.1×102 | 2.5×104
Y-92 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 3.6×105 | 9.6×106
Y-93 | | 0.2 | 5.41 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 1.2×105 | 3.3×106
Yb-169 | Ytterbium(70) | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 8.9×102 | 2.4×104
Yb-175 | | 30 | 811 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 6.6×103 | 1.8×105
Zn-65 | Zinc(30) | 2 | 54.1 | 2 | 54.1 | 3.0×102 | 8.2×103
Zn-69m | | 2 | 54.1 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.2×105 | 3.3×106
Zn-69 | | 4 | 108 | 0.5 | 13.5 | 1.8×106 | 4.9×107
Zr-88 | Zirconium(40) | 3 | 81.1 | 3 | 81.1 | 6.6×102 | 1.8×104
Zr-93 | | 40 | 1080 | 0.2 | 5.41 | 9.3×10−5 | 2.5×10−3
Zr-95 | | 1 | 27.0 | 0.9 | 24.3 | 7.9×102 | 2.1×104
Zr-97 | | 0.3 | 8.11 | 0.3 | 8.11 | 7.1×104 | 1.9×106
a International shipments of Einsteinium require multilateral approval of A1 and A2 values.
b International shipments of Fermium require multilateral approval of A1 and A2 values.
c 20 Ci for Mo 99 for domestic use.
MFP: For mixed fission products, use formula for mixtures or table 10 in § 173.433.
Note: The activity per gram of radionuclide quantities are technical information that might not provide a direct relationship between the activity and total mass of material contained in a package.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996]
§ 173.441
Radiation level limitations.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials offered for transportation must be designed and prepared for shipment, so that under conditions normally incident to transportation, the radiation level does not exceed 2 mSv/hour (200 mrem/hour) at any point on the external surface of the package, and the transport index does not exceed 10.
(b) A package which exceeds the radiation level limits specified in paragraph (a) of this section must be transported by exclusive use shipment, and the radiation levels for such shipment may not exceed the following during transportation:
(1) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) on the external surface of the package unless the following conditions are met, in which case the limit is 10 mSv/h (1000 mrem/h):
(i) The shipment is made in a closed transport vehicle;
(ii) The package is secured within the vehicle so that its position remains fixed during transportation; and
(iii) There are no loading or unloading operations between the beginning and end of the transportation;
(2) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at any point on the outer surfaces of the vehicle, including the top and underside of the vehicle; or in the case of a flat-bed style vehicle, at any point on the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on the upper surface of the load or enclosure if used, and on the lower external surface of the vehicle;
(3) 0.1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at any point 2 meters (6.6 feet) from the outer lateral surfaces of the vehicle (excluding the top and underside of the vehicle); or in the case of a flat-bed style vehicle, at any point 2 meters (6.6 feet) from the vertical planes projected by the outer edges of the vehicle (excluding the top and underside of the vehicle); and
(4) 0.02 mSv/h (2mrem/h) in any normally occupied space, except that this provision does not apply to carriers if they operate under the provisions of a State or federally regulated radiation protection program and if personnel under their control who are in such an occupied space wear radiation dosimetry devices.
(c) For shipments made under the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, the offeror shall provide specific written instructions for maintenance of the exclusive use shipment controls to the carrier. The instructions must be included with the shipping paper information. The instructions must be sufficient so that, when followed, they will cause the carrier to avoid actions that will unnecessarily delay delivery or unnecessarily result in increased radiation levels or radiation exposures to transport workers or members of the general public.
(d) Packages exceeding the radiation level or transport index prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section may not be transported by aircraft.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 48568, Sept. 10, 1998]
§ 173.442
Thermal limitations.
A package of Class 7 (radioactive) material must be designed, constructed, and loaded so that—
(a) The heat generated within the package by the radioactive contents will not, during conditions normally incident to transport, affect the integrity of the package; and
(b) The temperature of the accessible external surfaces of the loaded package will not, assuming still air in the shade at an ambient temperature of 38 °C (100 °F), exceed either—
(1) 50 °C (122 °F) in other than an exclusive use shipment; or
(2) 85 °C (185 °F) in an exclusive use shipment.
§ 173.443
Contamination control.
(a) The level of non-fixed (removable) radioactive contamination on the external surfaces of each package offered for transport must be kept as low as reasonably achievable. The level of non-fixed radioactive contamination may not exceed the limits set forth in table 11 and must be determined by either:
(1) Wiping an area of 300 square centimeters of the surface concerned with an absorbent material, using moderate pressure, and measuring the activity on the wiping material. Sufficient measurements must be taken in the most appropriate locations to yield a representative assessment of the non-fixed contamination levels. The amount of radioactivity measured on any single wiping material, when averaged over the surface wiped, may not exceed the limits set forth in table 11 at any time during transport; or
(2) Using other methods of assessment of equal or greater efficiency, in which case the efficiency of the method used must be taken into account and the non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of the package may not exceed ten times the limits set forth in table 11, as follows:
Table 11—Non-Fixed External Radioactive Contamination-Wipe Limits
Contaminant | Maximum permissible limits | Bq/cm2 | uCi/cm2 | dpm/cm2
Beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters | 0.4 | 10−5 | 22
All other alpha emitting radionuclides | 0.04 | 10−6 | 2.2
(b) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, in the case of packages transported as exclusive use shipments by rail or public highway only, the removable (non-fixed) radioactive contamination on any package at any time during transport may not exceed ten times the levels prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section. The levels at the beginning of transport may not exceed the levels prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section.
(c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, each transport vehicle used for transporting Class 7 (radioactive) materials as an exclusive use shipment that utilizes the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section must be surveyed with appropriate radiation detection instruments after each use. A vehicle may not be returned to service until the radiation dose rate at each accessible surface is 0.005 mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) or less, and there is no significant removable (non-fixed) radioactive surface contamination as specified in paragraph (a) of this section.
(d) Paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section do not apply to any closed transport vehicle used solely for the transportation by highway or rail of Class 7 (radioactive) material packages with contamination levels that do not exceed 10 times the levels prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section if—
(1) A survey of the interior surfaces of the empty vehicle shows that the radiation dose rate at any point does not exceed 0.1 mSv per hour (10 mrem per hour) at the surface or 0.02 mSv per hour (2 mrem per hour) at 1 meter (3.3 feet) from the surface;
(2) Each vehicle is stenciled with the words “For Radioactive Materials Use Only” in letters at least 76 millimeters (3 inches) high in a conspicuous place on both sides of the exterior of the vehicle; and
(3) Each vehicle is kept closed except for loading or unloading.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20753, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.447
Storage incident to transportation—general requirements.
The following requirements apply to temporary storage during the course of transportation but not to Nuclear Regulatory Commission or Agreement State-licensed facilities or U.S. Government-owned or contracted facilities.
(a) The number of packages bearing RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II or RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels stored in any one storage area, such as a transit area, terminal building, storeroom, waterfront pier, or assembly yard, must be limited so that the sum of the transport indexes in any individual group of packages does not exceed 50. Groups of these packages must be stored so as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 meters (20 feet) from other groups of packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(b) Mixing of different kinds of Class 7 (radioactive) materials packages that include fissile materials packages is authorized only in accordance with § 173.459.
§ 173.448
General transportation requirements.
(a) Each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be secured to prevent shifting during normal transportation conditions.
(b) Except as provided in §§ 174.81, 176.83, and 177.848 of this subchapter, or as otherwise required by the competent authority in the applicable certificate, a package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials may be carried among packaged general cargo without special stowage provisions, if—
(1) The heat output in watts does not exceed 0.1 times the minimum package dimension in centimeters; or
(2) The average surface heat flux of the package does not exceed 15 watts per square meter and the immediately surrounding cargo is not in sacks or bags or otherwise in a form that would seriously impede air circulation for heat removal.
(c) Packages bearing labels prescribed in § 172.403 of this subchapter may not be carried in compartments occupied by passengers, except in those compartments exclusively reserved for couriers accompanying those packages.
(d) Mixing of different kinds of packages that include fissile packages is authorized only in accordance with § 173.459.
(e) No person shall offer for transportation or transport aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft any single package with a transport index greater than 3.0 or an overpack with a transport index greater than 3.0.
(f) No person shall offer for transportation or transport aboard a passenger- carrying aircraft any Class 7 (radioactive) material unless that material is intended for use in, or incident to, research, medical diagnosis or treatment.
(g) If an overpack is used to consolidate individual packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the packages must comply with the packaging, marking, and labeling requirements of this subchapter, and the following:
(1) The overpack must be labeled as prescribed in § 172.403 of this subchapter, except as follows:
(i) The “contents” entry on the label may state “mixed” unless each inside package contains the same radionuclide(s);
(ii) The “activity” entry on the label must be determined by adding together the number of Becquerels (curies) of the Class 7 (radioactive) materials packages contained therein;
(iii) For a non-rigid overpack, the required label together with required package markings must be affixed to the overpack by means of a securely attached, durable tag. The transport index must be determined by adding together the transport indexes of the Class 7 (radioactive) materials packages contained therein; and
(iv) For a rigid overpack, the transport index must be determined by:
(A) Adding together the transport indexes of the Class 7 (radioactive) materials packages contained in the overpack; or
(B) Except for fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials, direct measurements as prescribed in § 173.403 for transport index, taken by the person initially offering the packages contained within the overpack for shipment.
(2) The overpack must be marked as prescribed in subpart D of part 172 of this subchapter and § 173.25(a).
(3) The transport index of the overpack may not exceed 3.0 for passenger-carrying aircraft shipments, or 10.0 for cargo-aircraft only shipments.
§ 173.453
Fissile materials—exceptions.
The requirements of §§ 173.457 and 173.459 do not apply to:
(a) A package containing 15 grams or less of fissile radionuclides. If the material is transported in bulk, the quantity limitation applies to the conveyance.
(b) A package containing homogeneous solutions or mixtures where:
(1) The minimum ratio of the number of hydrogen atoms to the number of atoms of fissile radionuclides (H/X) is 5200;
(2) The maximum concentration of fissile radionuclides is 5 grams per liter; and
(3) The maximum mass of fissile radionuclides in the package is 500 grams, except that for a mixture in which the total mass of plutonium and uranium-233 does not exceed 1% of the mass of uranium-235, the limit is 800 grams of uranium-235. If the material is transported in bulk, the quantity limitations apply to the conveyance.
(c) A package containing uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 1% by mass, and mixed with a total plutonium and uranium-233 content of up to 1% of the mass of uranium-235, if the fissile radionuclides are distributed homogeneously throughout the package contents, and do not form a lattice arrangement within the package.
(d) A package containing not more than 5 grams of fissile radionuclides in any 10 liter volume, provided that the material is contained in packages that will maintain the limitation on fissile radionuclide distribution during normal conditions of transport.
(e) A package containing one kilogram or less of plutonium of which 20% or less by mass may consist of plutonium-239, plutonium-241, or any combination of those radionuclides.
(f) A package containing liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2% by mass, with total plutonium and uranium-233 content not exceeding 0.1% of the mass of uranium-235 with a nitrogen-to-uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-248, 61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996]
§ 173.457
Transportation of fissile material, controlled shipments—specific requirements.
Shipments of fissile material packages that have been assigned a transport index of greater than 10 for criticality control purposes in accordance with 10 CFR 71.59 must meet the requirements of this section and § 173.441(a) or (b).
(a) For fissile material, controlled shipments, the offeror or carrier, as appropriate, must incorporate transportation controls which:
(1) Provide nuclear criticality safety;
(2) Protect against loading, storing, or transporting that shipment with any other fissile material; and
(3) Include in the shipping papers the description required by § 172.203(d) of this subchapter.
(b) Fissile material, controlled shipments must be transported:
(1) In an exclusive use conveyance;
(2) Except for shipments by aircraft, in a conveyance with an escort having the capability, equipment, authority, and instructions to provide administrative controls necessary to assure compliance with this section;
(3) In a conveyance containing no other packages of any Class 7 (radioactive) material required to bear one of the labels prescribed in § 172.403 of this subchapter. Specific arrangements must be made between the offeror and the carrier, with instructions to that effect issued with the shipping papers; or
(4) Under any other procedure approved by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety in accordance with part 107 of this subchapter.
§ 173.459
Mixing of fissile material packages.
(a) Mixing of fissile material packages with other types of Class 7 (radioactive) materials is authorized only if the transport index of any single package does not exceed 10 and the total transport index in any conveyance or storage location does not exceed 50.
(b) Fissile packages may be shipped with an external radiation level greater than 0.1 mSv/hr (10 mrem per hour) at 1 meter (3.3 feet), and combined with other packages of the same or different designs in a fissile material, controlled shipment, under the conditions prescribed in § 173.457, if:
(1) Each package in the shipment has been assigned a transport index for criticality control purposes in accordance with the 10 CFR 71.59;
(2) The nuclear criticality control transport index does not exceed 10 for any single package;
(3) The total nuclear criticality control transport index does not exceed 100 for all packages in the shipment; and
(4) Except as provided in § 176.704(e) of this subchapter, the shipment is not transported by vessel.
(c) A fissile material, controlled shipment of packages may be combined with other packages of the same or different design when each package has been assigned a nuclear criticality control transport index in accordance with 10 CFR 71.59, and may be combined with other fissile packages into a fissile material, controlled shipment under the conditions prescribed in § 173.457, if:
(1) The nuclear criticality control transport index which has been assigned in the package approval does not exceed 50 for any single package;
(2) The total nuclear criticality control transport index for all packages in the shipment does not exceed 100; and
(3) Except as provided in § 176.704(e) of this subchapter, the shipment is not transported by vessel.
§ 173.461
Demonstration of compliance with tests.
(a) Compliance with the design requirements in § 173.412 and the test requirements in §§ 173.465 through 173.469 must be shown by any of the methods prescribed in this paragraph, or by a combination of these methods appropriate for the particular feature being evaluated:
(1) Performance of tests with prototypes or samples of the specimens representing LSA-III, special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, or packaging, in which case the contents of the packaging for the test must simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of physical properties of the radioactive contents or packaging to be tested, must be prepared as normally presented for transport. The use of non-radioactive substitute contents is encouraged provided that the results of the testing take into account the radioactive characteristics of the contents for which the package is being tested;
(2) Reference to a previous, satisfactory demonstration of compliance of a sufficiently similar nature;
(3) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale incorporating those features that are significant with respect to the item under investigation, when engineering experience has shown results of those tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is used, the need for adjusting certain test parameters, such as the penetrator diameter or the compressive load, must be taken into account; or
(4) Calculations or reasoned evaluation, using reliable and conservative procedures and parameters.
(b) With respect to the initial conditions for the tests under §§ 173.465 through 173.469, except for the water immersion tests, compliance must be based upon the assumption that the package is in equilibrium at an ambient temperature of 38 °C (100 °F).
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998]
§ 173.462
Preparation of specimens for testing.
(a) Each specimen (i.e., sample, prototype or scale model) must be examined before testing to identify and record faults or damage, including:
(1) Divergence from the specifications or drawings;
(2) Defects in construction;
(3) Corrosion or other deterioration; and
(4) Distortion of features.
(b) Any deviation found under paragraph (a) of this section from the specified design must be corrected or appropriately taken into account in the subsequent evaluation.
(c) The containment system of the packaging must be clearly specified.
(d) The external features of the specimen must be clearly identified so that reference may be made to any part of it.
§ 173.465
Type A packaging tests.
(a) The packaging, with contents, must be capable of withstanding the water spray, free drop, stacking and penetration tests prescribed in this section. One prototype may be used for all tests if the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section are met.
(b) Water spray test. The water spray test must precede each test or test sequence prescribed in this section. The water spray test must simulate exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 centimeters (2 inches) per hour for at least one hour. The time interval between the end of the water spray test and the beginning of the next test must be such that the water has soaked in to the maximum extent without appreciable drying of the exterior of the specimen. In the absence of evidence to the contrary, this interval may be assumed to be two hours if the water spray is applied from four different directions simultaneously. However, no time interval may elapse if the water spray is applied from each of the four directions consecutively.
(c) Free drop test. The specimen must drop onto the target so as to suffer maximum damage to the safety features being tested, and:
(1) The height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the target may not be less than the distance specified in table 12, for the applicable package mass. The target must be as specified in § 173.465(c)(5). Table 12 is as follows:
Table 12—Free Drop Distance for Testing Packages to Normal Conditions of Transport
Packaging mass | Kilograms (pounds) | Free drop distance | Meters | (Feet)
< Mass 5000 (11,000) | 1.2 | (4)
5,000 (11,000) Mass to 10,000 (22,000) | 0.9 | (3)
10,000 (22,000) Mass to 15,000 (33,000) | 0.6 | (2)
> 15,000 (33,000) Mass | 0.3 | (1)
(2) For packages containing fissile material, the free drop test specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be preceded by a free drop from a height of 0.3 meter (1 foot) on each corner, or in the case of cylindrical packages, onto each of the quarters of each rim.
(3) For fiberboard or wood rectangular packages with a mass of 50 kilograms (110 pounds) or less, a separate specimen must be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 meter (1 foot).
(4) For cylindrical fiberboard packages with a mass of 100 kilograms (220 pounds) or less, a separate specimen must be subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 meter (1 foot).
(5) The target for the free drop test must be a flat, horizontal surface of such mass and rigidity that any increase in its resistance to displacement or deformation upon impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen.
(d) Stacking test. (1) The specimen must be subjected for a period of at least 24 hours to a compressive load equivalent to the greater of the following:
(i) Five times the mass of the actual package; or
(ii) The equivalent of 13 kilopascals (1.9 pounds per square inch) multiplied by the vertically projected area of the package.
(2) The compressive load must be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which must be the base on which the package would normally rest.
(e) Penetration test. For the penetration test, the specimen must be placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface that will not move significantly while the test is being performed.
(1) A bar of 3.2 centimeters (1.25 inches) in diameter with a hemispherical end and a mass of 6 kilograms (13.2 pounds) must be dropped and directed to fall with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the center of the weakest part of the specimen, so that, if it penetrates far enough, it will hit the containment system. The bar may not be significantly deformed by the test; and
(2) The height of the drop of the bar measured from its lower end to the intended point of impact on the upper surface of the specimen must be 1 meter (3.3 feet) or greater.
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-244, 61 FR 20753, May 8, 1996]
§ 173.466
Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases.
(a) In addition to the tests prescribed in § 173.465, Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases must be capable of withstanding the following tests:
(1) Free drop test. The packaging specimen must drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage to its containment. The height of the drop measured from the lowest part of the packaging specimen to the upper surface of the target must be 9 meters (30 feet) or greater. The target must be as specified in § 173.465(c)(5).
(2) Penetration test. The specimen must be subjected to the test specified in § 173.465(e) except that the height of the drop must be 1.7 meters (5.5 feet).
(b) [Reserved]
§ 173.467
Tests for demonstrating the ability of Type B and fissile materials packagings to withstand accident conditions in transportation.
Each Type B packaging or packaging for fissile material must meet the test requirements prescribed in 10 CFR part 71 for ability to withstand accident conditions in transportation.
§ 173.468
Test for LSA-III material.
(a) LSA-III Class 7 (radioactive) material must meet the test requirement of paragraph (b) of this section. Any differences between the material to be transported and the test material must be taken into account in determining whether the test requirements have been met.
(b) Test method. (1) The specimen representing no less than the entire contents of the package must be immersed for 7 days in water at ambient temperature.
(2) The volume of water to be used in the test must be sufficient to ensure that at the end of the test period the free volume of the unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining will be at least 10% of the volume of the specimen itself.
(3) The water must have an initial pH of 6-8 and a maximum conductivity of 10 micromho/cm at 20 °C (68 °F).
(4) The total activity of the free volume of water must be measured following the 7 day immersion test and must not exceed 0.1 A2.
§ 173.469
Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) Special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials must meet the test requirements of paragraph (b) of this section. Each solid Class 7 (radioactive) material or capsule specimen to be tested must be manufactured or fabricated so that it is representative of the actual solid material or capsule that will be transported with the proposed radioactive content duplicated as closely as practicable. Any differences between the material to be transported and the test material, such as the use of non-radioactive contents, must be taken into account in determining whether the test requirements have been met. The following additional conditions apply:
(1) A different specimen may be used for each of the tests;
(2) The specimen may not break or shatter when subjected to the impact, percussion, or bending tests;
(3) The specimen may not melt or disperse when subjected to the heat test; and
(4) After each test, leaktightness or indispersibility of the specimen must be determined by—
(i) A method no less sensitive than the leaching assessment prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. For a capsule resistant to corrosion by water, and which has an internal void volume greater than 0.1 milliliter, an alternative to the leaching assessment is a demonstration of leaktightness of 10−4 torr-1/s (1.3 ± 10−4 atm-cm3/s) based on air at 25 °C (77 °F) and one atmosphere differential pressure for solid radioactive content, or 10−6 torr-1/s (1.3 × 10−6 atm-cm3/s) for liquid or gaseous radioactive content; or
(ii) A specimen that comprises or simulates Class 7 (radioactive) material contained in a sealed capsule need not be subjected to the leaktightness procedure specified in this section provided it is alternatively subjected to any of the tests prescribed in ISO/TR4826-1979(E), “Sealed Radioactive Sources Leak Test Methods.”
(b) Test methods.—(1) Impact Test. The specimen must fall onto the target from a height of 9 meters (30 feet) or greater. The target must be as specified in § 173.465(c)(5).
(2) Percussion Test. (i) The specimen must be placed on a sheet of lead that is supported by a smooth solid surface, and struck by the flat face of a steel billet so as to produce an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free drop of 1.4 kilograms (3 pounds) through 1 meter (3.3 feet).
(ii) The flat face of the billet must be 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of 3 millimeters ±0.3 millimeters (0.12 inch ±0.012 inch).
(iii) The lead must be of hardness number 3.5 to 4.5 on the Vickers scale and thickness 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) or greater, and must cover an area greater than that covered by the specimen.
(iv) A fresh surface of lead must be used for each impact.
(v) The billet must strike the specimen so as to cause maximum damage.
(3) Bending test. (i) This test applies only to long, slender sources with a length of 10 centimeters (4 inches) or greater and a length to width ratio of 10 or greater.
(ii) The specimen must be rigidly clamped in a horizontal position so that one half of its length protrudes from the face of the clamp.
(iii) The orientation of the specimen must be such that the specimen will suffer maximum damage when its free end is struck by the flat face of a steel billet.
(iv) The billet must strike the specimen so as to produce an impact equivalent to that resulting from a free vertical drop of 1.4 kilograms (3 pounds) through 1 meter (3.3 feet).
(v) The flat face of the billet must be 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) in diameter with the edges rounded off to a radius of 3 millimeters ±0.3 millimeters (.12 inch ±0.012 inch).
(4) Heat test. The specimen must be heated in air to a temperature of not less than 800 °C (1475 °F), held at that temperature for a period of 10 minutes, and then allowed to cool.
(c) Leaching assessment methods. (1) For indispersible solid material—
(i) The specimen must be immersed for seven days in water at ambient temperature. The water must have a pH range of 6 to 8 and a maximum conductivity of 10 micromho per centimeter at 20 °C (68 °F).
(ii) The water with specimen must then be heated to a temperature of 50 °C ±5° (122 °F ±9°) and maintained at this temperature for four hours.
(iii) The activity of the water must then be determined.
(iv) The specimen must then be stored for at least seven days in still air of relative humidity not less than 90 percent at 30 °C (86 °F).
(v) The specimen must then be immersed in water under the same conditions as in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, and the water with specimen must be heated to 50 °C ±5 (122 °F ±9°) and maintained at that temperature for four hours.
(vi) The activity of the water must then be determined. The activities determined in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section and this paragraph, (c)(1)(vi), may not exceed 2 kilobecquerels (0.05 microcurie).
(2) For encapsulated material—
(i) The specimen must be immersed in water at ambient temperature. The water must have a pH of 6-8 and a maximum conductivity of 10 micromho per centimeter.
(ii) The water and specimen must be heated to a temperature of 50 °C ±5° (122 °F ±9°) and maintained at this temperature for four hours.
(iii) The activity of the water must then be determined.
(iv) The specimen must then be stored for at least seven days in still air at a temperature of 30 °C (86 °F) or greater.
(v) The process in paragraphs (c)(2)(i), (c)(2)(ii), and (c)(2)(iii) of this section must be repeated.
(vi) The activity determined in paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section may not exceed 2 kilobecquerels (0.05 microcurie).
(d) A specimen that comprises or simulates Class 7 (radioactive) material contained in a sealed capsule need not be subjected to—
(1) The impact test and the percussion test of this section provided that the specimen is alternatively subjected to the Class 4 impact test prescribed in ISO 2919-1980(e), “Sealed Radioactive Sources Classification”; and
(2) The heat test of this section, provided the specimen is alternatively subjected to the Class 6 temperature test specified in the International Organization for Standardization document ISO 2919-1980(e), “Sealed Radioactive Sources Classification.”
[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]
§ 173.471
Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved packages.
In addition to the applicable requirements of the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (USNRC) and other requirements of this subchapter, any offeror of a Type B, Type B(U), Type B(M), or fissile material package that has been approved by the USNRC in accordance with 10 CFR part 71 must also comply with the following requirements:
(a) The offeror shall be registered with the USNRC as a party to the packaging approval, and make the shipment in compliance with the terms of the packaging approval;
(b) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked with the package identification marking indicated in the USNRC packaging approval;
(c) Each shipping paper related to the shipment of the package must bear the package identification marking indicated in the USNRC packaging approval;
(d) Before export shipment of the package, the offeror shall obtain a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate for that package design or if one has already been issued, the offeror shall register, in writing (including a description of the quality assurance program required by 10 CFR part 71) with the U.S. Competent Authority as a user of the certificate. (Note: The person who originally applies for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate will be registered automatically.) Upon registration, the offeror will be furnished with a copy of the certificate. The offeror shall then submit a copy of the U.S. Competent Authority Certificate applying to that package design to the national competent authority of each country into or through which the package will be transported, unless the offeror has documentary evidence that a copy has already been furnished; and
(e) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as required by the IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The request must be in triplicate and include copies of the applicable USNRC packaging approval, USNRC Quality Assurance Program approval number, and a reproducible 22 cm × 30 cm (8.5” × 11”) drawing showing the make-up of the package. Each request is considered in the order in which it is received. To allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be received at least 90 days before the requested effective date.
§ 173.472
Requirements for exporting DOT Specification Type B and fissile packages.
(a) Any offeror who exports a DOT Specification Type B or fissile material package authorized by § 173.416 or § 173.417 shall comply with paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section.
(b) The shipment must be made in accordance with the conditions of the U.S. Certificate of Competent Authority.
(c) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked with the package identification marking indicated in the U.S. Competent Authority Certificate.
(d) Each shipping paper related to the shipment of the package must bear the package identification marking indicated in the U.S. Competent Authority Certificate.
(e) Before export of the package, the offeror shall obtain a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate for that package design, or if one has already been issued, the offeror shall register in writing (including a description of the quality assurance program required by 10 CFR part 71, subpart H, or 49 CFR 173.474 and 173.475) with the U.S. Competent Authority as a user of the certificate. Upon registration, the offeror will be furnished with a copy of the certificate. The offeror shall then submit a copy of the U.S. Competent Authority Certificate applying to that package design to the national competent authority of each country into or through which the package will be transported, unless the offeror has documentary evidence that a copy has already been furnished.
(f) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as required by IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The request must be submitted in triplicate and must include a description of the quality assurance program required by 10 CFR part 71, subpart H, or 49 CFR 173.474 and 173.475, and a reproducible 22 cm × 30 cm (8.5” × 11”) drawing showing the make-up of the package. A copy of the USNRC quality assurance program approval will satisfy the requirement for describing the quality assurance program. Each request is considered in the order in which it is received. To allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be received at least 90 days before the requested effective date.
§ 173.473
Requirements for foreign-made packages.
In addition to other applicable requirements of this subchapter, each offeror of a foreign-made Type B, Type B(U), Type B(M), or fissile material package for which a Competent Authority Certificate is required by IAEA's “Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials, Safety Series No. 6,” shall also comply with the following requirements:
(a) Prior to the shipment of such a package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials into or from the U.S., the offeror shall—
(1) Have the foreign competent authority certificate revalidated by the U.S. Competent Authority, unless this has been done previously. Each request for revalidation must be submitted in writing to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. The request must be in triplicate, contain all the information required by Section VII of the IAEA regulations in Safety Series No. 6, and include a copy in English of the foreign competent authority certificate. Each request is considered in the order in which it is received. To allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be received at least 90 days before the requested effective date;
(2) Register in writing with the U.S. Competent Authority as a user of the package covered by the foreign competent authority certificate and its U.S. revalidation. If the offeror is requesting the revalidation, registration is automatic; and
(3) Supply to the carrier, upon request, the applicable competent authority certificates. However, the competent authority certificates are not required to accompany the packages to which they apply.
(b) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked with the competent authority identification marking indicated on the Competent Authority Certificate and revalidation.
(c) Each shipping paper for a shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials must bear a notation of the package identification marking indicated on the competent authority certificate or revalidation.
(d) All requirements of the foreign competent authority certificate and the U.S. Competent Authority revalidation must be fulfilled.
§ 173.474
Quality control for construction of packaging.
Prior to the first use of any packaging for the shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) material, the offeror shall determine that—
(a) The packaging meets the quality of design and construction requirements as specified in this subchapter; and
(b) The effectiveness of the shielding, containment and, when required, the heat transfer characteristics of the package, are within the limits specified for the package design.
§ 173.475
Quality control requirements prior to each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
Before each shipment of any Class 7 (radioactive) materials package, the offeror must ensure, by examination or appropriate tests, that—
(a) The packaging is proper for the contents to be shipped;
(b) The packaging is in unimpaired physical condition, except for superficial marks;
(c) Each closure device of the packaging, including any required gasket, is properly installed, secured, and free of defects;
(d) For fissile material, each moderator and neutron absorber, if required, is present and in proper condition;
(e) Each special instruction for filling, closing, and preparation of the packaging for shipment has been followed;
(f) Each closure, valve, or other opening of the containment system through which the radioactive content might escape is properly closed and sealed;
(g) Each packaging containing liquid in excess of an A2 quantity and intended for air shipment has been tested to show that it will not leak under an ambient atmospheric pressure of not more than 25 kPa, absolute (3.6 psia). The test must be conducted on the entire containment system, or on any receptacle or vessel within the containment system, to determine compliance with this requirement;
(h) The internal pressure of the containment system will not exceed the design pressure during transportation; and
(i) External radiation and contamination levels are within the allowable limits specified in this subchapter.
§ 173.476
Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
(a) Each offeror of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and provide to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety on request, a complete safety analysis, including documentation of any tests, demonstrating that the special form material meets the requirements of § 173.469. An IAEA Certificate of Competent Authority issued for the special form material may be used to satisfy this requirement.
(b) Prior to the first export shipment of a special form Class 7 (radioactive) material from the United States, each offeror shall obtain a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate for the specific material. For special form material manufactured outside the United States, an IAEA Certificate of Competent Authority from the country of origin may be used to meet this requirement.
(c) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as required by the IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing, in triplicate, to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety. Each request is considered in the order in which it is received. To allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be received at least 90 days before the requested effective date. Each petition for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate must include the following information:
(1) A detailed description of the material, or if a capsule, a detailed description of the contents. Particular reference must be made to both physical and chemical states;
(2) A detailed statement of the capsule design and dimensions, including complete engineering drawings [22cm × 30cm (81/2 inches × 11 inches)] and schedules of material, and methods of construction;
(3) A statement of the tests that have been made and their results; or evidence based on calculative methods to show that the material is able to pass the tests; or other evidence that the special form Class 7 (radioactive) material complies with § 173.469; and
(4) For the original request for a Competent Authority Certificate, evidence of a quality assurance program.
(d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply in those cases where A1 equals A2 and the material is not required to be described on the shipping papers as “Radioactive Material, Special Form, n.o.s.”

Subparts J-O [Reserved]
Appendix A to Part 173 [Reserved]
Pt. 173, App. B

Appendix B to Part 173—Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packaging and Receptacles
1. The purpose of this procedure is to determine the chemical compatibility and permeability of liquid hazardous materials packaged in plastic packaging and receptacles. Alternatives for this procedure are permitted as specified in § 173.24(e)(3)(iii) of this subchapter.
2. Compatibility and rate of permeation are determined by subjecting full size plastic containers (or smaller containers as permitted in paragraph 4 of this appendix) and hazardous material lading to one of the following combinations of time and temperature:
a. Test Method 1: 180 days at a temperature no lower than 18 °C. (64 °F.)
b. Test Method 2: 28 days at a temperature no lower than 50 °C. (122 °F.)
c. Test Method 3: 14 days at a temperature no lower than 60 °C. (140 °F.)
3. Regardless of which test method is used, at least three sample containers shall be tested for each combination of hazardous material and size and design of container. Fill containers to rated capacity with the specific hazardous material (at the concentration to be transported) and close as for shipment. For the first and last 24 hours of storage under the selected test method, place the containers with closures downward, except that containers fitted with a vent are so placed on each occasion for five minutes only.
4. For testing under Test Method 2 or 3 in those instances where it is not practicable to use full size containers, smaller containers may be used. The small container shall be manufactured by the same process as the larger container (for example, using the same method of molding and processing temperatures) and be made of identical resins, pigments and additives.
5. Determine filled container weight or net weight of contents both before and after storage under the selected test method. Rate of permeation is determined from loss of hazardous materials contents, during the conduct of the test, expressed as a percentage of the original weight.
6. After storage under the selected test method, the container shall be drained, rinsed, filled to rated capacity with water and, with filled container at ambient temperature, dropped from a height determined in accordance with § 178.603(e) of this subchapter onto a rigid non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface.
7. Each of the following constitute test failure:
a. Visible evidence of permanent deformation due to vapor pressure build-up or collapse of walls, deterioration, swelling, crazing, cracking, excessive corrosion, oxidization, embrittlement, leakage, rupture or other defects likely to cause premature failure or a hazardous condition.
b. For materials meeting the definition of a poison according to this subchapter, a rate of permeation in excess of 0.5% determined over the test period. For all other hazardous materials, a rate of permeation in excess of 2.0% determined over the test period.
[Amdt. 173-176, 49 FR 24691, June 14, 1984, as amended by Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52670 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993]
Pt. 173, App. C

Appendix C to Part 173—Procedure for Base-level Vibration Testing
Base-level vibration testing shall be conducted as follows:
1. Three sample packagings, selected at random, must be filled and closed as for shipment. A non-hazardous material may be used in place of the hazardous material if it has essentially the same physical characteristics.
2. The three packages must be placed on a vibrating platform that has a vertical double-amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of one inch. The packages should be constrained horizontally to prevent them from falling off the platform, but must be left free to move vertically, bounce and rotate.
3. The test must be performed continuously for one hour at a frequency that causes each package to be raised from the vibrating platform to such a degree that a piece of material of approximately 1.6 mm (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel strapping or paperboard) can be passed between the bottom of any package and the platform.
4. Immediately following the period of vibration, each package shall be removed from the platform, turned on its side and observed for any evidence of leakage.
5. Rupture or leakage from any of the packages constitutes failure of the test.
[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52671, Dec. 21, 1990]
Pt. 173, App. D

Appendix D to Part 173—Test Methods for Dynamite (Explosive, Blasting, Type A)

1. Test method D-1—Leakage Test
A wooden stick, 114 mm (4.5 inches) long and 4.8 mm (0.2 inch) inch in diameter, with a sharpened end is used to punch 5 holes in one end of the wrapper of a dynamite cartridge. A cork stopper is placed on the bottom of a glass volumetric cylinder. The dynamite cartridge is placed, perforated end down, resting on the cork stopper in the cylinder. The entire assembly is placed in an oven at 38 °C (100 °F) for 48 hours and then examined visually for evidence of leakage.

2. Test method D-2—Centrifugal Exudation Test
The test apparatus consists of a glass tube, 135 mm (5.3 inches) long and one inch in diameter, with both ends open, and is assembled in the following manner:
(a) Close the bottom with a plastic plug of diameter equal to the inner diameter of the glass tube;
(b) Place a small amount of absorbent cotton on top of the plug;
(c) Place a plastic disk that matches the inner diameter to the glass tube and has seven small perforations on top of the cotton; and
(d) Place 10 g (0.35 ounce) of the dynamite sample on top of the disk.
The assembled glass tube is then placed in a hand-operated centrifuge and spun for one minute at 600 rpm (revolutions per minute). The dynamite sample is then removed from the glass tube and weighed to determine the percent of weight loss.

3. Test method D-3—Compression Exudation Test
The entire apparatus for this test is shown in Figure 1 of this appendix. The test is conducted using the following procedures:
(a) A glass tube, 135 mm (5.3 inches) long and one inch in diameter, is held on a wooden base;
(b) A small amount of absorbent cotton is placed into the bottom of the glass tube;
(c) Ten g (0.35 ounce) of dynamite sample are placed on top of the cotton in the glass tube;
(d) A small amount of absorbent cotton is placed on top of the dynamite sample;
(e) A plastic disk that matches the inner diameter of the glass tube and has seven small perforations is placed on top of the cotton;
(f) A plastic plug matching the inner diameter of the glass tube is then placed on top of the disk;
(g) The glass tube assembly is placed under the compression rod, and compression is applied by means of the weight on the metal lever rod. The sample is compressed for one minute; and
(h) The dynamite sample is then removed from the glass tube and weighed to determine the percent of weight loss.
Appendixes E-G to Part 173 [Reserved]
Pt. 173, App. H

Appendix H to Part 173—Method of Testing for Sustained Combustibility

1. Method
The method describes a procedure for determining if the material when heated under the test conditions and exposed to an external source of flame applied in a standard manner sustains combustion.

2. Principle of the method
A metal block with a concave depression (test portion well) is heated to a specified temperature. A specified volume of the material under test is transferred to the well, and its ability to sustain combustion is noted after application and subsequent removal of a standard flame under specified conditions.

3. Apparatus
A combustibility tester consisting of a block of aluminum alloy or other corrosion-resistant metal of high thermal conductivity is used. The block has a concave well and a pocket drilled to take a thermometer. A small gas jet assembly on a swivel is attached to the block. The handle and gas inlet for the gas jet may be fitted at any convenient angle to the gas jet. A suitable apparatus is shown in Figure 5.1 of the UN Recommendations, and the essential dimensions are given in Figures 5.1 and 5.2 of the UN Recommendations. The following equipment is needed:
(a) Gauge, for checking that the height of the center of the gas jet above the top of the test portion well is 2.2 mm (see Figure 5.1);
(b) Thermometer, mercury in glass, for horizontal operation, with a sensitivity not less than 1 mm/ °C, or other measuring device of equivalent sensitivity permitting reading at 0.5 °C intervals. When in position in the block, the thermometer bulb must be surrounded with thermally conducting thermoplastic compound;
(c) Hotplate, fitted with a temperature-control device. (Other types of apparatus with suitable temperature-control facilities may be employed to heat the metal block);
(d) Stopwatch, or other suitable timing device;
(e) Syringe, capable of delivering 2 ml to an accuracy of ±0.1 ml; and
(f) Fuel source, butane test fuel.

4. Sampling
The sample must be representative of the material to be tested and must be supplied and kept in a tightly closed container prior to test. Because of the possibility of loss of volatile constituents, the sample must receive only the minimum treatment necessary to ensure its homogeneity. After removing each test portion, the sample container must be immediately closed tightly to ensure that no volatile components escape from the container; if this closure is incomplete, an entirely new sample must be taken.

5. Procedure
Carry out the determination in triplicate.
WARNING—Do not carry out the test in a small confined area (for example a glove box) because of the hazard of explosions.
(a) It is essential that the apparatus be set up in a completely draft-free area (see warning) and in the absence of strong light to facilitate observation of flash, flame, etc.
(b) Place the metal block on the hotplate or heat the metal block by other suitable means so that its temperature, as indicated by the thermometer placed in the metal block, is maintained at the specified temperature within a tolerance of ±1 °C. For the appropriate test temperature, see paragraph 5.(h) of this appendix. Correct this temperature for the difference in barometric pressure from the standard atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) by raising the test temperature for a higher pressure or lowering the test temperature for a lower pressure by 1.0 °C for each 4 kPa difference. Ensure that the top of the metal block is exactly horizontal. Use the gauge to check that the jet is 2.2 mm above the top of the well when in the test position.
(c) Light the butane test fuel with the jet away from the test position (i.e. in the “off” position, away from the well). Adjust the size of the flame so that it is 8 mm to 9 mm high and approximately 5 mm wide.
(d) Using the syringe, take from the sample container at least 2 ml of the sample and rapidly transfer a test portion of 2 ml ±0.1 ml to the well of the combustibility tester and immediately start the timing device.
(e) After a heating time of 60 seconds (s), by which time the test portion is deemed to have reached its equilibrium temperature, and if the test fluid has not ignited, swing the test flame into the test position over the edge of the pool of liquid. Maintain it in this position for 15 s and then return it to the “off” position while observing the behavior of the test portion. The test flame must remain lighted throughout the test.
(f) For each test observe and record:
(i) whether there is ignition and sustained combustion or flashing, or neither, of the test portion before the test flame is moved into the test position;
(ii) whether the test portion ignites while the test flame is in the test position, and, if so, how long combustion is sustained after the test flame is returned to the “off” position.
(g) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph 6. of this appendix is not found, repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but with a heating time of 30 s.
(h) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph 6. of this appendix is not found at a test temperature of 60.5 °C (141 °F), repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but at a test temperature of 75 °C (167 °F). In the case of a material which has a flash point above 60.5 °C (141 °F) and below 93 °C (200 °F), if sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph 6. of this appendix is not found at a test temperature of 5 °C (9 °F) above its flash point, repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but at a test temperature of 20 °C (36 °F) above its flash point.

6. Interpretation of observations
The material must be assessed either as not sustaining combustion or as sustaining combustion. Sustained combustion must be reported at either of the heating times if one of the following occurs with either of the test portions:
(a) When the test flame is in the “off” position, the test portion ignites and sustains combustion;
(b) The test portion ignites while the test flame is in the test position for 15 s, and sustains combustion for more than 15 s after the test flame has been returned to the “off” position.

Note to paragraph 6 of this appendix:
Intermittent flashing may not be interpreted as sustained combustion. Normally, at the end of 15 s, the combustion has either clearly ceased or continues. In cases of doubt, the material must be deemed to sustain combustion.
[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67517, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996]